System Manual

PSS®SINCAL 18.
0
System Manual
Instructions for the PSS SINCAL User Interface
Published by
Siemens AG
Smart Infrastructure
Digital Grid
Freyeslebenstraße 1
91058 Erlangen, Germany
SIEMENS PSS SINCAL System Manual
Preface
Preface
The PSS SINCAL manuals can be divided into the following parts:
● the PSS SINCAL System Manual

● manuals for Electrical and Pipe Networks
● the Examples
● the Database Description
● the Automation Manual
The PSS SINCAL System Manual contains a general description for using the application.
The technical manuals for Electrical Networks contain detailed descriptions of the various
calculation methods for electrical networks - such as power flow, or short circuit calculations - and
their input data.
The technical manuals for Pipe Networks contain detailed descriptions of the various calculation
methods for pipe networks - water, gas and heating/cooling - and their input data.
The manuals with the Examples for electrical and pipe networks contain detailed information on the
use of the various calculation modules based on the provided sample networks.
The Database Description contains a complete description of the data models for electrical and
pipe networks. Furthermore, documentation on the Time Series Data Interface is also available, as
well as a description of the additional data files and external result data.
The Automation manual contains the documentation of the automation functions for PSS SINCAL.
Copyright
This manual and all the information and illustrations contained in it are copyrighted.
SIEMENS retains all rights, in particular the right to publish, translate, reprint, photocopy, make
microcopies or electronically store in a database.
Previously expressed written permission from SIEMENS is required for any reproduction or use
beyond the limits specified by copyright law.
Warranty
Even though our manuals are thoroughly checked for errors, no liability can be taken for errors found
or any resulting problems or difficulties. Modifications are frequently made to the text and the software
as a part of our routine updates.
PSS® is a registered trademark of SIEMENS AG

Copyright SIEMENS AG 2021 All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents
1. General Remarks 1
1.1 System Requirements 1

1.2 Licensing 2
1.3 Configuration 4
2. User Interface 6
2.1 User Interface Elements 7

2.1.1 Title Bar 7
2.1.2 Menu Bar 7
2.1.3 Pop-up Menus 9
2.1.4 Toolbars 9
2.1.5 Tabs 10
2.1.6 Working Area 11
2.1.7 Status Bar 12
2.2 Toolbars 12
2.2.1 Predefined PSS SINCAL Toolbars 12
2.2.2 Working Environments 20
2.2.3 Individually Customizing Toolbars 21
3. Basic Functions 23
3.1 Start Page 23

3.2 Help Menu 24
3.3 Execute Command 25
3.4 New 26
3.5 Open and Save 29
3.5.1 Open 29
3.5.2 Open Samples 32
3.5.3 Save 32
3.5.4 Revert to Saved 33
3.6 Importing and Exporting 33
3.6.1 Importing from Excel 34
3.6.2 Importing from CIM 48
3.6.3 Importing from PSS E 51
October 2021
PSS SINCAL System Manual SIEMENS
Table of Contents
3.6.4 Importing from HUB File 54

3.6.5 Importing from UCTE ASCII Files 57
3.6.6 Importing from DGS Exchange Format 58
3.6.7 Importing from DVG Exchange Format 59
3.6.8 Importing from CYMDIST 60
3.6.9 Importing from DINIS 62
3.6.10 Importing Network Archives 63
3.6.11 Importing Network States 64
3.6.12 Importing Network Diagrams 67
3.6.13 Importing Graphic Objects 68
3.6.14 Importing PSS SINCAL Networks 69
3.6.15 Importing Row Sets 71
3.6.16 Importing OC Protection Device Characteristics 72
3.6.17 Importing Protection Device Settings 73
3.6.18 Importing Diagram Pages and Templates 75
3.6.19 Importing Workspaces 76
3.6.20 Exporting to CIM 77
3.6.21 Exporting to PSS E 79
3.6.22 Exporting to NETOMAC 81
3.6.23 Exporting to UCTE ASCII Files 81
3.6.24 Exporting to DGS Exchange Format 82
3.6.25 Exporting to DVG Exchange Format 83
3.6.26 Exporting ASM-Identification 83
3.6.27 Exporting to CYMDIST 84
3.6.28 Exporting Network Archives 85
3.6.29 Exporting Network States 86
3.6.30 Exporting Network Diagrams 89
3.6.31 Exporting Protection Device Settings 91
3.6.32 Exporting Graphics 92
3.6.33 Exporting Graphics to Google Earth 93
3.6.34 Exporting Workspaces 96
3.7 Options 97
3.7.1 Common Settings for User Interface 98
October 2021
Table of Contents
3.7.2 Common Settings for Screen Forms and Tabular View 103
3.7.3 Common Settings for Change Mode 106
3.7.4 Shortcut Keys 107
3.7.5 User Menus 108
3.7.6 Macros 110
3.7.7 Directories 111
3.7.8 Model Search Paths 112
3.7.9 Background Maps 113
3.7.10 Database Configuration 116
3.7.11 Default Standard Database for Electrical Networks 119
3.7.12 Default Standard Database for Pipe Networks 120
3.7.13 Actual Standard Database for Electrical Networks 120
3.7.14 Actual Standard Database for Pipe Networks 122
3.7.15 Common Document Settings 123
3.7.16 Calculation Settings 125
3.7.17 General Selection Settings 127
3.7.18 Settings for Route Selection 128
3.7.19 General View Settings 129
3.7.20 View Settings for Selection 129
3.7.21 View Settings for Lines and Routes 129
3.7.22 Default Settings for Diagram View 129
3.7.23 Default Settings for Nodes 129
3.7.24 Default Settings for Node Elements 130
3.7.25 Default Settings for Branch Elements 131
3.7.26 Default Settings for Add Elements 132
3.7.27 Default Settings for Routes and Substations 133
3.7.28 Default Settings for Names 134
3.7.29 License 135
3.8 Administration 136
3.8.1 Create New Database 137
3.8.2 Manage Databases 138
3.8.3 Delete Results 140
3.9 Macros 140
October 2021
Table of Contents
3.9.1 Macro Explorer 141

3.9.2 Macro Output 142
3.9.3 Stop Active Macro 142
3.9.4 Macro Recorder 142
3.10 Printing 143
3.10.1 Select Print Area 143
3.10.2 Printing Frames 144
3.11 Setup 144
3.11.1 Page Size 145
3.11.2 Scale 146
3.11.3 Print Setup 147
3.11.4 Margins 147
3.11.5 Header/Footer 148
3.12 Document Properties 150
3.12.1 Common 150
3.12.2 Summary 151
3.12.3 Content 151
3.13 Selecting 152
3.13.1 Selecting with the Mouse 152
3.13.2 Selecting with the Help of Supplementary Graphics Objects 153
3.13.3 Select All 153
3.13.4 Select Objects 153
3.13.5 Select Text 153
3.13.6 Select Route 153
3.13.7 Select in Tabular View 154
3.13.8 Select in Signal Explorer 154
3.13.9 Select in all Views 155
3.13.10 Select by Type 155
3.13.11 Select by Query 156
3.13.12 Go to Next Node 162
3.13.13 Select in Graphics 162
3.13.14 Invert Selection 162
3.13.15 Selection Settings 162
October 2021
Table of Contents
3.13.16 Selection Mode 163

3.14 Copy and Paste 163
3.14.1 Copy 163
3.14.2 Cut 163
3.14.3 Paste 163
3.14.4 Delete 164
3.14.5 Copy Graphic 164
3.15 Find 164
3.16 Advanced Editing of Network Elements 165
3.16.1 Set Network Data 166
3.16.2 Replace Network Data 166
3.16.3 Set Input State 167
3.16.4 Insert Network Point 168
3.16.5 Join Lines 169
3.16.6 Busbars 169
3.17 Switches 170
3.17.1 Insert Switches 170
3.17.2 Open/Close Switches 171
4. Network Model 172
4.1 Networks Element Models 172

4.2 Substation Model 176
4.2.1 Substations and Routes Toolbar 176
4.2.2 Substation Browser 177
4.2.3 Graphic Substation Element 179
4.2.4 Update Substation 181
4.2.5 Create Bay 182
4.3 Route Model 183
4.3.1 Graphic Route Object 184
4.3.2 Editing Routes 187
4.4 Variants 187
4.4.1 Managing Variants 188
4.4.2 Variant Comparison for Input Data 189
October 2021
Table of Contents
4.5 Scenarios 191

4.6 Include Network 194
4.6.1 Inserting an Include Network 195
4.6.2 Inserting Connections 196
4.6.3 Calculating Included Networks 198
5. Graphics Editor 199
5.1 Structure of the Graphics Editor 199

5.2 Network Elements 201
5.2.1 Constructing Network Elements 203
5.2.2 Selecting Network Elements 205
5.2.3 Selecting with the Tabulator 205
5.2.4 Selecting the Network Element Components 205
5.2.5 Connecting the Network Elements to Nodes or Busbars 207
5.2.6 Simplified Display of Branch Elements 207
5.2.7 Aligning and Positioning Text 208
5.2.8 Pop-Up Menu for Network Elements and Network Element Components 211
5.3 Supplementary Graphics Objects 215
5.3.1 Constructing Supplementary Graphics Objects 218
5.4 Editing Elements and Objects 218
5.4.1 Position and Scale 219
5.4.2 Aligning or Spacing 221
5.4.3 Making Same Size 221
5.4.4 Grouping 221
5.4.5 Ordering 222
5.4.6 Rotating or Flipping 222
5.4.7 Contour 222
5.4.8 Text 224
5.4.9 Edit Linked Position 224
5.5 Insert Modes 225
5.6 Formatting 227
5.6.1 Formatting Network Element Components 227
5.6.2 Apply Format 228
October 2021
Table of Contents
5.6.3 Formatting Nodes 228

5.6.4 Formatting Elements 230
5.6.5 Formatting Add Symbols 234
5.6.6 Format Objects 235
5.6.7 Format View 240
5.7 Layers 245
5.8 Object Type 246
5.9 Views 247
5.10 Text Field Contents 252
5.11 Zoom 253
5.11.1 Zoom 254
5.11.2 Select Zoom Area 254
5.11.3 Zoom Viewer 254
5.11.4 Zoom to Selection 255
5.11.5 Hand Tool 255
5.12 Alignment Aids 255
5.12.1 Grids 256
5.12.2 Ruler 256
5.12.3 Crosshair Cursor 257
5.12.4 Selection Indicator 257
6. Tabular View 258
6.1 Structure of Tabular View 258

6.2 Functions for Working in Tabular View 260
6.2.1 Editing Data 260
6.2.2 Display Options 261
6.2.3 Selecting Network Elements 262
6.2.4 Finding and Replacing Data 263
6.2.5 Copying in Tabular View 264
6.2.6 Sorting Functions 264
6.2.7 Calculating Total Values 265
6.2.8 Filter Functions in Tabular View 266
6.2.9 Enhanced Pop-Up Menu Functions in Tabular View 270
October 2021
Table of Contents
6.3 Result Compilations 272

6.4 Database Queries 272
6.5 External Databases 272
6.6 Printing Tables 273
7. Diagram View 274
7.1 Structure of Diagram View 275

7.2 Creating Diagram Pages 277
7.2.1 New Empty Diagram Page 278
7.2.2 Diagram Page Wizard 280
7.3 Functions for Working in Diagram Views 282
7.3.1 Managing Diagrams and Diagram Pages 282
7.3.2 Variant Comparison of Diagram Pages 284
7.3.3 Printing Diagrams 284
7.3.4 Display Coordinates and Measuring 284
7.3.5 Information on Signals 286
7.3.6 Supplementary Graphics Objects in Diagrams 287
7.3.7 Objects in Diagrams 288
7.3.8 Comments in the Diagram View 289
7.3.9 Edit Data 289
7.3.10 Assigned Elements 290
7.3.11 Select in Graphics 291
7.3.12 Scale Diagrams 291
7.3.13 Format Diagrams 292
7.3.14 Format Diagram Views 300
7.3.15 Amount to be Displayed in the Diagram View 301
7.3.16 Display Options in the Diagram 302
7.3.17 Filter Function in the Diagram Browser 302
7.4 Format Editor 302
8. Report View 304
8.1 Aufbau des Berichtes Structure of the Report View 304

8.2 Manage Compilations 306
October 2021
Table of Contents
8.2.1 New Compilations 306

8.2.2 Open Compilations 306
8.2.3 Close Compilations 307
8.2.4 Edit Compilations 307
8.2.5 Print Compilations 308
8.2.6 Export Compilations 308
8.3 Manage Reports 308
8.3.1 New Report 309
8.3.2 Editing Your Own Reports 310
8.3.3 Print Reports 311
8.3.4 Export Reports 311
8.4 Report Options 312
8.4.1 Options 312
8.4.2 Format 313
8.4.3 Header/Footer 314
9. Screen Forms 316
9.1 Types of Fields and Control Buttons 316

9.2 Special Characteristics of Screen Forms 318
9.3 Topology Selection in Screen Forms 319
9.4 Manipulators in Screen Forms 320
9.4.1 Insert 322
9.4.2 Delete 322
9.4.3 Edit 322
9.4.4 Selecting a Manipulator 323
9.5 Result Diagrams in Screen Forms 323
9.6 Standard Types in Screen Forms 325
9.6.1 Selecting the Standard Types in Screen Forms 326
9.6.2 Edit Standard Types 328
9.6.3 Creating a New Standard Database 330
9.6.4 Creating and Editing Standard Types 330
9.6.5 Copying Standard Types 332
9.6.6 Update Standard Types Used 332
October 2021
Table of Contents
9.6.7 Reload Standard Databases 334

9.7 Special Screen Form with Browser 334
9.8 Screen Forms for Characteristics Input 336
9.8.1 Example of Generating a New Characteristic Curve 338
9.8.2 Example for Copying Data from Excel 339
10. Network Browser 342
10.1 Topology 343

10.1.1 Update Graphics 346
10.2 Substations 354
10.3 Network Element Group 356
10.4 Graphic Element Group 359
10.5 Owner 362
10.6 Scenarios 364
10.7 Malfunction Scenario 367
10.8 Master Resource 371
10.9 Models 372
10.10 Feeder 375
10.11 Route 383
10.12 Calculate Routes 385
10.12.1 Line Calculations 387
10.12.2 Route Calculations 388
10.12.3 Example of Line Calculations 389
10.12.4 Example of Route Calculations 391
11. Result Browser 396
12. Signal Explorer 398
13. Network Planning Tools 404
13.1 Feeder 404

13.2 Calculate Routes 405
13.3 Determining Line Data 405
October 2021
Table of Contents
13.4 Determining Load Data 406

13.5 Determining Polygon Data 407
13.6 Determining Pickup and Tripping Data 407
13.7 Determining Compensation Impedance 408
13.8 Determining Machine Data 409
13.9 Load/Customer Load Switching 410
13.10 Equipment Sizing 411
13.10.1 Line Sizing 411
13.10.2 Transformer Sizing 415
13.11 Apply Measurement Data 419
13.12 Apply Harmonic Impedances 420
13.13 Create Protection Documentation 420
13.14 Highlight Network Elements 423
13.15 Heat-Map 424
13.16 Background Images 429
13.17 Remove Temporary Images 433
13.18 Background Map 433
13.19 Remove Background Map 438
13.20 Check Graphics 438
13.21 Check Names 439
13.22 Check Usage 439
13.23 Check Radial Network 440
13.24 External Tools 440
13.24.1 Leika 441
13.24.2 PSS NETOMAC 442
13.24.3 SIGRA 442
14. Properties 444
14.1 Editing Properties 445

14.2 Additional Ways to Edit Graphic Attributes 445
15. Messages 446
15.1 Toolbar 446
October 2021
Table of Contents
15.2 Pop-Up Menu 448

15.3 Calculation Log in Result View 448
16. Projects 455
16.1 Managing Projects 456

16.2 Managing Folders 459
16.3 Managing Folder Links 459
16.4 Managing Files 460
17. Catalogues 462
17.1 Using Catalogues 463

17.2 Managing Catalogues 464
17.3 Creating Catalogue Elements 465
17.4 Editing Catalogue Elements 466
17.4.1 Catalogue Element Properties 466
18. Toolbox 468
19. Calculate 470
19.1 Presetting Calculation Methods 472

19.2 Multiple Calculations 473
20. Input Data and Results 475
20.1 Displaying Input Data and Results in the Network Diagram 475
20.2 Variant Comparison 475
20.3 Displaying Results in the Network Diagram using Tool Tips 477
20.4 Evaluations 478
20.4.1 Evaluation Types 478
20.5 Annotation of Network Elements in the Network Diagram 483
20.5.1 Annotation Depending on the Object Type 485
20.5.2 Format Text 486
20.5.3 Options 488
20.6 Filter Settings in the Network Diagram 489
October 2021
Table of Contents
20.6.1 Three State Filter Evaluation 490

20.6.2 Range Evaluation 490
20.6.3 Activating Filter Coloring and Evaluations 491
20.7 Visibility for Annotation 492
20.8 Displaying Results in Screen Forms 492
20.9 Displaying Input Data and Results in Tabular View 494
20.10 Result View 495
20.11 Result Compilation 497
20.11.1 Compiling Results 498
20.11.2 Displaying Results 501
21. Multi-User Master Database 506
21.1 Concept of the Master Database 506

21.2 Accessing the Master Database 507
21.3 Conflict Management 507
21.4 User Administration in the Master Database 508
21.4.1 Administering Modifications 508
21.5 Functions for the Administrator 509
21.5.1 Convert to Master Database 509
21.5.2 Master Database Administration 510
21.5.3 Publishing by the Administrator 515
21.5.4 Undo Changes 516
21.6 Functions for the User 516
21.6.1 Connect to Master Database 516
21.6.2 Change Password 516
21.6.3 Publishing by the User 517
21.6.4 Check for Updates 517
21.6.5 Refresh 518
21.6.6 Reload 518
21.6.7 Preview from Master Database 518
21.6.8 Disconnect from Master Database 519
21.7 Configuration and Use of the Master Database 519
October 2021
Table of Contents
22. Technical Reference 524
22.1 Shortcuts 524

22.2 File Formats 526
22.3 Databases 527
22.4 Directories 528
22.5 Converting Signals with Formulas 529
22.6 Help Program VecToPic 531
22.6.1 Starting VecToPic from the Graphic User Interface 532
22.6.2 Starting VecToPic with a Command Prompt 533
22.6.3 Integrating PIC Files into PSS SINCAL 534
22.7 Help Program PSS Tool 534
22.8 Help Program for Creating PSS SINCAL Databases 537
22.9 User Menus 544
22.10 PSS SINCAL PIC File 545
22.10.1 Structure of the PSS SINCAL PIC File 545
22.10.2 Help Program VecToPic 558
22.11 PSS SINCAL Symbol Files 561
22.11.1 General Remarks 561
22.11.2 Storage Locations for User-Defined Symbol Files 561
22.11.3 Example for the Symbol File 562
22.11.4 Symbols for Network Elements 563
22.11.5 Drawing Command 565
22.12 Feeder Documentation 570
22.13 Optimization Documentation 573
22.14 Messages from Calculations 574
22.14.1 Errors 575
22.14.2 Warnings 644
22.14.3 Infos 678
October 2021
General Remarks
1. General Remarks
PSS SINCAL (SIEMENS Network Calculation) software provides you with extensive functions for
planning networks. The program has a number of highly specialized simulation methods for
electrical networks and pipe networks that provide the best possible support when you create,
interactively administer and analyze networks.
PSS SINCAL offers a wide range of up-to-date features:
● Sleek windows interface, making network planning perfectly

● Functions that adjust any large network, with schematic or geographic coordinates
● Highly suitable for network documentation
● Extensive display and evaluation functions, including Graphics Editors, Diagram Views, Tabular
Views and reports
● Displaying of input and output data in the form of diagrams and tables
● Flexible report system based on List & Label (own reports can be integrated in PSS SINCAL)
● Functions to administer projects and network libraries
● Individual catalogues for network elements
● Extensive importing and exporting abilities
● Data change with other Windows applications, using cut and paste
● Clearly arranged message system
● Direct integration of background maps from the Internet
● Diverse network planning tools for network planning and analysis
● Use of relational database systems for data storage
● Smooth connection to relational database systems for data storage
● Automation functions using COM interfaces
● Comprehensive calculation methods for electrical and pipe networks
1.1 System Requirements

The PSS SINCAL Platform is released for use with the following listed operating systems and
database systems.
Hardware Requirements
● PC or notebook
● CPU: x64, >= 2 GHz, MultiCore
● RAM: >= 8 GB
● Hard disk: >= 20 GB
● Graphics card: >= 1920 x 1200, True Color
Operating Systems Supported
● Windows 8
● Windows 10
● Windows 11
● Windows Server 2008 R2
● Windows Server 2012 R2
October 2021 1
General Remarks
● Windows Server 2016

● Windows Server 2019
Database Systems Supported
● SQLite 3.x
● Microsoft Access
● Oracle 9i
● Oracle 10g
● Oracle 11g
● Oracle 12c
● Oracle 19c
● SQL Server 2008, SQL Server Express 2008
● SQL Server 2008 R2, SQL Server Express 2008 R2
● SQL Server 2017
● SQL Server 2019
The standard database system used by the PSS SINCAL Platform is SQLite. For this database
system, all the necessary components are already included in the installation structure, and there is
no need to configure anything else.
If the Microsoft Access database system is to be used, the 64-bit Microsoft Access Database Engine
(ACE) Redistributables must be installed. These are also required if you want to use Excel import
functions in the PSS SINCAL Platform. You can install either the Redistributeables of version 2016
or version 2010:
● Microsoft Access Database Engine 2016 Redistributable:

https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=54920
● Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010 Redistributable:
https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=13255
To use the database systems SQL Server or Oracle, these RDMBS must already be available in a
suitable configuration. In addition, the necessary RDBMS client software must be installed and
configured on the PCs on which the PSS SINCAL Platform is used. In addition, depending on the
RDBMS, other specific configurations are required for users to access the database systems.
Detailed information on configuring the database systems is available in the chapter Options in the
section Database Configuration.
1.2 Licensing
The PSS SINCAL Platform is licensed with the help of a binary encoded license file. This license file
contains information about all the program components and the right to use them on different
computers.
2 October 2021
General Remarks
The PSS SINCAL Platform already contains a special Xplore license file, which allows the use of
almost all modules with 50 node limit on any computer. This license is limited in time, i.e. the use is
possible for 8 months after the release of the product version in April or October. This is to ensure
that the product can be used immediately after installation and to make testing of the various modules
easy and uncomplicated.
To request an individual license file, the About dialog box can be opened via clicking Help – About.
This dialog box contains the version number and the Machine ID needed to grant a license.
Clicking the License button opens a drop-down menu containing the following functions:
● Request per E-Mail:

You automatically open an empty email screen with all the data needed for licensing in subject
line. This email must be provided with contact information and sent to PSS SINCAL Support
(sincal@simtec.cc).
● Export system information:
If opening of the email is not possible (e.g. due to permission or configuration problems of the
mail system), the necessary information shown in the dialog box can be exported to a text file
and sent per email to the PSS SINCAL Support (sincal@simtec.cc).
● Select license file:
The "license.bin" license file emailed by PSS SINCAL Support can be copied to any local
directory on the computer. The saved license file can then be assigned to the PSS SINCAL
platform via this menu item.
If no license file is available or a temporary license has already expired, the License dialog box
opens automatically when you start PSS SINCAL. It has the same functions as the About dialog
box.
October 2021 3
General Remarks
Another way of licensing the product is via the PSS Tool. This help program is provided in the
Windows Start menu. The System Information tab of the help program enables the computer
information to be exported to an ASCII file. The license file is assigned to the PSS SINCAL Platform
via the Configuration tab.
1.3 Configuration
All the important PSS SINCAL settings can be made directly in the user interface. Simply open the
Options dialog box with Extras – Options in the menu to configure PSS SINCAL.
The settings, depending on whether they are valid globally or refer only to the current network, are
stored in the database or in the network.
Global Settings
● Default directories for file operations (save, import, export, ...)

● Files for creating and updating databases
● Files and directories for the report generator
● Activated toolbars and their position
● Size of customizable dialog boxes and windows
Settings for the Network
● Annotations and filters

● Object types
● Settings for setup page
● Options
● Standard types
● References to the databases for standard elements
● Messages from the last calculations
● Definitions of queries
● Style sheets for diagrams and the creation of overlay diagrams
4 October 2021
General Remarks
Changing the Default Language
The default language of the user interface is always English. During installation, however, all the
available languages are installed so you can change the language after installation at any time with
the PSS Tool help program. The Configuration tab is used to set the default language for the user
interface.
October 2021 5
User Interface
2. User Interface
Before you use PSS SINCAL, it is important to know how it is designed. Learning where elements
are located and how functions can be performed easily will help you get PSS SINCAL working for
you quickly and optimally. The following sections describe its User Interface.
Basic elements of the user interface:
● Title bar (#1)

● Menu bar (#2)
● Toolbar (#3)
● Tabs (#4)
● Working area (#5)
● Status bar (#6)
● Support window (#7)
The workspace contains the Graphics Editor as a default. For enhanced evaluations, you can also
open the Tabular View and Diagram View.
PSS SINCAL can edit more than one network at the same time. Different types of display can be
selected for each network. These include the Graphics Editor, Tables and Diagrams. Tabs show the
individual networks and types of display, so you can switch easily and comfortably between views.
Each network has different tool windows, such as Network Browser, Results, Properties, Catalogues
or Messages, to simplify working with each. These tool windows need to be opened only once. The
contents of these tool windows always refer to the active network.
6 October 2021
User Interface
2.1 User Interface Elements

The user interface elements are used to edit PSS SINCAL. These include:
● Title Bar
● Menu Bar
● Pop-Up Menus
● Toolbars
● Tabs
● Working Area
● Status Bar
2.1.1 Title Bar
The top part of the windows contains a title bar with the name of the software (PSS SINCAL). When
a file is opened, PSS SINCAL displays the name of the file with the network type in angle brackets.
To move the PSS SINCAL window, click the title bar and drag the mouse.
2.1.2 Menu Bar
PSS SINCAL’s menu bar is an important element because it accesses most functions.
Note that the menu bar’s contents and scope depend on its window. For example, the Graphics
Editor has a different menu bar than the Diagram View.
File Menu
The File menu contains general functions for administration. These include opening, importing,
exporting, saving, closing and printing.
The Properties dialog box containing general information on the open network can be called up with
this menu.
This menu can also be used for administering databases and variants or setting up pages and print
areas.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu can do such basic functions as cutting, copying, pasting and deleting. The search
function or the different kinds of selections let you highlight network elements quickly.
You can even edit network data and results, and there are functions for setting network data,
replacing network data, insert and editing switches, etc.
October 2021 7
User Interface
View Menu
The View menu provides functions for customized display of the working area.
● Switch tools ON and OFF (grids, rulers, crosshair cursor and selection indicator)
● Zoom functions
● Switch the different toolbars and the status bar ON and OFF
● Switch between input data and results
● Define evaluations
● Define annotation and filter for input and output data
● Administration of graphic layers (different layers in the Graphics Editor) and object types
● Open Start Page, Tabular View and Diagram View
● Switch tool windows ON and OFF (Projects, Catalogues, Toolbox, Network Browser, Result
View, Properties and Messages)
Insert Menu
The Insert menu contains all elements that can be inserted when creating or editing a network.
These can be, for example, nodes, node elements and branch elements.
You can even define general data such as network levels, network areas, network element groups,
etc. with this menu.
Data Menu
The Data menu is used to enter additional data. These include, among other things, standard types
and complementary data for various types of calculation methods (for example Power Flow,
Protection Device Coordination, Harmonics, …).
Calculate Menu
The Calculate menu activates the different calculation methods and displays possibilities for setting
parameters for calculation methods.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu has a wide variety of tools and resources to help the user plan and evaluate output
in the network.
Format Menu
The Format menu contains all formatting possibilities for network elements, adding symbols and
objects.
It contains many functions to control the display of objects, such as aligning or spacing, size, order,
grouping, rotate, contour, and text.
Extras Menu
The Extras menu contains functions to simplify working with PSS SINCAL.
8 October 2021
User Interface
Options customizes the behavior of the user interface when creating and editing a network manually.
This menu also has the macro functions to record work sequences. User-specific menus are also
displayed here.
Window Menu
The Window menu is used to open, close and arrange windows on the screen.
Help Menu
PSS SINCAL provides comprehensive online help. The Help menu also contains additional
information about the program version, along with tips and tricks, and on how to contact the support
or access the official product website.
The menu point Update checks whether there are any PSS SINCAL updates. If there are, you can
download them from our WebPage.
2.1.3 Pop-up Menus
PSS SINCAL has context-dependent pop-up menus that simplify editing and evaluating networks.
Right-click on an object, network element or area, and PSS SINCAL displays the appropriate pop-
up menu.
2.1.4 Toolbars
The toolbar icons let you access all common functions of the program, which also can be selected
from menus.
Depending on what window is active, the following toolbars can be accessed below the PSS SINCAL
menu bar:
● Standard (basic functions like loading, saving and printing, calculating, …)

● Format (text-formatting functions)
● Network elements (electrical networks) (for creating network elements for electrical networks)
● Network elements (pipe networks) (for creating network elements for pipe networks)
● Substations and routes (for creating substations and routes)
● Results (improved control of selected results)
● Graphic objects (for creating supplementary graphics objects)
● Layout (for formatting network elements and supplementary graphics objects)
● Marcos (functions for the automation of work processes)
These toolbars can be toggled ON in the View – Toolbars menu. If you wish, you can also open this
toolbar menu by right-clicking on the toolbar.
You can even create user-defined toolbars (see the section on Individually Adapting Toolbars in the
chapter on Toolbars).
October 2021 9
User Interface
2.1.5 Tabs
In this area, the opened application windows are displayed in the form of simplified tabs. The tab that
indicates the active window is highlighted in color and displayed in bold font. Clicking on a tab
activates the corresponding window.
By clicking with the right mouse button on a tab, a pop-up menu can be opened, which provides
further functions.
● Close:
The active window is closed.
● Copy Full Path:
The path of the active network is copied to the clipboard.
● Open Containing Folder:
An explorer will be opened and the directory where the active network is stored will be
displayed.
● New Horizontal Tab Group:
A new horizontal view is created and the selected window is transferred to the lower view.
● New Vertical Tab Group:
A new vertical view is created and the selected window is transferred to the right view.
● Floating:
The selected window is decoupled from the application window. This allows it to be positioned
anywhere on the screen. Positioning on a second connected monitor is also possible with this.
Floating Tabs or Multimonitor Support
The PSS SINCAL user interface makes it possible to decouple the windows arranged in tabs from
the application window. This then allows, for example, a graphic editor with a schematic view of the
network to be displayed on another monitor. The undocking is possible for the following windows:
● Graphics editor (except primary view)

● Result view
● Reports
● Diagrams
● Tabular view
Undocking can be done either via the tab's pop-up menu or by dragging and dropping the tab outside
the application window.
10 October 2021
User Interface
The windows thus detached from the application window can also be optionally placed on the primary
monitor, but also on any other connected monitor. This creates a high-performance analysis system
that synchronizes input data, results and evaluations for a common database on all available
monitors.
2.1.6 Working Area
The working area takes up most of the window and displays the Start Page when PSS SINCAL starts.
When a network is opened, the Graphics Editor automatically opens as well. This area is used to
create the network.
Open Tabular View using the View menu. The Tabular View regulates the display of tables and the
editing of network element data.
Following any calculations, you can display a network in the Diagram View. This lets you look at
comprehensive results and complex input data on the screen, using the types of diagrams you define.
Different kinds of tool windows can also be displayed in the working area. These include:
● Project window
● Catalogue window
● Properties window
● Message window
● …
October 2021 11
User Interface
2.1.7 Status Bar
The status bar, at the bottom of the screen, provides information about the object selected or the
current operation.
Depending on which window is active, the status bar displays different information (e.g., the position
of the cursor, active variant).
To hide the status bar, click Status Bar in the View menu.
2.2 Toolbars
The toolbar icons let you access all common functions of the program, which also can be selected
from menus.
The individual toolbars can be placed anywhere on the screen. Click the toolbar on the left side, drag
to the desired position, and then release the mouse button.
2.2.1 Predefined PSS SINCAL Toolbars
PSS SINCAL provides the following toolbars to make it simpler and faster to use the program:
● Standard
● Format
● Network Elements (Electrical Networks)
● Network Elements (Pipe Networks)
● Substations and Routes
● Results
● Graphic Objects
● Layout
● Marcos
Standard
The Standard toolbar is used to activate basic functions.
Create a new PSS SINCAL network
Open an existing PSS SINCAL network
Save a PSS SINCAL network
12 October 2021
User Interface
Find data in the Graphics Editor and in the Tabular View
Preview (displays the page as it will be printed)
Print networks in the Graphics Editor, data in the Tabular View or Diagram View
Copy network elements, supplementary graphics objects, text, entire networks or

subnetworks
Cut network elements, supplementary graphics objects, text, entire networks or

subnetworks
Paste network elements, supplementary graphics objects, text, entire networks or

subnetworks
Activate the undo function
Start the last calculation
Select input data and results for the display in the Graphics Editor
Switch the Tabular View ON or OFF
Switch the Diagram View ON or OFF
Open/close the report window
Open/close the result view
Open/close the network browser
Open/close the result browsers
Open/close the signal explorer
Open/close the properties window
Open/close the message box
Execute a command
October 2021 13
User Interface
Format
This toolbar is used to modify the most important object properties. The individual attributes of the
toolbar that can be selected changes depending on which object or element has been selected.
Select the text font
Define the font size of texts
Display text bold
Display text italic
Display text underlined
Text left justified
Text centered
Text right justified
Select background color of network elements and objects
Select line color of network elements and objects
Select the text color
Select line width for network elements and objects
Select line style for network elements and objects
Select the direction of the text flow of network element annotation texts
Select the position of network element annotation text
Transfer formatting of defining network elements and objects to highlighted

network elements and objects
14 October 2021
User Interface
Network Elements (Electrical Networks)
This toolbar is used to create network elements in electrical networks.
When the Use ANSI icon collection option is activated in Common Settings for User Interface of
the Options dialog box, the display of symbols for electrical network elements is switched from
standard to ANSI.
Standard ANSI
Insert a substation
Create a node
Create a busbar
Create a synchronous machine
Create a power unit
Create a network feeder
Create an asynchronous machine
Create a load
Create a variable shunt element
Create a shunt impedance
Create a shunt reactor
Create a shunt capacitor
Create a static compensator
Create a shunt RLC circuit
Create a shunt ripple control transmitter
October 2021 15
User Interface
Create a converter
Create a route
Create a line
Create a variable serial element
Create a two-winding transformer
Create a three-winding transformer
Create a serial reactor
Create a serial dual reactor
Create a serial capacitor
Create a serial RLC circuit
Create a serial ripple control transmitter
Create a serial DC element
Network Elements (Pipe Networks)
This toolbar is used to create network elements in pipe networks.
Create a node
Create a distributor
Create a water tank
Create an infeeder pump
Create an infeeder in gas networks
16 October 2021
User Interface
Create an infeeder in heating/cooling networks
Create a consumer
Create a pressure buffer
Create a leakage
Create a temperature regulator
Create a pipe
Create a pressure increase pump
Create a const. pressure/const. flow
Create a pressure regulator
Create a compressor
Create a heat exchanger
Create a sliding valve/non-return valve
Substations and Routes
This toolbar is used to define relationships and structures in the network. Since network structures
are used to evaluate and list costs, these data structures are needed to calculate cost effectiveness.
Browser for creating substations, bays and equipments
Select an existing substation
Select an existing bay
October 2021 17
User Interface
Results
This toolbar is used for enhanced control when selecting results.
Select the input data or results
Move result type back. If you press the SHIFT key at the same
time you scroll to the first type of results.
Select the result type
Move result type ahead. If you press the SHIFT key at the same
time you scroll to the last type of results.
Move result sub type back. If you press the SHIFT key at the
same time you scroll to the first sub type of results.
Select the result sub type
Move result sub type ahead. If you press the SHIFT key at the
same time you scroll to the last sub type of results.
Graphic Objects
This toolbar is used to generate supplementary graphics objects.
Draw a straight line. If the SHIFT key is held down while drawing a line, PSS SINCAL
creates a 45° angle in the direction you move the mouse.
Draw a rectangle. If the SHIFT key is held down while drawing a rectangle, PSS SINCAL
creates a square.
Draw an ellipse. If the SHIFT key is held down while drawing an ellipse, PSS SINCAL
creates a circle.
Draw an arc of a circle. If the SHIFT key is held down at the same time, PSS SINCAL
creates a circular segment.
18 October 2021
User Interface
Draw a polyline. The mouse can be dragged to create interlinking lines known as
polylines. Polylines can be either open and closed elements. When you double-click the
mouse or click this control button, PSS SINCAL ends the polyline.
Create a freehand line. As with pencil on paper, the mouse cursor can be dragged to
create a freehand line.
Add a text field
Add frames
Hilite an area in color
Insert graphics or bitmaps from other files
Insert diagrams
Create a legend to enter data for network elements/additional elements and results. Drag
this to create the legend text according to the preliminary setting (annotation and filter).
Layout
This toolbar is used to modify the most important properties of the supplementary graphics objects.
The individual attributes of the toolbar that can be selected changes depending on which object or
element has been selected.
Edit points at network elements and supplementary graphics objects
Adjust points
Delete all points
Adjust to grid
Group objects and elements
Ungroup objects and elements
Select the sequence of objects
October 2021 19
User Interface
Rotate objects
Select the alignment of objects
Horizontal/vertical distribution of objects
Convert objects of different sizes to same size
Select the arrow style of lines
Select the hatch style of objects
Select the shadow of objects
Macros
This toolbar is used to automate work processes.
Open macro explorer
Stop active macro
Start recording
Stop recording
2.2.2 Working Environments
In PSS SINCAL you can switch between different working environments. The visibility of toolbars
and tool windows and their position is stored in these collections, making it easy to switch ON the
user interface elements you need for a particular work situation.
Use the View – Working Environment menu to select the working environment you want.
By default, PSS SINCAL offers the following working environments:
● Standard (Alt + 1)
● Edit (Alt + 2)
● Analysis (Alt + 3)
20 October 2021
User Interface
PSS SINCAL automatically saves any changes in toolbar and tool window visibility and positions to
the working environment you have selected.
A dialog box in which working environments can be added, deleted and renamed is opened by
clicking View – Working Environments – Customize.
When a new working environment is added, the currently set working environment is used as
template for the new one. Otherwise the default settings are used.
Up to 10 working environments can be defined.
You can also change the sequence of working environments manually. Select the working
environment you want, hold down the SHIFT key and then move the cursor buttons either up or
down.
The active working environment (in bold type) cannot be deleted.
A shortcut can also be defined for each working environment. This is carried out via the Options
dialog box.
2.2.3 Individually Customizing Toolbars
In PSS SINCAL, users can define their own toolbars. These toolbars can be filled with any functions
you like.
Filling Toolbars
Your toolbars can be filled with any functions you like. Simply select the Commands tab in the
Customize dialog box.
October 2021 21
User Interface
This tab lists all categories available in PSS SINCAL. Depending on what category you have
selected, PSS SINCAL displays the commands in the list on the right. Commands can be placed in
every individual toolbar with drag & drop.
Generating User-Defined Toolbars
Click View – Toolbars – Customize in the menu to open the dialog box to generate toolbars.
Alternatively, open this in the toolbar’s pop-up menu.
This tab lists all the toolbars. Option buttons show any toolbars currently displayed on the screen.
Simply click them to switch them ON or OFF.
Click Reset to reset the toolbar selected in the list. This means that PSS SINCAL takes back all
changes. This is only possible for predefined toolbars. Click Reset All to reset all predefined toolbars.
Click New to open an input field where you can enter the name for a new toolbar.
Use Rename to rename your toolbars.
Use Delete to remove any of your toolbars you do not want.
22 October 2021
Basic Functions
3. Basic Functions
The basic functions of PSS SINCAL can practically be summarized in the following points:
● Start Page
● Help Menu
● Execute Command
● New
● Open and Save
● Importing and Exporting
● Options
● Administration
● Macros
● Printing
● Setup
● Document Properties
● Selecting
● Copy and Paste
● Find
● Advanced Editing of Network Elements
● Switches
3.1 Start Page

When PSS SINCAL starts up, the Start Page is displayed in the working area providing functions
and information. This Start Page is always available and can be displayed at any time with View –
Start Page in the menu.
The Start Page is divided into sections.
October 2021 23
Basic Functions
Documents
This section lets you either create a new network, open an existing network or open the Sample
dialog box.
In addition, the networks opened most recently are listed and these can be opened by simply clicking
them.
The networks have a pop-up menu with different functions.
Actions
This section presents important help functions for working with PSS SINCAL. These include:
● Open options dialog

● PSS SINCAL online
● Check for update
3.2 Help Menu

This menu lets you access different kinds of information on the PSS SINCAL program version. It
contains the contact information you need for the support and the access to the official product
website.
Help
PSS SINCAL provides comprehensive online help when you are working with the program.
Support
Simply click Help – Support to display the Online Help Window with all the contact information.
PSS SINCAL Online
Click Help – PSS SINCAL Online to go to the official Siemens Product Website.
Check for Updates
The menu point Help – Check for Update checks whether there are any PSS SINCAL updates. If
there are, you can download them from our WebPage.
License Information
? – License Information opens a window listing in detail all the license information for all the
available PSS SINCAL program modules as well as any usage limitations.
24 October 2021
Basic Functions
Module Information
Click Help – Module Information to open a window in which all DLLs used are listed with their name,
version number and directory from which they were loaded.
System Information
Click Help – System Information to open the PSS Tool help program.
The PSS Tool program displays general system information and can also be used when managing
the Registry settings and Com components. You can even check communication with the License
Server.
Release Notes
Click Help – Release Notes to open the release information for the current PSS SINCAL version.
This briefly lists any new functions found in the current version.
About
Switch ON Help – About to display a window showing the current PSS SINCAL version and the
machine data.
3.3 Execute Command

This function enables commands to be started by entering the menu name. The dialog box is opened
via Extras – Execute Command.
The commands can be reduced temporarily via the Filter entry field. The entry of the filter causes an
immediate reduction of the scope of the display in the list beneath it.
The list contains all the commands available in the actual context, with their names and symbols (if
available). The selected command is started with the Execute button or by a double-click.
October 2021 25
Basic Functions
3.4 New
To create a PSS SINCAL network, click File – New. The PSS SINCAL Wizard prepares the
appropriate dialog boxes for all input settings and helps create the network.
Note that a new network is generated only temporarily (PSS SINCAL assigns this a specific name).
When the user closes or saves the network, it is connected to the name and storage location.
The first step in creating a new network is selecting the network type. PSS SINCAL displays all
available network types on the screen. Select one.
Click the Next > button to open the next dialog box in the Wizard.
Workspace file selects a template file. This allows you to apply the settings of this workspace for
annotation, filter, network size, etc. to the new network.
As Type of drawing, Schematic or Geographical coordinates can be selected for the new network.
26 October 2021
Basic Functions
Differences between schematic networks and those oriented on geographic coordinates are:
Attribute Schematic Geographical coordinates

Depending on area size,
Scale 1:1
e.g. 1:10000, 1:100000, ...
Page Size cm or inch km
Line length calculated No Yes
Snap to grid Yes No
Text alignment Horizontal or vertical In the same direction as the element
Base Unit selects the unit for the network being created.
In a schematic network, the desired Page Size and format are indicated.
In a network oriented to geographic coordinates, an Area Size is defined in kilometers.
Click the Finish button to create the new network.
Additional Dialog Box for Selecting Database Systems
If the Database system can be selected optionally option is activated, the following dialog box will
also appear.
The Database System section is used to select the desired system for the new network. The
administration user of the RDBMS system can be specified if Oracle and SQL Server are selected.
This is filled by default with the settings from the Options dialog box.
By clicking the Next > button the dialog box for entering the database information of the selected
database system appears.
October 2021 27
Basic Functions
Additional SQLite, Microsoft Access and SQL Server Express Dialog Box
If the SQLite, Microsoft Access or the SQL Server Express database system has been selected (see
the section on Database configuration in the chapter on Options), PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box
where you can define the storage location.
You define the storage location for the PSS SINCAL network in the PSS SINCAL file input field. This
entry consists of a SIN file and a data folder where the database and all additional files that are not
stored in the database are stored.
Additional Oracle Dialog Box
If the Oracle database system has been selected (see the section on Database configuration in the
chapter on Options), PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box where you can further configure this
database system.
28 October 2021
Basic Functions
PSS SINCAL stores the network in Oracle as a new user. Enter logon information in the input fields
User Name and Password.
Service name displays the database server set in the Options Dialog Box.
Additional SQL Server Dialog Box
If the SQL Server has been selected (see the section on Database configuration in the chapter on
Options), PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box where you can further configure this database system.
The PSS SINCAL network is stored at the SQL Server as new database with the automatically
assigned Database name. PSS SINCAL stores the network in Oracle as a new user. Enter logon
information for the SQL Server in the input fields User name and Password.
Service name displays the database server set in the Options Dialog Box.
3.5 Open and Save

This chapter precisely describes the basic functions of Open, Save and Revert to Saved for networks.
3.5.1 Open
To edit an existing network, click File – Open, which opens the dialog box where you select a
network.
October 2021 29
Basic Functions
This dialog box lets you select a network you want to edit.
An existing network archive (*.sinx) can also be selected. Note that the network inside it is located
parallel to the network archive. The processing is carried out in this new network and changes are
not transferred to the network archive.
Backing up Data after Unforeseen Program Abort
If Standard document behavior in the Database configuration dialog box in the Extras – Options
menu is turned ON when a network is opened, PSS SINCAL automatically creates a backup copy.
If the program ends properly, PSS SINCAL automatically deletes the backup copy when the network
is closed. When a program has an unforeseen termination, PSS SINCAL does not delete the backup
copy and shows the last valid network state that was saved.
If PSS SINCAL finds a backup copy when it opens the network, it notifies you.
If PSS SINCAL tells you there is a backup copy, you have three possibilities:
● Click Restore to recover the final backup copy of the network and delete all other backup
copies of that network.
● Click Open to delete all backup copies and open the network. Note that, in this case, there may
be inconsistencies in the network!
30 October 2021
Basic Functions
● Click Cancel to abort opening the network.
Caution: This function is available only if you are using Access databases.
Updating Standard Databases
When you open a network, PSS SINCAL automatically checks the version of any associated
standard databases. If this is not the current version, PSS SINCAL notifies the user.
This dialog box lists the standard databases to be updated. The Details section enables you to select
one of the following actions for each of these databases:
● Ignore:
The database is not updated, the assignment to the current network is retained. However, the
standard database is not opened and is not available for the current session.
● Update:
The database is updated and opened.
● Remove:
The assignment of the database is removed from the network. The database itself is not
updated.
Detailed information on the problem that has occurred is output as well as the database action to be
executed.
October 2021 31
Basic Functions
3.5.2 Open Samples
After clicking the menu item File – Open Samples the following dialog box appears:
The left-hand list shows all the sample networks of PSS SINCAL.
After clicking the Filter button, a dialog box appears in which the methods can be selected. In the
pop-up menu of the dialog box the Select Licensed Modules function is available. This allows you
to select those methods for which a license is available. The selection in the filter dialog box has the
effect that only those sample networks are displayed which are suitable for the selected methods.
The display range of the sample networks can be reduced in the Filter field.
The right side of the dialog box contains a short description of the selected sample network. Further
links to the product documentation are shown below.
The selected sample network can be opened by clicking the Open Sample button.
By clicking the Copy button, the sample network can be reset to the original version available in the
installation directory.
3.5.3 Save
Click File – Save to save the network. If the network does not have a file name, PSS SINCAL
automatically opens the dialog box for Save As.
If the network has been saved, the Save command saves it under the existing file name. If you want
to assign a new file name, click File – Save As.
32 October 2021
Basic Functions
General Hints on Saving
PSS SINCAL immediately stores in the database all changes in the network diagram and any
modifications of input data for network elements. This means you do not have to use Save or Save
As.
Save synchronizes all required values in the SIN file.
Save As saves an existing network with a new name or path. PSS SINCAL uses the database
system for storage setup to create new networks (see the section on Database configuration in the
chapter on Options). Save As lets you transfer PSS SINCAL networks between database systems.
3.5.4 Revert to Saved
Click File – Revert to Saved in the menu to restore the network, letting you revert to the last saving
state used and undo any complex modifications that have been made in the network.
Caution: This function is available only in connection with the Access and SQLite database
systems if Standard document behavior is turned ON.
3.6 Importing and Exporting

PSS SINCAL 18.0 can import network data from several programs, graphics and PSS SINCAL 18.0
workspaces. Click File – Import.
PSS SINCAL supports the following import functions:
● Importing from Excel

● Importing from CIM
October 2021 33
Basic Functions
● Importing from PSS E

● Importing from HUB File
● Importing from UCTE ASCII Files
● Importing from DGS Exchange Format
● Importing from DVG Exchange Format
● Importing from CYMDIST
● Importing from DINIS
● Importing Network Archives
● Importing Network States
● Importing Network Diagrams
● Importing Graphic Objects
● Importing PSS SINCAL Networks
● Importing Row Sets
● Importing OC Protection Device Characteristics
● Importing Protection Device Settings
● Importing Diagram Pages and Templates
● Importing Workspaces
To export records and graphics to other programs and PSS SINCAL 18.0 workspaces, click File –
Export.
PSS SINCAL supports the following export functions:
● Exporting to CIM
● Exporting to PSS E
● Exporting to NETOMAC
● Exporting to UCTE ASCII Files
● Exporting to DGS Exchange Format
● Exporting to DVG Exchange Format
● Exporting ASM-Identification
● Exporting to CYMDIST
● Exporting Network Archives
● Exporting Network States
● Exporting Network Diagrams
● Exporting Protection Device Settings
● Exporting Graphics
● Exporting Graphics to Google Earth
● Exporting Workspaces
3.6.1 Importing from Excel
PSS SINCAL network elements can be imported from an Excel Workbook.
The Wizard for the Excel import is started via clicking File – Import – Excel.
34 October 2021
Basic Functions
Excel Source File selects the file with the data you want to import (Click the Excel button to open
the file directly with Excel).
In the Import Definition section, you can select a configuration file. It contains all options and data
assignments of the Excel import. You have to press the Save button to store the settings in the
configuration file.
Click the Next > button to open the dialog box for import definition.
Import Definition
This tab assigns the data for PSS SINCAL from the Excel source file. A worksheet must be assigned
to each type of network element (in the following called element). A column of a worksheet must be
assigned to each attribute of a network element type.
October 2021 35
Basic Functions
This dialog box lists all the network elements supported by the import function. Individual elements
can be displayed with their attributes.
The top part of the Network Browser has a filter field. This reduces the amount to be displayed in the
list. A special feature is the control button in the filter field. Press this to display a menu.
The menu offers the following functions to customize how PSS SINCAL displays the list of options.
● Element:
Only for elements are filtered and not their fields.
● Field:
Only the fields of all the elements are filtered and not the element names.
● All:
There is no filtering. The list contains all available elements.
● Topology, Network objects, Graphics, Characteristics, Reliability and Protection:
What is displayed in the list is limited according to which menu item you select. This means that
PSS SINCAL only displays elements that meet this filter criterion.
Click the Display Options button to open the dialog box for it:
36 October 2021
Basic Functions
Show data depending on calculation methods restricts the amount of data displayed in the Select
Columns tab. If this option is ON, PSS SINCAL lists only attributes of network elements required for
the currently selected Calculation Methods.
Show SQL names for objects and fields displays the relation names (SQL names) instead of the
names in the user interface in the Select Sheets and Select Columns tabs.
Assigning Elements
PSS SINCAL stores the data of each element in their own worksheet of the Excel workbook. This
tab assigns elements to worksheets.
Click Edit Element to assign the worksheet manually. A dialog box opens containing all the
worksheets in the Workbook. Connect the network element you want to the selected network
element. This function can also be switched ON from the network element’s pop-up menu.
Click Autodetect to assign worksheets for selected elements automatically. PSS SINCAL compares
the worksheet names to names of the selected network element. If they agree, they are assigned.
PSS SINCAL also compares SQL names (of worksheets and element). If they agree, they are also
assigned. Autodetect in the pop-up menu also switches this function ON.
The Show Info button opens the input data description of the displayed element (online help).
You can make assignments for selected elements or automatically do this for all elements with the
Autodetect All button or using the pop-up menu.
Reset All resets all workbooks assigned to elements. To reset a specific assignment, open the pop-
up menu for the element and switch Reset ON. Note that resetting an element also resets its
attributes.
When data are imported, PSS SINCAL considers only data from elements selected in the list of
options. Selected elements have a check mark in front of them.
Assigning Fields
If a worksheet is selected for an element, its fields can be assigned columns from the Excel
worksheet.
October 2021 37
Basic Functions
Excel connects the attributes of the network element to columns in the worksheet. The first fields (up
to network area) describe the topology data. PSS SINCAL also has fields for enhanced element data
for network elements (switches, establishment date, shutdown date and phases).
Click Edit Field to assign the columns manually. This opens a dialog box containing all the columns
of the worksheet. Use this to assign a column to the selected field. This function can also be switched
ON from the field’s pop-up menu.
Click Autodetect to assign the column to the selected field automatically. PSS SINCAL compares
the column names in the worksheet to names of field. If these agree, they are assigned. PSS SINCAL
also compares SQL names (of worksheet columns and network element fields). If they agree, they
are also assigned. Autodetect in the pop-up menu also switches this function ON.
The Show Info button opens the input data description of the displayed element (online help).
In addition to making assignments for selected fields, you can automatically make assignments for
all fields of the element. Either click the button Autodetect All or use the pop-up menu.
Reset All resets all columns assigned to fields of the current network element. To reset a specific
assignment, open the pop-up menu for the field and switch Reset ON.
When data are imported, PSS SINCAL considers only data from fields selected in the list of options.
Selected fields have a check mark in front of them.
Import
This tab sets general options for importing.
38 October 2021
Basic Functions
Update data only for existing network elements controls the basic behavior of the Excel importing
procedure. PSS SINCAL differentiates between importing new records and updating existing
records. When this option is switched ON, PSS SINCAL only updates network data for the existing
network elements with the data from the Excel workbook when you import. No new network elements
are generated.
If Use short names for network element topology is switched ON, PSS SINCAL uses short names
instead of normal names to identify and assign network elements.
Repair errors in Excel data automatically has PSS SINCAL automatically correct errors in the
Excel file when importing. These can be violations to limits, invalid selection values, etc. If this option
is not turned ON, PSS SINCAL ignores errors from the Excel file.
The Extended messages for import option allows you to display advanced messages for updating
data.
The Graphic generation from node data option switches graphic node/busbar generation ON when
you import data from the Excel Workbook. PSS SINCAL uses the data from the worksheet with the
node graphics and optionally geographic node data. The nodes are generated using the up and right
distance or longitude and latitude from the node data. Clicking the Settings button opens the Set
Nodes dialog box in which additional setting values for node generation can be defined (see the
section on Set Nodes in the chapter on Graphics Editor). In this dialog box it is also possible to
choose whether an automatic generation of graphic elements is set. This option is only available if
no graphic elements are activated in the Import Definition tab.
The Test Import button works the same as the Finish button except that no data are actually
imported into the PSS SINCAL network and the dialog box is not closed. Before you actually import
anything, you must always check that the data in the Excel Workbook are error-free.
The settings can be written to the configuration file using the Save Configuration. If no configuration
file is specified, a new file can be entered via a file dialog box.
October 2021 39
Basic Functions
The Show Messages selection field can be used to display the errors and warnings that occurred
during the import process. With Show in internal browser the messages are displayed with the
internal browser. The Show in standard browser option displays the messages in the standard
browser.
Press the Finish button to perform the actual import.
Range of Import Functions
The import function lets you import network data for PSS SINCAL network elements from an Excel
Workbook.
The following network elements, graphic data and characteristic curves can be imported.
Topology data electrical networks Topology data pipe networks

Network level Network level
Network area Network area
Network zone Network zone
Substation
Network elements electrical networks Network elements pipe networks
Node Node
Synchronous machine Infeeder gas
Power unit Infeeder heating/cooling
Network feeder Water tank
Asynchronous machine Pump
Load Consumer
Variable shunt element Pressure buffer
Shunt impedance Leakage
Shunt reactor Temperature regulator
Shunt capacitor Pipe
Static compensator Pressure increase pump
Shunt RLC circuit Const. pressure decrease/const. flow
Shunt ripple control transmitter Pressure regulator
Converter Compressor
Line Heat exchanger
Variable serial element Sliding valve/return valve
Two-winding transformer Master Resource
Three-winding transformer
Serial reactor
Serial capacitor
Serial RLC circuit
Serial ripple control transmitter
Serial DC element
40 October 2021
Basic Functions
Breaker
Neutral point impedance
Owner
Master Resource
Graphic data electrical networks Graphic data pipe networks
Graphic node Graphic node
Graphic element Graphic element
Graphic area and tile Graphic area and tile
Characteristics electrical networks Characteristics pipe networks
Characteristics Pump characteristics
Characteristics values Pump characteristics values
Development series (ind. elements) Pressure buffer characteristics
Development series values Pressure buffer characteristics values
Power default Water tank characteristics
Power default values Water tank characteristics values
Operating points/profiles Pressure drop characteristics
Operating point/profile values Pressure drop characteristics values
Harmonics impedance characteristics Operating point
Harmonics impedance characteristics values Operating series
Harmonics voltage source Operating series values
Harmonics voltage source values Increase series
Harmonics current source Increase series values
Harmonics current source values Temperature consumption characteristics
Harmonics distribution limit Temperature consumption characteristics
values
Harmonics distribution limit values
Annual load duration curve
Annual load duration curve values
Transformer tap
Transformer tap values
Transformer control
Transformer control values
Power limit
Power limit value
Element loading
Element loading values
Reliability
Switchbay type
Busbar type
Line type
Transformer type
October 2021 41
Basic Functions
Supply type
Protection
Current transformer
Voltage transformer
Protection zone
Protection location
Protection ground factor
Overcurrent protection settings
Distance protection settings
Differential protection settings
Pickup
Characteristics – area distance protection
Characteristics – Siemens distance protection
Voltage protection
Protection frequency
Teleprotection group
Teleprotection
Arc flash configuration
When data are imported, PSS SINCAL creates a PSS SINCAL object for each line of data from the
Excel worksheet. Attributes that are not filled or assigned are initialized with default values.
After data has been imported, PSS SINCAL displays any errors (exceeding the limits or invalid
Lookup's) in the message window. The error messages have a short description of the errors, the
name of worksheet and the line numbers.
Structure of the Excel Workbook
Element data for individual element types are stored in their own worksheet of the Excel source file.
Element type attributes are stored in the columns of the worksheet. One line in a worksheet is for
one network element that is imported.
42 October 2021
Basic Functions
This Excel Workbook can contain any number of worksheets. Each worksheet has the data for a
PSS SINCAL network element (e.g. line, load, asynchronous machine, etc.).
Data structures in the Excel Workbook are "flat", i.e. the topological information (node names,
network level and element name) are part of the worksheet.
The worksheet contains an inscription line that uniquely identifies each column. The lines after Line
1 contain the data. One line in the worksheet is the equivalent of a network element.
Data is transferred from the Excel Workbook to the attributes as follows:
● Descriptions (text):
Descriptions are taken from the worksheet directly (without conversion). If the text is longer
than the allowed attribute length, PSS SINCAL shortens it.
● Technical attributes (numerical values):
The values for technical attributes are taken from the worksheet directly (without conversion).
PSS SINCAL checks for PSS SINCAL limits and may convert the numerical value, if necessary,
to a permissible minimum or maximum value. See the PSS SINCAL Database Description for
specific units of technical attributes.
● Selection values (Lookup's):
These are predefined values such as e.g. transformer vector groups, which PSS SINCAL, of
course, displays as text, but which are stored as numerical values. The entries can be either
text or numerical values. If it is text, this must be entered in the Excel Worksheet exactly as it
will be displayed in PSS SINCAL (see the PSS SINCAL Database Description for available
values).
● Secondary key (references):
Secondary keys are references to records. PSS SINCAL assigns cable types for lines, for
example, by storing the unique key for this record from the external standard type database.
You can, of course, use these fields when you import data, but then there will be no further
examinations by PSS SINCAL.
● Topology fields:
PSS SINCAL assigns all network elements topology structures that uniquely define the element
in the network. These topology structures can be terminals, nodes, elements or network levels.
In Excel worksheets, topology structures are simulated in a simplified way by using the names
of nodes, elements and network levels. When these are imported, PSS SINCAL connects and
creates the required topology structures.
● Enhanced element data:
In PSS SINCAL, all network elements have additional element data precisely defining the
network element.
Fields for Topological Information
The following fields define topology data:
● Node
● Element name
● Network level
● Network area
October 2021 43
Basic Functions
Fields for Enhanced Element Data
The following fields are for the enhanced definition of element data:
● Switch:
The switch defines whether the element is switched ON or OFF. This field refers to the
Flag_State in the Terminal table.
You can enter the following values: 1 (switch to Terminal 1), 2 (switch to Terminal 2) and 4
(switch to Terminal 3). If, for example, you want to switch Terminals 1 and 2 in a line, simply
enter 3.
● Establishment date:
The establishment date is the time when the element goes into operation. This field refers to Ti
in the Element table.
● Shutdown date:
The shutdown date is the time when the element shuts down. This field refers to Ts in the
Element table.
● Conductor:
The phases determine the type of connection. This field refers to Flag_Terminal in the Terminal
table.
You can enter the following values: L1, L2, L3, L12, L23, L31, L123 or 1 to 7.
● Out of service:
Determines whether the element is out of service. This field refers to Flag_State in the Element
table.
● Controller:
Determines whether the controller is enabled. This field refers to Flag_Input in the Element
table.
This field is only available for two-winding transformers, three-winding transformers,
synchronous machines, power units, network feeders, converters and shunt reactors.
● Control range:
Legt fest, ob das Regelband aktiviert ist. This field refers to Flag_Input in the Element table.
This field is only available for two-winding transformers, three-winding transformers and shunt
reactors.
● Comment:
The comment enables additional information on the element to be entered. This field refers to
TextVal in the Node or Element table.
Importing Graphic Data
Excel Import can import graphics for views, nodes and network elements in addition to technical data.
The Import Definition contains graphic data for GraphicAreaTile, GraphicNode and
GraphicElement.
44 October 2021
Basic Functions
GraphicAreaTile
This option is used to import basic graphic attributes for views.
October 2021 45
Basic Functions
The attributes of the Graphic Area and Tile table can be imported from the Excel Worksheet.
GraphicNode
This option is used to import basic graphic attributes for nodes. You can even define the position of
the node and the node type. The view can also be selected via the name.
The following table contains a list of the screen attributes that can be imported from the Excel
Workbook.
Attribute Unit Description

Area Name Name of the view (optionally)
Name Name of the node (essential, since the name creates the connection to the node’s
network data)
Foreground RGB Foreground color of the node
Color
Background RGB Background color (for filled nodes)
Color
Pen Style Pen Style
0: Straight line
1: Small dotted
2: Dotted
3: Straight line – point – straight line
4: Straight line – point – point – straight line
Pen Width 0.25mm Pen width
Symbol Size 0.25mm Size of the node symbol at normal nodes (not at busbars)
StartX m Node starting point’s X-coordinates
StartY m Node starting point’s Y-coordinates
EndX m Node stopping point’s X-coordinates (at normal node always the same as to StartX)
EndY m Node stopping point’s Y-coordinates (at normal node always the same as to StartY)
Node Type Node symbol type
0: No symbol
1: Circle
2: Rectangle
3: Busbar
46 October 2021
Basic Functions
GraphicElement
This option is used to import basic graphic attributes for network elements. You can even define the
bends of the element. The view can also be selected via the name.
The following table contains a list of the screen attributes that can be imported from the Excel
Workbook.
Attribute Unit Description

Area Name Name of the view (optionally)
Node 1* Starting node
Node 2* End node
Node 3* Second end node (for three-winding transformers)
Name* Element name
Foreground Color RGB Foreground color of the element
Background Color RGB Background color (for filled elements)
Pen Style Pen style
0: Straight line
1: Small dotted
2: Dotted
3: Straight line – point – straight line
4: Straight line – point – point – straight line
Pen Width 0.25mm Pen width
Symbol Size Factor 0.25mm Size for element
SymbolX m Symbol center X-coordinate
SymbolY m Symbol center Y-coordinate
Points Number of definition points for bends
*) Attributes marked in this way show the connection to the network element data. For node elements,
the attributes for Node 1 and Name must be filled. For branch elements, the attributes for Node 1,
Node 2 and Name must be filled. For three-winding transformers, the attributes for Node 1, Node 2,
Node 3 and Name must be entered.
Points defines the number of bends. According to this attribute, the points must be entered in pairs
to X and Y values in the Excel file. The first point is for the terminal at the starting node and the last
point is for the terminal at the end node. The following example illustrates this:
Points X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X3 Y3 X4 Y4
4 11250 21250 11750 21250 12225 22475 13250 22750
October 2021 47
Basic Functions
3.6.2 Importing from CIM
This function lets you import networks in CIM data format into PSS SINCAL.
CIM is integrated into PSS SINCAL on the basis of IEC 61970-301. This standard describes the
model for physical objects in EMS (Energy Management System) and their relationships to one
another.
The CIM data model was developed to exchange the universal network data for energy suppliers.
The model consists of a number of predefined objects organized into different packages.
Click File – Import – CIM in the menu to start importing. Note that you can only import to a new
empty network.
Import File
In this section, you can select the CIM file to be imported.
If imported networks contain different individual files, enter all of these in the Import File field.
PSS SINCAL will import all of them together.
When you select a Configuration File you can influence the behavior of CIM import. For model
import of dynamics, a mapping table can be defined.
CIM Version
The following CIM versions are available:
● CIM V10 (CIM Standard):

This profile is a universal implementation based on the minimum requirements for CIM data
exchange. It is based on the specification for "CPSM Minimum Data Requirements in Terms of
the IEC CIM Version 2.0" from Joe Evans and Kurt Hunter.
48 October 2021
Basic Functions
● CIM V12 (CIM for Planning):

This profile is based on the specification for "CIM Planning Network Model Exchange Profile for
Steady State and Short Circuit", Revision 1.1. This addresses, in particular, network data
exchange for planning data and, as such, is more appropriate than earlier versions for
exchanging network data.
● CIM V12 (CIM for Spectrum Power 5):
exchange from Spectrum Power 5 with special processing logic.
● CIM V14 (CIM for ENTSO-E):
This profile is based on the specification for "ENTSO-E Common Information Model (CIM) –
Model Exchange Profile, Revision 1.0 Version 14 from May 10 th, 2009". This was conceived for
universal data exchange between the members in ENTSO-E (European Network of
Transmission System Operators for Electricity).
Model Exchange Profile, Version 2.4.15 from August 7th, 2014". This was conceived for
universal data exchange of power flow, short circuit and dynamic data between the members in
ENTSO-E (European Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity).
Boundary File can contain the CIM file created by ENTSO-E for the boundary areas.
Extended Import Settings
General
Import Mode performs an enhanced control of the importing procedure. Currently only the Standard
option is available.
The CIM data model does not have any entry for network frequency, so you need to enter the Base
Frequency you want before starting to import data. This frequency is used to, among other things,
convert reactance to inductance or capacitance.
October 2021 49
Basic Functions
Naming
This section defines, which CIM attributes are assigned to names and short names for network
elements in PSS SINCAL.
Length Settings
Since all the entries for length in the CIM file are without dimensions, you need to select the basic
unit you want to use. PSS SINCAL will use this to convert all the entries for length to the PSS SINCAL
basic unit when they are imported. The basic unit used in PSS SINCAL is kilometers.
You can either select from predefined units or enter the Userdefined Factor to convert the CIM entry
for length to kilometers by hand.
Importing Graphics
This dialog box defines extended settings for importing graphic data from a CIM file.
Actually, no graphic information is stored in the CIM file, but the CIM standard does let you save
graphic positions for all "Power System Resources". To do so, the CIM standard has a "GmlPosition".
PSS SINCAL can both import and export this information, making it easy to display the basic
structure of the network diagram in the CIM data model. Basically, it is restricted to graphic positions
of nodes and the graphic contour of all the branch elements.
The Type of drawing selection field determines whether the imported network will be schematic or
geographical.
Switch Individual text ON to assign text attributes to each imported network element individually. If
this option is switched OFF, PSS SINCAL uses a common "global" text for all imported network
elements.
Switch Separate Views ON to generate an individual view for each drawing area defined in CIM.
Since entries for length in the CIM file have no dimensions, you need to enter the conversion factor
for the base unit for graphic data used by PSS SINCAL. PSS SINCAL’s base unit is meter. Either
use the Base unit option to prescribe fixed selection values or the Scale option to enter a factor.
50 October 2021
Basic Functions
Symbol Size defines how large PSS SINCAL displays imported network element symbols.
When CIM files are imported, PSS SINCAL displays an enhanced HTML log in the message box,
making it easier to find any errors in the CIM files.
3.6.3 Importing from PSS E
This function lets you import networks in PSS E format V27, V29, V30, V31, V32, V33 or V34 into
PSS SINCAL. When importing, all input data from the PSS E file are converted for use in
PSS SINCAL. Note that you can import only to a new empty network.
Click File – Import – PSS E in the menu to start importing.
Import Files
In this section, you can select the input files you need to import.
The most important file is here the RAW File with all the topological and technical information on the
network. Select this file in the RAW File field. Since RAW files up to Version 30.2 are without version
information, you need to select the Version manually. A unique function available here is that you
can select Auto. Then PSS SINCAL automatically attempts to recognize the version of the RAW file
to be imported.
October 2021 51
Basic Functions
In Graphic File, you have the option of selecting a file with information for the graphics. PSS E
supports the PSS E file formats .drw and .loc. The DRW file contains comprehensive graphic
information for the network that you want to import. The LOC file only contains entries for busbar
positions and bends for lines and transformers. You can even select more than one graphic file to be
imported. The file names have to be separated by ";". When it is imported, each additional file creates
its own view.
In the Sequence File field, you have the option to select a file with zero- and negative-phase
sequence data. You will need this if you require complete system information for calculating
unbalanced faults (e.g. 1-phase ground fault).
DYR File contains models for dynamic machine behavior in the calculations for dynamics. A network
node, model name and a list of settings in the DYR file define these models (for a detailed description,
see PSS E documentation). These models are assigned to the appropriate network elements. The
following predefined machine models can be imported from the DYR file: CGEN1, GENCLS,
GENROU, GENROE, GENSAL, GENSAE, GENTRA. The parameters from the models are
converted and stored as synchronous machine attributes.
The impedance correction data required for the short circuit calculation (according to IEC 60909) and
not available in the RAW file is stored in the IEC File. These are used for asynchronous machines
and transformers.
Harmonics data can be stored in the HAR File selection field. The data format basically corresponds
to the database tables for the harmonics data of PSS SINCAL. However, the identification is carried
out using the PSS E bus number and element identifier. Equivalent modelling is selected for the
network elements required for the harmonics calculation but which are not available in PSS E. For
this in PSS E a network element is created with the corresponding impedance for the basic
frequency. The behavior in PSS SINCAL can then be described using the assigned harmonics data.
Typical examples of elements where this kind of equivalent modelling is required are RLC filters such
as high pass, audio-frequency barrier etc.
A file with graphic information can be selected optionally in the Graphic file selection field. This
supports PSS E file formats DRW and LOC. The DRW file contains extensive graphic information on
the imported network. The LOC file only provides the position information for busbars and the buckle
points for lines and transformers. It is also possible to select several graphic files for the import. They
must be separated by ";". A separate view for every additional file is generated during the import.
PSS SINCAL Standard Database
In this section, you can select a PSS SINCAL standard database.
52 October 2021
Basic Functions
General
Import Mode selects between the options
● Standard and
● Extended (mixed power)
Standard import simulates the PSS E loads in PSS SINCAL with three independent network
elements (current-dependent load, constant load and impedance load). Extended import simulates
loads in PSS SINCAL with a single network element (variable shunt element), which enables mixed
loads.
In the Base Frequency field, select the frequency of the network element data from the RAW file.
In PSS E, you can enter nodes with a rated voltage of 0.0 kV. In PSS SINCAL, however, this is not
possible. If you wish to import PSS E data and avoid additional processing, enter a voltage in the
Reference Voltage field, which is used instead of 0.0 kV.
Length Settings
Since all the entries for length are without dimensions, you need to select the basic unit you want to
use. PSS SINCAL will use this to convert all the entries for length to the PSS SINCAL basic unit
when they are imported. The basic unit used in PSS SINCAL is kilometers.
You can either select from predefined units or enter the factor to convert the PSS E entry for length
to kilometers by hand.
October 2021 53
Basic Functions
The Use absolute impedance option causes the impedance of conductors stored in the RAW file
to be imported as an absolute value and not according to length (Ohm/km), as is otherwise usual.
However, in order to indicate the length of the conductor, this is imported with a minus sign from the
RAW file. The negative length is ignored in the PSS SINCAL calculation modules.
Advanced Settings
Import of Zero Impedance Lines controls the minimum impedance of lines the PSS E file accepts
for PSS SINCAL zero impedance connections. The setting for this value should be like PSS E
"THRSHZ" parameters. Set them in the PSS E GUI to control the Minimum Impedance from which
PSS SINCAL considers lines as zero impedance connections.
Note that the examination of minimum impedance only refers to the imaginary part. PSS E specifies
that the real part in zero impedance lines is always equal to zero.
If the Use Wave Impedance option is activated, the impedance and the capacitance of the lines
from the RAW file are converted using special formulas. This requires the appropriate values to have
been defined in the RAW file using wave impedance formulas. These are then converted back to an
impedance and capacitance at the rated frequency of the network.
If the All Lines option is activated, all imported lines are included.
If the Marked Lines option is activated, only those lines are included that have a "W" in the "CKT"
field of the RAW file.
From Version 34, the new node/breaker model is provided in the RAW file. If the Import Substation
Data option is activated, the RAW file is imported with the node/breaker model. This allows network
modelling to be carried out by substation.
3.6.4 Importing from HUB File
This function imports networks from PSS Adept. These networks must either be HUB files with V11,
V14 or V15 formats or in PSS U format. HUB files are ASCII files that contain all the significant data
of the network, including the graphics. PSS U files are ASCII files stemming from older PSS ADEPT
versions that still do not support any HUB data files.
Note that you can only import to a new empty network.
Click File – Import – HUB File in the menu to start importing.
54 October 2021
Basic Functions
Import Files
In this section, you can select the HUB file to be imported.
PSS SINCAL Standard Database
In this section, you can select a PSS SINCAL standard database and give consideration to the
available construction types when you import PSS Adept data.
To do so, the PSS SINCAL standard database must already be filled with data from the construction
file. For this, PSS SINCAL has a help program called "ImportCon.hta". For this purpose we provide
two automation scripts:
● ImportCon.py:
Python script to import a construction file into a PSS SINCAL standard database.
● ImportCon.vbs:
Visual Basic script for importing a construction file into a PSS SINCAL standard database.
Both scripts are available in the "My Documents\PSS Files\Sincal\Samples Auto" directory.
User Name in standard type connects a construction type in the HUB file to a PSS SINCAL standard
type. During of the import procedure, PSS SINCAL checks whether the assignment makes sense. If
there are any problems (e.g. incorrect rated voltage, problems of uniqueness, etc.) the message box
will have detailed information.
October 2021 55
Basic Functions
General
Import Mode sets the import mode. Currently only the Standard option is available.
In the Base Frequency field, select the frequency of the network element data from the HUB file.
Length Settings
Since all the entries for length in the HUB file are without dimensions, you need to select the basic
unit you want to use. PSS SINCAL will use this to convert all the entries for length to the PSS SINCAL
basic unit when they are imported. The basic unit used in PSS SINCAL is kilometers.
You can either select from predefined units or enter the factor to convert the HUB entry for length to
kilometers by hand.
Advanced Settings
Import of Zero Impedance Lines controls the minimum impedance of lines the HUB file accepts for
PSS SINCAL zero impedance connections.
Note that the examination of minimum impedance refers to the real and imaginary parts. If both
impedances are below the preset minimum impedance, PSS SINCAL imports the line as a zero
impedance connection.
56 October 2021
Basic Functions
Importing Graphics
This dialog box defines extended settings for importing graphic data from a HUB file.
General
Type of drawing determines whether the imported network will be schematic or geographical.
Length Settings in HUB File
Since all the entries for length in the HUB file are without dimensions, you need to select the basic
unit for the graphic data you want to use. PSS SINCAL will use this to convert all the entries for length
to the PSS SINCAL basic unit when they are imported. The basic unit for the graphic data used in
PSS SINCAL is meters.
You can either select from predefined units or enter the factor to convert the HUB entry for length to
meters by hand.
Base Unit in PSS SINCAL
This configures how PSS SINCAL displays imported data in the Graphics Editor. Select the desired
Unit for Network Diagram. This unit shows the graphic coordinates (rulers, status line, etc.).
3.6.5 Importing from UCTE ASCII Files
This function lets you import networks in UCTE data format into PSS SINCAL. Only network data are
imported since the UCTE data format does not have information on graphics.
When you import a network, the following UCTE versions are supported:
● Version 01 – 2003.09.01
● Version 02 – 2007.05.01
Click File – Import – UCTE ASCII File in the menu to start importing. Note that you can import only
to a new empty network.
October 2021 57
Basic Functions
Import File
In this section, you can select the UCTE file to be imported.
Import Options
In this section, you can switch ON the following options for import:
● Create network zones

● Create default names for elements with empty name
● Create network areas based on country code
● Create substations based on geographical node name
3.6.6 Importing from DGS Exchange Format
This function lets you import networks in DIgSILENT PowerFactory DGS ASCII format to
PSS SINCAL. Both network data and network diagrams can be saved in DGS format.
When you import a network, the following DGS versions are supported:
● Version 3.0
● Version 4.0
To start, click File – Import – DGS Exchange Format. Note that importing is possible only if you
have a new empty network.
Import File is used to select the DGS ASCII file.
58 October 2021
Basic Functions
Range of Import Functions
● Node/busbar
● Network feeder
● Synchronous machine
● Asynchronous machine
● Load
● Shunt impedance
● Shunt reactor
● Shunt capacitor
● Line
● Two-winding transformer
● Three-winding transformer
● Serial reactor
● Serial capacitor
Mainly the basic data from these network elements are processed, i.e. positive-phase-sequence
data, and (if they are available and can be evaluated) zero-phase sequence data. Transformer
controller data are also processed.
Graphics can also be imported from the DGS file. Importing multiple views is also supported, as long
as these are contained in the DGS file.
3.6.7 Importing from DVG Exchange Format
This function lets you import networks in the DVG data exchange format Version 0001 from
01.01.2000 to PSS SINCAL. When importing, PSS SINCAL converts all input data from the data
exchange format file for use in PSS SINCAL. If the data exchange format contains file type data,
PSS SINCAL imports these into the local type database. If the user does not enter any local type
database, PSS SINCAL assigns and stores the type data at the elements.
To start, click File – Import – DVG Exchange Format. Note that importing is possible only if you
have a new empty network.
October 2021 59
Basic Functions
Import Files
Select the DVG File (.net) and a Graphic File (.bild) to be imported. The entry for the graphics file
is optional and allows you to import graphics along with the data. You can even select more than on
graphics file. When individual graphics files are imported, a view is generated in the PSS SINCAL
network database.
Import Options
Proceed if errors occur allows an error-tolerant import. This means the data from the DVG file are
processed as well as possible and then written in the network database. PSS SINCAL logs any
problems or errors in the data and any unprocessed data as warnings.
3.6.8 Importing from CYMDIST
This function lets you import networks in CYMDIST format 5.0, 7.2, 8.0 or 9.0 into PSS SINCAL.
When importing, all input data from the CYMDIST file are converted for use in PSS SINCAL. Note
that you can import only to a new empty network.
Click File – Import – CYMDIST in the menu to start importing.
Import Files
In this section, you can select the input files you need to import. To actually start importing, you first
need to enter all the import files.
Equipment File is used to select the file describing the equipment (e.g. information on cable
configuration & shielding, substation data, etc.).
Network File contains all the topological and electrical network data. This file also contains the
graphical positions of nodes in the diagram as well as the positions of network element terminals at
busbars.
60 October 2021
Basic Functions
Load File selects the file with the consumer data.
General
The Import Customer Loads field has the following options.
● Load:
This groups all the customer loads from the Load file as loads in PSS SINCAL.
● Customer Load:
This imports all the customer loads from the Load file as customer loads in PSS SINCAL.
The Import Infeeder selection field makes it possible to select whether feeders are defined with the
SOURCE or SOURCE EQUIVALENT type. The selected type should be available in the Network
File at Import Data.
The available load models are read from the load file and can be selected for import via the Load
Model Name selection field.
In the Base Frequency field, select the frequency of the network element data.
If the Import only switch instead of breakers option is activated, no switches are imported but only
the switch state.
The Assign breaker to network elements option enables unnecessary connections with switches
to be eliminated. The switches are positioned on the next valid element.
Graphic
As all length information in the Cymdist file has no dimension, this section defines the actual base
unit for the graphic data. This is used during the import to convert all length information to the base
unit used by PSS SINCAL for graphic data.
October 2021 61
Basic Functions
The Graphic Unit selection field is used to select the following units for the import:
● Unit from import file:

The base unit for the import is defined in the CYMDIST network file.
● SI:
The base unit for the import of the graphic data is stated in Meter.
● Imperial:
The base unit for the import of the graphic data is specified in Feet.
● Custom scale:
A user-defined factor can be entered here, in order to convert the graphic data of the import file
to Meters.
If the Use custom scale option is activated, the scale is not calculated by PSS SINCAL but specified
via this input field.
The Graphic text visible option enables the annotation of supplementary graphics elements to be
shown or hidden. The "Equipment" object type is assigned for the supplementary graphics elements.
This makes it possible to redefine the visibility of the supplementary graphics elements also after the
import.
elements.
3.6.9 Importing from DINIS
This function lets you import networks in the External Data Interface Format from DINIS to
PSS SINCAL. When importing, all input data from the DINIS file are converted for use in
PSS SINCAL. Note that importing is possible only if you have a new empty network.
To start, click File – Import – DINIS.
Import Files
In this section, you can select the External Data Interface File and the Line Type File you need to
import. The information of the line type file is only required if the appropriate data is not present in
the external data interface file.
62 October 2021
Basic Functions
General
The Node Name field has the following options.
● Generated:
A node name is generated.
● User reference 1 to 4:
The name is taken from the corresponding field of the input file.
In the Base Frequency field, select the frequency of the network element data.
Graphic
If the Automatic Scale option is activated, the scale is calculated on the basis of the imported graphic
elements.
If the Fixed Scale option is activated, the scale is not calculated but entered in the input field.
The Create substations in additional views option makes it possible to import substations in the
form of "tiles" in separate views. This means that during the import a geographic view is generated
in which the network is shown. The substations are placed in the geographic view only as empty
containers. Clicking the substation element opens another view showing the details of the substation.
elements.
3.6.10 Importing Network Archives
This function lets you import networks that PSS SINCAL has previously stored as network archives
to PSS SINCAL. The advantage of this function is that networks with all relevant data can be imported
very easily.
October 2021 63
Basic Functions
To start, click File – Import – Network Archive. Note that importing is possible only if you have a
new empty network.
In this dialog box, you can select the network archive file to be imported.
If the network archive file contains standard databases and dynamic models or the new network has
already been stored, clicking Next > opens an additional dialog box for extended import settings.
This dialog box selects standard databases and dynamic models to be imported that are stored in
the network archive.
3.6.11 Importing Network States
This function imports the network state (i.e. the switch positions, the operating states and the element
data of network elements) into the current network, so you can test switching and operating states
and element data in the network and set them back again.
Click File – Import – Network State in the menu to start this function.
64 October 2021
Basic Functions
Import File
In this section you can select the name of the file used to import the network state. The XML file
selected here has to be a valid file for a network state. A precise format description for this XML file
is described in the Database Description in the Network State/Network Graphic/Scenario as XML
File chapter.
File Information
This section displays information about the selected XML file.
The Creation Date reads the date of creation within the XML file.
The Description provides additional information about the XML file that can be specified during
export.
If a valid file is specified, the next dialog box of the wizard can be displayed by clicking the Next >
button. In this dialog box import options can be specified.
October 2021 65
Basic Functions
Import Options
In this section you can select the criteria that identify the topology.
● Identification with Id:

PSS SINCAL compares element’s ID in the database with the one stored in the XML file. This
option only makes sense if the network state is imported into the same network. In this case,
however, you will have an exact assignment.
● Identification with Name:
PSS SINCAL compares the name of the element with the name from the XML file. To be able
to do this without any problems, names must be unique.
● Identification with Short Name:
PSS SINCAL compares the short name of the element with the short name from the XML file.
To be able to do this without any problems, short names must be unique.
● Identification with MRID:
The MRID in the XML file is compared with the master resources in the network. If a filter is
specified for the category, only these master resources in the network are used for comparison.
The category can be specified with a wildcard.
A description of the identification attributes can be found in the Database Description, chapter
Network State/Network Graphic/Scenario as XML File, section NetworkData.
No matter which import option you select, the network topology has to agree with the one in the XML
file. If this is not the case, PSS SINCAL cannot import this element.
Select import settings selects the network states to be imported into this network.
● Switch State:
Describes whether the switch of a terminal is open or closed.
● Operating State:
Describes whether an element is out of service or not.
● Element Data:
Describes additional element attributes.
66 October 2021
Basic Functions
PSS SINCAL only displays these settings, if they are available in the network state file (see Database
Description, chapter Structure of the XML File under Settings).
3.6.12 Importing Network Diagrams
This function imports graphics for nodes and network elements into the present network view, so you
can transfer an entire network diagram or parts of it between networks and views.
Click File – Import – Network Diagram in the menu to start this function.
Import File
In this section you can select the name of the file used to import the network diagram. The XML file
selected here has to be a valid file for a network diagram. A precise description of the format for this
XML file is available in the Network State/Network Graphics/Scenario as XML File chapter of the
Database Description.
File Information
export.
October 2021 67
Basic Functions
Import Options
In this section you can select the criteria that identify the topology.

PSS SINCAL compares element’s ID in the database with the one stored in the XML file. This
option only makes sense if the network diagram is imported into the same network. In this
case, however, you will have an exact assignment.
PSS SINCAL compares the name of the element with the name from the XML file. To be able
to do this without any problems, names must be unique.
● Identification with Short Name:
PSS SINCAL compares the short name of the element with the short name from the XML file.
To be able to do this without any problems, short names must be unique.
No matter which import option you select, the network topology has to agree with the one in the XML
file. If this is not the case, PSS SINCAL cannot import this element.
3.6.13 Importing Graphic Objects
This function allows, at any time, importing vector graphics in the PSS SINCAL Pic format to
PSS SINCAL networks. Unlike the background images, graphic objects can be changed even after
they have been imported.
To start this function, click File – Import – Graphic Objects.
68 October 2021
Basic Functions
In this dialog box, you can select the graphic object file to be imported.
3.6.14 Importing PSS SINCAL Networks
This function imports a complete PSS SINCAL network to an existing network allowing you, for
example, to group multiple unconnected networks and create a single network. This can also be
done with copy and paste, but it is better to import networks so they do not lose all their
supplementary data (characteristic curves, fault locations, network element groups, etc.).
Click File – Import – PSS SINCAL to start. PSS SINCAL has a Wizard to help you with this
procedure.
To start importing, select a PSS SINCAL network. Note that both database type (electricity, water,
gas, heating/cooling) and version have to agree. If they do not, PSS SINCAL displays an error
message.
Advanced Settings controls how imported network elements are assigned to a view, object type,
network level and network area. Click Settings to open the dialog box for this.
October 2021 69
Basic Functions
This dialog box has two basic list elements:
● Search:
Searches for suitable settings (view, object type, network level or network area) in the current
network. If such settings are found, PSS SINCAL assigns these. If not, it uses the data from the
network that is being imported.
● New:
This does not modify the data of the network being imported.
In View, you can also select Actual. This inserts the Basic View of the network you want to import
into the current view. PSS SINCAL imports additional views of this network as new views.
Click Next > to continue importing.
This dialog box sets the size and position of the network being imported. This is particularly important
if you wish to add networks with different scales or page sizes.
Area Size shows the physical sizes of the current network and the imported network and displays
the measurements of both networks.
Import Settings changes the network position and size when it is imported. The coordinates for
Origin for Import moves the network accordingly. Scale factor multiplies all coordinates in the
database. If you enter the factor "10," the network imported will be ten times as large. All network
elements and sizes of their symbols are considered.
70 October 2021
Basic Functions
Adjust page size automatically increases the page size of the current network so that the complete
network being imported will fit.
Click the Finish button to close the import dialog box. PSS SINCAL imports the network and displays
it in the graphic area.
3.6.15 Importing Row Sets
This function lets you import network records from existing PSS SINCAL networks that do not have
topological data.
There are the following types of records:
● Characteristics curves for motors

● Load curves
● Harmonics characteristics curves
● Manipulators
● Reliability data
● Generic data
● Characteristic curves for pipe networks
● Economic efficiency data
● Operating series for pipe networks
● Model export definition
● Enhanced settings
Click File – Import – Row Sets to open the Import Wizard, which guides you, step by step, through
additional settings.
In the Import Wizard’s first dialog box, select the PSS SINCAL database (network) from which the
records are to be imported.
Click Next > to open the Import Wizard’s next dialog box. Here you select tables and records to be
imported.
October 2021 71
Basic Functions
To add the selected data to the network, click Import.
Note that when you import the Model Export Definition PSS SINCAL overwrites previous settings
(for the selected records) in the network.
3.6.16 Importing OC Protection Device Characteristics
This function lets you import user-defined protection devices from an ASCII file to a PSS SINCAL
18.0 protection device database.
Start the function with the menu item File – Import – OC Protection Device Characteristics. This
opens a dialog where you can select a protection device database.
In the Select protection device database input field, select the protection device database to which
the data from the protection devices is to be imported.
Enter any protection device types you want from the Protection devices settings file list. Click
Browse to enter these databases.
72 October 2021
Basic Functions
Click OK to copy the selected OC protection devices to the protection database.
3.6.17 Importing Protection Device Settings
This function can be used to import protection device setting values into the current network.
Click File – Import – Protection Settings in the menu to start the function.
Import File
In this section, the name of the file for importing the protection device setting values can be selected.
The XML file selected here must be a valid protection device setting value file. The exact format
description for this XML file is described in the Database Description in the Network State/Network
Graphic/Scenario as XML File chapter.
File Information
export.
The Information field shows how many protection devices are in the XML file. Due to the number of
protection devices in the XML file and selection quantity, the import behaves differently.
If importing with a selection of protection devices and there is only one protection device in the XML
file, the protection device settings of the XML file are imported into the selected protection devices.
If this condition does not apply, import is performed based on the selected identification, either in the
selection amount or in the entire network.
October 2021 73
Basic Functions
Import Options
In this section it is possible to choose according to which criteria the protection devices are identified,
if it is necessary (see Information on the first page of the wizard).

PSS SINCAL compares protection device’s ID in the database with the one stored in the XML
file. This option only makes sense if the protection device settings is imported into the same
network. In this case, however, you will have an exact assignment.
PSS SINCAL compares the name of the protection device with the name from the XML file. To
be able to do this without any problems, names must be unique.
Independent of the selected import option, the topology of the network must match that of the XML
file. If this is not the case, no import is performed for this element.
Furthermore, the protection device setting values to be imported can be selected.
Data Processing
In this section it is possible to select whether the protection device setting values of the identified
protection devices are to be updated or replaced.
If Update data is selected, all protection device settings of the protection device except for
● Pickup
● Pickup and tripping
● Teleprotection
are deleted and then the selected protection device setting values are imported from the XML file.
74 October 2021
Basic Functions
If Update data is selected, the protection device setting values of the identified protection devices
are identified based on the following criteria and the data is overwritten. There is no deletion of
existing records.
● OC Settings: ProtCharP_ID, ProtCharE_ID

● DI Setting: Flag_Relais, Flag_pfad
● DIFF Settings: Flag_Model
● Voltage Protection Settings: Int_Name
● Frequency Protection Settings: Int_Name
● Earth Fault Detection: This setting must be unique on the device
● Tripping Settings Siemens and Common: Int_Name
3.6.18 Importing Diagram Pages and Templates
You can use this function to import diagram pages and templates from an other PSS SINCAL
network.
This function is started with the menu item File – Import – Diagram Pages and Templates.
The Import Diagrams dialog box opens.
First select a PSS SINCAL network in the File name field.
The diagram pages and format templates available in the selected network are displayed in the
selection list and can be selected by activating the checkbox.
After pressing the Finish button, all diagram pages and formats are transferred to the network.
October 2021 75
Basic Functions
3.6.19 Importing Workspaces
This function imports PSS SINCAL workspaces from a file. The PSS SINCAL workspace contains
settings for the network and the application:
● Options for program use

● Shortcut keys
● Report settings
● Tabular view
● Variable units
● Annotation and filter settings
● Evaluation
● Queries
● Default data for network elements
● Document options
● Calculation parameter
● Calculation methods
● Format view
● Page settings
● Background images
PSS SINCAL displays these settings only if they can be imported (e.g. the network types agree) and
if they are available (if they were selected when the workspace was exported).
To open the Import Workspace dialog box, click File – Import – Workspace.
This opens the Import Workspace dialog box where you can select the workspace to be imported
(one that you exported before).
In Choose settings, select the settings to be applied to the current network.
76 October 2021
Basic Functions
3.6.20 Exporting to CIM
This function exports PSS SINCAL networks in a CIM file.
CIM is integrated into PSS SINCAL on the basis of IEC 61970-301. This standard describes the
model for physical objects in EMS (Energy Management System) and their relationships to one
another.
The CIM data model was developed to exchange the universal network data for energy suppliers.
The model consists of a number of predefined objects organized into different packages.
Click File – Export – CIM in the menu to start exporting.
Export File
This section defines the format for the export.
The following CIM versions are available:
● CIM V10 (CIM Standard):

This profile is a universal implementation based on the minimum requirements for CIM data
exchange. It is based on the specification for "CPSM Minimum Data Requirements in Terms of
the IEC CIM Version 2.0" from Joe Evans and Kurt Hunter.
● CIM V12 (CIM for Planning):
exchange for planning data and, as such, is more appropriate than earlier versions for
exchanging network data.
Model Exchange Profile, Revision 1.0 Version 14 from May 10th, 2009". This was conceived for
universal data exchange between the members in ENTSO-E (European Network of
Transmission System Operators for Electricity).
October 2021 77
Basic Functions

Model Exchange Profile, Version 2.4.13 from October 8th, 2013". This was conceived for
universal data exchange of power flow, short circuit and dynamic data between the members in
ENTSO-E (European Network of Transmission System Operators for Electricity).
In the Boundary File you can enter the CIM file created by ENTSO-E for boundary areas, so
boundary nodes will not be exported.
Click Next > to open the Import Wizard’s next dialog box.
This dialog page sets extended parameters for export.
Object Identification selects the ID used to export the objects.
● SINCAL Generated Identifier:

To identify exported objects, a unique key is created by combining a prefix and PSS SINCAL
primary key for the database.
● Globally Unique Identifier (GUID):
To identify exported objects, a GUID is used. A GUID is a 16-byte number (128-bit) built by a
lot of information. A GUID provides unique identification worldwide. The GUID generated for
export is stored in PSS SINCAL’s database for all exported objects. This means that if you
decide to export something later, exactly the same GUID number will be used for this object.
● Universally Unique Identifier (UUID):
To identify exported objects, a UUID is used. A UUID is a 16-byte number (128-bit) built by a lot
of information. The UUID’s uniqueness is only guaranteed for the computer where it was
generated. The UUID generated for export is stored in PSS SINCAL’s database for all exported
objects. This means that if you decide to export something later, exactly the same UUID
number will be used for an object.
Name and Short Name defines, which CIM attributes are assigned to names and short names for
network elements in PSS SINCAL.
78 October 2021
Basic Functions
The Export Graphic selection field determines whether graphic data will also be exported. Generally
speaking, no graphic information is stored in the CIM file, but the CIM standard does let you save
graphic positions for all "Power System Resources". PSS SINCAL can both import and export this
information, making it easy to display the basic structure of the network diagram in the CIM data
model. Basically, this is restricted to graphic positions of nodes and the graphic contour of all the
branch elements. The following options are available:
● No graphic export:
Graphics are not exported.
● Automatic graphic export:
Depending on the CIM version and the profile selected, either simple or extended graphic
export is selected.
● Simple graphic export:
Only the positions and the contour for the graphics are exported.
● Extended graphic export:
Starting with CIM 14, the CIM has special graphic classes so the graphics have more details.
Export automatic generated names defines whether unique names are stored in the PSS SINCAL
CIM file. This option is mainly used when the CIM file needs to be analyzed in connection with the
PSS SINCAL network database.
Export Power Flow Results is only available if the CIM for ENTSO-E or CIM for Dynamics profile
has been selected. If this option is switched ON, PSS SINCAL calculates the power flow immediately
before export. PSS SINCAL exports the results of these power flow calculations as special "SV
objects" to the CIM file.
Split CIM file is only available if the CIM for ENTSO-E or CIM for Dynamics profile has been
selected. This option makes it possible to generate multiple files when you export. These files are:
● Topology file:
Contains the basic topology of the exported network.
● Equipment file:
Contains all network elements, element data and characteristic curves.
● State Variable file:
Contains the current results of the power flow calculations in the network.
● Dynamics File:
Contains the dynamic machine data and the controller data.
● Graphics file:
Contains all screen attributes, such as, for example, node positions and bends.
Create ZIP archive defines whether the created CIM files will be grouped in a ZIP archive.
When you export to CIM, PSS SINCAL displays an enhanced HTML log in the message box.
3.6.21 Exporting to PSS E
This function lets you export PSS SINCAL networks to the PSS E V32, V33 or V34 format. Click File
– Export – PSS E in the menu to start exporting.
October 2021 79
Basic Functions
Export File
This section selects the PSS E RAW file and the PSS E version for export.
Export Options
This section sets extended parameters for export.
In PSS SINCAL, node and network elements have two names (name and short name). In the Export
dialog box, select which of these names will be exported to the PSS E file.
Use short name as unique key allows you to convert a short name for a node to a "BUS Number"
for the PSS E RAW file. This is above all useful if the PSS SINCAL network was originally imported
from a RAW file. In this case, the BUS Number from the RAW file is stored in the node’s short name.
If this option is switched ON, PSS SINCAL checks all short names for uniqueness and generates a
BUS Number for all the nodes without a valid one, letting you generate a topologically correct RAW
file.
If the Lines marked with wave impedance option is activated, the impedance and capacitance of
all those lines are exported with special formulas which were modeled with wave impedance
equations. These are then marked in the "CKT" field of the RAW file with a "W".
From Version 34, the new node/breaker model is provided in the RAW file. This makes it possible to
export the substation data using the Model Export selection list.
● No conversion:
The Bus Branch section is exported, but the Node Breaker section is not.
● Bus Branch:
The Bus Branch section is exported and the Node Breaker section only in a simplified form. In
other words, all elements of the substation are exported directly to the Node Breaker section.
● Node Breaker:
The Bus Branch section is exported and the Node Breaker section in an expanded form. This
means that suitable elements must be generated in the Node Breaker section depending on
the switching state of the connections.
80 October 2021
Basic Functions
Note that PSS SINCAL exports only network element data to the PSS E RAW file. Network graphics
cannot be exported.
3.6.22 Exporting to NETOMAC
This function lets you export PSS SINCAL networks to a PSS NETOMAC input file. To start, click
File – Export – NETOMAC.
Export File
This section selects the PSS NETOMAC file for export.
Export Options
dialog box, select which of these names will be exported to the PSS NETOMAC file.
3.6.23 Exporting to UCTE ASCII Files
This function lets you export PSS SINCAL networks to a UCTE file Version 02 – 2007.05.01. Click
File – Export – UCTE ASCII File in the menu to start exporting.
October 2021 81
Basic Functions
Export File
This section selects the UCTE file for export.
Export Options
dialog box, select which of these names will be exported to the UCTE file.
The UCTE format requires specially structured node keys:
● 1st character: UCTE Country Code

● 2nd to 6th character: Short description of the geographic position
● 7th character: Voltage level
● 8th character (optional): Differentiates among busbars
As can be seen from the description above, the first character is for country coding. Since
PSS SINCAL does not have this information, the country code for Germany (D) is entered as the
default.
If you wish, you can use the PSS SINCAL short name as the node key. The option Use short name
as unique key can be switched ON in the Export dialog box. Remember that the short name has to
meet the semantic demands of the UCTE format (country code, uniqueness etc.).
3.6.24 Exporting to DGS Exchange Format
This function lets you export PSS SINCAL networks to a DIgSILENT PowerFactory DGS ASCII file
Version 4.0. To start, click File – Export – DGS Exchange Format.
Export File
This section selects the DGS data exchange format file for export.
Export Options
82 October 2021
Basic Functions
dialog box, select which of these names will be exported to the DGS file.
3.6.25 Exporting to DVG Exchange Format
This function lets you export PSS SINCAL networks to a DVG data exchange format file Version
0001 from 01.01.2000. To start, click File – Export – DVG Exchange Format.
Export File
This section selects the DVG data exchange format file for export.
Export Options
dialog box, select which of these names will be exported to the DVG file.
3.6.26 Exporting ASM-Identification
This function exports asynchronous machine data to a PSS NETOMAC input file for motor
identification.
Before you export, you have to select an asynchronous machine. File – Export – ASM-Identification
in the menu starts the exporting procedure.
October 2021 83
Basic Functions
Export File
This section selects the file for export.
Export Options
dialog box, select which of these names will be exported to the PSS NETOMAC file.
3.6.27 Exporting to CYMDIST
This function lets you export PSS SINCAL networks to the CYMDIST 5.0 and 7.x format. Click File
– Export – CYMDIST in the menu to start exporting.
84 October 2021
Basic Functions
Export File
This section can contain the path and the base name as well as the CYMDIST version for the export
files. Note that when you export, PSS SINCAL creates three files with file names made up of the
base names and the appropriate affix (Equipment, Network or Load). This creates the following
export files:
● Equipment File:
Describes the equipment (e.g. information on the cable configuration & shielding, substation
data, etc.).
● Network File:
Contains all the topological and electrical network data. This file also contains the graphical
positions of nodes in the diagram as well as the positions of network element terminals at
busbars.
● Load File:
Contains the consumer data.
Export Options
In PSS SINCAL, node and network elements have two kinds of names (name and short name) and
a unique ID. In the Export dialog box, select which of these options you want to use as the Unique
key in the CYMDIST files.
3.6.28 Exporting Network Archives
This function lets you archive entire PSS SINCAL networks. This makes it easy to save or archive
PSS SINCAL networks and save space at the same time, independent of the database involved. The
user can store all relevant network data to a single file, assuring access to network archives at any
time. This simplifies transmitting a network with all relevant data to other user (and, of course, to the
product support).
To start, click File – Export – Network Archive.
October 2021 85
Basic Functions
Export File
Export Options
The Save complete data directory option determines if the complete data directory (all files and
folders in the "_files" directory) of the network model is exported into the network archive. If this
option is deactivated, only the network-relevant directories "Symbols", "Models" and "Leika" are
exported in the network archive, if existing.
How network databases are stored depends on the database system being used. In Access and
SQLite with Format to store network database you can select whether the network database
should be saved as a data file or as a database-independent format (XML). Oracle and SQL Server
automatically store them in XML format.
All other files from the network directory (diagrams, the SIN file, and the data for results, dynamics
and reliability, ...) are also archived along with the network database.
If the network has standard databases or dynamic models, clicking Next > opens an additional dialog
box for extended export settings.
This dialog box selects any assigned standard databases and dynamic models that should also be
stored in the network archive.
3.6.29 Exporting Network States
This function exports PSS SINCAL network states (i.e. the switch positions, operating states and
element data of network elements) into a file, so you can save switching and operating states and
element data for a network and import these again later.
Click File – Export – Network State in the menu to start this function.
86 October 2021
Basic Functions
Export File
File Description
In this section, an additional Description for this file can be specified.
button. In this dialog box export options can be specified.
Export Options
This section defines the scope of the export.
● Full Topology:
PSS SINCAL exports the entire network topology.
October 2021 87
Basic Functions
● Reduced Topology:
PSS SINCAL only exports network elements that are either switched or out of service.
● Selection:
Only the network elements selected in the graphics editor are exported.
Choose settings you want to export selects the network states to be saved in the file.
● Switch State:
Describes whether the switches of a terminal are open or closed.
● Operating State:
Describes whether an element is out of service or not.
● Element Data:
Describes additional element attributes.
If Element data is switched ON, clicking Next > opens an additional dialog box for extended export
settings.
In the Element Attributes section, you can select the attributes of the network elements to be stored
in the XML file. So that the settings do not have to be defined again each time you export, they can
be stored in a Compilation File.
A description of the structure of the network state file can be found in chapter Network State/Network
Graphic/Scenario as XML File of the Database Description.
Create Scenario File
This function enables scenario files to be created, which can later be used for Scenario Data.
The creation of a scenario file is started via Insert – Scenario. The Network Browser is opened. The
Create Scenario File function is activated via the pop-up menu in the list of scenarios.
88 October 2021
Basic Functions
If no network element is selected, the cursor appears for selecting the elements using the polygon.
Otherwise the already selected elements are used for creating the file.
This has the same functionality as the Exporting Network States function.
If a scenario is selected in the list of scenarios in the Network Browser, the scenario file is
automatically assigned to this scenario.
3.6.30 Exporting Network Diagrams
This function exports graphics for nodes and network elements in the present network view, so you
can save an entire network diagram or parts of it and import these again later.
October 2021 89
Basic Functions
Click File – Export – Network Diagram in the menu to start this function.
The network diagram is stored in a special XML file. For detailed documentation on the structure of
this XML file, see the Network State/Network Graphics/Scenario as XML File chapter of the Database
Description.
Export File
This section selects the network diagram file for export.
File Description
90 October 2021
Basic Functions
Export Options
● All Objects:
PSS SINCAL exports the entire network diagram of the present view.
● Only Selected Objects:
PSS SINCAL exports only selected elements of the present view.
3.6.31 Exporting Protection Device Settings
This function exports protection device settings to a file. This makes it possible to save a wide variety
of variations of protection device setting values and to import them again later.
Click File – Export – Protection Settings in the menu to start the function.
Export File
This section specifies the file for exporting the protection device setting values.
File Description
October 2021 91
Basic Functions
Export Options
In this section you can define the scope of the export.
● All elements:
The data of all protection devices are exported.
● Only selected elements:
Only the data of the selected protection devices will be exported.
In the selection list you can select the types of protection device settings to be saved in the XML file.
The structure of the XML file for protection device setting values corresponds to that of the network
state file. A description of this structure can be found in the chapter Network State/Network
Graphic/Scenario as XML File of the Database Description.
3.6.32 Exporting Graphics
This function lets you export a PSS SINCAL network to several graphics formats for processing in
other programs.
Click File – Export – Graphic in the menu to start this function. This opens the Export Graphic
dialog box.
92 October 2021
Basic Functions
Export File
This section selects the graphics file for export. PSS SINCAL supports the following export formats:
● EMF files (Enhanced Windows Metafiles):

This is Windows’ standard graphics format and can be used to exchange vector and bitmap
graphics with all Windows applications.
● BMP files
● GIF files
● JPEG files
● PNG files
● TIF files
● XLS files
Only graphic positions of network elements are exported to an Excel workbook. This has been
designed so that PSS SINCAL can process the graphic data of the Excel import directly.
Export Options
Export only selected objects limits what you export to objects selected in the Graphics Editor.
Export background images controls whether background images are included when you export.
3.6.33 Exporting Graphics to Google Earth
This function exports the basic structure of a geographic PSS SINCAL network diagram to a KML
(Keyhole Markup Language) file. This KML file can then be imported into Google Earth or Microsoft
Virtual Earth. PSS SINCAL displays the exported graphics as an "overlay" of the actual world
projection.
File – Export – Graphic (Google Earth) starts this export function and opens the Export Graphic
(Google Earth) dialog box.
October 2021 93
Basic Functions
Enter the complete file name of the export file in the KML File field.
Options sets extended parameters for exporting.
Export only selected objects exports only network elements selected in the Graphics Editor.
Grouping in KML file switches grouping ON according to
● Network level or
● Network area
All exported network elements will be grouped into special folders according to their assignment in
the KML file.
Minimum size for export reduces data volume for exporting. When this option is switched ON,
PSS SINCAL only exports network elements that are greater than the preset minimum size.
Extended node visibility and Extended element visibility control the display in Google Earth. This
prescribes a minimum number of pixels that the respective object in Google Earth will need on the
screen. If, due to the projection settings, the size of the object is less than this number of pixels,
PSS SINCAL will not create the object. In Google Earth, this setting is known as LOD (Level of
Detail).
Fixing the Network Diagram in Google Earth
PSS SINCAL network diagrams use a Cartesian coordinate system with any eligible point of origin.
PSS SINCAL saves the positions of the network elements in meters from a point of origin. The
Google Earth projection system requires entries for latitude and longitude. This means you need to
convert the coordinates to this projection system.
To convert coordinates, you need to define three points, which position is known both in the
PSS SINCAL network diagram and the Google Earth projection system. This can be set in the
Positions tab. Select three nodes and define their geographic position.
94 October 2021
Basic Functions
To define the geographic position of the nodes, PSS SINCAL has two different entries that you can
select with the selection button:
● Latitude or longitude
● UTM coordinates
In the fields for Node 1, Node 2 and Node 3 select three nodes in the current graphic view. The
fields to the right define the geographic position. These settings convert the entire network diagram
into Google Earth coordinates.
Note: To assure these results are as precise as possible when they are converted, select nodes
that are far away from one another. Ideally select one at the top left, one at the bottom left and one
at the bottom right.
When you define Latitude and Longitude, the selection menus of the buttons are used to switch
ON the following functions.
Click Open in Google Maps to display the current map position in Google Maps.
Click Paste location to insert any latitude and longitude you want from the clipboard (e.g. a
geographical position determined using Google Maps).
Click Copy location to copy the current map position to the clipboard.
Comments on Export Scope
The export function is limited to a simplified illustration of the network. Only the following elements
are exported:
● Nodes and busbars

● Branch elements
October 2021 95
Basic Functions
PSS SINCAL exports nodes and busbars as position markers. PSS SINCAL provides the current
network diagram legend as information text for the position marker. The color of the position marker
is similar to the color of the node or busbar on the monitor.
PSS SINCAL exports branch elements as line objects. PSS SINCAL provides the current network
diagram legend as information text for the line object. The color of the line object is similar to the
color of the branch element on the monitor.
3.6.34 Exporting Workspaces
This function exports PSS SINCAL workspaces to a file. The PSS SINCAL workspace contains
several network settings:
● Options for program use

● Shortcut keys
● Report settings
● Tabular view
● Variable units
● Annotation and filter settings
● Evaluation
● Queries
● Default data for network elements
● Document options
● Calculation parameter
● Calculation methods
● Format view
● Page settings
● Background images
To open the dialog box for Export Workspace, click File – Export – Workspace.
96 October 2021
Basic Functions
Select workspace file shows the name of the export file and where it is stored.
Choose settings contains settings to be applied in the export file.
3.7 Options
Click Extras – Options to configure the program settings. Users can define operational settings as
needed for the work they are doing. Any settings made are stored for future sessions.
This dialog box allows the following settings:
Application Options:
● Common Settings for User Interface

● Common Settings for Screen Forms and Tabular View
● Common Settings for Change Mode
● Calculation
● Shortcut Keys
● User Menus
● Macros
● Directories
● Model Search Paths
● Background Maps
Database Options:
● Database Configuration
● Default Standard Database for Electrical Networks
● Default Standard Database for Pipe Networks
● Actual Standard Database for Electrical Networks
● Actual Standard Database for Pipe Networks
Document:
● Common Document Settings

● Calculation Settings
● General Selection Settings
● Settings for Route Selection
View:
● General View Settings

● View Settings for Selection
● View Settings for Lines and Routes
● Default Settings for Diagram View
● Default Settings for Nodes
● Default Settings for Node Elements
● Default Settings for Branch Elements
● Default Settings for Add Elements
● Default Settings for Routes and Substations
October 2021 97
Basic Functions
● Default Settings for Names
Diagram View:
● Default Settings for Nodes

● Default Settings for Node Elements
● Default Settings for Branch Elements
● Default Settings for Add Elements
License Options:
● License
3.7.1 Common Settings for User Interface
These options define the general appearance and behavior of the user interface and preliminary
settings for the program.
Window Layout
This section selects the layout for the program:
● Tabbed documents:
PSS SINCAL displays each document in a tab to simplify administering and toggling between
multiple documents and views.
● Multiple documents:
PSS SINCAL displays each document in its own window so the whole screen area can be used
to display the documents and views. Press Ctrl + Tab to switch between the windows.
98 October 2021
Basic Functions
User Interface
This section selects whether PSS SINCAL displays the user interface flat or shaded.
Environment Settings
Use this section to switch Animate environment tools ON and select the speed for the animation.
If the Adjust dialog font size option is activated, the font size of the dialogs can be changed in
stages. The size 0 would correspond to the standard size. This function is only available from
Windows Vista onwards.
Toggle tool windows defines how the program reacts when tool windows (message boxes, network
browser, properties windows, etc.) are switched ON and OFF. If this option is switched ON, tool
windows turn ON or OFF when you click the respective menu item or toolbar button. If this option is
switched OFF, then the program acts like Microsoft Visual studio. This means that when you click on
the respective menu item or toolbar button, PSS SINCAL displays the tool window. If this window is
already displayed, the program switches it ON.
Use themed backgrounds in dialog boxes controls the display for tabbed dialog boxes. When the
theme of the operating system is switched ON, tabbed dialog boxes normally have a special design
background. If you switch this option OFF, PSS SINCAL displays the dialog boxes with a simple gray
background.
The Use menu font in dialog boxes option enables the menu font to be used instead of the standard
dialog font. This function is only available from Windows Vista onwards.
When the Use ANSI icon collection option is activated, the display of symbols for network elements
in the user interface is switched from Standard to ANSI. I.e. the graphical network element symbols
are then shown in menus, toolbars, network browser and toolbox according to the ANSI Standard.
With this option it must be noted that the symbols are not changed before PSS SINCAL is restarted.
The High Dpi awareness option activates a special user interface display mode on screens with Dpi
values greater than 110, which draws all interface elements and graphics in the increased resolution.
If this option is not activated, the scaling of the user interface on high dpi screens is performed by
the operating system.
The Use advanced graphic rendering option is only available from Windows Vista onwards. This
option switches ON enhanced graphic rendering for the network diagram based on Direct2D API.
This assures you have fast, high-quality network graphics with smoothed edges and hardware
acceleration.
General Options
The following general options can be switched ON:
● Show all power flow calculation methods in the menu:

Enhances the display in the Calculate – Power Flow menu. This menu can then be used to
start the different power flow procedures (admittance matrix, current iteration and Newton
Raphson).
● Open start page on startup:
Causes the start page to open automatically after PSS SINCAL starts.
October 2021 99
Basic Functions
● Open and close start page automatically:

Causes the start page to open automatically when the network is closed. If a network is
opened, the start page closes automatically.
● Days to check for updates:
If this option is activated, it is possible to define the number of days after which a PSS SINCAL
update check is to be carried out.
● Edit dynamic models with PSS NETOMAC:
If this option is deactivated, the model is opened with the standard text editor. Otherwise an
attempt is made to edit this with PSS NETOMAC.
● Use stored dialog positions:
When this option is switched ON, the dialog boxes open at the position on the screen used the
last time.
Network Browser
The Network Browser section defines general settings for the Network Browser.
Choose information to be shown in second column selects the additional information to be

displayed in the network browser. The following selection values are available in PSS SINCAL:
● None
● Additional Name
● Element Type
● Network Level
● Network Group
● Substation
● Network Zone
● Database ID
Color Palette
In the Color Palette section, the default color palette can be defined for the View and for the
Diagram View. This will then be used for each color selection. It should be noted here that the
settings are only applied to all color selection buttons if the complete toolbar settings are reset.
Text Indicators
This option defines how network elements with empty data fields are displayed in the Graphics Editor,
i.e., it toggles placement markers ON or OFF.
Double-Click-Mode
This option defines what the program does when you double-click on network elements or
supplementary graphics objects in the Graphics Editor.
100 October 2021

Basic Functions
Mouse-Mode
This option sets the behavior of the mouse’s scroll wheel.
● Normal (Windows Standard):

Zooming in the Graphics Editor: CTRL key + mouse wheel
Scrolling: mouse wheel = vertically, SHIFT key + mouse wheel = horizontally
● Use mouse wheel to zoom in and out:
Zooming in the Graphics Editor: mouse wheel
Scrolling: CTRL key + mouse wheel = vertically, SHIFT key + mouse wheel = horizontally
When Enable hand tool on center mouse button has been switched ON, you can use the middle
mouse button to move the section that is displayed. When this mode is active, you see a special
cursor.
Show Input Data Dialogs
This section controls how network data are displayed when creating network elements.
When After graphical placement is switched ON, PSS SINCAL displays the dialog box (the screen
form with input data) immediately after the network element has been created.
When Before calculation is switched ON, PSS SINCAL does not display dialog boxes when network
elements are created. However, when calculations start, PSS SINCAL checks all network elements
for completeness and displays dialog boxes for any network elements with missing input data.
Element Data
This section controls behavior of the screen forms when new elements are added.
Insert standard data fills all fields in the screen form with standard data.
Inherit data fills the screen form with the same data used previously.
Automatically generate device names generates names for protection devices, i.e. when you
create a protection device (both distance and overcurrent protection devices), PSS SINCAL
automatically assigns every new device a specific name.
Create Network Elements
This section defines the behavior of creating network elements concerning network levels.
When Allow connect only to matching nodes/busbars is switched ON, PSS SINCAL checks the
network level when branch elements are created. This means the second node can only be placed
at network levels matching the network level of the first node.
When Allow connect to all nodes/busbars is activated, the network level check is switched OFF,
allowing you to create branch elements independent of network levels. You are only notified of input
errors by the calculations.
October 2021 101

Basic Functions
Node Connection Mode
If the Allow connect only to separate nodes/busbars option is activated, branch elements can
only be created between different nodes.
By activating the Allow connect to same node/busbar option it is possible to also create branch
elements at the same node. In other words, start and end terminal of the branch element are located
on the same node.
Copy Network Elements
This option sets whether, when network elements are copied, the name is copied with it or whether
PSS SINCAL automatically generates a new name.
Click Copy Settings to set additional copy options.
The Copy Settings dialog box defines how the attributes for layer, object type, network level and
network area are assigned when network elements are copied. PSS SINCAL offers the following
functions:
● Actual:
This setting applies the corresponding attribute from the selected preliminary setting.
● Search:
This setting initiates a search for the appropriate attribute. PSS SINCAL automatically creates a
new attribute if no appropriate one is found.
● New:
This setting means PSS SINCAL always generates a new attribute when copying.
102 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.7.2 Common Settings for Screen Forms and Tabular View
Use this dialog page to define operational settings for screen forms for input data and results.
PSS SINCAL keeps these settings for future sessions.
Settings for Screen Forms
When the Variable units option is switched ON, you can individually select the unit used when
entering numerical values. To select the desired unit, click on the unit displayed behind the input field
in the screen form. Click Reset if you want to change all the units you have modified in the screen
forms back to the standard units.
Extended edit controls defines how entries in numeric fields behave. When this option is switched
ON the input is formatted. PSS SINCAL checks the data immediately as it is typed in. When this
option is switched OFF, you can enter whatever you want and PSS SINCAL checks the data after
you leave the input field.
The Show data range and default values option toggles the display for limits and default values of
screen-forms input fields ON and OFF. A ToolTip window displays these when the mouse cursor
rests on the input field.
With the Show database attribute in tooltip option, an extended display of the tooltip for input fields
can be activated, which displays the name of the database attribute. This is especially useful when
creating automation solutions and accessing the database and its attributes directly.
The Ignore minimum and maximum values option toggles checking limits for input fields ON and
OFF. When it is ON you can enter values outside the prescribed minimum or maximum values.
If Show data depending on calculation methods is switched ON, PSS SINCAL displays only the
data set with Calculate – Methods. If it is switched OFF, PSS SINCAL displays all available data.
Note that only data selected under Calculate – Methods can be modified (see section on Presetting
Calculation Methods).
October 2021 103

Basic Functions
If the Optional data displayed in color mode option is ON, PSS SINCAL displays the data not
required for calculations in blue in the screen form.
The Show short names at topology fields option displays the short names of nodes and network
elements in the fields of the screen form. If this option is OFF, PSS SINCAL displays the long names
for these elements.
Show phasing switches the representation of the phasing in screen forms for network elements ON.
This means the connection types (L1, L2, L3, L12, L23, L31 and L123) are available directly in the
Basic Data tab.
Default Units
This globally configures default units for data screen forms and tabular view. Click Default Units to
open the Default Settings for Units dialog box.
This dialog box globally sets default units for all screen forms. If, for example, you want to have
lengths in miles and not in kilometers in all dialog boxes, this can be defined here.
To define a new default unit, first select the basic unit in the list on the left. Filter temporarily reduces
what PSS SINCAL displays in the list. Entering the filter immediately reduces the amount displayed
in the list of options below. The filter field also has a control button. Press this, and PSS SINCAL
displays a menu for entering enhanced display settings:
● All:
PSS SINCAL displays all the available units.
● Modified:
PSS SINCAL only displays units that have already been modified.
Then select the new default unit you want in the list on the right. These can be for all units in
PSS SINCAL. PSS SINCAL displays modified units in the list in bold.
Click OK to apply the settings in the dialog box.
To make it easier to reset all the user-specific settings, PSS SINCAL has a special function. In the
list on the left, click Reset All in the pop-up menu to call up this function.
104 October 2021

Basic Functions
Caution: Any settings made affect all PSS SINCAL screen forms and tabular view. They are valid
globally for the entire application.
A special feature is the dynamic unit conversion from Farad to Siemens and from Ohm to Per Unit.
● Farad [F] → Siemens [S]:

The frequency from the calculation settings is used for the conversion.
● Ohm [Ω] → Per Unit [pu]:
The base impedance Z is used for the conversion. The base impedance Z is calculated from
the rated voltage Vn of the network level and the reference power Sref from the calculation
settings.
Zbase = Vn2/Sref
Diagram View
The Decimal notation field shows how many decimal places numbers will have in the diagram view.
If Show edit signal dialog on dropping signal is switched ON, PSS SINCAL displays the Edit
Signal dialog box when Drag & Drop is used to insert a signal from the signal explorer into a diagram.
Tabular View
The Decimal notation selection field makes it possible to select between the predefined, the decimal
and the exponential display in the tables. If decimal display is selected, the number of decimal places
can also be specified.
The Record limit field enables you to define the number of records that are displayed per page for
external database tables.
October 2021 105

Basic Functions
3.7.3 Common Settings for Change Mode
This tab configures how the program behaves when there are changes in the lists for layers, object
types, network levels, network areas, substations and bays.
Combobox Change Behavior
This section defines how the program reacts to changes in the toolbar lists of the Graphics Editor.
● Not changeable:
When you make a change in the list of options, the selected objects and network elements in
the Graphics Editor are not modified. This means that the selection is only used as predefinition
for new objects and network elements.
● With confirmation:
When you make a change in the list of options PSS SINCAL displays a message box that lets
you apply the change to selected network elements and objects.
● Without confirmation:
PSS SINCAL immediately assigns changes in the list of options to network elements and
objects selected in the Graphics Editor without your confirmation.
Variants
This section sets parameters for whether PSS SINCAL displays special messages after changes in
global data structures.
Undo Configuration
This section switches the undo function ON or OFF. Enter the number of undo steps in the input field.
The memory required undoing increases with the number of steps that have been set.
106 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.7.4 Shortcut Keys
This lets you define keystroke combinations for different PSS SINCAL functions. For a list of
PSS SINCAL standard key combinations, see Shortcuts.
Define Individual Shortcut Keys
This section lists PSS SINCAL functions and the keystroke combinations that have been assigned.
Filter temporarily reduces what PSS SINCAL displays in the list. Entering the filter immediately
reduces the amount displayed in the list below.
Click a function in the list of shortcut keys to select it.
PSS SINCAL differentiates between normal and enhanced keystroke combinations. Select the kind
you want in Shortcut type. You can select between the following options:
● Normal:
This is a normal keystroke combination. To call up a desired function, simply press the
assigned shortcut key.
● Ctrl + K:
These are enhanced keystroke combinations. To call up one of these functions, hold down the
CTRL key, press K and then the key assigned to the function.
In the Shortcut key field, the desired keystroke combination can be defined.
To assign the keystroke combination to one function, click Assign. If the keystroke combination has
already been assigned to another function, PSS SINCAL will delete the old assignment. To delete a
current assignment, simply click Remove.
Shortcut currently used by shows whether and where the keystroke combination is already in use.
Click Reset All to return all keystroke combinations to standard settings.
October 2021 107

Basic Functions
3.7.5 User Menus
User menus can be used to integrate individual programs and tools into the PSS SINCAL user
interface. These user menus are found under Extras.
Define Individual User Menus
The list of individual user menus shows already defined user menus for all or each individual network
type. Simply click the menu you want in this list to select it.
You can modify the sequence of the user menus within the network type. Select an entry in the list
and while holding down the SHIFT key, press the cursor buttons to move it up or down.
Click Add to create a new user menu. PSS SINCAL inserts this under the menu selected in the list.
Click the Rename button to change the name of menu items directly in the list.
Delete removes the currently selected menu from the list.
To arrange the menus, you can click Separator to insert delimiters between menu items.
In the Command field, enter the program you want to start after clicking the menu item.
Directory defines the start directory for the selected program.
108 October 2021

Basic Functions
You can enter any additional parameters for the program in the Arguments field. These parameters
can have any environment variables you want. PSS SINCAL replaces the parameters with the new
contents before executing the program. In addition to predefined environment variables,
PSS SINCAL has the following environment variables.
Variable Function
SIN_NETTYPE 1 = Electricity
2 = Water
3 = Gas
4 = Heating/Cooling
SIN_NAME Current network name without extension (drive:\path\name)
SIN_FILE Current network name with extension (drive:\path\name.sin)
SIN_DB Current database name
Access: "drive:\path\name.mdb"
SQLite: "drive:\path\name.db"
Oracle: "User/Password/@HostName"
SQL Server Express: "drive:\path\name.mdf"
SQL Server: "DBName|HostName"
SIN_DBPWD Password for the Oracle database
SIN_DBSTD Local standard database name
SIN_DBSTDGLO Global standard database name
SIN_DBPROT Local protection database name
SIN_DBPROTGLO Global protection database name
SIN_SELECTION Selection file name (file contains all IDs of the selected elements)
SIN_TOOLS Tools directory
To improve program control, you can even switch ON a dialog box to enter parameters. This can be
switched on with a predefined control code in the arguments field.
Code Function
&[File:{file name}] Before the program executes, a dialog box opens where you can select a
file. When a file name is entered in the control code, this file name is
shown as default in the dialog box.
&[Inp:{parameter}] Before the program executes, a dialog box opens where you can enter a
parameter. When a parameter is entered in the control code, this
parameter is shown as default in the dialog box.
Examples of Individual User Menus
To start Microsoft Access with the network database currently open in PSS SINCAL:
● Command: MsAccess.exe
● Directory: .
● Arguments: "%SIN_DB%"
To open Notepad with a dialog box for entering parameters:
● Command: Notepad.exe
October 2021 109

Basic Functions
● Directory: .
● Arguments: &[File]
3.7.6 Macros
Here you can enter the settings for the Macro Recorder.
Settings for Macro Recording
This section is used to change the directory for the macros and select the script language.
Edit Macros
This section selects the program for editing macros. You can differentiate between the application
assigned by Windows and the Text Editor.
110 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.7.7 Directories
You can set where different standard PSS SINCAL directories are located individually.
Common Settings
The following directories can be preset:
● SINCAL Projects:
This input field sets the base directory for user-specific PSS SINCAL files. This directory
already has the sample PSS SINCAL networks. If the project directory changes, PSS SINCAL
automatically copies the entire contents of the standard PSS SINCAL project directory to the
new project folder after they are checked.
● Reports:
This input field sets the directory for user-specific reports.
● Symbols:
This input field sets the directory where user-specific symbol-definition files are found.
Advanced Settings
If Use individual directories for file input fields is switched ON, PSS SINCAL stores the individual
directory in the registry for the file selection dialog box. If this is switched OFF, PSS SINCAL only
stores one directory in the registry which is used by all the file selection dialog boxes.
Examples
This section is used to copy the example files from the install directory to the user folder. All files will
be overwritten. Click Copy to open the Select Folders dialog box.
October 2021 111

Basic Functions
This dialog box enables the selection of directories which can be copied to the user directory by
clicking the OK button.
3.7.8 Model Search Paths
This is used to set the search paths for the models of the dynamics.
Define Model Search Paths
The list displays currently defined search paths used later in the Model data screen form to determine
available models for the Search type.
Click Add to open a dialog box where you can select the search path. Paths in the list can be changed
afterwards by clicking Edit. Delete removes the search path currently selected from the list.
The sequence of search paths listed in the dialog box is the same as the search sequence for models.
Hold down the SHIFT key and press the cursor button to move the search path selected in the list of
options.
112 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.7.9 Background Maps
PSS SINCAL lets you display geographical data from the Internet in the background of PSS SINCAL
networks. These background maps can be inserted into networks with geographic coordinates.
Background maps are composed of tiles. These tiles are available in 18 predefined levels of detail
for the entire Earth. The lowest level of detail describes the whole planet with only one tile. For the
highest level of detail, approx. 70 billion tiles are necessary.
PSS SINCAL lets you use background maps from different map providers. The drop-down menu in
the first section of the background maps tab is used to select the map provider. Currently you can
select from:
● MapBox
● Cloudmade
● Bing
● Generic
● OpenStreetMap
MapBox
MapBox background maps are based on the map data from OpenStreetMap that is available cost-
free. The maps are provided as good quality road maps, satellite maps and hybrid maps.
Server URL contains the address of the MapBox Server. The tiles required for the display are
retrieved here. Enter the following address: https://api.mapbox.com/styles/v1/mapbox/.
An individual access key must be entered in the API key field. This is provided when registering at
MapBox (mapbox.com). A free access key with restrictions or a chargeable access key can be
selected as required.
October 2021 113

Basic Functions
The Style list is used to select how the map will be displayed. PSS SINCAL differentiates between:
● Street:
A schematic display portraying the streets, rivers, towns, etc. and their annotations.
● Areal:
A satellite picture of the earth without any annotations.
● Hybrid:
A satellite picture of the earth portraying the streets, rivers, towns, etc. and their annotations.
Press Test to check whether the indicated data are valid or a connection to the server is possible.
Cloudmade
Cloudmade background maps are based on the map data from OpenStreetMap, however, this
service is not free of charge. Access authorization must be purchased from Cloudmade in order to
use the background maps.
Server URL contains the address of the Cloudmade Server. The tiles required for the display are
retrieved here. Enter the following address: http://tile.cloudmade.com/.
The access key purchased from Cloudmade must be entered in the API key field.
Cloudmade offers a number of predefined styles for displaying background maps. Enter the code for
the desired style in the Style ID field. These IDs can be found at http://maps.cloudmade.com/.
Bing
Microsoft’s Bing Maps provides tile-based background maps in the form of normal maps, hybrid maps
and satellite maps. In this case, however, you can use both normal maps and satellite maps. The
quality of the satellite maps is very good, but the normal maps are not as detailed as the maps based
on OpenStreetMap data. The use of background maps at Bing is also chargeable. Use of these maps
requires registration at Bing.
Enter the connection data for the map provider in the Bing section. These data are needed to
download the tiles.
Server URL contains the address of the Bing Server. The default address is
http://dev.virtualearth.net/REST/v1/Imagery/Metadata/. The tiles required for the display are
retrieved here.
The Maps key identifies the user at the Bing Server. For more information, please see
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff428642.aspx.
The Style list is used to select how the map will be displayed. PSS SINCAL differentiates between:
● Street:
A schematic display portraying the streets, rivers, towns, etc. and their annotations.
● Areal:
A satellite picture of the earth without any annotations.
● Hybrid:
A satellite picture of the earth portraying the streets, rivers, towns, etc. and their annotations.
114 October 2021

Basic Functions
Generic
This is a generic map provider that is based on the standardized OpenStreetMap API. It allows the
use of basically any OpenStreetMap compliant service. This makes it possible for any provider or a
map provider available in a company to be used directly in PSS SINCAL.
URL contains the address of the map Server. The tiles required for the display are retrieved here.
The content of the URL can be configured as required with tokens to enable use with different map
providers. The following tokens are available:
Function Format code

Style ID &[STYLE] or &[ST] (optionally)
API key &[APIKEY] or &[KEY] (optionally)
Zoom factor &[Z]
X coordinate &[X]
Y coordinate &[Y]
The tokens for the Style ID and API key are optional because these can also be entered directly in
the link. The other fields (X, Y, Z) are automatically filled if the background map tool loads the
particular tiles. The upper/lower case of the tokens has no significance.
The API key field allows an access key to be stored if the map provider used requires a special
authentication.
The Style ID field enables a configuration string to be stored for the display form of the background
maps.
OpenStreetMap
The map provider OpenStreepMap makes it possible to use all types of OpenStreetMap.
The link to the particular OpenStreetMap provider is entered in the Server URL field.
Some OpenStreetMap providers offer several styles, which can be specified as a string in the Style
field.
Note: This field must be filled! If the map provided only has one style, the string can simply be
specified as "default".
Tiles Cache
Enter the Path where the downloaded tiles are stored in the Tiles Cache section.
Press Clear Cache to display the following dialog box.
October 2021 115

Basic Functions
This dialog box is used to clear the tile cache of the map provider you have selected (Cloudmade,
Bing).
You can switch ON All Tiles to delete all the tiles of the map provider. Selecting Tiles from active
Network only deletes tiles used in the views that are open.
3.7.10 Database Configuration
This is used to define common settings for in PSS SINCAL supported database systems.
Default Database System
This section presets the desired database system for new networks that are created. You can select
from the following systems:
● SQLite
● Microsoft Access
● SQL Server
● SQL Server Express
● Oracle
The prerequisite for using the respective database systems is that the proper client software has
been installed on the computer (see chapter System Requirements).
116 October 2021

Basic Functions
Database system can be selected optionally switches ON the possibility of simultaneously using
different database systems.
● If this option is not switched ON, the standard database system is always used to select and
create new PSS SINCAL databases.
● If this option is switched ON, the database system can be selected directly at the respective
database operation.
SQLite Configuration
This section is used to configure the SQLite database system.
Standard document behavior lets the user save documents in a typical Windows method. This
means that when you close a file, you can save any changes in the network, throw the changes out
or abort the procedure. If the changes are thrown out, PSS SINCAL automatically restores the last
version saved.
Compact database when document is closed automatically compresses the database after it has
been closed. The Compact database after simulation option carries out the automatic compacting
of the database after every calculation. Activating this option is useful when carrying out several
calculations in the network with a large volume of results occurring in succession. Both options are
designed to ensure that optimum power can be achieved while keeping the required memory to a
minimum.
Microsoft Access Configuration
This section is used to configure the Microsoft Access database system.
Standard document behavior lets the user save documents in a typical Windows method. This
means that when you close a file, you can save any changes in the network, throw the changes out
or abort the procedure. If the changes are thrown out, PSS SINCAL automatically restores the last
version saved.
Compress database when document is closed automatically compresses the database after it
has been closed for the indicated number of times. It assures optimal efficiency and minimizes the
storage capacity required. If this option is switched ON and there is a "0", the database will be
compressed after each calculation procedure.
SQL Server Configuration
Enter the parameters for the database access under this section.
October 2021 117

Basic Functions
The Service name, User name and Password parameters are used to manage and configure
PSS SINCAL networks in the SQL Server system. This means any user has to be authorized to
create additional databases and configure them.
The Save password option lets you save the set password permanently so it does not have to be
entered again when creating new networks.
Click Test to check the SQL Server configuration. This creates a connection to the PSS SINCAL
configuration user that has been set. PSS SINCAL performs various initializing and test functions. If
there are any errors, PSS SINCAL displays these in a special information dialog box.
Click Work User to display a dialog box where you can enter the user name and the password for
the SQL Server’s default user. This is the user connecting to the SQL Server and for whom the
databases are available at the server. If no default user is configured, the SQL Server database
displays a sign-up dialog box when it opens where you have to enter the user data.
Oracle Configuration
Enter the parameters for the database access under this section.
The Service name, User name and Password parameters are used to manage and configure
PSS SINCAL networks in the Oracle system. This means any user has to be authorized to create
additional uses and configure them.
The Save password option lets you save the set password permanently so it does not have to be
entered again when creating new networks.
Click Test to check the ORACLE configuration. This creates a connection to the PSS SINCAL
configuration user that has been set. PSS SINCAL performs various initializing and test functions. If
there are any errors, PSS SINCAL displays these in a special information dialog box.
With the Tablespace button, additional preliminary settings for PSS SINCAL networks in the Oracle
database system can be defined. This dialog box configures the data area where the ORACLE
RDBMS networks are stored.
118 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.7.11 Default Standard Database for Electrical Networks
PSS SINCAL offers the possibility of using libraries for different kinds of network equipment, e.g.
cables, transformers or protection devices. In PSS SINCAL, these are designated as standard
databases and are real relational databases with type-specific data for the equipment.
The Electrical Networks tab contains the path for different kinds of default database files for
electrical networks.
Default standard databases are used to globally define preliminary settings. PSS SINCAL
automatically assigns these when new networks are created. Databases assigned in this way can,
however, also be customized for individual networks (as needed) with the Actual Standard Database
dialog page.
The paths can also contain environment variables.
Standard Databases
Enter the paths of the standard databases in this section. The standard databases contain different
types of lines, motors, transformers, etc.
Protection Databases
Enter the paths of the protection databases in this section. These contain the data for predefined OC
protection devices.
Models
Enter the paths of the models in this section.
Click Test to check whether the selected databases are valid. PSS SINCAL checks the type and the
version of the standard databases.
October 2021 119

Basic Functions
3.7.12 Default Standard Database for Pipe Networks
PSS SINCAL offers the possibility of using libraries for different kinds of network equipment, such as
lines. In PSS SINCAL, these are designated as standard databases and are real relational databases
with type-specific data for the equipment.
The Pipe Networks tab contains the path of different kinds of default database files for pipe
networks.
Default standard databases are used to globally define preliminary settings. PSS SINCAL
automatically assigns these when new networks are created. Databases assigned in this way can,
however, also be customized for individual networks (as needed) with the Actual Standard Database
dialog page.
The paths can also contain environment variables.
Standard Database
Enter the paths of the standard databases in the standard databases fields. The standard databases
contain different types of pipes.
3.7.13 Actual Standard Database for Electrical Networks
PSS SINCAL offers the possibility of using libraries for different kinds of network equipment, e.g.
cables, transformers or protection devices. In PSS SINCAL, these are designated as standard
databases and are real relational databases with type-specific data for the equipment.
The Electrical Networks tab has the path for the current standard databases in an electrical network.
120 October 2021

Basic Functions
Standard Databases
This section contains the paths of the standard databases used for the current network. Standard
global and local databases are used when entering data in Screen Forms and contain different types
of lines, motors, transformers, etc.
Protection Databases
This section contains the paths of the protection databases used for the current network. The global
and local protection databases contain the data needed for creating Protection Databases.
Models
A local and a global directory for the Models can be entered in this section.
With all global settings, you can select from the following options:
● Default:
PSS SINCAL automatically uses the global setting from the Default Standard Database for
Electrical Networks tab.
● Manual:
Entries for databases or model directories can be made manually.
In the Local input fields, local databases and the model directory can be assigned.
Use relative path to link local databases and local models to the document switches ON relative
storage for local standard databases and models. This means the database and the model are stored
only with the relative path to the network (parallel or in a subdirectory). This makes it easier to forward
networks with local standard databases and models.
October 2021 121

Basic Functions
Note: Only data from local standard databases can be edited with the Data – Standard Types
menu. Data from global standard databases cannot be modified.
For a precise description of the standard types, see Standard Types in Screen Forms.
3.7.14 Actual Standard Database for Pipe Networks
PSS SINCAL offers the possibility of using libraries for different kinds of network equipment, such as
lines. In PSS SINCAL, these are designated as standard databases and are real relational databases
with type-specific data for the equipment.
The Pipe Networks tab has the path for the current standard databases in a pipe network.
Standard Databases
This section contains the paths of the standard databases used for the current network. Standard
global and local databases are used when entering data in Screen Forms and contain different types
of pipe.
Global lets you select from the following entries:
● Default:
PSS SINCAL automatically uses the global standard database from the Default Standard
Database for Pipe Networks tab.
● Manual:
You can replace the global standard database with your own.
In the Local input field, the local standard database can be assigned.
122 October 2021

Basic Functions
Use relative path to link local databases to the document switches ON relative storage for local
standard databases. This means the database is stored only with the relative path to the network
(parallel or in a subdirectory). This makes it easier to forward networks with local standard databases.
Note: Only data from local standard databases can be edited with the Data – Standard Types
menu. Data from global standard databases cannot be modified.
For a precise description of the standard types, see Standard Types in Screen Forms.
3.7.15 Common Document Settings
Use this dialog page to define common document settings.
Currency
The Symbol field defines the currency sign used for all attributes that refer to amounts of money.
Feeder Creation
If Create feeder from database while opening the document is switched ON, PSS SINCAL loads
any feeders already in the database when you open a network. For a precise description of how
feeders are saved, see the section on Build Feeder in the chapter on Overview Feeders.
October 2021 123

Basic Functions
Tooltip Settings
This area is used to configure the display of tooltips in the network graphics. The settings made here
apply to the entire document. The tooltips, however, are activated/deactivated individually for each
view.
The entire displayed content in the tooltip can be set individually. Any Object type can be selected
for this. The annotation setting of this object type is then used to generate the appropriate tooltip
texts for network elements. It is also possible to select whether
● Input data
● Results
● Input data and results
are displayed in the tooltip. The results that are currently shown in the graphics editor are always
used.
Default Units for Annotation
This globally configures default units for annotations in network diagrams. Click Default Units to
open the Default Settings for Units dialog box.
This dialog box globally sets default units for all annotations settings in the network diagram. If, for
example, you want to have lengths in miles and not in kilometers for all network elements, this can
be defined here.
To define a new default unit, first select the basic unit in the list on the left. Filter temporarily reduces
in the list of options below. The filter field also has a control button. Press this, and PSS SINCAL
displays a menu for entering enhanced display settings:
● All:
PSS SINCAL displays all the available units.
● Modified:
PSS SINCAL only displays units that have already been modified.
Then select the new default unit you want in the list on the right. These can be for all units in
PSS SINCAL. PSS SINCAL displays modified units in the list in bold.
124 October 2021

Basic Functions
Click OK to apply the settings in the dialog box.
To make it easier to reset all the user-specific settings, PSS SINCAL has a special function. In the
list on the left, click Reset All in the pop-up menu to call up this function.
In addition to default units, automatic unit conversion in the network diagram can also be switched
ON. Turn Switch unit ON and enter the desired limit for automatic unit conversion in the input field.
Caution: Any settings made here are stored in the current network. They are valid for all
annotations settings in the network diagram.
Reset Settings of Document
This section enables the document settings to be reset to default values. Click Reset to open the
Reset Settings of Document dialog box.
This dialog box enables the settings of the activated options to be reset to the default settings by
clicking the OK button.
Manage Workspace
This section sets you import PSS SINCAL workspaces from a file or export them to a file. Click
Import to open the Import Workspace dialog box. Click Export to open the Export Workspace dialog
box.
3.7.16 Calculation Settings
Use this dialog page to define common settings for calculations. These settings are assigned in the
current document and can therefore be set individually as required.
October 2021 125

Basic Functions
Parallel Processing
The parallel calculation in PSS SINCAL can be defined in the Max. par. processes input field. This
defines the maximum number of calculation processes that can be started at the same time.
PSS SINCAL sets the actual number of processes itself using selected calculation processes and
the current network configuration.
The Max. parallel threads input field is used to control the internal parallel processing in the
calculation methods. If a value of "-1" is entered here, PSS SINCAL automatically determines the
maximum possible number of parallel threads depending on the hardware configuration.
The new Max. MKL Threads entry field now enables the use of the Intel Math Kernel Library to be
controlled. This makes it possible to specify the maximum number of threads for parallel processing.
If 0 is set, the use of MKL is completely deactivated. If a value of "-1" is entered here, PSS SINCAL
automatically determines the maximum possible number of parallel threads according to the
hardware configuration.
Logging
Log File Level defines the amount of output data from the calculation logging.
● None:
No log information is generated.
● Low:
Only minimal information is written into the log file.
● Standard:
The amount of information in the log file is selected so that the course of the simulation can be
reconstructed and potential problems can be analyzed.
● Advanced:
Very comprehensive information is provided in the log file. This information is mainly useful in
the reliability calculations or the hosting capacity, since each individual power flow is
documented in detail.
126 October 2021

Basic Functions
An detailed description of the logging function is provided in the chapter Calculation Log in Result
View.
Calculation Messages
This section enables the Limit for equal messages, i.e. the maximum number of the same
messages, and Suppress following messages to be defined. The messages to be suppressed are
specified via the message numbers separated by comma. It is also possible to enter ranges (e.g.
"1201, 1203, 1500 – 1600").
The Show interactive calculation dialog for convergence problems option causes the interactive
calculation dialog box to be opened if there are any convergence problems in the power flow. This
makes it possible to analyze in detail the location of convergence problems and to carry out additional
power flow iterations if necessary. This dialog box is described in greater detail in the chapter
Convergence Debug in the Power Flow Manual.
Advanced
If the Save external results in variant specific files option is activated, control and result databases
for the procedures generating external results are saved individually for each variant.
3.7.17 General Selection Settings
This tab contains the general settings for selections in the network currently open.
General Options for Selection
Synchronize selection in all views simplifies how you work with multiple Views. When this option
is switched ON, PSS SINCAL takes the selection in the current view for all open views.
October 2021 127

Basic Functions
Exclude for Selection
The list of objects to be excluded contains all the network elements and supplementary graphics
objects. Simply click the options button to select the elements in the list you no longer want to select
with the mouse when you work on the network.
This function is useful mainly in large geographic networks. Here the network elements and
supplementary graphics objects are often very close together. This prevents you from inadvertently
selecting specific objects.
3.7.18 Settings for Route Selection
Use this dialog page to make preliminary settings used when selecting route sections. Note that
PSS SINCAL displays this dialog page only in open networks.
Global Parameters for Route Selection
Stop on opened switches terminates route selection at open switches.
Stop on elements out of service terminates route selection at elements that are out of service.
Stop on primary substation terminates route selection at primary substations.
Add nodes and busbars to selection defines whether node and busbars are also selected.
Limiting Elements
This function lets you select the network elements that limit route selection. When you select Two-
Winding Transformer, for example, route selection will stop when PSS SINCAL finds this network
element.
128 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.7.19 General View Settings
For general view settings, see the section on View in the chapter on Format View.
3.7.20 View Settings for Selection
For view settings for selection, see the section on Selection in the chapter on Format View.
3.7.21 View Settings for Lines and Routes
For view settings for lines and routes, see the section on Lines and Routes in the chapter on Format
View.
3.7.22 Default Settings for Diagram View
Use this dialog page to set what characteristics are assigned to new diagrams. This tab is only
available if a diagram view is active.
In this section, the standard font is selected for the diagrams (title and texts).
3.7.23 Default Settings for Nodes
Use this dialog page to set what characteristics are assigned to new nodes.
October 2021 129

Basic Functions
Line and Area
This section defines the basic attributes (line width, line type, line color, etc.) for the new node. You
can select the type or the size of the node symbol.
Text
This section defines the Font, the Text alignment and the Distance to the new node text.
Switching OFF Individual Text stops PSS SINCAL from assigning individual text attributes when
new nodes are created and a shared "global" text is used for these nodes. This is particularly useful
in large networks, since it greatly reduces the amount of memory required. Note that neither the
attributes of the text nor the text position are stored when this option has been switched OFF.
3.7.24 Default Settings for Node Elements
Use this dialog page to set what characteristics are assigned to new node elements.
130 October 2021

Basic Functions
Line and Area
This section presets standard attributes for new node elements (see the section on Formatting
Elements).
Text
This section makes the settings for node element text. You can set the Font, Text alignment and
Distance of the new text from the node element.
new node elements are created and a shared "global" text is used for these node elements. This is
particularly useful in large networks, since it greatly reduces the amount of memory required. Please
note that neither the attributes of the text nor the text position are stored when this option has been
switched OFF.
Text alignment aligns the text horizontally, vertically or in the direction of the element. Automatic
text alignment can also be turned OFF.
3.7.25 Default Settings for Branch Elements
Use this dialog page to set what characteristics are assigned to new branch elements.
October 2021 131

Basic Functions
Line and Area
This section presets standard attributes for new branch elements (see the section on Formatting
Elements).
Text
This section makes the settings for branch element text. You can set the Font, Text alignment and
Distance for the new branch element text.
new branch elements are created and a shared "global" text is used for these branch elements. This
is particularly useful in large networks, since it greatly reduces the amount of memory required.
Please note that neither the attributes of the text nor the text position are stored when this option has
been switched OFF.
Text Alignment aligns the text horizontally, vertically or in the direction of the element. Automatic
text alignment can also be turned OFF.
3.7.26 Default Settings for Add Elements
Use this dialog page to define what characteristics are assigned to new Add Elements.
132 October 2021

Basic Functions
Line and Area
This section presets standard attributes for new add elements (for example protection devices, fault
observations, etc.).
Text
This section defines the Font and the Distance to the new attachments.
Breaker
In the Breaker section, the default symbol as well as the graphic appearance of the symbols can be
set. Depending on the selected breaker type, the corresponding symbol is displayed, as long as it
has not been changed by the user (in the Properties Window under Symbol – Default). For the
breaker type Switch, the selected symbol with the selected appearance is displayed. For the switch
types Circuit breaker, Disconnector and Earthing disconnector, the corresponding symbols are
displayed in the selected form (simplified or extended).
3.7.27 Default Settings for Routes and Substations
Use this dialog page to define what characteristics are assigned to new Routes and Substations.
October 2021 133

Basic Functions
Routes
This section presets standard attributes for new routes.
Line width and Line style define how new routes appear on the screen. Line color attribute
specifies the color used to draw routes; Node color specifies the color for the ends of the routes
(route nodes).
Substations
This section presets standard attributes for new substations.
Line width, Line color and Background color define how new substations appear on the screen.
The Font and the Distance of the new substation texts can also be defined here.
new substations are created and a shared "global" text is used for these substations. This is
particularly useful in large networks, since it greatly reduces the amount of memory required. Note
that neither the attributes of the text nor the text position are stored when this option has been
switched OFF.
3.7.28 Default Settings for Names
Use this dialog page to configure automatic name generation for new network elements. When you
create new network elements, PSS SINCAL uses the name you select here and adds the serial
number for the network element (the ID from the database).
134 October 2021

Basic Functions
Default Names for New Elements
In the list of options, PSS SINCAL lists all the network elements with their default names.
Click Edit to change the default name of the selected network element.
3.7.29 License
This dialog page contains information on the license in use and lets you configure network licenses.
October 2021 135

Basic Functions
License Information
This section shows the type and expiration date of the license. To obtain details on the license, the
License Info button is available. This opens a window detailing all available program modules and
use limitations.
Network License
Network licenses supported by PSS SINCAL let you implement the program on any computer without
individual licensing. PSS SINCAL groups the available PSS SINCAL modules in a special license
group and prepares them for use.
Network license sets the desired license group for the respective module (electricity, water, gas or
heating/cooling). Click Connect to activate the license group. This must be done before editing
networks.
When you start PSS SINCAL, Automatic reconnect on startup automatically accesses the preset
license groups.
Network licenses have a special function letting you temporarily transmit use authorization from the
license server to the local computer. Press Check Out to transfer the current license groups to the
local computer for the desired time period (0 to 20 days). This allows you to use PSS SINCAL without
being connected to the license server. In the License Information section, you can check how long
the license is actually available on the client computer.
When you press Check In or the Days specified run out, the license will be returned to the license
server. This button is only available if the user is connected to the license server and the license has
been previously transferred to the local computer.
Note the Following:
● You need a network license to select license groups of modules (contact the product support
for more information).
● You have to select the license group of modules before opening a network.
● Checking out licenses is limited for a time period. Once this period is over, checked-out
licenses automatically return to the license server.
● A special case is when you enter 0 days as the Check Out period. In this case the checked-out
license automatically returns to the license server when PSS SINCAL is shut down (assuming
that a connection to the license server is possible at this time).
● Generally speaking, the system administrator at the license server can prevent licenses from
being checked out. This system administrator at the license server can also configure the
program to limit the maximum check out period to less than 20 days.
3.8 Administration
File – Administration calls up several administrative functions of PSS SINCAL:
● Create New Database

● Manage Databases
● Delete Results
136 October 2021

Basic Functions
Note that, depending on what type of network is open, this menu displays different administrative
functions.
3.8.1 Create New Database
File – Administration – Create New Database lets you create a standard database or protection
database.
Via the selection field Database type, you can choose between the following entries:
● Standard Database Electrical Networks

● Standard Database Pipe Networks
● Protection Database
The path and name of the new database are defined in the New database field. Select the database
name by entering this directly in the input field or clicking … to open the browser. If Database system
can be selected optionally has been switched ON in the Options dialog box, the database system
can be selected from a list of options.
The Fill database selection list makes it possible to select whether the new standard or protection
database is filled with the default data or with the data from the manually specified database. This
process can take a long time, depending on the data volume to be transferred.
As a default, the database is not assigned to any network. To assign database to an open network
as a local or global standard or protection database, switch Link new database to actual network
ON and select a database. Alternatively, use the Options dialog box.
October 2021 137

Basic Functions
3.8.2 Manage Databases
File – Administration – Manage Databases in the menu opens the dialog box for managing the
PSS SINCAL databases.
The first step in managing databases is to select the database system.
To select the Oracle database system and SQL server, you need to enter both the PSS SINCAL
Admin user and the Instance.
Click Next > to switch ON the next dialog box for the selected database system.
Microsoft Access
This dialog box selects and updates PSS SINCAL databases.
Databases lists the selected PSS SINCAL databases and any supplementary information (e.g. type
and version).
Add opens a file selection dialog box where you can select the PSS SINCAL database to be
managed. Remove removes the selected database from the dialog box.
138 October 2021

Basic Functions
Click Update to update all the databases selected in the list to the current database version.
PSS SINCAL displays the results of this procedure for each database in the State column.
SQLite
SQLite databases are managed in the same way as Microsoft Access.
SQL Server
This dialog box updates and deletes PSS SINCAL databases.
Databases lists all PSS SINCAL databases stored at the SQL Server and any supplementary
information (e.g. type and version).
Click Delete to permanently remove all the databases selected in the list. Note that this procedure
cannot be reversed.
Click Permissions to display a dialog box for setting access rights for the database.
Grant database permissions to contains the names of the users (separated by ";") who have been
granted access rights to the selected database.
If the Grant database permissions to guests option is switched ON, access is possible for all users.
October 2021 139

Basic Functions
SQL Server Express
SQL Server Express databases are managed in the same way as Microsoft Access.
Oracle
This dialog box is used to update and delete PSS SINCAL databases.
Databases lists all PSS SINCAL databases stored at the Oracle server and any supplementary
information (e.g. type and version).
Click Delete to permanently remove all the databases selected in the list. Note that this procedure
cannot be reversed.
Since Oracle manages PSS SINCAL databases as users, you need to enter a Password for each
database managed. The password is always defined only for the PSS SINCAL database selected.
3.8.3 Delete Results
After clicking File – Administration – Delete results the following message box is displayed.
The following data can be deleted.
● Internal Results:
All calculation results are deleted from the database. In addition, all calculation logs are
deleted.
● External Results:
All external result databases are deleted.
● Signal Results:
All signals are deleted.
3.9 Macros
PSS SINCAL lets you automate work sequences so that different procedures in PSS SINCAL are
done automatically with the help of macros.
140 October 2021

Basic Functions
This automation macro is a small program that invokes different PSS SINCAL automation functions.
The PSS SINCAL Macro Recorder can create programs like this automatically. PSS SINCAL
supports the languages Visual Basic and Python. Use the Options dialog box for the preliminary
setting. Alternatively, you can create it manually. In this case, any programming language can be
used that can support COM functions.
For a precise description of the available automation functions, see the Automation Manual.
3.9.1 Macro Explorer
The Macro Explorer can both edit and execute macros. Click Extras – Macro – Macros in the menu
to open the dialog box.
The list of options contains all the files in the selected directory. Filter temporarily reduces what
PSS SINCAL displays in the list. If you enter a filter, PSS SINCAL immediately reduces the amount
displayed in list of options.
The filter field also has a control button. Press this, and PSS SINCAL displays a menu for entering
enhanced display settings:
● All:
Displays all files in the selected directory.
● VBScript:
Displays only VBScript files.
● Python:
Displays only Python files.
Edit opens the selected file either with the Text Editor or the assigned application – depending on
the setting in the Options dialog box – that it can be edited.
Delete deletes the file selected in the list.
With the Directory button you can change the current macro directory.
The Description section has the macro’s comment lines at the beginning of the file.
October 2021 141

Basic Functions
Execute opens the selected file. If the file is a macro, PSS SINCAL runs the macro. This closes the
Macro Explorer. These functions can also be switched ON with the macro’s pop-up menu.
3.9.2 Macro Output
The macro output window enables interaction by the user during automation processes. In this way,
user entries can be entered directly in the PSS SINCAL user interface during an automation process
and the states or results can be visualized if required.
The macro output window is opened via View – Other Windows – Macro Output.
The content of the automation window is completely defined with the automation functions (see the
Automation Manual, chapter Macro Output Object).
3.9.3 Stop Active Macro
Menu item Extras – Macro – Stop Active Macro enables interactive macros to respond if aborted
by the user (see the Automation Manual, chapter Abort – Setting and Querying the Abort Status).
3.9.4 Macro Recorder
To document the steps, PSS SINCAL has a Macro Recorder that records what you do and creates
a small program with the corresponding automation functions.
Switch this ON with Extras – Macro – Start Recording. PSS SINCAL logs functions called up. Click
Stop Recording in the menu to generate a script file after you enter a file name.
The Macro Recorder supports the following functions:
● Open and close networks

● Start calculations
● Display input data or results
● Apply results
142 October 2021

Basic Functions
● Update window
● Selections (Select by type, Select by function, interactive, …)
● Interaction with network element (branches, …)
● Print networks (complete, print area, …)
● Print reports
● Execute network planning tools
● Change variants
● Open and close diagram view
● Print and export diagrams
3.10 Printing
To open the Print dialog box, click File – Print – Print.
This window displays the printing properties. If they are satisfactory, click OK.
3.10.1 Select Print Area
Before a part of a network can be printed, the area must be selected. Click File – Print – Select
Print Area to define the area to be printed in the network diagram.
You see a modified cursor.
Make a rectangle to define a new print area.
If you also press the SHIFT key at the same time, you can adapt the print area according to the
Printer settings. This means PSS SINCAL will automatically enlarge or reduce the area to match the
set paper format, taking advantage of the paper size. This function works only when the print option
Adjust to one page is turned ON.
The print area can be moved at any time with drag & drop by clicking on the border. When print
option Adjust to one page is turned ON, the area can be enlarged or reduced using modify markers.
Alternatively, it can be assigned customized proportions.
October 2021 143

Basic Functions
When Print true to scale is selected in the Page Setup dialog box, only the point of origin of the print
area can be defined. The scale and paper format automatically determine the width and height of the
area.
If Select Print Area is ON, PSS SINCAL prints only the area defined within the border.
If Select Print Area is OFF, PSS SINCAL prints the entire network.
3.10.2 Printing Frames
In the Graphics Editor, PSS SINCAL lets you define a frame and then print its contents. Simply click
File – Print – Print Frames.
Use this dialog box to display all frames in the network. Click the option buttons in the list to activate
more than one frame and print these later with Print. You can even rename the borders directly in
the list. Simply click entry you want in the list and click again, or press F2 or use the pop-up menu.
Zoom, Select and the setting Visible on Print affect only frames selected in the list.
Click Zoom in the Graphics Editor to zoom into the rectangle around the selected frame.
Select all and Deselect all switch all borders for the list of options ON or OFF.
Click Select to select all elements and objects in the frame in the Graphics Editor.
The Visible on Print option defines whether you can see the frame you have selected when it is
printed.
3.11 Setup
The Page Setup dialog box in the File menu sets most page properties (size of worksheet, scale,
header ...). This controls both screen and printer settings. This type of dialog box is also available in
diagrams.
This dialog box has the following tabs:
● Page Size
144 October 2021

Basic Functions
● Scale
● Print Setup
● Margins
● Header/Footer
For printer configuration, click Printer to open the Windows dialog box.
3.11.1 Page Size
This tab defines the size or alignment (portrait or landscape). These settings influence only the
screen display.
Select the desired paper format with Page Size. PSS SINCAL allows three types of sizes:
● Standard size
● Custom page size
On the right side of the dialog box there is a preview of the size selected for the drawing. The physical
size of the page is indicated below depending on what has been set in the Scale tab.
In Adjust Page Size, click the Adjust button to calculate the paper format using the positioned
elements in the network. Note that this function can also change the zero-coordinate placement (in
the Scale tab).
Standard Size
This option uses a predefined type of paper and a predefined size for the dimensions. Select a paper
type from the options.
The Page Orientation toggles between portrait and landscape modes.
October 2021 145

Basic Functions
Custom Page Size
This option lets the user customize the size of the worksheet. Input fields for Width and Height define
the size and measurement units (mm, cm, inch, pt).
When the worksheet is scaled, PSS SINCAL calculates the size, using the scale from the screen and
diagram scale, and displays the sheet with the appropriate units.
Free Page Size
This option creates the diagram without assigning a page format.
3.11.2 Scale
The Scale tab defines whether the network display on the screen is scaled, predefined or user-
defined. The physical size and the page size, which depends on the settings, are displayed in this
dialog box.
Base Unit and Scale defines the unit and the scale.
In the list of options, select the unit to be used for the worksheet. You can select millimeters,
centimeters, meters, kilometers, inches, feet, yards and miles.
Then the scale of the network can be selected. There are three options:
● No scale
● Standard scale
● Custom scale
No scale means that PSS SINCAL does not create a scaled diagram. If this option is active, the
worksheet and printed diagram are exactly the same.
Standard scale sets a predefined scale, selected from the options, for the size of the worksheet.
Custom scale sets a user-defined ratio, selected from two input fields, between the size of the
worksheet and the actual physical dimensions of the network.
146 October 2021

Basic Functions
On the right side of the dialog box there is a preview of the size selected for the drawing. The physical
size of the paper is indicated below.
Zero-Coordinate Placement sets the position of the starting (or zero) point of the diagram in X or Y
direction.
3.11.3 Print Setup
The Print Setup tab controls the printed page.
Print Scale controls the output of the diagram.
To resize the diagram manually, click Increase/decrease and enter a percentage.
Adjust to one page fits the entire diagram to the paper size of the printer.
Switch on the Center on page option to align the diagram horizontally and vertically at the center.
To send a diagram with the correct scale to the printer, click Adjust to Scale and enter a scale. In
addition, you must set the lower left fixing point for the scaled diagram. To do this click Select Printing
Area in the menu. Once the lower left fixing point is set, PSS SINCAL displays the part of the network
that fits in the paper size of the printer as a rectangle.
Print Order controls the printing sequence for pages that are too large. The page can first be printed
to the right and then to the bottom, or first to the bottom and then to the right.
3.11.4 Margins
Normally, PSS SINCAL does not print a page completely from side to side. It leaves a clear space
around the network borders. Click this tab to set these margins, limiting the printed network area.
October 2021 147

Basic Functions
You determine Borders at the top, bottom, left and right, and for the header and footer.
Show frame assigns a border to the entire worksheet within the prescribed margins.
Header line or Footer line displays a separator at the top or bottom of the page. The size of this
separator is defined in a list of options for Line style.
3.11.5 Header/Footer
Click this tab to set the display of the element legend, header and footer.
The Plot Header section defines which additional inscription information is displayed on the page
when you print it.
In the Graphics Editor, a plot header can be created directly in the view in special plot header layer.
This is why the list contains all the layers designated as plot headers. Select the layer where graphics
elements will be used as plot headers.
148 October 2021

Basic Functions
In diagrams, plot headers are selected from a catalogue. You can select a catalogue file with
predefined plot headers in the file selection field. The plot headers in the file are displayed in the list
of options.
Place drawing above plot header displays the network in the free part of the page on top of the
plot header. Use full page size draws the plot header above the network. Normally PSS SINCAL
displays the plot header at the right lower page margin. Plot header at left corner moves it to the
left lower page margin.
Header/Footer allows you to define the text for these areas. Use format codes to simplify entering
dates, titles, etc.
Click Font to open the font dialog box, where you select the size, color and font of the text.
Format Codes
PSS SINCAL has the following format codes:

Date &[Date]
Time &[Time]
File name &[File]
File name with path and extension &[Dir/File]
Results &[Result]
Subresults &[Subresult]
Variant &[Variant]
Variant path &[Variant Path]
Variant comment 1 &[Variant Comment1]
Scale &[Print Scale]
Name of current diagram4 &[Chart]
Type of current diagram4 &[Chart Type]
Information on current diagram4 &[Chart Info]
Title1 &[Title]
Subject1 &[Subject]
Author1 &[Author]
Company1 &[Company]
Keywords1 &[Keywords]
Category1 &[Category]
Comments1 &[Comment]
Dynamics variable2 &[Dynamics:Name]
Description &[Descr:Description Name]
October 2021 149

Basic Functions
1)
The content of these fields is taken from the Properties dialog box located under the menu item File
– Properties.
2)
This format code is only available for dynamics calculations in electrical networks. The format code
is made up of the fixed entry "Dynamics:" and a variable name to be freely entered. The variable
name stands for the name of the variable in the dialog box for the Variables for Dynamics.
3)
This format code consists of both the fixed entry "Descr:" and a description name you can enter. The
description name reflects the name entered in the Description dialog box.
4)
These format codes are only available in diagrams. The special format code Information on current
diagram displays the Comment that can be assigned to individual diagram pages. If you only want
to display one specific line of the comment, you can specify this in the format code, e.g. &[Chart
Info:3].
3.12 Document Properties

Document properties access general information on the current network. Click File – Properties in
the menu.
This dialog box has the following tabs with information:
● Common
● Summary
● Content
3.12.1 Common
This tab stores general information on network editing (editing time, operator, etc.).
150 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.12.2 Summary
This tab has information on the current network.
The text entered in the fields of this tab can be used to document the network. This text can be used
both in the text objects of the Graphics Editor and the headers and footers.
3.12.3 Content
This tab lists the network elements in the network, so you can quickly see what, and how many,
network elements there are in the actual network.
What you see in this tab depends on what you have selected in the Graphics Editor. At the top,
PSS SINCAL lists all Network Elements of the network. You could also see Selected Network
Elements if any elements have been selected. PSS SINCAL also lists Other Objects such as
supplementary graphics objects and background pictures.
October 2021 151

Basic Functions
3.13 Selecting
You can extend commands to more than one network element or supplementary graphics object, or
an entire network. PSS SINCAL's comprehensive selection options let you speed and streamline
many editing and evaluation procedures.
Selecting offers a visual highlight of the network area where action is planned.
PSS SINCAL displays selected network elements and graphic objects in color with their modifying
markers.
In multiple selections, color delineates which element is selected first or is the determining element.
PSS SINCAL has the following selection possibilities:
● Selecting with the Mouse

● Selecting with the Help of Supplementary Graphics Objects
● Select All
● Select Objects
● Select Text
● Select Route
● Select in Tabular View
● Select in All Views
● Select by Type
● Select by Query
● Go to Next Node
● Select in Graphics
● Invert Selection
To adapt selections to your specific needs, PSS SINCAL has the following possibilities:
● Selection Settings
● Selection Mode
3.13.1 Selecting with the Mouse
In selecting elements, the mouse provides a versatile tool for working on the network. The mouse
moves freely and quickly around a window, selecting areas without a need for keyboard sequences.
Elements or objects can be selected individually by left-clicking or, as a group, by holding the SHIFT
key down and left-clicking the elements or objects one by one.
In selection mode, left-click above the desired elements or objects, hold the button down and move
the mouse to define a rectangle. When the button is released, PSS SINCAL selects the elements or
objects in this area. Hold down the SHIFT key to extend this area selection.
PSS SINCAL enables enhanced selection functions with help of the tabulator.
When more than one element is selected, the first selected becomes the determining element.
Press the CTRL key while left-clicking another element changes this. This element becomes the
determining element.
152 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.13.2 Selecting with the Help of Supplementary Graphics Objects
The supplementary graphics objects rectangle, polygon and frame can be used to select the
network elements and supplementary graphics objects they contain.
Right-click on the supplementary graphics object around the elements to open the pop-up menu and
then click Select enclosed objects.
3.13.3 Select All
Edit – Select – Select All selects all visible elements in the network.
3.13.4 Select Objects
Edit – Select – Select Objects switches ON the general selection mode. This mode is used to select
and edit elements and objects.
Selection mode can be turned ON in the toolbar or with the F2 key.
If a different edit mode is switched ON, right-click to switch this OFF and return to selection mode.
3.13.5 Select Text
This function lets you select network element text manually. This is a very useful tool if special
functions for working are to be confined only to specific text.
Edit – Select – Select Text switches this function ON. A modified cursor indicates when this function
is ON.
This lets you select only network element text with the mouse. You can do all the same operations
(area selection, extending the selection, etc.) as with "normal" Selecting with the Mouse.
If you switch Select Text ON for an existing selection, this reduces the selection to the text of the
selected network elements.
3.13.6 Select Route
This function lets you select both lines and complete subnetworks in the GUI.
PSS SINCAL uses a special algorithm for route selection that always determines the shortest
possible connection between two points. To determine this connection, PSS SINCAL uses the
number of network elements between the starting and end points. For a description of how the
function behaves, see the section on Selection.
Click Edit – Select – Select Route in the menu to switch this function ON. The cursor changes its
form.
October 2021 153

Basic Functions
To select a route, select a node element or branch element at the beginning of the route. Then select
a node element or branch element at the end of the desired route.
PSS SINCAL searches for the shortest connection between these and marks the route.
PSS SINCAL normally uses the route selected with this function to determine line data (see section
Line Data).
To continue working normally on the network again and to return to the standard cursor, switch this
function OFF by clicking the right mouse button in an empty area.
Select Subnetworks
Hold down the CTRL key to activate select subnetwork. You will see a different cursor.
Click on any network element to select the whole subnetwork linked to it. The size of the selection
can be limited with the options in the Selection Settings dialog page in the Extras – Options menu
(see the section on Settings for Route Selection in the chapter on the Options).
There is another easy way to limit which subnetworks are selected. First, select the limiting network
element. Then press the CTRL key and click a network element in the subnetwork.
The subnetwork selected in this way is normally used to determine power data (see the section on
Power Data).
To continue working normally on the network again and to return to the standard cursor, switch this
function OFF by clicking the right mouse button in an empty area.
3.13.7 Select in Tabular View
This function is available only in the Graphics Editor.
After you select network elements in the Graphics Editor, the amount of display in the tabular view
can be reduced to the selected network elements by selecting Edit – Select – Select in Tabular
View. This lets you open Tabular View faster, then clearly visualize elements, since only selected
elements are displayed on the screen.
3.13.8 Select in Signal Explorer
This function is only available in the Graphics Editor.
After network elements have been selected in the Graphics Editor, the amount of disply in the Signal
Explorer can be reduced to the selected network elements by selecting Edit – Select – Select in
Signal Explorer. The advantage of this function is a clearer display in the Signal Explorer, since only
the selected network elements are displayed. The selection filter can be removed again via the filter
button in the Signal Explorer.
154 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.13.9 Select in all Views
This function is only available in the Graphics Editor.
After you select network elements in the current view, these can be transferred to all open views by
clicking Edit – Select – in all Views in the menu.
3.13.10 Select by Type
To open a dialog box that lets you select network elements and supplementary graphics objects in
the Graphics Editor with a dialog-supported procedure, click Edit – Select – Select by Type.
This dialog box lists all the network elements in the network. Elements can be switched ON or OFF
by simply clicking in this list with the mouse. You can also select any element or remove any
selections with the pop-up menu.
On the right side of the dialog box, you can choose additional selection filters. You can select from
the following filters depending on their availability in the network:
● Network level
● Network area
● Layer
● Object type
● Owner
● Substation
● Network zone
Below your selection, PSS SINCAL displays the appropriate list. Here additional criteria can be
selected that will be used to limit the selection. The filter field directly reduces the amount to be
displayed in the list.
The pop-up menu can be used to select all the entries in the list or to remove all the selections.
Click Select to select elements in the Graphics Editor with the help of the settings in the dialog box.
This function resets any element selections.
If you click Add, elements selected in the dialog box are also selected in the Graphics Editor, and
any elements already selected keep this state. This lets you simply extend existing selection.
October 2021 155

Basic Functions
Click Reduce to reduce what has already been selected in the network to match the selection in the
dialog box. This is mainly useful if all elements in a graphic area have already been selected and this
selection needs to be reduced to show specific types.
3.13.11 Select by Query
This function selects network elements using a query for input data in the Graphics Editor. You can
also modify network element input data according to the query.
To activate this function, click Edit – Select – Select by Query.
The Select by Query dialog box lets you administer all the queries defined in the network. Queries
can be used to select network elements that meet specific criteria and modify them if you wish.
The dialog box displays an overview of all the current queries. Each query is divided into Find and
Set functions. Individual elements in the query can have entries for search criteria or update
assignments.
Click Add to define a new query.
To edit queries or to define search criteria or update assignments, click Edit.
Click Delete to remove queries, search criteria and update assignments.
The Select and Set buttons execute the query. The update query is used for network elements that
meet the search criteria.
Adding Queries
Click Add to open the dialog box for Add Query.
156 October 2021

Basic Functions
This dialog box defines a new query. First enter the Name of Query.
Select network elements for the query from the Elements in Query list and decide whether the
search is only for the network element or whether this should be modified as well. This is done by
switching ON the options button in the Find and Set column of the respective network element.
Click OK to create the query which PSS SINCAL displays in the Select by Query dialog box.
Defining Search Criteria
Select a search criterion for the query in the Select by Query dialog box. Then click Edit to open
the dialog box where you can define the search criterion.
You can enter a condition for each attribute in this dialog box. Select the attribute you want and click
Edit.
The comparison operators (=, <>, >, <, >=, <=) can be used for the search. Enter these with the
comparison value. Several comparisons of a field can be logically linked together using the AND &&
and OR || operators. Topology fields such as network areas or network levels can also be queried.
Click OK to display the search criteria in the Select by Query dialog box.
October 2021 157

Basic Functions
Defining Update Assignments
Select an update assignment for the query in the Select by Query dialog box. Then click Edit to
open the dialog box where you can define the update assignment.
This dialog box is used to define update assignments for individual attributes. Select the attribute you
want and click Edit.
Updates can have the assignment operators (=, +, -, *, /). Enter these with the update value.
Click OK to display the update assignments in the Select by Query dialog box.
Example of Creating a Query
The following example shows how to create and modify queries:
● To an existing query (consumer: Load.P >= 0.3 MW), add a query that selects all lines at least
one kilometer long.
● Then modify the consumer query so that the reactive power of the matching network elements
is multiplied by a factor of 5.
Set Query for Lines
First, create a new query for lines. Click the Add button.
158 October 2021

Basic Functions
In the Add Query dialog box, enter the name of the new query. Then switch ON the find options
button in the network element line and click OK. PSS SINCAL displays the new query in the overview.
Now you can define the criteria for the query. Select Line as the network element (in the Find part)
and press Edit.
PSS SINCAL opens the Find of Line dialog box.
Select l (length in km) as the attribute. Press Edit to define the condition. Then enter >= as the
comparison operator and 1 as the comparison value. Note that the unit displayed in the Info line
below the attribute list is valid.
To stop editing the search criterion, press OK. PSS SINCAL applies the conditions you entered in
the query and displays them in the overview.
October 2021 159

Basic Functions
To actually execute the new query, click the Select button.
Set Query for Consumers
To execute the second part of the example, you need to extend the existing Consumer query.
Select the Consumer query in the overview. Press Edit to display the Modify Query dialog box.
In this dialog box, click the options button in the Set column for the network element for the Load.
Press OK. PSS SINCAL displays the query in the overview.
160 October 2021

Basic Functions
To specify what you want to assign, select the network element for the Load (in the Set part) and
press Edit.
The Set Load dialog box opens.
In this example, the reactive power needs to be multiplied by the factor 5. Select the attribute Q
(reactive power in Mvar) and click Edit to make the assignment. Enter the assignment operator * and
the update value 5.
To stop editing the update assignment, press OK. PSS SINCAL applies the assignment you entered
in the query and displays it in the overview.
Press Set and confirm the confirmation message with Yes to execute the query. This updates all
network elements that meet the search criteria you have selected.
October 2021 161

Basic Functions
3.13.12 Go to Next Node
This function localizes the "opposite" node of the branch element and shows it at the center of the
graphics editor at a constant zoom level. This is mainly useful in large networks because it simplifies
navigation through the network.
To use this function a branch element must be selected in the graphics editor and then activate the
Go to next node menu item in the toolbar.
Alternatively, this function can also be activated via Alt + Page Down.
3.13.13 Select in Graphics
This function is available only in Tabular View.
After you select rows in Tabular View, click Edit – Select in Graphics in the menu to display them
in the Graphics Editor.
3.13.14 Invert Selection
This function is available only in the Graphics Editor.
After you select network elements or supplementary graphics in the current view, the selection can
be reversed by selecting Edit – Invert Selection in the menu. This means that those elements are
now selected which were not previously selected.
3.13.15 Selection Settings
Click Selection Settings in the toolbar of the Graphics Editor to open the Options dialog box with
the selection settings.
162 October 2021

Basic Functions
3.13.16 Selection Mode
Selection Mode in the toolbar of the Graphics Editor selects the mode for the area selection.
PSS SINCAL differentiates between two modes:
● Rectangular Selection:
PSS SINCAL creates a rectangle defining the highlighting area.
● Lasso Selection:
PSS SINCAL creates a free shape defining the highlighting area.
The Partially Covered option enables objects also to be selected which are only partially located
within the selected area. If the option is not active, the objects must be completely contained within
the selection area.
3.14 Copy and Paste

This chapter precisely describes the basic functions for Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete and Copy Graphic.
3.14.1 Copy
Click Edit – Copy to copy network elements, supplementary graphics objects, text or even entire
networks or subnetworks to the Clipboard for placing in another position (see the section on Paste).
3.14.2 Cut
The Edit – Cut function works like Copying, except that the parts selected are immediately deleted.
3.14.3 Paste
Edit – Paste places at the cursor position any network elements, supplementary graphics objects,
text or even entire networks or subnetworks copied to the clipboard with Copy or Cut.
When elements are copied and pasted, the formatting, network data, switch positions and any
protection devices are copied as well.
Pasting Using Keystroke Combinations
Elements on the screen (network elements and supplementary graphics objects) are placed at the
cursor position, which marks the center of the element pasted.
Pasting Using Menu
PSS SINCAL places the element slightly off-center.
October 2021 163

Basic Functions
Copy Graphic
PSS SINCAL lets you copy the graphic data from one view to another within a network. Select the
network elements you want and copy them to the clipboard with the Edit – Copy function. Copy
Graphic in the pop-up menu inserts the data in another view (in the same network). PSS SINCAL
generates only graphic data for the copied network elements and only those that do not already exist
in this view.
Pasting Special
The Paste Special menu item inserts the current contents of the clipboard selectively. Before
pasting, you decide how you want to paste the data from the Clipboard.
3.14.4 Delete
Switch Delete ON with Edit – Delete in the menu. Delete can remove network elements,
supplementary graphics objects, text or even entire networks or subnetworks. When you switch this
function ON there is a confirmation message. There you can define what is to be deleted, i.e. you
can select between deleting the whole network element (network element data and graphic data)
and only deleting the element’s graphic data. Click Cancel to stop the deletion procedure.
When you delete network element data using multiple views, network elements are also deleted in
all other views.
3.14.5 Copy Graphic
This function copies whatever you have selected to the clipboard as a Windows MetaFile.
Use the menu item Edit – Copy Graphic to prepare network elements, supplementary graphics
objects, text or even entire networks or subnetworks on the clipboard as Windows MetaFile graphics
for other programs (see the section on Paste).
3.15 Find
The Edit – Find function can be very helpful when you want to select nodes or network elements by
name in a comprehensive network.
Define search conditions to find individual nodes or all nodes and network elements that meet the
search criteria. These network elements can then be edited.
164 October 2021

Basic Functions
This dialog box has a filter field for the search argument. Entering the filter immediately reduces the
amount displayed in the list below. The filter field also has a control button. Pressing this button
displays a menu.
Use this menu to select the filter criteria (nodes/busbars, elements, add elements or substations).
Click All to search independent of type. Use Short Name lets you search for short names or normal
element names (long names).
Click Select to select all network elements in the Graphics Editor that were selected in the list.
Click Edit to open the screen form of the network element selected in the list.
Click the Find button to save the current settings and select all elements of the list in the Graphics
Editor. Clicking Close, of course, saves the settings, but does not select anything.
Search Options
Click Options to open a dialog box for setting parameters for the input field.
The Start of field content option displays only those elements with names that agree with the name
at the beginning.
There are also options for Part of field content, Exact value (wildcards are supported) and Case
sensitive.
Use short name lets you search for short names or normal element names (long names). Which
kind of names are displayed in the search dialog box depends on this setting.
3.16 Advanced Editing of Network Elements

This chapter describes advanced editing functions for network elements.
October 2021 165

Basic Functions
3.16.1 Set Network Data
This function lets you modify the attributes of more than one network element selected in the network
diagram at the same time.
To activate this function, click Edit – Set Network Data.
The Elements list comprises all available types of network elements of the current selection. From
this list, select the type of network element for which PSS SINCAL will modify the attributes.
From the list for attributes, select the Attribute. The list of options varies depending on the option
selected in Elements.
From the Operator list, select the conditions for setting network data. You select from the basic
assignment operators (=, +, -, *, /).
In the input field Replace with, enter the value for the attribute selected.
This means, for example, that when you select the attribute l and the operator * for lines and enter 2
in the input field, this multiplies line lengths by 2.
To actually set the network data, click Apply and confirm the confirmation message with Yes.
PSS SINCAL then provides new data for all elements selected.
3.16.2 Replace Network Data
This function lets PSS SINCAL apply the attributes from a network element to other network elements
of the same type.
First, select the network element that contains the data to be applied. Then select the elements where
PSS SINCAL should replace the data.
To activate this function, click Edit – Replace Network Data.
166 October 2021

Basic Functions
The list contains those attributes that PSS SINCAL should apply. The options listed depend on the
type of network element selected.
The filter field enables the display range in the selection list to be restricted. This makes it possible
to select the required data easily even with large quantities of data. The button in the input field is a
special feature. Clicking this button opens a menu, in which the desired categories for filtering can
be selected.
The following functions are available in the pop-up menu of the data list.
● Select All:
Selects all attributes in the list.
● Deselect All:
Removes all selections in the list.
● Select Category:
Selects all attributes of the selected category.
● Delete Category:
Removes the selections of the selected category.
To replace the data, click Replace.
3.16.3 Set Input State
PSS SINCAL lets you simultaneously set the input state for multiple network elements (zero-phase-
sequence data, controller data, ...). First, select at least one network element in the Graphics Editor.
Then activate the function with Edit – Set Input State.
October 2021 167

Basic Functions
General
Click Out of Service to make all the network elements selected out of service.
When Marked is switched ON, this marks all the previously selected network elements for the
diagram output or for storing the results.
Input States
This section displays all the possible input states for selected elements. Click the option buttons to
switch them ON or OFF.
The menu items for Select All or Deselect All in the pop-up menu can also switch all the input
statuses in the list ON or OFF.
Click OK to close the dialog box and set the input state.
3.16.4 Insert Network Point
This function splits a line, creating a new node at the position clicked in the line. PSS SINCAL uses
the data from the old line for the new line. You can give the node a name and specify the line length
in the dialog box shown below.
PSS SINCAL also considers line attachments when network points are inserted.
To activate this function, open the pop-up menu for the desired terminal to the line and activate Insert
Netpoint.
168 October 2021

Basic Functions
The Length of the new line can be entered either as a percentage or as a fixed length. The dialog
box automatically proposes a value calculated from the position that has been clicked. You can
change these values.
PSS SINCAL displays the Actual line length (the length of the line originally selected) in this dialog
box for orientation.
Enter the name of the new node in the field for Name of the new node. If no name is entered,
PSS SINCAL automatically generates a new name for the node.
PSS SINCAL updates the length of the line originally selected after the dialog box is closed. The
length of the old line is reduced by the length of the new line.
3.16.5 Join Lines
This function joins lines selected in the Graphics Editor.
Select the lines you want in the Graphics Editor. Then click Join Lines in the pop-up menu of the
determining line. The "determining" element in the selection defines the beginning and the direction
of the new line.
Element Data shows the name of the new line.
Warnings lists any problems found when joining lines. These are only for reference and will be
automatically corrected when the lines are joined.
The new line is generated in the diagram along existing lines. Network data for the new line are
calculated from the network data of the individual lines.
3.16.6 Busbars
PSS SINCAL lets you both split up and join selected busbars or you can assign them to a main
busbar.
Split Busbar
Split Busbar divides the selected busbar at the current position of the mouse pointer.
October 2021 169

Basic Functions
Connected elements are divided according to graphic positions among the two new busbars. Both
busbars are connected by a line without impedance.
Join Busbars
Join Busbars groups busbars selected in the Graphics Editor.
The "determining" object in your selection becomes the new busbar. This busbar adapts in size so
that the network elements of the other selected busbars can be assigned without modifying
connection points. PSS SINCAL assigns all network elements connected to the selected busbars to
the new busbar. PSS SINCAL moves the positions of node elements so they can be connected to
the new busbar without changing the size. With the branch elements, only the connection point is
connected to the new busbar. PSS SINCAL deletes connection lines (coupler units) between the
busbars and "old" busbars.
Main Busbar
This function lets you assign a busbar to a main busbar. Click Additional Data – Main Busbar in
the pop-up menu of a busbar to open a dialog box.
The list of options contains all the existing created main busbars. Click New to create additional main
busbars.
Select the main busbar in the list, then click Assign to assign it to the selected busbar.
3.17 Switches
PSS SINCAL lets you insert switches (disconnecting points) at network elements and then open or
close them as you wish.
Setting a switch interrupts the network at this position so it is easy to disconnect network elements
of the network and calculate different planning variants.
3.17.1 Insert Switches
To insert a switch, switch mode needs to be ON. Click Edit – Switch Mode in the menu. The cursor
changes its form.
Now you can place a switch at a terminal of a node element or branch element.
170 October 2021

Basic Functions
Note that, when you are finished, switch mode must be turned OFF again to be able to continue
working on the network with the standard cursor. The easiest way to do this is to click the right mouse
button on an empty area.
3.17.2 Open/Close Switches
Depending on what type they are, network elements in PSS SINCAL have one (node elements), two
(branch elements) or three terminals (three-winding transformers). Switches can be opened or
closed at these terminals.
Switches opens or closes the switches of network elements selected in the Graphics Editor. Edit –
Switches switches this function ON.
This dialog box shows the state of the switches for the selected network elements. Click the option
buttons to open or close them.
October 2021 171

Network Model
4. Network Model
A network's structure is described by its nodes and branches. The branches connect two nodes to
each other. A branch (or branch element) goes from the starting node to the end node. Node
elements are connected to the nodes.
Node element
Branch element
Node or
Busbar
Nodes and Busbars
Nodes are the basic elements of a network. When node elements or branch elements are created
and if there is no node, PSS SINCAL automatically creates one.
The busbar is a special graphic form of node, aiding visualization when connecting node elements
or branch elements at an individual node.
Node Elements
Node elements are placed at locations defined by nodes. Feeders, consumers, etc. are connected
to the nodes.
Branch Elements
A branch element connects two or three nodes. The branch element defines the connection between
the nodes with their transmission properties. In electrical networks, this can be a simple overhead
line or cable, or in pipe networks a simple pipe that transports the medium. Branch elements are also
used to simulate complex elements such as transformers or pressure regulators.
4.1 Networks Element Models

In PSS SINCAL, it is basically differentiated between two model extension or substitution types. On
the one hand, representation of physical behavior for network elements (machines, loads, converter-
based generation and transmission, lines, switches etc.) can be partially or totally done by users. On
the other hand, pre-defined network element models can be extended by controls and protection or
auxiliary devices (voltage regulator, turbine control, transformer tap-changer, thermal processes
etc.).
172 October 2021

Network Model
For both model types, PSS SINCAL utilizes a proven and validated model basis as well as an
extensive model library, which can be efficiently utilized by users after parametrizing towards
individual requirements. For special requirements in simulation of steady-state and dynamic
operating states there is furthermore the possibility of model substitution. In PSS NETOMAC System
Manual – Model Editor – Using Models in PSS SINCAL handling of both model extension and
substitution types is described.
Beside the conventional topics of investigations in the network planning process, the focus of todays’
analyses is often on the behavior of converter-based generation and transmission. Due to the usage
of power electronics and powerful computation, these network elements have a very dynamic
behavior. At the same time, they exhibit disadvantages with limited capabilities in overloading.
Anyhow, these elements usually must fulfill at least the classical requirements in network operation.
For representing their realistic behavior in power system studies for steady-state and dynamic
conditions, PSS SINCAL provides different possibilities of model extensions or substitutions. As a
basis, the converter element is used. This can be extended beyond classical specifications of power
flow values in steady-state operation. Even more, it can be completely substituted, which is called
BOSL model in the following. The below table gives an overview on usage of provided modeling
capabilities in the tabs of the node element converter for different simulation methods in core
modules. Other methods, which are based on the core modules, use the same model basis.
Core Modules Used Model Data Optional Extension/

Recommended Substitution within
of within Basic Substitution within Basic
Extended Application
PSS SINCAL Application Application
Power Flow Basic Data, Element Limits, Controller Basic Data: Power Flow Type Model
Data Power/Current/Voltage and generic
BOSL model from global model
library or user-defined BOSL model
Short Circuit Basic Data, Element - -
Data, System Data
(constant current or
dynamic voltage
support)
Harmonics Basic Data, Element - -
Data, Harmonics
Stability Basic Data with Basic Data: Power Flow Type Basic Data: Power Flow Type Model
inherit dynamic Model Power/Current/Voltage Current/Voltage and user-defined
model, Element Data and generic BOSL model from BOSL model
global model library
EMT Basic Data with - Basic Data: Power Flow Type Model
inherit dynamic Current/Voltage and user-defined
model, Element Data BOSL model
The two simulation methods of Short Circuit and Harmonics, as well as other methods based on
these, basically do not allow the usage of model substitutions in the context of this chapter, as the
provided inherent models do already cover all use cases. The other core modules have the capability
to implement network element models (from global model library or user-defined in model editor) into
the simulation process according to the following figure.
October 2021 173

Network Model
According to the figure, users’ input data for Basic Data and Element Data can be used in all 4
paths. That means, it is applied within the inherent models of PSS SINCAL as well as within the
model substitutions (generic or user-defined). For that purpose, PSS SINCAL provides pre-defined
parameters (e.g. #Sn as rated apparent power, #Plf as final active power set-point, #Qlf as final
reactive power set-point) related to Network Feeder Data and Operating State etc. to models.
Subsequently, the models can consider these values and other parameters and finally provide
feedback values at the model outputs, which are in turn used for the network solution. Hereby, it is
differentiated between the following types:
● Power
● Current
● Voltage
For investigations of steady-state conditions based on power flow calculation (power flow, time-
series calculation and operating points etc.) it is for most use cases sufficient to utilize PSS SINCAL’s
inherent model basis (the upper two paths in the figure above). But, if it is intended to consider special
controls or communication structures (see Example Control System Modeling), capabilities of the
model editor can be utilized, and the inherent model can be substituted (the lower two paths in the
figure above).
For investigations of dynamic conditions based on stability simulation (stability, eigenvalue

calculation etc.) it is recommended at least to use the generic models from the global model library.
This is valid for balanced and unbalanced network structures (asymmetrical topology etc.) or
operation (fault definitions etc.). Beside a suitable initialization within a power flow calculation, they
usually represent the most important dynamic properties of converter-based plants. Different models
are provided in the model library, which must be chosen suitable to the existing use case. Many use
cases can be already covered by a correct parametrization of such generic models from the model
library. If, on the other hand, no model substitution is done, PSS SINCAL utilizes a simple inherent
model, which ideally controls power and does not cover fault handling. Especially for investigations
based on EMT simulation this must be avoided!
174 October 2021

Network Model
Generally: Only a user-defined or plant-specific model, which can be provided by the manufacturer,
will represent the realistic steady-state and especially dynamic behavior of converter-based plants!
Therefore, when investigating dynamic conditions, please ensure application of such user-defined
models, which are validated in best case, or use derived parameters for generic models from
provided model library.
Power
Depending on the individual model option (y, y0+y, y0*y, y0/y, in PSS SINCAL power flow only the
first option is available) a substitution, addition, multiplication or division of active and reactive power
set-points of the modeled network element is done in all simulation methods. The first two options
require the units [MW] and [MVar], while the last ones are used as a multiplication factor for the
operating state input in PSS SINCAL. One- and three-phase network elements can be addressed by
this type. Applicable model types: GNE-P/Q, VAR-P/Q.
Exemplary equivalent circuit for positive sequence or a specific phase with R sw as switching
resistance:
Current
Injection of a one- or a three-phase complex current (power flow and stability-based methods) or
rather an instantaneous current (EMT-based methods) with the unit [MVA] (related to nominal voltage
of terminal node) into a defined node. It is possible to combine individual phase current injections in
one model and by that to represent unbalanced infeeds. Applicable model types: GNE-I, Source-I.
Exemplary equivalent circuit for positive sequence or a specific phase current injection with internal
resistance Rint and Rsw as switching resistance:
Voltage
Applying of a one- or a three-phase complex voltage (power flow and stability-based methods) or
rather an instantaneous voltage (EMT-based methods) with the unit [pu] (related to nominal voltage
of used branch) to a defined branch. For this, usually a definition of the short-circuit impedance of
the network element is needed in order to represent this appropriately in fault analysis. Furthermore,
it is possible to combine individual phase voltage applications in one model and by that to represent
unbalanced infeed. Applicable model types: GNE-V, Source-V.
October 2021 175

Network Model
Exemplary equivalent circuit for positive sequence or a specific phase voltage application with
internal resistance Rint and Rsw as switching resistance:
4.2 Substation Model

The substation model documents electrical network structures in detail. These data structures are
optional, and the more traditional calculation methods for electrical networks (e.g. power flow, short
circuit, etc.) do not consider them in the calculations. They are, however, required in economic
efficiency calculations, since these calculations use structures in the network to evaluate and list
costs.
PSS SINCAL has the following data:
● Substation
● Bay
● Equipment
These data structures are hierarchically structured, so you can assign any bays you want to a
substation. You can also assign equipments to the bays. To process the complex data structures of
the substation model, PSS SINCAL has special functions and tools:
● Substations and Routes Toolbar

● Substation Browser
● Graphic Substation Element
● Update Substation
● Create Bay
4.2.1 Substations and Routes Toolbar
The Substations and Routes toolbar creates all essential data structures. Select View – Toolbars
– Substations and Routes in the menu to switch this ON.
Substation browser
List of options for substations
List of options for bays
176 October 2021

Network Model
Substation Browser
The browser for substations, bays and equipments displays the data structures of the substation
model in hierarchical form. This lets you easily edit large amounts of data.
List of Options for Substations
This list of options contains all the substations in the network. If a network element has been selected,
PSS SINCAL displays the substation in the list that is connected to the network element. if no network
elements have been selected, PSS SINCAL displays the default substation (for creating network
elements).
List of Options for Bays
This list of options displays the bays available at the selected substation. If a network element has
been selected, PSS SINCAL displays the bay in the list connected to the network element. If no
network elements have been selected, PSS SINCAL displays the default bay (for creating network
elements).
4.2.2 Substation Browser
The Substation Browser displays the complete structures of the substation model. The substations,
bays and equipments of the substation model are organized hierarchically. The Substation Browser
can be used to create new elements and edit existing structures.
Select Insert – Substation in the menu to open the Substation Browser.
October 2021 177

Network Model
The Substation Browser is divided into two parts:
● The browser for navigation

● The data area
Browser for Navigation
The browser displays the substation model’s structure in hierarchical form. Simply click elements to
select them and display their input data or results in the data area.
The pop-up menu also has enhanced working functions.
New creates new substations, bays and equipments.
Copy copies elements of the substation model. When you copy, PSS SINCAL automatically copies
the selected element and all subordinate elements.
Paste inserts the copied elements.
Delete deletes the element selected in the browser and all subordinate elements.
Results displays the results of the economic efficiency calculations for the selected element.
Refill Dialog updates the contents in the browser; i.e. it rebuilds the hierarchical structures.
Select marks the element selected in the browser in the network diagram.
Localize is the same as Select, but PSS SINCAL modifies the diagram section in the Graphics Editor
to display the selected element.
Expand displays all elements in the browser, i.e. it opens all group entries.
Collapse closes the selected element. This lets you reduce the amount displayed.
Delete unused Stations removes all the substations which are not assigned to a network element.
Delete unused Bays removes all the bays which are not assigned to a network element.
178 October 2021

Network Model
Toolbar
An additional way to generate and edit new elements is to use the toolbar in the browser.
New substation
New bay
New equipment
Create graphic
Copy
Paste
Delete
Toggle between input data and economic efficiency results
Data Area
The area displays data for the element selected in the browser. You can even edit the data.
4.2.3 Graphic Substation Element
To simplify processing substation structure, the network diagram has a graphic substation element.
PSS SINCAL displays the substation as a container "in the background" containing the assigned
network elements. This element can be created either with the substation toolbar or the Insert –
Node/Busbar – Substation menu.
October 2021 179

Network Model
When you create new network elements inside the graphic substation element, PSS SINCAL
automatically assigns these to this substation. This lets you create substation structures quickly and
intuitively.
The substation element’s pop-up menu has enhanced working functions.
The pop-up menu opens the Substation Browser for updating network data and substation graphics.
Additional Functions for Processing Substations
To simplify the working with the substation model, PSS SINCAL also has new functions.
Creating new bays is now particularly simple. The example below shows how a DBD bay is created
for three busbars. First, the desired busbars are selected in the Graphics Editor. Then you open the
pop-up menu where you can select Create Bay.
PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box where you can enter the bay name. You can select among the
following bay types:
● Disconnector (D)
● Disconnector – circuit breaker (DB)
● Disconnector – circuit breaker – disconnector (DBD)
Depending on what has been selected, PSS SINCAL automatically generates the corresponding
network elements.
180 October 2021

Network Model
In the example below, the disconnector – circuit breaker – disconnector option has been
selected. The new bay has been connected to all the selected busbars. Disconnectors have been
installed in the terminal lines to the busbar as in the DBD selection type. A power circuit breaker and
a disconnector have been installed in the Line L4.
Even Marking Complete Fields is particularly simple. Simply select any network element of the bay
in the Graphics Editor and open the pop-up menu.
The Select Bay function selects all network elements assigned to the bay in the Graphics Editor.
4.2.4 Update Substation
Update Substation lets you customize the substation graphics or update assignments for network
elements.
Select Update Substation in the graphic substation’s pop-up menu to access this function.
October 2021 181

Network Model
Update substation graphic updates the graphic substation element. PSS SINCAL determines the
rectangle around all the substation’s network elements and updates the substation graphics
accordingly.
Assign network elements assigns all network elements within the graphic substation element to
the substation. Depending on what you select, PSS SINCAL assigns only those elements that are
either completely inside or only partially inside the graphic substation element.
Consider only selected substations limits the function to graphic substation elements selected in
the Graphics Editor. If this option is not selected, PSS SINCAL processes all the graphic substation
elements found in the Graphics Editor.
4.2.5 Create Bay
This is an easy way to connect a new switch bay to multiple busbars selected in the Graphics Editor.
Select Create Bay in the pop-up menu for the node or busbar to use this function.
This dialog box assigns a Name to the new switch bay. It also contains enhanced options for setting
the parameters to generate the switch bay.
182 October 2021

Network Model
Add breakers switches disconnector or power circuit breaker generation ON. You can select
between different configurations.
● Disconnector:
PSS SINCAL only generates disconnectors directly at the busbar connection.
● Disconnector – circuit breaker:
PSS SINCAL creates a disconnector at the busbar connection and a power circuit breaker at
the feeder.
● Disconnector – circuit breaker – disconnector:
This option is similar to the first two, but it also inserts an additional disconnector at the end of
the feeder.
The following illustration shows a DBD switch bay.
Hide text of connection lines hides the text for auxiliary lines in the bay.
If you select Invert graphic direction, PSS SINCAL creates the new bay in the opposite direction.
PSS SINCAL always creates the new switch bay at the right corner of the selected busbar. The
standard direction is down and to the right.
4.3 Route Model

A route describes the geographic connection between two route points. Route can have any lines
you want, which then follow the graphic route. This means routes basically define possible
connection segments between substations to one another and to consumers.
"Classic" network calculations do not require a route model. These can, however, precisely
reproduce the actual transmission and distribution structures of real networks. It can also be a basis
for different optimization procedures.
The network browser administers existing routes. Insert – Route in the menu opens the route display
in the network browser.
October 2021 183

Network Model
For a general description of the route functions, see the chapter on Network Browser, section Route.
4.3.1 Graphic Route Object
To simplify working with route structures, network diagrams have a graphic route element.
PSS SINCAL displays the route as a container "in the background" containing the assigned lines.
This element can be created either with the Network Elements (Electrical Networks) toolbar or the
Insert – Branch Elements – Route menu.
The route model consists of multiple route objects that are connected. These objects can have any
number of bends. Route objects can be created between two route nodes either by attaching these
to an existing route node or by automatically generating a new connection.
The following illustration shows routes in the network graphic.
184 October 2021

Network Model
Now you can assign lines to the existing route model. There are two ways to do this:
● Create Lines
● Subsequently Assign Lines
To calculate routes, PSS SINCAL determines the shortest possible path and considers whether a
proper connection is possible at all. This means the routes need to be the right type (cable route or
overhead route), a connection between the entry and exit points has to be feasible, and the route
needs to be able to have additional lines. PSS SINCAL visualizes the possible route. The line
assumes the course of the selected route.
Creating Lines
During creating a line, select the route node where you want the line to enter in the route. Then select
the end node for the route. This can be on this route or any other route connected to the first route.
Subsequently Assigning and Adjusting Lines
Use the pop-up menu of the line to assign to an existing line.
Assign to Routes
Assign to Routes assigns the line to a new route. Click this and PSS SINCAL automatically switches
route assignment mode ON. Then click the starting node for the route where the line enters the route
in the network diagram. Finally select an end point for the route to define the route.
October 2021 185

Network Model
Press the right mouse button to terminate route assignment mode. PSS SINCAL displays the Assign
Line to Route dialog box.
This dialog box defines the Length of line. This can be done in three ways:
● From line:
Original value for line length from the input data
● From route:
Sum of the lengths of the complete route
● From network:
Geographically calculated line length
Manual Settings positions the line within the route. By switching Route location ON, you can define
the alignment for the entire route. If the value is 0, the line does not move, i.e. it is located directly on
the route. Positive and negative values place the line above or below the route. When this option is
switched OFF, PSS SINCAL aligns lines automatically. This means the line is always placed at a
free position within the section of the route.
Click OK to close the dialog box and assign the line to the route.
Adjust to Route
Click Adjust to Route to open the Adjust Line to Route dialog box.
Length of line determines what value PSS SINCAL will use for line length. There are three
possibilities:
● From line:
Original value for line length from the input data
● From route:
Sum of the lengths of the complete route
186 October 2021

Network Model
● From network:
Geographically calculated line length
Manual Settings positions the line within the route. By switching Route location ON, you can define
the alignment for the entire route. If the value is 0, the line does not move, i.e. it is located directly on
the route. Positive and negative values place the line above or below the route. When this option is
switched OFF, PSS SINCAL aligns lines automatically. This means the line is always placed at a
free position within the section of the route.
Click OK to close the dialog box and adjust the line to the route.
4.3.2 Editing Routes
To simplify working with route models, pop-up menus for routes and lines have special help functions.
Network Data opens the input screen form for the selected route.
If you open the pop-up menu for a route node, Network Data (Route Node) displays the data-input
form for the route node.
If a substation is assigned to the route node, Edit Substation displays this substation in a data
screen form.
Select Assigned Lines selects all the lines that have been assigned to the route.
Disconnect removes the route from an existing route node. This creates a new route node.
Update Route Length calculates the length of all selected routes and stores the new value in the
database.
Split Route breaks up the route at the desired point and creates a new route. PSS SINCAL
automatically updates all route assignments.
Assigned Lines opens the network browser and selects the marked route.
4.4 Variants
Variants are used to save alternative and planning phases in a network with a hierarchical structure.
Each variant stores only the differences from the preceding variant.
October 2021 187

Network Model
4.4.1 Managing Variants
File – Variants – Variants opens the dialog box for selecting and managing variants.
This dialog box displays a list with all currently available variants in this network. The base variant is
always listed in the list of options. All the additional available variants are listed below in hierarchical
order. PSS SINCAL displays the active variant in the dialog box with a colored symbol. The selected
variant can be moved by holding the Shift key and pressing the cursor key. Using the pop-up menu,
the Sort Ascending/Descending functions can be used to order the sequence of the subvariants
within the selected variant alphabetically.
Change Variants
Select the desired variant in the dialog box and click Activate. PSS SINCAL displays variants
selected in this way with a colored symbol to show they are "active". When you close the dialog box,
PSS SINCAL loads the data for the active variant and displays the name of the variant in the status
line.
Another quick way to change variants is to double-click on the checkbox in front of the variant entry
in the list of options. This automatically closes the dialog box and switches the variant ON.
Create Variants
To create a new variant, first select the preceding variant you want to use in the dialog box. Then
click Add. This generates the new variant as a subvariant to the predecessor you selected. You can
change the name of the new variant by pressing the F2 key or with the pop-up menu.
Edit Variants
Click Edit to open the data screen form for the variant you have selected and enter enhanced
information for the variant (operator, processing time, comment, etc.).
188 October 2021

Network Model
Delete Variants
To delete a selected variant, press the Delete button. Then PSS SINCAL deletes the data for this
variant and all its subvariants. When you delete a variant, this cannot be undone. For this reason,
PSS SINCAL asks you to confirm with OK before actually deleting the variant.
Remove all Variant Information
This converts any variant to the base variant, completely removing all variant information in the
network.
Select the variant you want in the dialog box and click Set Base. When you delete a variant, this
cannot be undone. For this reason, PSS SINCAL asks you to confirm with OK before actually deleting
the variant. It can be selected whether existing subvariants of the new base variant should also be
deleted.
Variant Comparison for Results
PSS SINCAL lets you compare output data for different planning variants.
To compare variants you first need to select the variants to be considered. Click the check box in the
Compare column. To switch all variants ON and OFF, use the functions in the pop-up menu.
The extended result data for the comparison variants is not loaded until you activate the Compare
variants option.
Select
Select selects all network elements and supplementary graphics objects in the Graphic Editor
created in the selected variant helping you visualize changes in network structure for the variant.
The evaluations have enhanced functions to display the changes in the network in different variants
(see the section on Evaluations in the chapter on Input Data and Results).
4.4.2 Variant Comparison for Input Data
PSS SINCAL provides the possibility of comparing the input data of two variants. To do this click File
– Variants – Variant Comparison.
October 2021 189

Network Model
This view enables two variants which are used for the comparison to be selected via the selection
fields.
Clicking this button opens the following dialog box.
This dialog box is used to select the scope of the comparison.
Click OK to start the comparison and output the results of this comparison in the variant comparison
view.
This button enables the variant differences to be saved as scenario files. New nodes and elements
are likewise saved in the scenario file.
190 October 2021

Network Model
4.5 Scenarios
A scenario is a combination of change data which is assigned to an existing network. This enables
the operating state of the network elements (active/inactive), the switching of connections and also
the individual network data of the different network elements (e.g. powers, factors, control settings,
control method etc.) to be defined.
The existing network is thus modified according to the data of the scenario and then the calculations
are carried out. A scenario is basically not different to a variant, however, changes to the scenario
are not saved in the database but in external files. This separation from the network database and
thus looser connection enables scenarios to be used more flexibly. The key difference to the variant
is the fact that the changes of a scenario are only used temporarily and the network data in the
database remains unchanged.
The actual purpose of scenarios is to consider/assess a network in different configurations, in order

to obtain better information than from only one analysis of limit cases (positive and negative). The
"scenario funnel" visualizes this very well:
Positive
extreme scenario
Trend scenario
Negative
extreme scenario
The trend scenario is based on the assumption that the background conditions are stable, such as
the continuous development of the network in relation to consumption and generation. However, as
the background conditions are generally not stable, scenarios can also be used to examine several
other cases which can then be considered in the network planning, based on the probability of
occurrence.
Definition of Scenarios
The modifications of network element and node attributes are defined in network status files (special
XML files which describe the network changes). This enables a network to be examined and
considered in various ways.
Insert – Scenario in the menu is used to define scenarios. A detailed description of this is provided
in the chapter Scenario of the Input Data Manual.
Scenario Comparison
PSS SINCAL enables the current network to be compared with the required scenario. To do this click
Insert – Scenario. The Network Browser is opened. The Scenario Comparison function is activated
via the pop-up menu in the list of scenarios.
October 2021 191

Network Model
The previously selected scenario is pre-selected in the scenario comparison.
This view enables the scenario to be used for the comparison to be selected via the selection field.
Click this button to start the comparison and display the results.
192 October 2021

Network Model
Variant from Scenario
This function enables a subvariant to be created from a scenario definition. To do this activate Insert
– Scenario. The Network Browser is opened. The Variant from Scenario function is activated via
the pop-up menu in the list of scenarios.
This opens the following dialog.
The previously selected scenario is pre-selected in the dialog box.
After the Scenario is selected and the Variant Name is entered, a subvariant is created by clicking
the Create button. The scenario is used in this subvariant. In other words, the data of the individual
elements and switching states is transferred to the database according to the scenario files. New
elements and nodes are also inserted.
Calculate Scenarios
The scenarios can be calculated via the Multiple Calculations dialog box.
October 2021 193

Network Model
For this, the complete network is loaded first of all in the virtual database. The defined scenarios are
processed in succession if the Consider for all Calculations using Scenarios option is activated
for this. In other words, the selected calculation method is performed multiple times with the different
scenarios and the results are stored in a subvariant. The variants for the scenarios are created at
the end of the calculation. This is performed as described under Variant from Scenario. The name of
the variant corresponds to the name of the scenario.
At the end of the calculation procedure, the results for all completed calculations are provided in the
database as subvariants. The results are evaluated by loading the required variant. The variant
comparison function can be used to compare different scenario results.
4.6 Include Network

PSS SINCAL lets you calculate multiple networks simultaneously by combining independent
networks for the calculations.
The following illustration shows the electrically connecting of two networks.
The following illustration shows the connecting of two pipe networks.
To combine networks for the calculations, you need to identify the nodes attached to independent
networks. In the above examples, these are the nodes N3 and N1. Names are assigned to both these
nodes to create this connection.
To create and use include networks, you need to proceed as follows:
● Inserting an Include Network
194 October 2021

Network Model
● Inserting Connections
● Calculating Included Networks
Note at electrical networks: The networks must be able to work together properly. This means the
connection nodes that create the link must be at the same network level and the networks need to
have the same basic data (frequency, zero-phase sequence input data, etc.).
Note at pipe networks: The networks must be able to work together properly. This means the
connection nodes that create the link must be at the same sea level and the networks need to have
the same basic data (density, viscosity, etc.).
4.6.1 Inserting an Include Network
To calculate the networks simultaneously, you first have to define where the connected network is
located.
Click Insert – Include Network. An include network defines an external network included in the
calculations.
This dialog box lists already included networks. Include networks can be switched ON or OFF with
the option button. Select all and Deselect all in the pop-up menu switch all include network ON or
OFF together.
Hold down the SHIFT key and press the cursor button to modify the sequence of the include network
listed in the dialog box.
To insert a new include network, click New. To remove existing include network, click Delete. Press
Edit or double-click on the include network in the list to modify an existing include network.
October 2021 195

Network Model
PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box where the linked PSS SINCAL file can be entered or edited. You
can either enter the database name directly in the input field or click … to open the browser. Any
number of include networks can be included.
Clicking Open opens networks for the selected include networks in PSS SINCAL. Clicking Open All
opens all networks for the available include networks in the list.
When you press Sync. Variant, you use the current network variant for all available open networks
in the list. This, however, is only possible if there is a variant with the same name in the other network.
4.6.2 Inserting Connections
In addition to defining an include network, you need to enter connecting nodes or busbars for both
networks. Double-clicking a node, for example, opens the screen form for the node.
Node Electrical Networks
196 October 2021

Network Model
Node Pipe Networks
PSS SINCAL calculates nodes with the same field Include Network Name in both networks as a
single node.
October 2021 197

Network Model
The number of connections that can be created between networks is unlimited.
The attached nodes or busbars must have the same characteristics (e.g. rated voltage, sea level,
…).
4.6.3 Calculating Included Networks
To calculate included networks, click Calculate in the menu and select the desired method.
PSS SINCAL automatically considers include networks and connection nodes, and then updates
results in all networks.
198 October 2021

Graphics Editor
5. Graphics Editor
The Graphics Editor is used to create the network diagram. The network diagram is the geometric
and/or schematic network layout, with its input and output data.
Basic elements of the user graphics editor:
● Toolbar (#1)
● Working area (#2)
The graphics used to display a network consist of symbols for network elements with their inscription
boxes and supplementary graphics objects (objects drawn by hand, text or bitmaps).
5.1 Structure of the Graphics Editor

The window of the Graphics Editor is divided into the following main areas:
● A toolbar
● A working area
October 2021 199

Graphics Editor
Toolbar
This toolbar activates the important functions of the Graphics Editor.
Select a selection function
Switch mode ON/OFF (for inserting switches)
Select a tool
Select a zoom function
Zoom to page (the working area is zoomed so that the entire graphic is
visible in the working area.)
Define the zoom level
Evaluate the network graphics by coloring
Annotation and filter (definition of the display type and amount of input and
output data)
Edit a graphics layer
Select an existing layer
Edit an object type
Select an existing object type
Create a network level in electrical networks or pipe networks
Select an existing network level
Create a network area in electrical networks or pipe networks
Select an existing network area
Create a network zone in electrical networks or pipe networks
Select an existing network zone
200 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Working Area
The working area of the Graphics Editor is used to create the network. When a network is opened,
the Graphics Editor is opened automatically.
5.2 Network Elements

Network elements fall into three categories:
● Nodes or busbars
● Node elements
● Branch elements
Draw a plan for a network by first creating nodes or busbars. Then connect branch and node
elements to the nodes to build the network.
The symbols provided in PSS SINCAL display the network elements.
Node element
Branch element
Node or
Busbar
Nodes and Busbars
Nodes are the basic elements of a network. When node elements or branch elements are created
and if there is no node, PSS SINCAL automatically creates one.
The busbar is a special graphic form of node, aiding visualization when connecting node elements
or branch elements at an individual node.
Node Elements
Node elements are placed at locations defined by nodes. Feeders, consumers, etc. are connected
to the nodes.
Branch Elements
A branch element connects two or three nodes or busbars. The branch element can have bends
used in creating branches (see the section on Contour in the chapter on Supplementary Graphics
Objects).
October 2021 201

Graphics Editor
Network Element Toolbar
Besides using the Insert menu, network elements can be inserted with the network element toolbar.
This provides easy access to all available network elements.
If the Use ANSI icon collection option is activated in the Common Settings for User Interface of the
Options dialog box, the display of the symbols for electrical network elements switches from Standard
to ANSI.
Standard ANSI
Substation
Node
Busbar
Synchronous machine
Generator unit
Network feeder
Asynchronous machine
Load
Variable shunt element
Shunt impedance
Shunt reactor
Shunt capacitor
Static compensator
Shunt RLC circuit
202 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Shunt ripple control transmitter
Converter
Route
Line
Variable serial element
Two-winding transformer
Three-winding transformer
Serial reactor
Serial dual reactor
Serial capacitor
Serial RLC circuit
Serial ripple control transmitter
Serial DC element
5.2.1 Constructing Network Elements
Network elements are created from symbols, terminals and texts.
In the following example, a branch element – a two-winding transformer – is selected.
As this example shows, components of the network elements are easy to recognize: the displayed
branch element consists of a symbol, both terminals (linking the symbol to the node) and texts.
October 2021 203

Graphics Editor
The simple network elements are nodes and busbars. They have only one symbol and text. All node
elements and branch elements are connected to these.
Node elements consist of one terminal, a symbol and text.
Branch elements consist of two terminals, a symbol and text.
A special form of branch elements is the three-winding transformer. Unlike all other branch elements,
it connects to three, rather than two, nodes or busbars.
Markers
All network elements have colored markers showing which component they are assigned to.
Main Markers
Position of symbol and attachments (protection devices, fault observation, …)
Terminal of node elements and branch elements at nodes or busbars
Position of nodes, and starting and end points at busbars
Change in size of selection and supplementary graphics objects
Rotating of selection and supplementary graphics objects
Additional Markers
Position of switches at terminals
Position of text
Bends of node elements, branch elements and polygons
Selection indicator (when option switched ON)
Move the modify markers to change the appearance of the network element on the screen.
Markers in Individual Selection
When individual elements and objects are selected, PSS SINCAL displays the markers.
PSS SINCAL always displays main markers independent of the zoom step and these can be edited.
PSS SINCAL only displays additional markers starting with the zoom factor entered with Enable
modification at zoom level in the Selection tab of the Format View dialog box.
204 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Markers in Multiple Selection
When multiple elements and objects are selected, PSS SINCAL only provides markers for changing
size and these can be modified. You can also display selection indicators with the Show Selection
Indicator option in the Selection tab of the Format View dialog box.
5.2.2 Selecting Network Elements
Click the left mouse button to select network elements.
To modify attributes and input and output data for a selected network element, use the pop-up menu.
This assures fast access to all functions of the selected network element.
Right-click to open the pop-up menu. Here that element is used, which is under the mouse cursor.
5.2.3 Selecting with the Tabulator
The tabulator has enhanced selection functions. What you have selected becomes the basis for the
enhanced selection functions. Depending on what was selected, PSS SINCAL does something
different when you press the tabulator.
● Select a node:
The tabulator lets you switch between nodes and any attached network elements.
● Select a network element:
The tabulator lets you switch between the network element and nearby network elements in the
diagram. The click position becomes the starting point for the surrounding elements.
● Select multiple elements:
The tabulator lets you leaf through the elements selected.
5.2.4 Selecting the Network Element Components
The Select menu item in the pop-up menu lets you select separate components of network elements,
such as symbols or terminals.
Right-click to open the pop-up menu. Here that component is used, which is under the mouse cursor.
All components have individual attributes, which can be set when they are selected with Properties
or the toolbar.
October 2021 205

Graphics Editor
The following illustration shows a pop-up menu for the two-winding transformer symbol.
The next illustration shows a pop-up menu for the first terminal of the two-winding transformer.
Compared to the previous pop-up menu, this one offers more options for the selected terminal.
The Select menu item in the pop-up menu provides the following selection types:
● Select symbol
● Select terminal
● Select all properties
Select Symbol
If a symbol is selected, only the attributes of this symbol are modified.
Select Terminal
Selection of a terminal means that only the attributes of the terminal are modified. The selected
terminal is also shown in the dialog box and the property sheet.
206 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Multiple selection means that only common characteristics are activated. PSS SINCAL displays the
attributes of the determining element.
Select All Properties
Select the symbol or terminal and click Select all Properties to display all attributes in the property
sheet again.
5.2.5 Connecting the Network Elements to Nodes or Busbars
The Graphics Editor connects the network elements to nodes or busbars. First select the network
element to display the markers.
Pink main marking points show the nodes or busbars currently attached to the network element.
To changing a connection point, position the cursor over the pink marker. When the cursor is over
the marker, it automatically changes its shape.
Select the connection point with the left mouse button and move it. Release the mouse button to
create a new node at the current position and attach the element to this new node. If the node or
busbar at this position is technically correct, PSS SINCAL attaches the element here.
5.2.6 Simplified Display of Branch Elements
With this display form the branch element is not drawn completely but only the terminal section at
the node. The following illustration shows the principle:
The display form is particularly useful for networks that were created with automatic graphic
generation. The usual overlaps that occur here are thus completely avoided. It is also useful for the
display of stations. The station itself can be modeled in detail, but the connections to the other
stations can be visualized with the new terminal display form.
October 2021 207

Graphics Editor
The display form is activated via the Reduced Graphic option in the Properties window.
The following options are available here:
● No:
The network element is drawn in the normal display form.
● First Knee Point:
The network element is drawn in the reduced display form. The length of the terminal section is
defined by the first knee point of the branch element.
● Automatic:
The network element is drawn in reduced display form. The length of the terminal section is
determined by the connection length for node elements. The alignment is determined by the
first knee point of the terminal. If this is not present, drawing is at right angles to the main
busbar.
5.2.7 Aligning and Positioning Text
Move the gray modify marker to position the text. Set the formatting options to align it.
You can define the text formatting option either directly with the Format toolbar or network-element
specific in the dialog box
● Format Node,
● Format Element or
● Format Symbol.
Click Format in the pop-up menu of the network element component.
208 October 2021

Graphics Editor
The Line and Text or Text Position tabs have the following formatting possibilities:
● Alignment
● Text Alignment
● Orientation
● Text Position
● Resetting Text
Alignment
Alignment formats multi-line text placed under one another as follows.
● Left
● Center
● Right
Text Alignment
PSS SINCAL can automatically align text. Select either Horizontal/Vertical or Direction of
Element.
If you do not want automatic text alignment, it can be switched OFF by selecting the No option.
Orientation and Text Position let you align the text manually.
Horizontal/Vertical
PSS SINCAL sets the text position automatically and tries, at the same time, to fit it to the text
connection point.
October 2021 209

Graphics Editor
Terminal 1
Direction of Element
PSS SINCAL rotates the text depending on the direction of the element and uses the angle of the
terminal or symbol to keep the text parallel to the element.
Orientation
The direction of the text flow can be defined manually.
To do this, Direction of Element needs to be switched OFF in Adjust text angle.
Text Position
Text position gives you the flexibly you need to manage text alignment. You can even choose one
of nine reference points where the text block will be aligned so that the inscription does not end up
in the network graphics symbol.
Caution: PSS SINCAL uses the text alignment you have selected only when the automatic text
alignment has been turned OFF.
210 October 2021

Graphics Editor
The dialog box defines the distances of the text form the text connection point in the Text Position
tab.
Resetting Text
You can return the text position of selected network elements to the standard position. PSS SINCAL
will use the text settings of the View for these network elements.
Click the Text Adjustment and Visibility button – menu item Standard Text Position – in the
Format toolbar.
5.2.8 Pop-Up Menu for Network Elements and Network Element

Components
Depending on which network element or network element component you select, PSS SINCAL
provides a pop-up menu with different functions.
October 2021 211

Graphics Editor
The following illustration shows a pop-up menu for a line.
Pop-up menus can contain the following menu items:
● Copy
● Paste
● Delete
● Network data
● Additional data
● Results (current)
● Results
● Calculation at element
● Calculation at node
● Select
● Insert
● Set network data
● Replace network data
● Set input state
● Insert netpoint
● Join lines
● Reconstitute from segments
● Switch
● Split busbar
● Join busbars
● Shape
● Format
Copy
The Copy function copies selected network elements to the Clipboard so that they can be placed at
another position.
212 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Paste
The Paste function inserts selected network elements from the Clipboard to the cursor position.
When network elements are copied and pasted, PSS SINCAL also copies the formats, network data,
switch positions and any connected protection devices.
Delete
The Delete function removes selected network elements, following a check as to whether the network
element should really be deleted.
Network Data
When you select Network Data in the pop-up menu, PSS SINCAL displays the Screen Form for the
network element.
Additional Data
Click this menu item to open the screen form for additional data (such as breakers, measurement
data, line reactors, fault observations, etc.).
Current Results
Results (current) displays the Results of the last calculation method for the selected network
element.
Results
Results (or in the case of nodes or busbars, Node Results or Branch Results) displays all Results
in the database for the selected network element.
Calculation at Element
This starts calculations for selected elements directly.
Calculation at Node
This starts calculations for the selected node directly.
Select
This selects parts of the network element (see Selecting the Network Element Components) as well
as elements assigned to the same network level, network group, substation or bay. In the case of
nodes, you can select all connected elements or nodes that have the same busbar or you can select
the supply of a node. At node elements and branch elements, you can even select linked elements
or existing feeders.
October 2021 213

Graphics Editor
Insert
This inserts attachments at a terminal (such as breakers, measurement data, line reactors, fault
observation, overcurrent protection, distance protection or differential protection). You can also insert
a coupled line at two selected lines.
Replace Network Data
Replace Network Data applies the attributes of a network element to multiple network elements of
the same type.
Set Network Data
Set Network Data lets you modify the attributes of more than one network element selected in the
network diagram at the same time.
Set Input State
Set Input State sets the input state for at least one selected network element.
Insert Netpoint
Insert Netpoint divides the selected line. PSS SINCAL creates a new node at the cursor position and
splits the selected line into two sections.
Join Lines
Join Lines joins selected lines.
Reconstitute from Segments
With the Reconstitute from Segments function, the selected line can be divided into individual lines
again based on the assigned line segments.
Switch
Switch opens or closes the selected terminal.
Split Busbar
Split busbar divides a marked busbar at the current position of the mouse cursor.
Join Busbars
Join busbar joins busbars selected in the Graphics Editor.
214 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Shape
This submenu contains enhanced graphic functions to edit elements and objects. You can, for
example, align network element symbols, edit, align and delete points, group elements, sequence
elements and rotate elements.
Format
Click Format to display a dialog box where the graphic attributes of the selected network element
can be edited.
5.3 Supplementary Graphics Objects

Supplementary graphics objects are screen elements that can be added to the network diagram to
enhance its display. Objects and supplementary information can be included in the network graphics
without being included in the calculations.
In working with the Graphics Editor, the graphic object toolbar is extremely helpful because it contains
all supplementary graphics objects.
Draw a straight line. If you hold down the SHIFT key while you are drawing a line,
PSS SINCAL creates a 45° angle in the direction you move the mouse.
Draw a rectangle. If the SHIFT key is held down while drawing a rectangle, PSS SINCAL
creates a square.
Draw an ellipse. If the SHIFT key is held down while drawing an ellipse, PSS SINCAL
creates a circle.
Draw an arc of a circle. If the SHIFT key is held down at the same time, PSS SINCAL
creates a circular segment.
Draw a polyline. The mouse can be dragged to create interlinking lines known as
polylines. Polylines can be either open and closed elements. When you double-click the
mouse or click this control button, PSS SINCAL ends the polyline.
Create a freehand line. As with pencil on paper, the mouse cursor can be dragged to
create a freehand line.
Add a text field
Add frames
Hilite an area in color
October 2021 215

Graphics Editor
Insert graphics or bitmaps
Insert diagrams
Create a legend to enter data for network elements/attachments and results. Drag this to
create the legend text according to the preliminary setting (annotation and filter).
Drawn Elements
Drawn elements are vector-oriented. Unlike pixels or bitmap graphics, no information is recorded at
individual points in the drawing. Starting and end points of a line are defined. Curves are made up of
many small straight lines connected. All screen elements are independent and can be edited. Such
objects can be modified or regenerated.
The graphic object toolbar contains the icons used for drawing graphics elements. You can create
texts, lines, rectangles, ellipses, arcs and polygons. For each operation, PSS SINCAL has a
corresponding icon in the toolbar. Draw by clicking on the icon, then placing the mouse cursor at the
desired location and holding down the mouse button to extend the object.
To draw an element, you must be in the Graphics Editor.
Text Fields
PSS SINCAL lets you add text fields you want to the diagram. These can have static text as well as
variable contents as predefined format codes.
Another way to define text field contents is to use Text Field Contents, predefined text components
with contents that change depending on what input data or results are displayed.
Frame
In PSS SINCAL, the supplementary graphics object frame has enhanced functions. These include
the definition as a print frame, zooming in the frame and links between views. To prevent
unintentional editing of these frames, the Lock object function is available in the Properties window.
After creating a frame, you can print it or the multiple frames. To do this, the frame in the Properties
window must be specified as a "print area". Select File – Print Area – Print Frames to start printing.
Double-click on the frame to zoom in on it precisely.
Highlight an Area in Color
Areas can be assigned colors in the network diagram. Click the icon from the toolbar. Then make a
rectangle over the area to be colored with the mouse button.
PSS SINCAL assigns this area of the network diagram a color as defined in the Property Sheet.
216 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Graphics and Bitmaps
Graphics and bitmaps originate in another file. They can be scanned illustrations, photographs or
clipart.
Diagrams
PSS SINCAL’s Graphics Editor can display any diagrams you want from the Diagram View.
PSS SINCAL has a special insertion dialog box where you can select the desired diagram.
The selected diagram is then displayed in the graphics editor.
After clicking Open Diagram in the pop-up menu of the diagram, the selected diagram is displayed
in the diagram view.
If the data of a diagram in diagram view is changed, these changes can also be applied to the diagram
object. This is carried out via the Update Diagram function in the pop-up menu.
Another diagram can be selected for display via the Change Diagram function in the pop-up menu.
Element Legend
With the help of the supplementary graphics object legend, PSS SINCAL can display the legend for
nodes and network elements in the network diagram and accompanying filter settings in the drawing.
The following illustration shows examples of different legends.
October 2021 217

Graphics Editor
Place a legend in the network diagram. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box where you can enter the
information that will appear in the legend.
In Type, you can choose from the following options:
● Legend container:
This creates a container where you can group and automatically arrange legends.
● Legend – input data:
PSS SINCAL displays the input data for network elements and nodes in the legend.
● Legend – results:
PSS SINCAL displays the results for network elements and nodes in the legend.
● Load density (only for electrical networks):
When you select Load Density Polygon, PSS SINCAL displays the load density for the
selected load group (graphical) in the legend. Please note that the evaluation of load density
must be active.
● Evaluation:
This lets you display the settings of the active Evaluation in the legend.
● Protection device:
Depending on the sub-type the legend shows the value range and/or the current setting values
of OC protection devices or the status of the protection device in the protection coordination.
The visualization of the status shows the color coding of the protection device status and the
fault observations as well as the overlay symbol of the protection device.
Sub-Type defines the type you want to select.
Display Data selects the data to be displayed in the legend.
The menu item Format – Format Selection – Objects defines additional Formatting for the legend.
5.3.1 Constructing Supplementary Graphics Objects
Supplementary graphics objects have a simple construction. Essentially, they are elements with
modify markers. These markers are green. They can be moved to change the size of the element.
5.4 Editing Elements and Objects

Depending on the element in question, you can use the following editing and formatting functions:
● Position and Scale

● Aligning or Spacing
● Making Same Size
218 October 2021

Graphics Editor
● Grouping
● Order
● Rotating or Flipping
● Contour
● Text
● Edit Linked Position
5.4.1 Position and Scale
Selected network elements or objects can be easily modified in position and scale with either the
mouse or the cursor keys.
To move network elements and objects with the mouse, click an element in the selection with the left
mouse button and move it to the desired position. To change the size of the selection, click on one
of the green markers at the corners in the selection. The rotation marker can be used to rotate the
selection. If you hold down the SHIFT key, the rotation is done in steps of 45°.
If you do not want to use the mouse, you can use the cursor keys. At this cursor keys move selected
elements 0.25 mm in the designated direction. If you hold down the CONTROL key, the cursor moves
by grid units (to modify the grid settings, see the section on Grids in the chapter on Alignment Aids).
You can change the size of supplementary graphics objects by holding down the SHIFT key and
pressing the cursor keys.
If you do not wish to do this interactively, you can modify selected network elements or objects by
using the Format – Position and Scale menu. PSS SINCAL offers different editing functions:
● Position
● Scale
● Length
● Rotate
Position
Position moves selected network elements.
In Position, enter the new X and Y position for the selection. This sets the top left corner of the
selection. Close the dialog box with OK to move the selection.
October 2021 219

Graphics Editor
Scale
Scale resizes selected network elements.
Use Scale to adjust the size of the selection. Orientation sets the reference point of the scale, i.e.
the scale refers to the width and height of the point selected. If you wish to keep the aspect ratio,
click Keep aspect ratio to switch this option ON.
Length
Length modifies the length of selected node elements.
For Length, select either absolute or relative length. Depending on what you select, PSS SINCAL
displays an input field to either enter document units or a percentage.
Rotate
This defines how the selected network elements will be rotated.
Rotate defines how selection will be rotated. You need to enter the Angle and the direction of
rotation. Ref. point defines the reference point for the rotation.
220 October 2021

Graphics Editor
5.4.2 Aligning or Spacing
Objects can be placed relative to one another, as illustrated by the menu below.
You can select Left, Center, Right, Top, Middle and Bottom.
Space Across and Space Down distribute the selected objects within the Graphics Editor.
If you want to align multiple objects, select one and select the desired function. Note that when you
select elements, these must be of the same type:
● Nodes and busbars

● Node elements
● Branch elements
● Additional elements
● Supplementary graphics objects
● Texts of network elements
At aligning note that, in multiple selection, the determining object is the basis for alignment. The
determining object is displayed in a different color than other selected objects (see the section on
Selecting Using the Mouse in the chapter on Basic Functions).
Note: For network elements, the icon area is defined as an actual object and thus is the same for
all network elements. This means that the functions for Top, Middle and Bottom can produce the
same graphic display.
5.4.3 Making Same Size
Use these functions to convert objects of different sizes (widths or heights) to the same Width or
Height or total size.
5.4.4 Grouping
To group objects, you draw a selection frame around them, then select Group in the menu Format
– Group.
October 2021 221

Graphics Editor
The Group command connects the selected objects to an element.
Ungroup releases the objects from the grouping so they can again be edited individually.
5.4.5 Ordering
To define the sequence of objects, click Format – Order.
If elements are placed atop one another, their sequence determines how they are displayed on the
screen. You can reorder the elements. Bring to Front or Send to Back let you move selected
elements to the front or back of the display. This can also be done in single steps, using the functions
Bring Forward and Send Backward.
5.4.6 Rotating or Flipping
Elements can be turned or rotated on the screen by using Format – Rotate or turn.
An element can be rotated using Rotate Left and Rotate Right to turn an element by 90° stages in
the designated direction.
Flip Horizontally mirrors the element along an imaginary vertical axis in the center of the element.
Flip Vertically gives you a mirror image along an imaginary horizontal axis.
Click Custom in the menu to display the dialog box for Position and Scale where you can individually
define how the selection is rotated.
Click Unrotate to return the supplementary graphics objects to their starting position.
5.4.7 Contour
In creating or editing a polygon or a freehand line, the Format – Contour menu is particularly
important.
222 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Edit Points
This function is used to insert, edit or delete points at branch elements and supplementary graphics
objects (freehand forms and polygons). When Format – Contour – Edit Points is turned ON in the
menu, the cursor changes form.
Depending on which modify marker is in focus or depending on the activity involved, PSS SINCAL
displays the cursor for insert, delete or move.
Insert New Point
To insert a point, left-click on a line in the object.
Move Point
To move an existing point, left-click and hold down the mouse button.
Delete Point
To delete a point, press CONTROL and left-click on the point.
Adjust Points
Adjust points aligns bends of a selected network element orthogonally. This saves a lot of time
since so you do not need to place move the points of branch elements by hand afterwards.
The following illustration shows a line before and after point alignment.
Bends not adjusted Bends adjusted
October 2021 223

Graphics Editor
Delete All Points
Click Format – Contour – Delete All Points to delete all the bends for selected network elements.
Adjust to Grid
This function is used to align network elements at a later time. This can be very useful when you
want to import networks. It lets you arrange the network elements so that they are exactly at the grid
positions.
First select the network elements to be aligned in the network diagram. Then switch the function ON
with Format – Contour – Adjust to Grid in the menu.
The function aligns the selected nodes and network elements (connection points on busbars, bends
and centers of symbols) to the nearest grid point. The current grid settings are used.
5.4.8 Text
Use the Format – Text menu to format text.
Visible switches the text display for a selected network element ON or OFF.
For text alignment, there can be either Manual Adjustment, Horizontal/Vertical Adjustment or
Direction of Element Adjustment.
Standard Text Position resets the text for selected network elements to the standard position. The
text settings of View are used for the respective network element.
5.4.9 Edit Linked Position
All supplementary graphics objects can also be used as graphical link objects. This means objects
are assigned a link to a position of a view. Simply double-click on the object or click Show linked
position in the pop-up menu to switch ON the matching view and display the zoomed area.
Links can be defined with Edit linked position in the pop-up menu of the frame or with the Linked
to entry in the Properties Window.
224 October 2021

Graphics Editor
The dialog box has a list of options containing all the existing views for this network and possible
existing zoom positions.
Filter temporarily reduces views and positions. Entering the filter immediately reduces the amount
displayed in the list of options below.
Clicking Assign will save the selected position as a link.
Clicking Remove will delete the active link.
5.5 Insert Modes

The insert modes enhance working functions and assign additional data to network elements.
Most special functions use the menu Insert – Insert Modes.
Note that insert modes have calculation functions. You can, for example, activate the functions for
distance protection, overcurrent time protection and fault observation only when corresponding
procedures have been turned ON using Calculate – Methods (See the section on Presetting
Calculation Methods in the chapter on User Interface).
The selected insert mode has a special cursor and a specific mark in the menu.
Note that, to resume normal work on the network with the standard cursor, the insert modes must be
turned off. Simply click the right mouse button in an empty area.
October 2021 225

Graphics Editor
Load Group Behavior
This defines power behavior for Load Group Behavior. The cursor assigns increase data to a
graphical load group or graphical supply area.
First, select the graphic element group you want. This automatically opens the screen form where
you can enter load group behavior.
Breaker
This installs a Breaker at a network element terminal. The breaker turns network elements terminal
ON or OFF. PSS SINCAL considers the breaker (or more precisely the network element’s tripping
state) in all calculations.
Measurement Data
This function lets you define Measurement Data at a network element terminal. PSS SINCAL only
uses this measurement to simulate load assignment.
Line Reactor
This function inserts a Line Reactor at line terminals to compensate for the charging power.
Frequency Characteristics
This special cursor function lets you assign a frequency characteristic to a node (for Harmonic
Calculations). Select the node you want, and PSS SINCAL opens the screen form for entering data
for the frequency characteristics.
Note that a frequency characteristic can be placed only at nodes and busbars.
Fault Observation
This function lets you define a fault observation for the simulation procedures Multiple Fault
Calculation, Dynamics Calculation and Protection Simulation. Select the terminal for the desired
network element, and PSS SINCAL opens the screen form for entering the fault observation.
226 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Fault observations can be placed at network element terminals and node terminals.
Protection Device
This function lets you define a protection device for the Protection Coordination. Click the terminal
for the desired network element, and PSS SINCAL opens the screen form for entering data for
defining a protection device.
Note that this is possible only at node and branch elements. You can, however, assign more than
one protection device to a terminal.
5.6 Formatting
This function edits how network elements and supplementary graphics objects are displayed on the
screen.
There are different ways to change formatting. Using the format toolbar, you can assign important
attributes (color, line width, etc.) to selected objects. Alternatively, you can use specific Format dialog
boxes in pop-up menus and the main menu.
You can even format selected objects using the Property sheet (se chapter on User Interface section
Properties).
Basics of Formatting
Symbols and terminals can be given different formats at a network element. Text, switching icons
and protection icons can also be customized.
Since, however, the color assigned to a component – symbol, terminal, etc. – is normally the same
throughout, a change in the attribute is automatically passed on to similar components (symbols and
terminals) of the network element. To customize individual network element components, right-click
on them and use the pop-up menu.
5.6.1 Formatting Network Element Components
In the default setting formatting applies to the entire network element: the symbol itself and its
connections. If you want to assign a special format of a network element component (symbol or
terminal), select the component with the pop-up menu.
Click the right mouse button to turn the pop-up menu ON. PSS SINCAL opens the menu for the
network element component under the mouse cursor.
In the pop-up menu, click either Select Symbol or Select Terminal in the Select submenu.
Once the network element components have been selected, they are formatted either with the
property sheet or the toolbar.
You can also select the individual network element components with Format Element dialog box.
Select the network element and click Format – Format Selection – Elements in the menu.
October 2021 227

Graphics Editor
5.6.2 Apply Format
PSS SINCAL lets you transfer the formatting of network elements or objects to other ones. Click the
determining element and then, while holding the shift key down, click any elements with the left
mouse button where you want to transfer the formatting.
Then select Format – Apply Format in the menu or click the control button in the Format toolbar to
assign the formatting.
This is an easy way to assign the attributes to other selected elements.
5.6.3 Formatting Nodes
This section describes using the Format dialog box to format nodes and busbars. To activate this
function, use the pop-up menu or click Format – Format Selection – Nodes in the dialog box.
The Format dialog box has tabs for the many attributes of the nodes and busbars.
● General
● Line and Text
● Text Position
When you open the dialog box, PSS SINCAL displays the tab that was last opened.
228 October 2021

Graphics Editor
General
Click this tab to set the basic settings of nodes and busbars.
Layer defines the graphics layer with the node or the busbar. Object type assigns the node an
Object Type, which controls, among other things, the scope of the inscription.
Use Scale to adjust the size of the selection. Note that scale for width and height refers to the top
left point of the highlighted selection. This corner is the reference point for the scaling.
Type and Size selects the Node type (node or busbar). The Node symbol field sets the graphic
display of the node (no symbol, circle or rectangle). Node symbol size sets the size of the symbol.
Line and Text
Click this tab to set how nodes and busbars are displayed on the screen.
Line and Area set basic attributes (line width, line style, background color, ...) for nodes and busbars.
October 2021 229

Graphics Editor
Text determines settings for node text (input data and results) and symbol text.
You can set the font, alignment and color of node text and toggle the text display ON or OFF.
Text Adjust aligns text horizontally/vertically or manually (see the section on Text Alignment in the
chapter on Aligning and Positioning Text).
Text Orientation sets direction of the text flow (see the section on Orientation in the chapter on
Aligning and Positioning Text).
Text position can be used to control the alignment of the text (see the section on Text Position in
the chapter on Aligning and Positioning Text).
Text Position
Click this tab to set the position of the text.
Node Text defines the text position (for nodes, relative to node center; for busbars, relative to the
starting point) for this inscription and the distance to the X and Y axes.
5.6.4 Formatting Elements
This section describes formatting node elements and branch elements using the Format dialog box.
To activate the dialog box, use the pop-up menu or Format – Format Selection – Elements.
The Format dialog box has tabs for the many attributes of the node elements and branch elements.
● General
● Line and Text
● Text Position
● Switch
230 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Note the following when formatting text for node elements and branch elements:
● Node elements have two text fields. One displays input data, the other displays calculation
results.
● Branch elements (except for three-winding transformers) usually have three text fields. One
text field displays input data, the other two are attached to the terminals and contain calculation
results.
To preset contents of text fields, click View – Annotation and Filter (See the chapter on Annotation
of Network Elements in Network Graphics).
General
Click this tab to make basic settings for size of node elements and branch elements.
Layer regulates the graphics layer assigned to the node element or branch element. Use Object
type to assign node and branch elements to an Object Type, which controls, among other things,
the scope of the inscription.
Use Scale to adjust the size of the selection. Note that scale for width and height refers to the top
left point of the highlighted selection. This corner is the reference point for the scaling.
Symbol defines the size of the symbol. At node elements, you can select the graphic display of the
symbol individually for synchronous machines and asynchronous machines.
Symbol Types can be used to assign a graphic symbol to a network element. The list of options
contains all available symbols. Default is the standard symbol display for the network element.
October 2021 231

Graphics Editor
Line and Text
Click this tab to set how the network element components terminals and symbols are displayed on
the screen.
Line and Area defines basic attributes of the selected network element component.
Text contains the settings for text. You can set the font, alignment and text color, and switch the
text display ON or OFF.
Text Adjust lets you align the text horizontally, vertically or in the same direction as the element.
Alternatively, you can switch ON manual text alignment (see the section on Text Alignment in the
chapter on Aligning and Positioning Text).
Orientation sets direction of the text flow (see the section on Orientation in the chapter on Aligning
and Positioning Text). Note that this is not possible if the text-alignment setting Direction of Element
is switched ON.
In addition to orientation, if you align text manually, you can also set the Text Position (see the
section on Text Position in the chapter on Aligning and Positioning Text).
The lower part of the dialog box has a list of options where you can select the network element
components you want to format. PSS SINCAL provides the following options:
● All
● Symbol
● Terminal 1 to 3
All assigns the attributes to all the components of the network element (the entire network element).
PSS SINCAL only displays this list of options if network elements of the same type are being edited.
232 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Text Position
Click this tab to set the position of the text.
Symbol defines the position of the symbol text and its distance from the terminal and the symbol.
Terminal 1 to Terminal 3 define the position of the text of the respective terminals and its distance
from the node and terminal.
Switch
Click this tab to define the appearance of the switch symbol. You can set the position, alignment and
the symbol type for the switch symbol.
This dialog box sets the parameters for displaying the switch symbol and their position at the network
element terminal.
In the selection field for Switch type, click the graphic symbol of the switch.
October 2021 233

Graphics Editor
To assign the graphic orientation of the switch, use the Alignment selection field.
To set the distance from the switch to the node, use the input field for Distance node.
Switch size sets the size of the switch symbol.
5.6.5 Formatting Add Symbols
This section describes how to format add symbols (such as protection devices, fault observations,
...) using the Format dialog box. To turn it ON, use the pop-up menu or Format – Format Selection
– Add Symbols.
The Format dialog box has two tabs:
● Symbol
● Text
Symbol
Click this tab to set the add symbol display for a protection device.
Symbol allows basic attributes to be assigned to the symbol.
Layer selects the graphic layer.
Object type connects the add symbol to an Object Type that PSS SINCAL uses, among other
functions, to control the inscription scope.
Symbol Type assigns a graphic symbol to an add symbol. The list of options has all the available
symbols. Default is for the standard symbol.
Size and Position sets the Size of the add symbol as a percentage.
Distance node sets the distance of the add symbol for the node.
Alignment aligns the add symbol on the screen.
234 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Line and Area defines the width, style, color and background color of line in the add symbol.
Text
Click this tab to set the position and display type of the add symbol text.
Text sets the font, alignment and color of the text. This function can be turned ON or OFF.
Text Orientation sets the direction of the text flow (see the section on Orientation in the chapter on
Aligning and Positioning Text).
Text position can be used to control the alignment of the text (see the section on Text Position in
the chapter on Aligning and Positioning Text).
You can even define the Distance of the text from the symbol.
5.6.6 Format Objects
This section describes formatting supplementary graphics objects using the Format dialog box. To
activate this function, use the pop-up menu or Format – Format Selection – Objects.
The Format dialog box has tabs for the many attributes of the supplementary graphics objects.
● General
● Attributes
● Legend
● Text
October 2021 235

Graphics Editor
General
Click this tab to make basic settings for the size of supplementary graphics objects.
Layer and Element Code defines the layer where the supplementary graphics object is assigned.
The Code field displays the internal name for the supplementary graphics object. This code can be
changed at will and is used in different dialog boxes of the network diagram to identify supplementary
graphics objects.
Use Scale and Rotation to adjust the size of the selection. Note that scale for width and height refers
to the top left point of the highlighted selection. This corner is the reference point for the scaling.
Rotate angle rotates supplementary graphics objects in any direction.
The Margins fields Left, Right, Top and Bottom set the distance from the margin to the text. This
option is available for text objects and legends.
Attributes
Click this tab to set how supplementary graphics objects are displayed on the screen.
The number of attributes to be changed depends on what supplementary graphics object has been
selected.
236 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Line and Area defines basic attributes for supplementary graphics objects. You can set Line width,
Line style, Line color, Hatch style, etc. You can also define the appearance of the line caps (arrow
icon) and the size of the arrow. The Frame Visible option displays the frame around objects (text
field, frame, legend and diagram).
Text defines Font, Alignment and Text color. In legends, the Row space field lets you set the
space between individual legend lines.
Legend Title determines how PSS SINCAL displays the header line in legends. You enter the title
text for the legend using the Legend tab. If this field is empty, PSS SINCAL automatically generates
an appropriate text. The Font and the Line width of the dividing line can also be defined. This section
is only visible when one or more legends have been selected before the Format Object dialog box
is opened.
Legend
The legend is a special supplementary graphics object visualizing the contents of the network
elements legends (input data and results).
Click this tab for settings of element legend. This tab is only visible when one or more legends have
been selected before the Format Object dialog box is opened.
October 2021 237

Graphics Editor
In Type, you choose from the following options:
● Legend – input data:

PSS SINCAL displays the input data for network elements and nodes in the legend.
● Legend – results:
PSS SINCAL displays the results for network elements and nodes in the legend.
● Load density (only for electrical networks):
When you select Load Density Polygon, PSS SINCAL displays the load density for the
selected graphical load group in the legend.
● Evaluation:
This lets you display the settings of the active Evaluation in the legend.
Sub-Type defines the type you want to select.
Display Data selects the data PSS SINCAL will display in the legend.
Object Type lets you select the type of object, which settings PSS SINCAL will display in the legend.
Legend Style lets you select how PSS SINCAL will display the legend (short name and unit, short
name).
Title Style lets you select whether there will be a title and how PSS SINCAL will display it. You can
select a display without a title, with a simple title or with an extended title.
You enter the title text for the legend in the Title field. If the field is empty, PSS SINCAL automatically
displays an appropriate title text using the selected legend settings.
Text
PSS SINCAL lets you add text fields you want to the diagram. These can have static text as well as
variable contents as predefined format codes.
Click this tab for settings of element text. This tab is only visible when one or more texts have been
selected before the Format Object dialog box is opened.
238 October 2021

Graphics Editor
The Text content lets you use Text Field Contents (only possible in the Text object) defined a short
while before by the user under Insert – Annotations – Text Field Content.
You enter the contents of the text fields in the Text field. Pressing Ctrl and Enter inserts a word-
wrap for multi-line texts.
In the input field, you can enter predefined format codes anywhere as well as normal text. When the
diagram is displayed, these entries are replaced by the current contents.
PSS SINCAL has the following format codes:

Date &[Date]
Time &[Time]
File name &[File]
Results &[Result]
Subresults &[Subresult]
Variant &[Variant]
Variant path &[Variant Path]
Scale &[Print Scale]
Name of current diagram &[Chart]
Type of current diagram &[Chart Type]
Information on current diagram &[Chart Info]
Title1 &[Title]
Subject1 &[Subject]
Author1 &[Author]
Company1 &[Company]
October 2021 239

Graphics Editor
Comments1 &[Comment]
Dynamics variable2 &[Dynamics:Name]
Description &[Descr:Description Name]
1)
The contents of these fields come from the Properties dialog box under the menu item File –
Properties.
2)
This format code is only available for dynamics calculations in electrical networks. The format code
is made up of the fixed entry "Dynamics:" and a variable name to be freely entered. The variable
name stands for the name of the variable in the dialog box for the Variable for Dynamics.
3)
This format code consists of both the fixed entry "Descr:" and a description name you can enter. The
description name reflects the name entered in the Description dialog box.
In addition to predefined format codes, PSS SINCAL lets you perform database queries as select
commands. You can place these anywhere in the text.
If a select command has more than one line of results, PSS SINCAL displays only the first one. If no
data are found, PSS SINCAL displays the text SQL_ERROR_NO_DATA.
To perform a query, use the following syntax:

![SELECT …]
The syntax for the select assignment depends on what database system you use and can be found
in the respective database system documentation. If the select command has a syntax error or an
error occurs when it is executed, PSS SINCAL displays SQL_ERROR.
Examples:
![SELECT Name, 'fP =', fp FROM Manipulation WHERE Mpl_Id = 1]
![SELECT Name, 'fQ =', fq FROM Manipulation WHERE Mpl_Id = 1]
![SELECT Format( hh, '##9.000') FROM Node WHERE Node_ID = 8]
![SELECT Format( Ti, "ddd, dd. mmm. yyyy" ) FROM Node WHERE Node_ID = 8]
![SELECT Parameter, DataVal, Descr FROM MacroValue WHERE (TRIM(Parameter) = '#T' AND Macro_ID = 4)]
5.6.7 Format View
This section describes formatting the view or the worksheet using PSS SINCAL's Format dialog box.
Activate it with the pop-up menu or Format – Format View.
The Format dialog box has the following tabs.
● View
● Selection
● Lines and Routes
240 October 2021

Graphics Editor
View
Click this tab to set basic characteristics of the worksheet.
The Display Settings section sets global preliminary settings for the view of the worksheet.
The Background Color option sets the worksheet color.
Click Options to display a dialog box for setting view options. Options buttons switch these ON or
OFF.
● Invert Mode:
This option activates an inverse network display.
● Show Substations:
This option switches the display of the substation graphics ON or OFF.
● Show Routes:
This option switches the display for the route model ON and OFF.
● Show ToolTip:
This option automatically displays a Tooltip for the network elements under a resting mouse
cursor.
● Fill Text Background:
When this option is activated, PSS SINCAL displays all text of the network elements with a
border. This border is filled with the worksheet color.
● Show Connection Type:
This option activates a function that lets you see the characteristics of connection types.
PSS SINCAL can display connections in electrical networks in one, two or three colors. With
heating/cooling networks, PSS SINCAL can display the loop (forward or return line).
● PF-Arrow (extended):
In electrical networks this option shows the flow direction of active and reactive power
individually.
● Flow direction (extended):
This option displays the flow direction in pipe networks separately.
October 2021 241

Graphics Editor
● Enable Switch Color:

If this option is activated, breakers and switches are shown according to the defined colors.
● Transformer – Draw Windings:
This option turns ON the display of vector group symbols in two- and three-winding
transformers.
● Transformer – Draw Ground:
This option lets you turn ON the display of the ground symbol.
● Transformer – Draw Autotransformer:
This option switches the display of the autotransformer symbol ON.
● Draw Controller:
This option marks network elements that have controller data with an additional symbol.
● Draw Grounding:
Grounding symbols are drawn if network elements are grounded.
● Draw Extended Breaker Symbols:
With this option additional information (such as Remote Control) is shown for the switches
graphically with the symbol in the network graphic.
● ProtDevice – Show Current:
With this option the current registered in the activated and tripped protection devices is
indicated by an arrow in the protection coordination results.
Extended visibility of network elements is used for entering settings for future elements and
elements out of service.
In the Future Elements field, you can select whether to display network elements with establishment
times after the observation period (in the Calculation Settings), either normally, hidden or colorized.
If Colorize is switched ON, you can set both color and line type.
In the Elements out of service field you can select whether network elements set to Out of service
or shut down are displayed normally, hidden or in color. If Colorize is switched ON, you can set both
color and line type.
Element Symbols selects the icon library used to display network elements.
The Library defines how network element icons appear on the screen. The library for the network
diagram can be customized. Currently, there are the libraries Standard and ANSI.
The Symbol Factor is the percentage, by which the size of the icon for all network elements is
multiplied. The Add Symbol Factor is used for attachments (protection devices, fault observation,
...) in a way similar to Symbol Factor.
242 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Selection
This tab defines the basic characteristics for selecting and editing in the Graphics Editor.
Selection sets the color and line type with which selected objects are displayed on the screen. If
more than one element has been selected, PSS SINCAL differentiates between determining object
and additional objects. This lets you, for example, transfer the attributes of the determining object to
other objects.
Selection Style sets the color of the determining object, when selected. The second color defines
how colors are displayed for any other objects selected. You can even define the line type for these
objects.
Show Selection Indicator activates a special marker for selected objects at multiple selections. This
enables to determine the position of selected objects in large networks.
Show Terminal Indicator switches the display of the connection numbers for selected network
elements on or off. PSS SINCAL displays network element connections by superimposing numbers.
Show Text Indicator specifies how text is allocated to the selected network elements with reference
lines.
Modification makes preliminary global settings for edit in the Graphics Editor.
Modify markers have to be displayed for PSS SINCAL network elements to be edited graphically.
Enable modification at zoom level defines the zoom levels where additional markers are displayed.
With very small zoom steps, this helps you to avoid unwanted modifications to network elements
(because they cannot be seen or controlled).
In individual selections, Enable drag of objects independent of zoom level specifies whether
elements and objects can be moved at their contour. PSS SINCAL only switches this ON when it
reaches a zoom step that is larger than the specified zoom factor. If this option is not switched ON,
elements and objects can only be modified with the help of the main markers.
October 2021 243

Graphics Editor
Select text of network objects lets you select network elements also by clicking on the attached
text. Normally it is better to switch this option OFF if you are working with very dense networks with
geographic coordinates. In this way, you can be certain that the correct elements are selected even
if they have network element text in front of them.
Use Automatically adjust points of network elements to automatically align bends orthogonally
when you edit network elements. When this is switched on, PSS SINCAL aligns all connected branch
elements when you move a branch element or a node.
This function can also be switched on for individual branch elements with the pop-up menu (see the
section on Pop-Up Menu for Network Elements and Network Element Components in the chapter on
Network Elements).
Lines and Routes
This tab defines the basic characteristics for lines and routes.
The Calculate Length of Lines and Routes section activates automatically calculation of line and
route length when creating and modifying them.
● Never:
This option switches OFF automatic calculations of the length completely.
● At insertion:
This option activates the automatic calculations only for new lines and routes.
● At modification:
If this option is ON, PSS SINCAL calculates the line and route length, when inserting or moving
them.
Note that calculations of length are based on the preset scale. Therefore, this function works only
with Geographical Networks.
244 October 2021

Graphics Editor
The Route Options section presets the global processing options for the route model. You use these
settings when you want to create lines or make subsequent assignments to the route model. The
following options can be switched ON or OFF:
● Consider route type:

This option considers the route type (route for a cable or overhead line). This is set when you
create the first route. When you assign a route, the type of line determines what type of route is
possible.
● Consider configuration:
When this option is switched ON, PSS SINCAL only uses routes for algorithms that provide
enough room for at least one line. Enter the maximum allocation for the route in a data input
form.
● Consider voltage specification at route:
When this option is switched ON, PSS SINCAL only considers routes whose admissible
voltage range includes the current value for the line voltage.
5.7 Layers
Layers are used to determine the amount of information displayed on the screen. The Graphics Editor
only displays elements assigned to visible graphics layers.
To open the dialog box for edit layers, Click View – Layer.
The Layers dialog box lets you add, delete and select layers in the Graphics Editor. Graphics layers
can be renamed directly in the list. Simply click entry you want in the list and click again, or press F2
or use the pop-up menu.
Layers for the screen and for the printer can, independent of one another, be made visible or invisible
and locked for processing. The Visible and Print option buttons are available for this purpose.
Editing of the elements within the layer can also be controlled. This is done with the options Frozen
and Locked. With the option Frozen the elements assigned to the layer can be selected and their
data can be edited in the masks, but a graphical modification of the position is not possible. With the
Locked option, editing is not possible.
October 2021 245

Graphics Editor
Visibility on the screen can even be coupled with the zoom factor. This means the graphics layer is
only visible when the zoom factor entered is reached. Entering 0 as a zoom factor effectively turns
this function OFF.
In this dialog box, the Select button has special functions. In the Graphics Editor, this button selects
all network elements and supplementary graphics objects assigned to the layer selected in the dialog
box.
The layer dialog box always contains Standard and Plot Header layers. PSS SINCAL automatically
generates both these layers when a new network is created.
The Plot Header layer normally contains the objects for the inscription creating the plot header. This
layer has special characteristics:
● Inscription elements in this layer are customized to the page format before output.
● Elements in this layer are automatically aligned in the right lower margin.
● No network elements can be created in this layer.
Multiple graphics layers can be defined with plot header characteristics. Note that only one graphics
layer is actually printed as a plot header. This layer can be selected in the Page Setup dialog box.
Layers can be sorted at will. Select an entry in the list, then hold down the SHIFT key and press the
cursor buttons to move the layer up or down.
When network elements and supplementary graphics objects are created, PSS SINCAL assigns
these to the layer selected in the toolbar of the Graphics Editor.
5.8 Object Type

The object type can be assigned to network elements as additional formatting and evaluation criteria,
which lets you create different annotations and filter evaluations for network elements. Object types
are similar to layers in the way they work.
To manage object types, click View – Object Type.
This dialog box lists all available object types. The list always contains a Standard object type as a
default that cannot be deleted.
246 October 2021

Graphics Editor
To create an object type, click Add. To delete object types selected in the list, click Delete.
In this dialog box, the Select button has special functions. In the Graphics Editor, it selects all network
elements assigned to the selected object type in the dialog box.
Object types can be renamed directly in the list. Simply click entry you want in the list and click again,
or press F2 or use the pop-up menu.
Visible makes the inscription of network elements for the particular object type visible or invisible.
Visibility of the inscription on the screen can even be coupled with the zoom factor. This means that
the inscriptions of the network elements are only visible when the zoom factor entered is reached.
Entering 0 as a zoom factor effectively turns this function OFF.
As network elements are created, PSS SINCAL assigns them to the object type selected in the
toolbar of the Graphics Editor.
You can even sort the object types as you wish. Simply select an entry in the list and move it up or
down by holding the SHIFT key down and pressing the cursor buttons.
5.9 Views
This function lets you create the network diagram graphically in different ways. Different views of a
network with completely separate graphics can be created to display a network both with geographic
coordinates and schematically, for example.
Networks always have a Base View and as many Additional Views as you want. You can open and
close additional views, as you need them, but not Base View. PSS SINCAL always loads Base View
with the network. Closing Base View closes the network and all additional views.
You can create as many zoom positions as you want for each view. Zoom positions save a section
of the diagram for the view (i.e. position and zoom step) under any name you want. Zoom positions
are a very useful tool if you are working with large networks. They are an easy way to switch between
important diagram sections.
File – Views in the menu opens the dialog box for selecting and administering views.
October 2021 247

Graphics Editor
This dialog box has a list of options containing all the existing views for this network and possible
existing zoom positions. This list always has the Base View. PSS SINCAL displays views that are
currently open in the dialog box with a colored symbol.
To help you distinguish between views, individual names can be assigned. The title bar in the window
of the Graphics Editor displays the name of the view after the network name.
Filter temporarily reduces what PSS SINCAL displays in the list. Entering the filter immediately
reduces the amount displayed in the list of options below.
Open Views and Zoom Positions
To open a desired view, first select this in the list of options and then click Open. If the view is already
open, PSS SINCAL only switches it ON and brings it to the foreground.
Another quick way to open a view or zoom position, or to switch between the views or zoom positions
is to double-click on the desired entry in the list. PSS SINCAL automatically closes the dialog box
and switches the view or the zoom position ON.
Close Views
To close an open view, select this in the list and click Close. Views can also be closed with the pop-
up menu.
Add Views
To create a new view, first select the original view you want in the dialog box. Then click Add or
switch Add ON with the pop-up menu for the entry in the list. This creates the new view and opens
the Page Setup dialog box.
This dialog box lets you define the Page Size and the Scale for this view. Click OK to close the dialog
box and either press F2 or use the pop-up menu to rename the new view in the list.
Add Zoom Positions
To create a new zoom position, first select the desired view in the dialog box. Click Add Pos. (or
select Add Position in the pop-up menu for the entry in the list). This stores the current zoom area
in the selected view as zoom position.
You can also change the sequence of zoom positions in the dialog box manually. Select the zoom
position you want, hold down the SHIFT key and then move the cursor buttons either up or down.
Updating Zoom Positions
This function changes an existing zoom position. Simply click Update Position in the pop-up menu
for the selected zoom position. This overwrites the old zoom position with the current zoom area of
the Graphics Editor.
248 October 2021

Graphics Editor
Delete Views and Zoom Positions
To delete a selected view or zoom position, press Delete or switch Delete ON in the pop-up menu
of the entry in the list. In views, this deletes all graphic data for this view, but the network data still
remains complete.
Once the view or the zoom position has been deleted this cannot be undone, so before the view is
deleted PSS SINCAL has a confirmation message that you confirm with OK.
Defining the Standard View
The Standard option makes it possible to define the standard view, which is automatically displayed
when the network is opened. The currently selected standard view is shown in bold type in the list.
Create Network Elements
To enter existing network elements graphically in the views, there is an Update Graphics function in
the Network Browser that you can switch ON with View – Network Browser in the menu. This only
generates graphic data for the respective view.
General Remarks
PSS SINCAL has additional functions and options to simplify working with views:
● Automatic selection of specific network elements in all views by switching the Synchronize
selection in all views option ON in the Options dialog box
● Selection of specific network elements in more than one view with the menu item Edit – Select
– in all Views
● Deleting network elements
Example of Working with Multiple Views
The following example illustrates how you can work with multiple views with the following
PSS SINCAL network.
The following illustration shows a PSS SINCAL network in base view.
Open the view dialog with File – Views in the menu. The dialog box will already have the Base View.
To generate a new view, click Add. Then you can define parameters in the open dialog box for
Create new View.
October 2021 249

Graphics Editor
After you finish defining the page format, PSS SINCAL displays the new view in the list of options of
the dialog box. Press F2 or use the pop-up menu to assign an individual name.
To work in the new view, it needs to be open. Either double-click on the view name in the list or click
Open to open the view.
The new view is completely empty. You can now create any new network elements you want with
PSS SINCAL standard functions. You can even create graphics for existing network elements in this
view. Open the Network Browser with View – Network Browser in the menu and switch the
Topology function ON in the selection field. The menu in the filter field makes it possible to activate
manual or automatic updating.
The dialog box displays the nodes that can be updated. In this example, ORT1 and ORT2 are
generated graphically using manual updating. Nodes can be moved from the dialog box in the
Graphics Editor to the desired position by with drag & drop by pressing the left mouse button.
250 October 2021

Graphics Editor
PSS SINCAL functions let you generate the network graphically step by step.
The following illustration shows the updated network in the new view.
Once network elements are created in a view, these can be updated graphically at any time in
another view. In our example, we have attached a general load to the ORT node in Base View and
created a new line L13 from the IND node.
The Update Graphics function is used to create graphics for both new elements.
October 2021 251

Graphics Editor
To generate the new line L13, the new end node N9 is simply dragged from the list in the Graphics
Editor. PSS SINCAL automatically generates the line once the node is placed. To create the missing
load at the node ORT, Create Elements first needs to be switched ON in the pop-up menu. This
produces the following illustration in the additional view:
5.10 Text Field Contents

In a graphic, text fields can be used. The contents of these fields change automatically depending
on what type of calculations or variant has been selected in the Graphics Editor (e.g. the title in the
plot header). The use of text field contents enables this dynamic adaptation of contents.
Editing Text Field Contents
To edit text field contents, click Insert – Annotations – Text Field Content.
PSS SINCAL displays the dialog box for Text Field Content.
The dialog box contains two lists of options. Variables lists all available variables. Contents displays
all selected variably assigned contents.
252 October 2021

Graphics Editor
To define new text field contents, click New. Thus a new variable is created.
In the next step click the Add Content button to assign special text contents to the variable for
different criteria.
The above dialog box is used to define Criteria and Variant for text contents. Both these conditions
display the contents only when they are the same as the settings in the Graphics Editor (displayed
input data and results, selected variant).
You can enter any text you want in the Text field. Alternatively, you can use predefined tokens.
Using Text Field Contents
Text field contents can be used in text fields for supplementary graphics objects.
Assign these variables with the dialog box for formatting objects in the menu Format – Format
Selection – Objects. Select the variable in the list of options in Text content on the Legend and
Text tab.
5.11 Zoom
An essential function for creating networks is the ability to zoom to any degree. Depending on what
you work, you select the desired display size of the network diagram.
Zoom functions are in the submenu View – Zoom.
October 2021 253

Graphics Editor
5.11.1 Zoom
The Zoom dialog box is used to set the zoom size.
Enter a zoom factor as a percentage in the User Defined section.
Select Zoom lets you specify the zoom size.
● Paper size:
PSS SINCAL displays the whole page on the screen.
● Paper width:
PSS SINCAL adjusts the size of the network diagram to fit the page width.
● Paper height:
PSS SINCAL adjust the size of the network diagram to fit the page height.
● All objects:
PSS SINCAL displays all visible objects in the network diagram on the screen.
● Selected objects:
PSS SINCAL displays all selected objects in the network diagram on the screen.
5.11.2 Select Zoom Area
This zooms the view of a section and creates a rectangle in the Graphics Editor. When this mode is
active, PSS SINCAL displays a special cursor.
This function contains also the opportunity of reactivation the previous zoom. For this hold down the
Ctrl key and left-click the mouse button.
To continue working normally on the network and return to the standard cursor, click the right mouse
button in an empty area to turn the zoom OFF.
5.11.3 Zoom Viewer
To easily edit a section of a diagram, click View – Zoom – Zoom Viewer. One advantage of the
Zoom Viewer is that, in large networks, a section of a displayed zoom section can be moved easily.
254 October 2021

Graphics Editor
The Zoom Viewer has the following characteristics:
● The Zoom Viewer displays the whole worksheet.

● The section of the diagram currently displayed in the Graphics Editor has a "rectangular box"
with a light background.
● This area can be enlarged and reduced by pulling the lines with the mouse or the cursor keys
or moved as a whole. To change the size, hold down the SHIFT key and press the cursor keys.
● Changes to the section of the diagram can be seen in the Graphics Editor.
● Press R to update the zoom viewer. PSS SINCAL will update how the network is displayed and
zoom to the part of the network seen on the screen.
● To close the Zoom Viewer, click the close button, press F11 or click in the Graphics Editor.
Caution: PSS SINCAL temporarily stores the contents of the Zoom Viewer in a bitmap. This
assures that the zoom viewer can be opened quickly in larger networks. If necessary, the contents
can be changed by pressing R.
5.11.4 Zoom to Selection
With this function the zoom can be set automatically in such a way that all selected objects in the
Graphics Editor are visible.
5.11.5 Hand Tool
This function is used to move the visible zoom area. When this mode is active, PSS SINCAL displays
a special cursor.
To continue working normally on the network and return to the standard cursor, click the right mouse
button in an empty area to turn the hand OFF.
5.12 Alignment Aids

Alignment aids ease the use of graphics elements.
● Grids
● Rulers
● Crosshair Cursor
October 2021 255

Graphics Editor
● Selection Indicator
5.12.1 Grids
Grids make it easier for users to orient themselves in PSS SINCAL graphics by adapting the network
to a standard display. Click View – Tools – Show Grid to toggle these grids ON and OFF.
To change the settings for grid display, switch View – Tools – Grid Settings ON in the menu.
Switch Show grid ON to display the grid in the Graphics Editor. You can also define the color of the
grid lines.
Enter the grid spacing in the input fields for Height and Width. Grid spacing defines the size of the
grid squares, indicated in points.
Switch Show Guidelines ON to display additional guidelines in the Graphics Editor. You can also
define color of the guidelines.
If Snap to Grid is switched ON, elements and objects snap to the grid lines when they are created
or moved.
5.12.2 Ruler
View – Tools – Rulers in the menu switches rulers ON or OFF.
If you move around an area in the Graphics Editor, the position marker on the ruler adjust to the new
position.
The ruler displays the units set in the Page Setup dialog box (see the section on Scale in the chapter
on Basic Functions).
The ruler has another special function – guidelines. Simply click the left mouse button in the ruler to
create any horizontal and vertical guidelines you want and move it in the Graphics Editor. These
guidelines are a practical alignment tool for schematic networks. Guidelines can also be deleted with
the ruler’s pop-up menu.
256 October 2021

Graphics Editor
5.12.3 Crosshair Cursor
A cross extends the cursor with vertical and horizontal help lines. This is for user orientation himself
in the PSS SINCAL Diagram View.
Click View – Tools – Crosshair Cursor to turn the cross ON or OFF.
5.12.4 Selection Indicator
This function switches the display for the selection indicators ON or OFF.
Click View – Tools – Selection Indicator in the menu to do this.
This activates a special marker for selected objects at multiple selections. This enables to determine
the position of selected objects in large networks.
October 2021 257

Tabular View
6. Tabular View
The input data and results of the network elements can be displayed next to the Graphics Editor
also in Tabular View.
Click View – Tabular View.
Basic elements of the tabular view:
● Toolbar (#1)
● Browser (#2)
● Table (#3)
Tabular View lets you clearly display all input and output data. Integrated search, filter and sort
functions let you make evaluations quickly and easily.
When working with Tabular View, note the following points:
● Topological changes are impossible

● Changes in output data are not applied in the database
6.1 Structure of Tabular View

The window of Tabular View is divided into the following main areas:
● A toolbar
● A browser for data selection
258 October 2021

Tabular View
● A table
Toolbar
This toolbar activates the important functions of the Tabular View.
Toggle browser
Defining filter and visibility
Settings for filter and visibility
Filter by selection
Enable/disable filter
Reset filter
Switch the filter row ON and OFF
Switch filter with network browser ON and OFF
Edit network data displayed in Tabular View in the data screen form
Select a network element in the Graphics Editor selected in Tabular

View
Fill in data
Calculate the sum of selected data
Previous page (only with external databases). Pressing the Shift key
at the same time scrolls to the first page.
Position indicator for external databases
Next page (only for external databases). Pressing the Shift key at the
same time scrolls to the last page.
Browser for Data Selection
PSS SINCAL differentiates among sections for input data, results and database queries.
Input Data contains all input data available in PSS SINCAL, organized thematically. Selecting a type
in the browser displays related data in the table.
October 2021 259

Tabular View
The Results contain all available calculation results and all result compilations defined in the
network, organized according to calculation methods.
Database Queries lists all queries defined in the database. This tool is very useful when there are
large amounts of data.
The External Databases section lists all databases from the data directory that were generated by
the PSS SINCAL calculation and contain the results in reduced form.
The accompanying example shows the network element node in Input Data. The table displays the
data of all network nodes.
Table
This area displays data of the type selected in the browser.
The first line is for the inscriptions and units of the data and cannot be edited. Each subsequent line
in the table is equivalent to a record in the database.
6.2 Functions for Working in Tabular View

PSS SINCAL provides the following functions for working in Tabular View:
● Editing Data
● Display Options
● Selecting Network Elements
● Finding and Replacing Data
● Copying in Tabular View
● Sorting Functions
● Calculating Total Values
● Filter Functions in Tabular View
● Enhanced pop-up menu functions in Tabular View
6.2.1 Editing Data
Only data that already exist can be modified in Tabular View. For consistency throughout the
program, data can be neither inserted nor deleted.
Lines selected in the table can be edited at any time with the data screen forms. To turn this function
ON, click Network Data in the pop-up menu.
260 October 2021

Tabular View
Data screen forms offer more complete processing possibilities than tables. In a data screen form,
you can also edit attributes that are not displayed or are unavailable in the table.
6.2.2 Display Options
Table – Display Options in the menu configures enhanced visibility settings for Tabular View.
Single Branch Results hides double results for network element connections (start/end). This
means that if a branch element has two results, PSS SINCAL only displays the first one in the results.
Only Visible Elements restricts the display to network elements visible in the Graphics Editor.
PSS SINCAL checks whether the graphics layer of the network element is visible or invisible (see
the section on Layers in the chapter on the Graphics Editor).
October 2021 261

Tabular View
Selected Elements reduces the display in Tabular View to elements selected with Select in Tabular
View.
The Reset Selected Elements option removes the selection filter from the tabular view.
If Indicate ReadOnly Attributes is switched ON, PSS SINCAL displays attributes for input data that
cannot be modified in gray lettering.
Freeze Topology Columns fixes columns with topology attributes for network elements to the left
border of Tabular View. Then PSS SINCAL always displays these attributes, something that is
particularly practical for tables with a lot of attributes.
The Show Short Names option causes the short names of nodes and network elements to be
displayed in the topology fields. If this option is deactivated, the long names of these elements are
displayed.
The Show Primary Key option displays an additional column in the Tabular View with the primary
key of the active table.
6.2.3 Selecting Network Elements
This function lets you select, for the Graphics Editor, a network element that is displayed in Tabular
View (e.g. a node).
Select the desired line in Tabular View, then open the pop-up menu. Activate Select in Graphics.
You can also select multiple lines and display these in the Graphics Editor.
You can also click Edit – Select in Graphics in the menu to select elements to be displayed.
262 October 2021

Tabular View
Database Queries
The database queries have a special function. These are defined directly in the database and can
be visualized in the tabular view. A database query enables any information to be visualized. This
information can be structured as required. To enable network elements to be selected, the database
queries can be searched by key fields in order to identify the appropriate network elements.
The following key fields are supported:
● Node
● Element
● Terminal
● Substation
● VoltLevel und VoltageLevel
● NetwLevel und NetworkLevel
● NetworkGroup
● NetworkArea
If one of these terms and the string _ID appears in a column of the table header, this field is used to
collect IDs and database types for the selection in the graphic.
The priorities of the selections are defined as in the previously stated order.
● "Node", "Element" and "Terminal" and

● "VoltLevel", "VoltageLevel", "NetwLevel", "NetworkLevel" and
● "NetworkGroup" and "NetworkArea"
have equal status here.
6.2.4 Finding and Replacing Data
The Find function works only in individual columns, i.e. PSS SINCAL searches only in the column
where the cursor is resting.
To turn the search function ON, click Edit – Find.
Replacing works the same way as finding, column by column. Click Edit – Replace in the menu to
open the dialog box.
October 2021 263

Tabular View
In the Replace dialog box, enter the search argument and the replacement text. Click Replace to
replace the text selected in the table.
Replace All replaces all search arguments in the selected area.
6.2.5 Copying in Tabular View
Using the valuable Tabular View copying function, you can export all data in the table for processing
in other Windows programs (e.g. Microsoft Excel).
Select the desired cells in the table, then open the pop-up menu and click Copy. This copies the
selected cells to the clipboard, from where you can insert the data into any Windows program.
Filling in Data
Tabular View also has a Fill Selection function to simplify copying data in a column.
To select an area, left-click in a column and drag the mouse. The marked starting point is that cell
from which the other cells get the data. When you finish selecting, PSS SINCAL displays the output
cell in white and the remaining area in black. When you click Edit – Fill Selection, PSS SINCAL fills
the selected area with the data from the output cell.
6.2.6 Sorting Functions
One key function of Tabular View is evaluating data, which can be done quickly and easily with the
integrated sort function.
To Sort displayed data, select the sorting (ascending or descending) with the pop-up menu.
264 October 2021

Tabular View
Default Order resets the sorting by the pop-up menu to the default order. PSS SINCAL then displays
the data in the default sequence.
This type of the sorting is always only for one column. For multi-stage sorting, use Filter Functions.
6.2.7 Calculating Total Values
Total values must be calculated column by column. You can select an area by left-clicking and
dragging the mouse. Edit – Sum Selection in the menu switches calculations for sums ON.
The Sum Selection dialog box calculates the following values from the selected area:
● Count:
Number of selected cells
● Sum:
Sum of all values in the selected cells
● Min:
Smallest value of all values in the selected cells
October 2021 265

Tabular View
● Max:
Largest value of all values in the selected cells
● Avg:
Average value of all values in the selected cells
● Std.Dev.:
Standard deviation of all values in the selected cells
6.2.8 Filter Functions in Tabular View
The filter function reduces the data displayed in Tabular View. Switch this ON with the toolbar or the
pop-up menu.
Defining filter and visibility
Selecting filter settings
Filter by selection
Enable/disable filter
Reset filter
Switch the filter row ON and OFF
Switch filter with network browser ON and OFF
Defining Filter and Visibility
This function defines filter settings. Open the Filter and Visibility dialog box.
266 October 2021

Tabular View
Active setting in the list of options is used to manage different kinds of settings. You can even store
settings to be used again at a later time. Select New, Rename and Delete next to the list of options.
These settings are used to define all the visibility and filter settings for Tabular View. You can select
settings later with the Tabular View toolbar.
In the Attributes section there is a filter field where you can reduce the amount of display of the list.
The list shows the current settings and is divided in four columns.
● Sorting:
This column sets the sorting. Simply click to select ascending, descending or unsorted.
● Visibility:
This column determines whether PSS SINCAL displays this attribute in Tabular View. Either
click the options button or press the spacebar to switch visibility ON.
● Attribute:
This column lists the names of all the available fields for the record.
● Filter:
This column defines filter rules for an attribute. Select the attribute you want in the list and click
Edit Filter. Now you can define the filter by entering an operator (=, <>, >, >=, <, <=) and a
filter value. In text queries, wildcards can be used. Several filter queries can be logically linked
together using the AND && and OR || operators.
The sequence of the lines can be changed by holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the cursor
button. This does not work with topology fields. Here the sequence cannot be modified.
Edit Filter defines the filter rules for an attribute. Reset Filter deletes all filter rules for the active
setting. Press Reset Sort to delete all the settings for sorting.
Beneath the list of active filter settings PSS SINCAL displays a detailed description (field description
and unit) for the selection.
October 2021 267

Tabular View
Filters can also be edited with the pop-up menu in the list.
Show All Attributes and Hide All Attributes in the menu let you set the visibility of all the attributes
in the list. Reset Sort removes all specified sorts for the active setting. Restore Default Settings
sets the entire list back to the default values.
To close the dialog box, click OK. This reduces the amount displayed in Tabular View according to
the filter setting.
Selecting Filter Settings
If additional settings are specified in the filter dialog box, these can be selected with the Tabular View
toolbar. What PSS SINCAL displays in the table depends on the scope and filter setting for the entry.
Filter By Selection
This function specifies a filter for the column you have selected. PSS SINCAL uses the value of the
active cell as the filter value for the column. As the filter operator, PSS SINCAL automatically enters
the character "=".
Filter Excluding Selection
This function specifies a filter for the column you have selected. PSS SINCAL uses the value of the
active cell as the filter value for the column. As the filter operator, PSS SINCAL automatically enters
the character "<>". This means that PSS SINCAL displays data that do not meet the filter criteria.
Enable/Disable Filter
This function switches the filter ON or OFF. Disabling only switches the filter OFF, i.e. the existing
filter settings are not deleted.
Reset Filter
268 October 2021

Tabular View
This function removes all filter settings completely. PSS SINCAL displays the data unfiltered.
Using a Filter Row
Click Table – Filter Row to display a filter row in the table. This reduces amount of data displayed
in the table.
The filter row can be used in two ways. It lets you use a simple typing filter to reduce the amount to
be displayed. It also lets you define a query for numbers fields. This means you can assign an
operator (=, <>, >, >=, <, <=) with a filter value. OR or AND can be used to combine multiple
expressions in a query.
Filter with Network Browser
If this function is activated, only the data corresponding to the element selected in the network
browser with topology is shown in tabular view. All data is always displayed if this function is
deactivated or if no element is selected in the network browser.
Clicking Table – Filter with Network Browser enables this function to be switched on or off.
October 2021 269

Tabular View
6.2.9 Enhanced Pop-Up Menu Functions in Tabular View
In Tabular View, right-clicking opens a pop-up menu which provides additional editing functions.
Network Data
When you select Network Data in the pop-up menu, PSS SINCAL displays the Input Screen Form
for the network element.
Linked Data
This function is only available, if the selected cell is a linked field (e.g. profiles, manipulator, ...). By
selecting Linked Data in the pop-up menu, the respective screen form for the selected link is opened.
Results
When you select Results in the pop-up menu, PSS SINCAL displays the results screen form for the
network element.
Node Results
The node results stored in the database for the selected data sets can be called in the table via the
Node Results menu. Like with the network graphic, these can be displayed in the result data screen
forms.
Branch Results
The branch results saved in the database can be called for the selected data sets in the table via the
Branch Results menu. Like with the network graphic, these can be displayed in the result data
screen forms.
270 October 2021

Tabular View
Select in Graphics
The Select in Graphics function lets you select, for the Graphics Editor, a network element that is
displayed in Tabular View (e.g. a node).
Set Network Data
Set Network Data lets you modify the attributes of more than one network element selected in the
Tabular View at the same time.
Set Input State
Set Input State sets the input state for at least one selected network element in the Tabular View.
Switches
The Switches function enables the terminals of the network elements selected in the Tabular View
to be opened or closed.
Filter and Visibility
This function opens the Filter and Visibility dialog box, in which the filter settings can be defined.
Filter By Selection
The Filter By Selection function specifies a filter for the column you have selected. PSS SINCAL
uses the value of the active cell as the filter value for the column. As the filter operator, PSS SINCAL
automatically enters the character "=".
Filter Excluding Selection
The Filter Excluding Selection function specifies a filter for the column you have selected.
PSS SINCAL uses the value of the active cell as the filter value for the column. As the filter operator,
PSS SINCAL automatically enters the character "<>". This means that PSS SINCAL displays data
that do not meet the filter criteria.
Enable/Disable Filter
The Enable/Disable Filter function switches the filter ON or OFF. Disabling only switches the filter
OFF, i.e. the existing filter settings are not deleted.
Sort Ascending
The Sort Ascending function is used to sort the selected column in ascending order.
Sort Descending
The Sort Descending function is used to sort the selected column in descending order.
October 2021 271

Tabular View
Default Order
The Default Order function resets the sorting by the pop-up menu to the default order. PSS SINCAL
then displays the data in the default sequence.
Cut
The Cut function works like copying, except that the parts selected are immediately deleted.
Copy
Click Copy to copy network elements, supplementary graphics objects, text or even entire networks
or subnetworks to the Clipboard for placing in another position.
Paste
The Paste function enables cells which were copied to the Clipboard beforehand with the Copy
function to be inserted at the current cursor position.
6.3 Result Compilations

The browser shows all Result Compilations defined in the network under Results.
If this view is activated, clicking the Filter and Visibility button opens the dialog box for the selected
result compilation.
All filter functions likewise refer to all filters defined in the result compilation dialog box.
6.4 Database Queries

In Tabular View, PSS SINCAL lets you display results of any query in the database. This lets you
add your own evaluations in the database and display these in the PSS SINCAL User Interface.
Database queries are implemented based on the Microsoft ADO (Active Data Objects) technology,
letting you view and evaluate large amounts of data very quickly.
PSS SINCAL automatically displays all queries available in the database in the browser. Simply click
to display them in the same way as input data and results. The working functions are, with few
exceptions, identical to those for input data and results.
Note, however, that data cannot be modified in database queries. Queries are exclusively for
purposes of visualization and evaluation.
6.5 External Databases

PSS SINCAL allows you to store calculation results in external databases that do not fit into the
network database structurally or in terms of the result range.
272 October 2021

Tabular View
These results databases are listed in the section External Databases of the tabular view and contain
simplified topology information in addition to the results.
Because the external databases are designed to store extensive results, only part of the data is
displayed in the tabular view. The number of data records to be displayed can be set using the
Options dialog box in the Common Settings for Screen Forms and Tabular View. The toolbar can be
used to scroll through the results.
In addition to forward and backward scrolling, it is also possible to jump to a specific data record by
entering the item.
6.6 Printing Tables

Data in Tabular View can be printed. The page can be set up and printed using the same menu items
as in the Graphics Editor. Here, however, there are additional functions.
October 2021 273

Diagram View
7. Diagram View
Some types of PSS SINCAL calculations also provide the results as diagrams. To display these
diagrams, click View – Diagram View.
Basic elements of the diagram view:
● Toolbar (#1)
● Browser (#2)
● Legend (#3)
● Diagram area (#4)
Diagrams generated by calculation methods are stored in a special signal database (.db). Each
variant has its own signal database. These signal databases are in the "_files\DIA" directory of the
network. Since PSS SINCAL automatically reads the appropriate singal database (depending on the
variant) when the network is opened or the variant is changed, no new calculations are needed to
display the diagrams.
274 October 2021

Diagram View
7.1 Structure of Diagram View

Diagrams are displayed in a window with the following main areas:
● A toolbar
● A diagram selection browser
● A legend
● A diagram area
Toolbar
This toolbar switches the important functions of diagrams ON.
Toggle browser
Filter function in the diagram browser
Insert a filter text for the diagram browser
Compare variants
Creating diagram pages
Formatting diagrams
Select objects
Zoom to page (the diagram page is zoomed so that the entire diagram
page is visible in the diagram window.)
Define the zoom level in the diagram
Editing network data displayed in the diagram in the data screen form
Selecting a network element in the Graphics Editor previously selected in

the diagram
Interactive scaling
Reset all interactive scaling
Show signal or reference position
Highlighting the signal selected in the legend
October 2021 275

Diagram View
Diagram Selection Browser
The browser contains all the diagrams, created by the user. The diagrams can optionally be created
manually or generated automatically with the help of various wizards.
The amount of the available wizards depends on the calculation method, input data for the network
as well as the scope of the results selected manually.
Motor Start-Up calculations can be used to help you understand the browser better. For this method,
signals are provided for both results and input data. The results data are only available after the
Motor Start-Up calculations have been completed successfully. After the calculation, the diagram
pages can be generated automatically with the help of the wizards.
The result diagrams can be compiled individually. For this purpose, Empty Diagram Pages are
created and the desired signals are dragged from the signal explorer into the respective diagram
using drag & drop. If Show edit signal dialog on dropping signal is switched ON in the Options
– Common dialog box, Forms and Views tab, PSS SINCAL also displays the Edit Signal dialog
box.
The diagram browser is mainly used to select the diagram page you want to display, but the pop-up
menu also contains different editing functions.
276 October 2021

Diagram View
Depending on which entry you select in the browser, PSS SINCAL has an individual pop-up menu
with important functions.
Legend
The legend has additional information about the diagram page or the selected diagram.
Selected diagrams are displayed with a blue border and the legend shows the diagram
characteristics, making it easier to identify data displayed in the diagram.
The legend also shows the signal position and the reference position (see chapter Display
Coordinates and Measuring) if these display modes are active.
You can even open a pop-up menu in the legend with enhanced functions.
This makes it possible, among other things, to edit the data of assigned network elements, copy and
manage the signals.
The Display Options submenu allows to change the amount of information in the legend. This
includes the additional output of 1/X and the visibility control of the curves in the diagram view.
Diagram Area
This area displays the diagram page selected in the browser. Diagram pages can have one or more
diagrams. These are based on data stored in the signal database. The content of the diagrams can
be compiled completely freely from all existing signals.
The diagram contains various Working Functions to analyze, format and edit displayed data. These
functions can be switched ON either with the pop-up menu or the toolbar.
Click File – Print to send the diagram displayed on the screen to a printer or plotter.
To customize the output sent to the printer, click File – Page Setup. You set the plot header, position,
margins, headers and footers. Note that the plot header will be imported from a catalogue you select.
7.2 Creating Diagram Pages

The PSS SINCAL diagram system makes it possible to customize the diagrams according to the
user's requirements. Here, the user is provided with complete flexibility in the compilation.
Any folder structure can be created to organize the user-defined diagram pages.
October 2021 277

Diagram View
The functions for creating diagram pages are available in the Diagram – Create menu, in the pop-
up menu and in the toolbar. Here, either empty diagram pages can be created, which can be
compiled individually, or complete diagram pages can be created with the help of Wizards.
7.2.1 New Empty Diagram Page
Clicking the New Empty Diagram Page menu item in the pop-up menu of the browser opens the
dialog box for defining a new diagram page.
To create a new diagram page, enter the Name in this dialog box and select a page format from
Select page layout. PSS SINCAL displays the page layout you selected at the right of the dialog
box as a preview.
Click OK to confirm and PSS SINCAL creates the new diagram page and display it in the browser.
If a diagram path is specified in the name, the diagram page is created in the specified path. If the
diagram path does not exist, it will be generated automatically. Here, several levels can also be
defined separated by "\".
It is then possible to transfer any signals from the Signal Explorer to the diagrams of the newly created
page using drag & drop. To do this, select the required signal in the Signal Explorer and drag it into
the diagram area.
278 October 2021

Diagram View
Once the signal is placed in the diagram, it is displayed immediately. This means that an empty
diagram in front of it takes over the size of the signal for X- and Y-axis and also its units. The following
figure shows the voltage of node K1 in the time series calculation.
It is now possible to add more signals to the diagram with further drag & drop actions. In the following
illustration, the voltages of two additional nodes were transferred to the diagram.
There are no restrictions on which data is displayed on a diagram page at the same time, i.e. all data
available in the Signal Explorer can be used. However, only data with the same X-axis can be
visualized within a diagram. For example, the display of the voltage profile over a route cannot be
combined with the time series results over different time points in one diagram.
October 2021 279

Diagram View
There are no restrictions to the design of the visual display of the diagrams. Extensive functions for
formatting the diagram and its signals are provided for this. The scaling for X and Y axes can also
be selected as desired. All these functions are described in the chapter Format Diagrams.
7.2.2 Diagram Page Wizard
PSS SINCAL provides wizards for generating diagram pages. These can be started via the Diagram
– Create menu, the toolbar and via the pop-up menu in the diagram browser. The scope of the
available wizards depends on the input data as well as on the results of the network.
A wizard is available for the following diagram pages.
Electrical Networks
Power Flow – Voltage Profile Voltage profile diagram for voltage, active and reactive power,
current or utilization of the route.
Power Flow – PV-Behavior Result diagram with active and reactive power behavior.
Short Circuit – Current Curve Current curve diagram – current or power of the line.
Harmonics – Variations Diagrams of the harmonic variations.
Harmonics – Frequency Characteristic Harmonic results of the frequency characteristics.
Harmonics – Node Level Harmonic results of the node levels.
Harmonics – Network Level Harmonic results for network level.
Protection – Tripping Characteristic (Input Tripping characteristic of the protection devices based on the input
data) data.
Protection – Tripping Area (Input Data) Tripping area of the protection devices based on the input data.
Protection – Tripping Characteristic Tripping characteristic, current ranges, registered current and
(Simulation) damage curves of the protection devices from the calculation results.
Protection – Tripping Area (Simulation) Tripping area, current ranges, registered current and damage curves
of the protection devices from the calculation results.
Protection Routes – Ratio Impedances (Z) Protection routes impedance ratio.
Protection Routes – Ratio Impedances (X) Protection routes reactance ratio.
Protection Routes – Impedance and Tripping Impedance and tripping area of the protection route.
Areas
Protection Routes – Opening Behavior (Z) Tripping behavior of the protection routes (Z).
Protection Routes – Opening Behavior (X) Tripping behavior of the protection routes (X).
DI Device Settings – Grading Diagram (Z/t) Grading diagrams of distance protection setting value calculation.
DI Device Settings – Grading Diagram (X/t) Grading diagrams of distance protection setting value calculation.
VoltVar Optimization Result diagrams of the VoltVar optimization.
Transformer Tap Detection Result diagrams of transformer tap detection.
Motor Characteristic Start-up current and motor torque via the speed of the asynchronous
machines.
Motor Characteristic (NEMA) Diagram page for asynchronous machines with input type NEMA with
torque, current and efficiency over speed.
Motor Startup – Heyland circle Diagram pages with the Heyland circle of the asynchronous
machine.
Motor Startup – Torque Result diagrams for torque and counter-torque characteristics of
asynchronous machines.
Motor Startup – Power over Time Result diagrams with the time curve of the power of the
asynchronous machine.
280 October 2021

Diagram View
Motor Startup – Voltage over Time Result diagrams with the time curve of the voltage of the
Pipe Networks
Profile-Curve (Supply, Return) Profile-curve diagrams of the route.
Operating Point (Supply, Return) Result diagrams of the operating point calculation.
Operating Point Behavior (Supply, Return) Result diagrams with the operating point behavior.
Depending on the procedure, the wizard is available in different functional scope.
In the Folder input field, an existing directory path can be selected or a new path can be entered.
In the Diagram pages list, those entries can be selected for which the wizard is to create the diagram
pages. The name of the diagram pages can be renamed.
The signal quantities to be displayed can be defined via the Select data to be shown list. Depending
on the wizard, the display scope can be selected.
The selection field in the lower part of the wizard offers the following options:
● Don't overwrite diagram pages:

New diagram pages are created in the specified path.
● Overwrite diagram pages by name:
Existing diagram pages with the same name and directory path will be overwritten.
● Replace all diagram pages in the folder:
The existing directory is deleted first, then the new diagram pages are created.
October 2021 281

Diagram View
7.3 Functions for Working in Diagram Views

PSS SINCAL has the following functions for editing diagrams:
● Managing Diagrams and Diagram Pages

● Variant Comparison of Diagram Pages
● Printing Diagrams
● Display Coordinates and Measuring
● Information on Signals
● Supplementary Graphics Objects in Diagrams
● Objects in Diagrams
● Comments in the Diagram View
● Edit Data
● Assigned Elements
● Select in Graphics
● Scale Diagrams
● Format Diagrams
● Format Diagram Views
● Amount to be Displayed in the Diagram View
● Display Options in the Diagram
● Filter Function in the Diagram Browser
7.3.1 Managing Diagrams and Diagram Pages
This chapter describes the functions for managing diagrams and diagram pages. These functions
can be switched ON either in the respective pop-up menu or using the toolbar.
PSS SINCAL has the following functions:
● Rename
● Duplicate
● Delete
● Copy Diagram Page
● Copy Diagram
● Copy Signal
● Copy all Signals
● Paste Signals
● Delete all Signals
● Save Diagram Page
Rename
Click Rename in the browser's pop-up menu to give the respective diagram page a new name.
282 October 2021

Diagram View
Duplicate
Click Duplicate in the pop-up menu of the browser to duplicate the diagram page with all data. This
makes a copy of the diagram page and inserts it in the browser.
Delete
Click Delete in the browser’s pop-up menu to delete the respective diagram page.
Pop-up menus in the diagram page have a menu item for Delete. Depending on what you select, a
signal or an object can be removed.
Copy Diagram Page
Copy Diagram Page copies the entire diagram page to the clipboard. This uses the printed page
and the page settings (header and footer, legend, etc.) as a basis. This page can then be inserted
into other Windows applications.
Copy Diagram
Copy Diagram copies the selected diagram to the clipboard. This can then be inserted into other
Windows applications.
Copy Signal
The Copy Signal function in the pop-up menu of the diagram enables the appropriate signal as well
as all signal-dependent objects (such as signal labels, ...) to be copied to the Clipboard and is
available for other functions.
Copy all Signals
The Copy all Signals function in the pop-up menu of the diagram enables all signals as well as all
diagram objects (such as labels, marker, ...) to be copied to the Clipboard and is available for other
functions.
Paste Signals
The Paste Signals function in the pop-up menu of the diagram enables a previously copied signal
to be pasted if this signal has not yet been assigned to the diagram.
Delete all Signals
The Delete all Signals function in the pop-up menu of the diagram enables all signals to be deleted.
October 2021 283

Diagram View
Save Diagram Page
Click Save Diagram Page to save the complete diagram page in a Windows MetaFile. Files
generated in this way can be processed by almost any Windows application.
The pop-up menu for diagram folders in the browser can store all diagram pages of a specific type
as Windows Metafiles. Simply select Save All Diagram Pages in the menu. Only the storage location
needs to be selected. Individual diagram pages are stored in their own metafiles. The name of the
metafile is the same as the name of the diagram page.
7.3.2 Variant Comparison of Diagram Pages
PSS SINCAL makes it possible to visualize and compare the signals of several variants in the form
of diagrams. For this the Compare variants mode is activated via the toolbar of the diagram view:
When the function is activated, the signals of all activated variants are displayed in the diagrams.
The variants are selected via the Variants dialog box.
7.3.3 Printing Diagrams
The diagram pages can, of course, also be printed. This can be done either individually or for all
diagram pages of a specific folder.
File – Print in the menu sends the current diagram page to the printer. This function is also found in
the toolbar.
7.3.4 Display Coordinates and Measuring
Displaying Coordinates
When the cursor moves in the diagram, PSS SINCAL automatically displays its Position in the
Status Bar as diagram coordinates, letting you determine the position of specific points of interest in
the diagram.
Show Signal Position
To better evaluate signal values in the diagrams, the signal position can be visualized in the diagram
legend. Click Diagram – Show Signal Position in the menu to switch this function ON.
284 October 2021

Diagram View
If this function is activated, round position markers are displayed on the X axis and on the positions
of the signals. The corresponding values are visualized as tooltips on the position markers or in the
legend.
The position can be changed interactively by clicking the position marker and dragging it with the
mouse button held down. In addition, the position can also be changed with help of Diagram – Set
Signal Position in the menu. In this case, the value for the x-axis has to be entered. The signal
position is then displayed at the indicated position.
If the signal position is displayed in a time series diagram and there are time series results in the
network, the item Sync. to network graphic is displayed in the pop-up menu. With this menu item
the date on which the signal position is located can be transferred to the network results.
Show Reference Position
This function can be used to activate the display of a reference position in addition to the signal
position. This is activated by clicking Diagram – Show Reference Position. When activated, this
reference position is set identically to the signal position. By dragging or clicking the Diagram – Set
Signal Position, the position marker of the reference position can be moved to another position and
thus the deltas between the two positions can be visualized.
The information regarding signal position and reference position as well as their distances from each
other are clearly visualized in the legend.
October 2021 285

Diagram View
Measuring
This function lets you determine distances between any two points in the diagram. Click the left
mouse button to create the starting point. Then hold down the mouse button and move the cursor to
the end point. PSS SINCAL will display the distance in the status line.
The function automatically terminates when the mouse button is released.
7.3.5 Information on Signals
If a signal is selected in the legend of the diagram, different functions can be switched ON in the pop-
up menu.
Display Signal Information
This function displays different kinds of information on the signals for a diagram you have selected
in the legend. Simply open the pop-up menu in the legend and select Signal Info.
286 October 2021

Diagram View
This dialog box calculates the following values for the selected signal:
● Count:
Number of points in the signal.
● X-values:
Smallest and largest value of all X-values in the signal.
● Y-values:
Smallest and largest value of all Y-values in the signal.
Copy Signal
Copy Signal in the menu places the points of the signals onto the clipboard. The signals that is
copied consists of lines, each with an X and Y value and separated by a tab sign. This format can be
imported later as a user-defined signal. This is done in the Signals tab in the Format Diagrams dialog
box.
Save Signal as CSV
Save Signal as CSV saves the points of signals to a CSV file.
7.3.6 Supplementary Graphics Objects in Diagrams
Supplementary graphics objects can be inserted into all diagrams.
Supplementary graphics objects can, for example, be used to add complementary information to the
diagram page.
The Toolbar for Graphic Objects is very useful when inserting supplementary graphics objects.
PSS SINCAL has the following supplementary graphics objects for diagrams:
● Line
● Rectangle
● Ellipse
● Arc
● Polyline
● Freehand line
● Text field
● Frame
● Hilite
Supplementary graphics objects in diagrams are edited in the same way as in the Graphics Editor.
For a precise description of the functions, see the Editing Elements and Objects section in the chapter
Graphics Editor.
October 2021 287

Diagram View
7.3.7 Objects in Diagrams
Objects let you integrate individual comments, limits and ranges into the diagram.
PSS SINCAL has the following objects:
● Label:
Text field you want integrated into the diagram.
● Signal Label:
A signal can be assigned a label in which the values of the signal can also be displayed.
● Marker:
Horizontal or vertical marker with any text you want to limit sections in the diagram.
● Range:
Horizontal or vertical range used to color any sections you want in the diagram.
The following illustration shows a diagram with objects.
Either the Format Diagram dialog box or the pop-up menu of the diagram can be used to insert
objects. The pop-up menu has the advantage of being able to create the new object directly at the
position of the mouse cursor.
The position of the objects in the diagrams can also be changed interactively. If the mouse cursor is
placed over an adjustable object, the move cursor is displayed. This indicates that the object can be
moved interactively by clicking and dragging.
288 October 2021

Diagram View
7.3.8 Comments in the Diagram View
The user can add a comment to each diagram page. Either click Edit – Comment in the main menu
or use the pop-up menu for the diagram in the browser.
Enter any multi-line text in this dialog box. PSS SINCAL can display this text in the header and footer
as well as in the legend. To do this, enter the predefined format code &[Chart Info].
7.3.9 Edit Data
This function edits network element data assigned to the diagram. At present PSS SINCAL has the
function for input data for protection devices and asynchronous machines.
Either Edit – Edit Data in the main menu or the pop-up menu can be used to edit data.
PSS SINCAL opens a screen form with the network element data for the diagram selected. The
example below shows a screen form for editing distance protection devices.
October 2021 289

Diagram View
Use this screen form to change any settings. Click Apply to see the modified values in the diagram.
Click Cancel to close the screen form without applying the modified settings. Click OK to display the
values in the diagram and close the screen form.
7.3.10 Assigned Elements
Use this function to edit network elements assigned to the diagram. Select in Graphics shows the
assigned network elements in the Graphics Editor. You can start this either in the main menu with
Edit – Assigned Elements or with the pop-up menu.
290 October 2021

Diagram View
This dialog box displays all the network elements assigned to the diagram. PSS SINCAL
differentiates between network elements that are part of the diagram and those that have been
assigned manually.
Press Add Selection to assign the network elements selected in the Graphics Editor to the diagram.
PSS SINCAL displays these in the Manually Assigned Elements section.
Press Remove to manually remove assigned network elements.
7.3.11 Select in Graphics
This selects assigned network elements in the diagram in the Graphics Editor. This function helps
you find network elements in the diagram. PSS SINCAL selects network elements in the diagram
and those that have been assigned manually.
7.3.12 Scale Diagrams
PSS SINCAL has different functions for scaling diagrams that can be switched ON with the Diagram
– Scaling menu.
● Axes Scaling
● Interactive Scaling
Axes Scaling
This assigns a user-defined scale to a diagram, meaning that limits can be prescribed for both
diagram axes.
Diagram – Scaling – Axes Scaling in the menu switches this function ON. For a precise description
of how this works, see the section on Axes in the chapter on Format Diagrams.
The Diagram – Scaling menu can be used to undo axes scaling if you want to remove it.
● Reset Axes Scaling in the menu switches OFF the scaling for the diagram currently selected.
● Reset All Axes Scaling switches OFF axes scaling for the entire diagram page.
Interactive Scaling
Diagram – Scaling – Interactive Scaling in the menu switches ON interactive scaling.
This scales the diagram interactively by creating a rectangle. Interactive scaling is only temporary,
e.g. this is not stored. This type of scaling is – as the name already implies – intended to help you
interactively analyze the signals.
The interactive scaling is automatically transferred to all diagrams with the same X-axis. Thus it is
possible to visualize the same diagram section in all diagrams.
October 2021 291

Diagram View
If interactive scaling is switched ON, the following additional functions are possible:
● Pressing CTRL and clicking the left mouse button reduces the zoom step in the diagram by one
step.
● Pressing the SHIFT key as well, lets you move the diagram section.
The Diagram – Scaling menu can be used to undo interactive scaling if you want to remove it.
● Reset Interactive Scaling in the menu switches OFF the scaling for the diagram currently
selected.
● Reset All Interactive Scaling switches OFF interactive scaling for the entire diagram page.
7.3.13 Format Diagrams
PSS SINCAL lets you configure many diagram attributes individually.
Open the dialog box for formatting diagrams using the pop-up menu in the diagram window and the
diagram browser or Diagram – Format Diagram in the menu.
The dialog box for Format Diagram has the following tabs:
● General
● Axes
● Signals
● Objects
General
This tab is used to set general parameters for the diagram.
Use the Title field to change the diagram legend. Here format codes can be used.
The Format section is used to select the Title font and the Diagram font.
292 October 2021

Diagram View
In addition, the Diagram scale can be used to determine how the minimum and maximum values of
the axes are determined based on the data to be displayed in the diagram.
Axes
Click this tab to set how axes of the diagram are displayed.
PSS SINCAL displays a list of all the available diagram axes. Select the Axis in the list where you
want to edit the attributes. Among other things, you can set both the scaling and the format of the
axis.
If Fixed (= fixed scaling) is switched ON, user-defined scaling is activated. Limits can be set manually
for the diagram axis selected. These limits are used for scaling the diagram. If this option is switched
OFF, axes scaling is reset for the diagram axis selected.
The Data field contains the minimum and maximum values for all the signals.
In the Format section, individual settings can be made for the axis.
The Axis position selection field can be used to specify where the axis inscription is to be displayed
in the diagram.
The Logarithmic option allows the axes subdivision to be in logarithmic form.
If the Exponential option is switched ON, an axis description can be forced in the exponential form.
If this option is switched OFF, the display of the exponential is used only for very large or small
values.
The Grid lines and Minor grid lines options can be activated for the selected diagram axis.
If the Interval interlacing option is switched ON, every 2nd interval between the grid lines has a gray
background.
If Major interval is switched ON, a user-defined value can be entered for the major interval. The
major interval is the distance between the grid lines.
October 2021 293

Diagram View
If the Reference value option is enabled, the reference value can be defined for protection devices.
Signals
This tab defines the display for the diagram’s signals. You can even define your own signal.
The list of options displays all the available Signals. Select the signal in the list where you want to
edit the attributes.
The order of the signals can be changed in the list using drag & drop. To do this, select the signals
and drag it into the desired position in the list.
Additional signals can be added to the diagrams for documentation. It is easy to transfer values for
the user-defined signals from the Windows clipboard. Values are stored directly in the diagram.
Add and Delete are used to manage user-defined signals. Click Add to open a dialog box that lets
you enter user-defined values for a signal.
If a user-defined signal is selected in the list, it can be removed by clicking Delete. The pop-up menu
in Diagram View can also be used to delete user-defined signals.
The name of the user-defined signal is also displayed in the legend. You can change the name of
the signal directly in the list of options. Press F2 to edit the name.
294 October 2021

Diagram View
Edit Signals
Click Edit to modify the selected signal. This opens the following dialog box. In the dialog box the
signal (Y) as well as the signal base (X), a unit conversion and a scaling can be defined.
In the Signal Definition section, the name of the signal can be specified. In the Result File input
field, the data source is displayed. Via the selection field Y value, the displayed signal can be
specified.
In the Signal Values section, you can define your own formula and unit. Switch ON the Formula
field if you want to enter a user-defined formula. To do this, fill the Formula and the Unit fields. Click
Check Formula to check the entered formula for accuracy.
Post-processing is used to convert the signal. You can choose from the following selection values:
● None:
There is no post-processing.
● RMS:
A continuous square mean value (RMS) is used for post-processing.
● Mean Value:
A continuous arithmetic mean value is used for post-processing.
Two additional entry fields are displayed both for RMS as well as for Mean Value. The first window
is used to define the time window in ms for determining the mean value. This should at least be a
half period (at 50 Hz, i.e. 10 ms). The second value defines the sample rate for calculating the mean
value. If the value is equal to 0, the Y values of the signal is used. If the value is greater than 0 ms,
the specified time frame is divided in equal time steps and the Y values are interpolated accordingly.
The frequency required for recalculating is indicated in the input field.
Minimum and Maximum manually defines limits for the signal. For this the minimum and maximum
value are entered in the two input fields. These limit values determine the section to be shown in the
diagram. To simplify the input of these values, use the selection button to choose from different
predefined values.
The Data field displays the actual minimum and maximum values of the signals.
October 2021 295

Diagram View
Info
The Info section has the minimum and maximum values of the selected signal.
Format
Format is used to edit the Color, Style and Width of the signal you want. This can only be done, if
this option has been switched ON. Otherwise the standard attributes are used.
Description
Description defines the properties for legends and labels. If Show in legend is switched ON, the
name of the signal selected is displayed in the diagram’s legend. If Show label is switched ON, the
name of the signal appears directly in the diagram. If you click the Options button, PSS SINCAL
displays the following dialog box:
Position determines whether labels will be displayed at the start, the end or at a particular position
of the signal. The X and Y fields specify the position of the label. The Angle and Distance of the
label can also be defined. Format determines whether a line is displayed between the label and
signal or whether borders are displayed.
Objects
This tab is used to specify objects (label, signal label, marker or range) in diagrams.
The available objects are displayed in the list of options. Select the Object in the list where you want
to edit the attributes.
Click Add to open a dialog box where the type for the new object can be defined. Click Delete to
delete the selected object. The pop-up menu in Diagram View can also be used to delete objects.
A description how the objects can be used interactively in the diagrams is provided in chapter Objects
in Diagrams.
296 October 2021

Diagram View
Label
The label can be used to insert any comments in a diagram.
The Info section can be used to define the label’s Orientation and Position. The position settings
are always diagram values, i.e. the values shown on the X and Y axis of the diagram.
The Text field is used to enter any multiple line text which is then displayed in the diagram. You can
also use format codes. The label itself also supports the following format codes:

X position in the diagram &[ValX]
Y position in the diagram &[ValY]
Format is used to define the Color, Background Color, Style and Width.
The Anchor option is used to activate the display of a reference line for the label. This is used to set
angle and distance.
October 2021 297

Diagram View
Signal Label
The signal label enables a comment to be attached to a signal in the diagram.
The Signal selection fields are used to select the signal to which the label is assigned.
● Only one signal: Label visualizes one point in the signal.

● Two signals: Label visualizes the difference between the signals.
The X position of the signal label is defined in the Position field. The corresponding Y position is
defined using the values from the signal. The position settings are always diagram values, i.e. the
values shown on the X and Y axis of the diagram.
also use format codes. The signal label itself supports the following format codes:
Function Format
code
X position in the diagram &[Val]
Value of signal 1 at X position &[Val1]
Value of signal 2 at X position &[Val2]
Difference between signal 2 and signal 1 &[Diff]
Label fixing on largest absolute value of the signal &[Peak]
Label fixing on largest value of the signal &[Peak:max]
Label fixing on smallest value of the signal &[Peak:min]
Legend entry of the signal on the X axis (only with activated signal position) &[NameX]
Legend entry of the signal on the Y axis (only with activated signal position) &[NameY]
Evaluation of the signal in the legend window (X signal) (only with activated &[EvalX]
signal position)
Evaluation of the signal in the legend window (Y signal) (only with activated &[EvalY]
signal position)
298 October 2021

Diagram View
The Anchor is used to activate the display of a reference line for the signal label. This is used to set
angle and distance.
Marker
The marker is a horizontal or vertical marking line in the diagram which can contain any text.
The Orientation field is used to define whether the marker is horizontal or vertical and whether the
text of the marker is to be shown at the beginning or end of the diagram.
The Position field is used to define the position of the marker. Depending on the type of marker the
X and Y position is entered here. The position settings are always diagram values, i.e. the values
shown on the X and Y axis of the diagram.
also use format codes. The marker itself also supports the following format code:

Position in the diagram &[Val]
October 2021 299

Diagram View
Range
The range object can be used to color highlight a horizontal or vertical section in the diagram.
The Orientation field is used to define whether the range is horizontal or vertical.
The Position field is used to define the range, i.e. the start and end position are entered. Depending
on the selected orientation, these are X or Y positions. The position settings are always diagram
values, i.e. the values shown on the X and Y axis of the diagram.
Format is used to define the Color.
7.3.14 Format Diagram Views
This chapter describes formatting the diagram pages containing a network diagram (e.g. in protection
documentation).
The dialog box for formatting diagrams can be opened with Format View in the pop-up menu of the
network diagram.
The Format View dialog box has the following tabs.
● General
● Node
● Node Element
● Branch Element
● Add Element
300 October 2021

Diagram View
General View Settings
This tab defines the general properties of the network diagram.
Network graphic alignment is used to define the position and direction of the network diagram.
Node symbol determines the type of node when a node is created. The Color mode list and the
Line style option define whether the network diagram will be drawn in the default color or the
respective characteristic curve color and line style. Not considered color lists the colors for network
elements without characteristic curves.
The Library defines how network element icons appear on the screen. The library for the network
diagram can be customized. Currently, there are the libraries Standard and ANSI.
The Global Symbol Size is the percentage, by which the size of the icon for all network elements is
multiplied. The Global Add-Symbol Size is used for attachments (protection devices, fault
observation, etc.) in a way similar to Symbol Factor.
The Terminal distances define the distance between symbol and node.
7.3.15 Amount to be Displayed in the Diagram View
With certain types of diagrams, you can manually set what characteristics you want to display. This
is done with Show data in the diagram pop-up menu.
October 2021 301

Diagram View
This dialog box contains characteristics for the active diagram type. If you select these in the dialog
box, PSS SINCAL activates these characteristics for display in the diagram view.
7.3.16 Display Options in the Diagram
These functions let you configure multiple display options globally for all diagrams. Diagram –
Display Options in the menu switches these functions ON.
PSS SINCAL has the following display options:
● Show Short Names at Diagrams:

This switches the display for short names (instead of long names) ON in the diagram.
● Show Fills:
This switches the display for filled surfaces ON or OFF.
● Show Object Name at Title:
This switches the display for object names in diagram titles ON or OFF.
● Show 1/X at Legend:
This function also displays the value 1/X in the legend when the signal position and reference
position are activated (see chapter Display Coordinates and Measuring).
● Show Visibility at Legend:
This function adds a checkbox for visibility control to the legend for each characteristic curve.
● Show Variant Diagrams:
This menu item enables or disables the variant comparison of diagram pages.
7.3.17 Filter Function in the Diagram Browser
Use this function to make it easier to reduce what is displayed in the diagram browser.
You can enter filter text in the filter field and PSS SINCAL will only display diagrams in the browser
if their name meets these filter criteria.
7.4 Format Editor

The Format Editor allows the user to create their own templates for diagrams. These templates
created by the user are available in the New Empty Diagram Page dialog box for diagrams.
To reach the editing mode for creating format templates, switch to the editing mode in the diagram
view by clicking Diagram – Format Editor. Clicking again on Diagram – Format Editor will end this
mode.
302 October 2021

Diagram View
The browser lists the available user templates. After selecting a template, it is displayed in the
diagram view and can be modified by the user.
The browser pop-up menu provides general functions for editing the template. In addition to creating
new templates, existing templates can be renamed, duplicated and deleted.
The menu item New in the pop-up menu of the browser or the menu item Diagram – New Diagram
Format opens the New Diagram Format dialog box, which can be used to create a new format
template.
Use the Name input field to give the format template a name and the Select page format selection
list to select the format to be used as the basis for the new template. After clicking the OK button,
the new template is created and can be edited in the diagram view.
Besides changing the size of a diagram, new diagrams can be added to the page using the toolbox.
To do this, the Diagram object in the Toolbox is activated and a diagram is created at the appropriate
position in the diagram view.
For easier editing and alignment of the diagrams, functions are available in the Toolbox as well as in
the Properties Window.
October 2021 303

Report View
8. Report View
PSS SINCAL has a universal report interface based on the standard reporting tool "List & Label".
PSS SINCAL features several report templates to help you easily organize input data and calculation
results. The scope and the display of the reports can be customized. You can even include reports
you created yourself in the PSS SINCAL program user interface (see the section on Editing Your
Own Reports).
Click View – Report View.
Basic elements of the report view:
● Toolbar (#1)
● Browser (#2)
● Report (#3)
8.1 Aufbau des Berichtes Structure of the Report View

The window of Report View is divided into the following main areas:
● A toolbar
● A browser for report selection
● A report
304 October 2021

Report View
Toolbar
This toolbar activates the important functions of the Report View.
Toggle browser
Search
Search field
Edit compilation
Report options
Move to first page
Move to previous page
Move to next page
Move to last page
Entire page
Zoom the report view
Stop loading
Press Toggle browser to display or hide the browser of the report view.
Press down the Search button to switch ON search mode. This starts a search for the concept
entered in the Search field in the report.
To browse in the report window, use the control buttons to Move to first page, previous page, next
page or last page.
Press Entire Page to zoom the report and display the whole page in the report window.
Zoom the report view sets the enlargement factor for the display in the report window.
Stop loading stops the generating the report.
Browser for Report Selection
The browser displays opened compilations with the reports. Select the compilation from the list to be
displayed in the preview window.
October 2021 305

Report View
The report browser has a pop-up menu with various functions.
Click Print Report to print the selected report.
Click Print Compilation to print the current compilation.
Report
This window displays the reports with the List & Label Previewer. Note that only individual reports
and NOT the entire compilation can be viewed at one time.
Printing and exporting are limited to the report displayed in the preview window.
8.2 Manage Compilations

PSS SINCAL lets you compile reports individually for later output. The following functions are used
to manage and edit compilations:
● New Compilation
● Open Compilations
● Close Compilations
● Edit Compilations
● Print Compilations
● Export Compilations
8.2.1 New Compilations
To create a new compilation, click Report – Compilation – New Compilation in the menu. Then
select where you want to store the compilation. The file name is the same as the name of the
compilation in the browser.
8.2.2 Open Compilations
Click Report – Compilation – Open Compilation in the menu to open an existing compilation.
306 October 2021

Report View
8.2.3 Close Compilations
Click Report – Compilation – Close Compilation in the menu to close the compilation.
8.2.4 Edit Compilations
Click Report – Compilation – Edit Compilation in the menu to open the following dialog box.
Use Report Compilation to compile different kinds of reports for output. PSS SINCAL displays all
Available Reports in the list to the right. Filter temporarily reduces what PSS SINCAL displays in
the list. Entering the filter immediately reduces the amount displayed in the list of options below. The
filter field also has a control button. Press this, and PSS SINCAL displays a menu for entering
enhanced display settings:
● Show all available reports:

PSS SINCAL displays all the available reports for the activated Calculation Settings.
● Show reports with data:
PSS SINCAL displays only reports that are available for the data.
The available reports can be individually added to the list of Active Compilation by clicking the Left
Arrow. Click the Right Arrow to remove them. If you hold down the Shift key while you click one of
these buttons, PSS SINCAL will add or remove all the reports in the compilation. The Up and Down
Arrows move reports to the top or to the bottom.
Multiple reports can also be used in the compilation. This is a good idea when general report
elements (e.g. separation pages) are used to organize the report compilation. In the example above,
multiple separation pages are used in the compilation and subsequently renamed (input data, power
flow results, short circuit results). To rename, double-click on the element in the compilation.
October 2021 307

Report View
User Reports
You can add user-defined reports to the list of the Available Reports or delete these from the list.
This can be done at any time by using the pop-up menu at the User Reports entry.
Click Add in the menu to display the file selection dialog box where you can select any List & Label
Report you want. This report then appears in the section on User Reports. These can then be
transferred to the Active Compilation at any time.
Click Delete to remove the currently selected user-defined report from the list of available reports.
To remove all the user-defined reports, switch ON Delete in the pop-up menu of the section on User
Reports.
8.2.5 Print Compilations
Click Report – Compilation – Print Compilation in the menu to print the current compilation.
8.2.6 Export Compilations
PSS SINCAL offers the possibility of exporting compilations of reports to be used later in other
Windows applications.
To export a compilation, select this in the browser and then click Report – Export in the menu. Then
select the storage location for the exported compilation and enter the file name.
PSS SINCAL supports the following export formats:
● PDF files
● XPS files
● PRN files
● EMF files
● PNG files
● XLS files
● XML files
● CSV files
● DOCX files
● XLSX files
8.3 Manage Reports

PSS SINCAL lets you define or edit your own reports. The following functions are used for managing
and editing one’s own reports:
● New Report
● Editing Your Own Reports
● Print Reports
● Export Reports
308 October 2021

Report View
8.3.1 New Report
To create a new report, select Report – Report – New Report in the menu. PSS SINCAL displays
the New Report dialog box.
Enter the name of the new report in the Report Name field.
Select the template for the new report in the list of Available Reports. Filter temporarily reduces
in the list of options below.
Click Next > to display the next dialog box of the Wizard. This dialog box is used to select the tables
you want to include in the new report.
October 2021 309

Report View
Select the tables for your own report in the list of Available Tables. PSS SINCAL automatically
switches ON tables already existing in the template and these cannot be removed. Filter temporarily
reduces what PSS SINCAL displays in the list. Entering the filter immediately reduces the amount
displayed in the list of options below.
Click Finish to create the new report and save this in the user-specific directory for "SINCAL
Projects\Reports".
PSS SINCAL automatically opens the new report in the List & Label Designer for further editing. For
a precise description of how the List & Label Designer works, see the Designer's Online Help. When
you close the Designer, PSS SINCAL automatically adds the new report to the active compilation.
8.3.2 Editing Your Own Reports
To edit your own reports, select Report – Report – Edit Report in the menu. PSS SINCAL opens
the active report in the List & Label Designer for editing. For a precise description of how the List &
Label Designer works, see the Designer's Online Help.
To edit tables in your own report, hold down the SHIFT key while you switch ON Report – Report –
Edit Report in the menu. PSS SINCAL displays the Edit Report dialog box. This dialog box is used
to select the tables you want to include in the report.
310 October 2021

Report View
Select the tables you want to include in the report in the list of Available Tables. PSS SINCAL
automatically switches ON tables already existing in the report and these cannot be removed. Filter
temporarily reduces what PSS SINCAL displays in the list. Entering the filter immediately reduces
the amount displayed in the list of options below.
Click Finish and PSS SINCAL automatically opens the new report in the List & Label Designer. For
more comprehensive help on defining reports, see the List & Label Designer's Online Help.
8.3.3 Print Reports
Click Report – Report – Print Report in the menu to print the selected report.
8.3.4 Export Reports
PSS SINCAL offers the possibility of exporting reports to be used later in other Windows applications.
To export a report, select this in the browser and then click Report – Export in the menu. Then,
select the storage location for the exported report and enter the file name.
PSS SINCAL supports the following export formats:
● PDF files
● XPS files
● PRN files
● EMF files
● PNG files
● XLS files
● XML files
● CSV files
October 2021 311

Report View
8.4 Report Options

Click Report options to specify general settings for the reports.
8.4.1 Options
The Options tab defines general options for report output.
The General Options section defines the output language (German, English, Chinese and Spanish)
and element display (short name, name). These settings are valid for all report elements of the active
compilation.
The Element Filter section defines whether all elements of the network are used for the output in
the report or only the network elements in the basic view.
In the Topology Data Filter section, you can choose additional selection filters for the output. You
can select from the following filters depending on their availability in the network:
● Network level
● Network area
● Substation
● Network zone
The list next to it is filled according to the selection. Here additional criteria can be selected that will
be used to limit the output.
312 October 2021

Report View
8.4.2 Format
The Format tab lets you customize the appearance of the report.
The left part of the dialog box displays a thumbnail version of the report page, in which you can check
the selected formatting options. Report elements can be selected by clicking at the left of the preview
window or selected from the list of options. Active report elements are marked in the preview window
and displayed in the list of options.
Click Reset to return all the settings to the default settings.
Select Edit to open a dialog box with all the report elements (headers, report titles, etc.) to be
displayed. Check boxes are used to switch these elements ON or OFF.
The right side of the dialog box is used to set attributes for active report elements. Font, font color,
font style and font size can be defined here.
You can even assign a Background Color.
Show Grid turns the output of the grid lines ON or OFF and defines die color of the grid.
Alternative Color is used to select additional background colors for the data rows. Every second
data row will be displayed in this color, if this has been defined in the report.
October 2021 313

Report View
8.4.3 Header/Footer
The Header/Footer tab lets you integrate additional information on the pages of the report.
For the report, enter text for the title, header and footer. You can even define multi-line texts in the
header. Enter "\n" for word-wrap.
Predefined Tokens can be used to facilitate entering page numbers, dates, etc. The PSS SINCAL
dialog box has the following icons:
Actual page number
Total number of pages
Date
Time
File name
File name with path and extension
Title of the report
314 October 2021

Report View
PSS SINCAL has the following format codes for header and footer fields:

Actual page number &[Page]
Total number of pages &[Pages]
Date &[Date]
Time &[Time]
File name &[File]
Title of the report &[Report]
Title1 &[Title]
Subject1 &[Subject]
Author1 &[Author]
Company1 &[Company]
Comment1 &[Comment]
1)
The contents of these fields can be found in the Properties dialog box of the menu item File –
Properties.
October 2021 315

Screen Forms
9. Screen Forms
Screen forms are used to enter, display and edit data for network elements.
The input data for a network element, describing its characteristics, and the output data supplied by
PSS SINCAL are displayed in various screen forms.
Screen forms are divided into tabs (e.g. for basic data, harmonics, reliability, etc.) that contain the
information to be entered for a particular element.
Colors in Screen Forms
Screen forms use different colors to depict different input statuses and errors.
If the descriptive text for a data field is gray, this field is blocked out. If the text is blue, the input data
are optional, and PSS SINCAL does not use them in calculations.
PSS SINCAL normally displays the text of data fields in black. Red text means that the value is
outside the permissible value range and has to be corrected. Purple values also indicate data outside
the permissible value range, but only as a warning, i.e., these do not need to be corrected.
9.1 Types of Fields and Control Buttons
Input Fields
Input fields can be text fields, number fields or selection fields. Number fields have abbreviations
on the left and the unit of numerical value on the right.
316 October 2021

Screen Forms
Selection Fields
In these fields, you click the arrow to open a list of options or enter the text manually.
Input Format Button
The input format button, to the right of input fields, selects the type of input. For example, when you
enter zero-phase sequence data, you can alternate between Z0/Z1 and R0/X0, R0 and X0 or Z0
identical Z1.
Edit Button
Selection fields have an edit button, which is displayed either in front of or behind the field and is
used to edit data of the selection field. Click on this button to open a screen form for the element
selected in the list of options. For example, the fields for characteristics, topology data, etc. all have
edit buttons.
Manipulation Button
Lists of manipulators have a manipulation button. Click this button to display the attributes of the
manipulator you have selected in the list of options. If you want to modify these attributes, however,
you need to click the Insert – Manipulation menu. For a detailed description of how this is done,
see Manipulators in Screen Forms.
Connection Button
This button opens the Terminal screen form for editing network elements. This screen form, for
example, has the connection type (1-phase, 2-phase, and 3-phase).
The button is directly behind the edit button in the node-selection lists for network elements.
October 2021 317

Screen Forms
Filter Button
Selection fields for standard types have a filter button, which is used to filter standard types in the list
of options. For a detailed description of how this is done, see Standard types in Screen Forms.
Navigation Buttons
Display first record
Display previous record
Display next record
Display last record
These buttons let you navigate easily between data displayed in the screen form. Note that
PSS SINCAL only displays these buttons when the screen form has more than one record.
Diagram Button
Click the diagram button to display a dialog box, which represents the results graphically in a
diagram.
9.2 Special Characteristics of Screen Forms

PSS SINCAL screen forms have several functions to optimally organize entering and evaluating
comprehensive network element data.
Design of Screen Forms
Considerable care went into the design of the screen forms and the sequence and organization of
input fields.
● All-important data for a network element can be edited in screen forms.

● Important data (positive-phase and zero-phase sequence) are contained in the tab for basic
data; additional data are contained in additional tabs.
● The data for network elements are combined and selected to data groups (e.g. data for the
workspace).
● To set the amount of data displayed in screen forms, click Calculate – Methods. This lets you
display only those data for input in screen forms that are necessary for the calculation methods
you have selected.
● Optional data groups can be activated or deactivated by clicking a check box (e.g. zero-phase
sequence, and transformer controller).
318 October 2021

Screen Forms
Optimal Data Input
PSS SINCAL was also designed to describe different network elements optimally.
● PSS SINCAL's data model has a uniform structure that lets you enter data for all network
elements in a consistent procedure (e.g. workspace, zero-phase sequence, etc.)
● PSS SINCAL displays or grays out input fields in screen forms, depending on options selected.
For example, when you select "P, Q and (V)" or "I, cosphi and V" for the operating point in a
load, PSS SINCAL’s screen form displays only the fields you need.
● Many network elements offer several methods to enter data (e.g. Z0/Z1 and R0/X0 or R0 and
X0 for zero-phase sequence data).
Additional Functions in Screen Forms
PSS SINCAL screen forms have several functions to facilitate entering data or locating errors. To
access important additional functions, click Extras – Options, Selection dialog box.
● Screen forms allow coloring of faulty input values.

● Optional data can be given distinctive colors.
● Tooltips display permissible value ranges for input fields.
● When entering data, you can switch units by clicking a new unit next to the input field.
● When supplementary data for network elements (e.g. neutral point impedance) are edited, the
PSS SINCAL screen form generates these data automatically if the relevant data group is
activated. Data are deleted when the data group is deactivated.
● Numerical data can be entered with decimal points or commas and points.
● Data in data-output forms can be displayed as tables, letting you use filters for evaluations.
● When a screen form is reopened, PSS SINCAL displays the tabs that were active when the
form was closed.
9.3 Topology Selection in Screen Forms

In PSS SINCAL you need to select, for example, topological information for various calculation
methods. This can be done by clicking the control button in the input field in the data-input forms.
Click the control button in the input field. PSS SINCAL opens the dialog box where you can select
topological information quickly and easily.
October 2021 319

Screen Forms
This dialog box displays all current topology data. Use Filter to temporarily reduce the amount of
data displayed. When a filter is created, this immediately reduces the amount displayed in the list
below. The filter field also has a control button. Clicking this displays a menu.
The menu has the following functions to customize how the list is displayed.
● Filter and Visibility:

Opens a dialog box to filter and sort the data by various criteria. For a precise description of
how this works, see the chapter on Filter Functions in Tabular View in the System Manual.
● Reset filter:
Temporarily deletes a defined filter. All the data are displayed again.
● No grouping, network area, network level and substations:
Depending what group has been selected, PSS SINCAL displays different topology data in the
list.
Double-click on a topology element in the list to open and edit the current screen form.
The status line shows you whether the contents of the list have been reduced (for example with the
help of a filter).
Click Select to copy the selected topology element to the screen form.
9.4 Manipulators in Screen Forms

Manipulators offer some easy ways to edit data for elements already in the network.
They let you change the energy point of more than one producer or load at the same time. For
selected types of elements (e.g. load, synchronous machine, ...) one or more manipulators can be
defined.
320 October 2021

Screen Forms
You can, for example, use a manipulator to modify consumption values of loads by assigning the
loads a manipulator, then changing it. This lets you test many planning examples in the network
without editing the network element data.
Manipulators have these basic characteristics:
● Network elements have different kinds of manipulators since the manipulators are applied to
individual attributes of network elements.
● Manipulators are stored in the network.
● When data for a manipulator are changed, PSS SINCAL automatically edits previously input
data of any network elements assigned to the manipulator.
The following electrical network elements can have manipulators:
● Loads
● Asynchronous machines
● Synchronous machines
● Network feeder
● Power units
The following pipe network elements can have manipulators:
● Water tank
● Infeeder pump
● Infeeder
● Consumer
● Pressure increase pump
● Constant pressure decrease/constant flow
● Heat exchanger
To edit the manipulators using the Manipulation dialog box, click Insert – Manipulation.
This dialog box contains all manipulators available in the current network, listed with the name and
the element type where they are assigned.
Insert is used to create new manipulators. Delete deletes existing manipulators, as long as they are
not in use. Edit modifies manipulators selected in the list.
Click Select to select all the network elements in the diagram where the selected manipulators are
assigned.
When you close the dialog box, PSS SINCAL automatically updates the network element data.
October 2021 321

Screen Forms
9.4.1 Insert
To open a dialog box for inserting a new manipulator, click Insert.
Use this dialog box to select the Element Type to which the new manipulator is applied.
In the input field for Manipulation Name, enter a name, and PSS SINCAL will display this name in
the screen forms for the network elements.
The list of options for Operate State shows network element attributes to which the manipulator can
be applied. The components of this options list depend on the type of element selected.
The attributes that the manipulator can change for type of element and operating point are displayed
to the right of the options list.
In front of each attribute, there is a box that must be checked to activate the attribute in the
manipulator. You enter the desired manipulation value in the input field for the attribute.
If a manipulation value is changed, PSS SINCAL updates the corresponding values in all network
elements connected to this manipulator. In the PSS SINCAL data model in the load there is for
example next to the active power an additional manipulation factor fP. Overwriting this multiplication
factor provides a simple way to increase or decrease the entire active power of the load without
changing the original input value for P.
9.4.2 Delete
To delete the selected manipulator, click Delete. Note that a manipulator can be deleted only when
no network elements are assigned to it.
9.4.3 Edit
To open the dialog box for Manipulation for modifying the attribute of the manipulator, click Edit.
322 October 2021

Screen Forms
9.4.4 Selecting a Manipulator
All network elements that support manipulators offer the possibility to enter the manipulator in the
screen form.
The following example shows how to select the manipulator for the network element for Load.
The desired manipulator can be selected in the list of options for Manipulation Factors. It contains
only manipulators for the particular network element and the selected operating point.
Click the button in front of the list of options to open the Manipulation dialog box. If a manipulator is
selected, PSS SINCAL displays this in the dialog box and it cannot be changed. If no manipulator
has been assigned, PSS SINCAL automatically creates a new manipulator for the type and operating
point of the element.
When you leave the Manipulation dialog box, PSS SINCAL automatically selects the new
manipulator in the list of options for manipulation factors.
9.5 Result Diagrams in Screen Forms

This result dialog box enables currents and voltages displayed in the screen form to be graphically
visualized. The integrated selection list offers different display options for visualizing the data.
October 2021 323

Screen Forms
The following selection options are available depending on the scope of the result in the screen form.
● Phase Values – Current [A]:

The currents of the conductors are shown with real and imaginary value in a Cartesian
diagram.
● Sym. Components – Current [A]:
The currents of the symmetrical components are shown with real and imaginary value in a
Cartesian diagram.
● Phase Values – Voltage [kV]:
The voltage values of the conductors are shown with real and imaginary value in a Cartesian
diagram.
● Sym. Components – Voltage [kV]:
The voltage values of the symmetrical components are shown with real and imaginary value in
a Cartesian diagram.
● Phase Values – Voltage/Current:
In this polar diagram the conductor data for current and voltage is shown simultaneously in
order to visualize the angles. Both current and voltage are shown in relation.
● Sym. Components – Voltage/Current:
In this polar diagram the symmetrical components of current and voltage is shown
simultaneously in order to visualize the angles. Both current and voltage are shown in relation.
● Ground Current, Ground Voltage:
In this polar diagram, the ground current, setting current and ground voltage are displayed
simultaneously to visualize the angles. It should be noted that the ground voltage is only shown
as a default value due to different axis definitions.
324 October 2021

Screen Forms
9.6 Standard Types in Screen Forms

PSS SINCAL has settings for network elements in a database of standard types. This lets you select
characteristic settings of the network element by selecting a type instead of manually entering
descriptive values. For example, you can enter cable and overhead lines by simply selecting the type
using descriptive input values.
In electrical networks the following network elements have standard types:
● Synchronous Machine
● Power Unit
● Network feeder
● Asynchronous Machine
● Shunt Reactor
● Shunt Capacitor
● Converter
● Line
● Two-Winding Transformer
● Three-Winding Transformer
● Serial Dual Reactor
● Overcurrent Protection
● Distance Protection (not yet available)
● Substation
● Bay
● Equipment
● Route
In pipe networks the following network elements have standard types:
● Pipe
Standard types are kept in special databases. PSS SINCAL distinguishes between local and global
standard types. To select the standard type databases, click the dialog box for Options.
Locking/Unlocking Standard Databases
There is the possibility to lock or unlock standard databases for editing. This is done using the pop-
up menu of the Global or Local Types.
October 2021 325

Screen Forms
After clicking the menu item Properties the following dialog box appears.
With the selection field Locked the corresponding standard database can be locked or unlocked. If
the standard database is locked, it is not possible to edit the standard database.
9.6.1 Selecting the Standard Types in Screen Forms
You can select standard types with special lists of options in the screen forms. The scope of these
lists of options can be filtered. This is necessary because of the large number of standard types
(approx. 5,000 predefined line types), which would otherwise make selection very difficult.
After pressing the filter button, PSS SINCAL automatically opens the dialog box where you can
preselect the types.
326 October 2021

Screen Forms
This dialog box defines which standard types PSS SINCAL will provide in the selection field. Switch
the standard types you want ON in the browser.
Use the filter to temporarily reduce the amount of standard types displayed. By clicking the Filter
button, the Filter and Visibility dialog box appears. When a filter is entered in the filter field, this
immediately reduces the amount displayed in the list below. The filter field also has a control button.
Clicking this displays a menu.
The menu has the following functions to customize how the list is displayed.
● Filter and Visibility:

Opens a dialog box to filter and sort the data by various criteria. For a precise description of
how this works, see the chapter on Filter Functions in Tabular View in the System Manual.
● Reset Filter:
Temporarily deletes a defined filter. All the data are displayed again.
● Group by manufacturer:
With OC protection devices, the devices can also be grouped by manufacturer. This has the
advantage that the device types of well-known manufacturers can be found more easily.
The displayed standard types can be filtered. Open the pop-up menu and click Filter. To switch the
filter OFF temporarily, select Disable Filter in the pop-up menu.
Click OK to close the Preselect Standard Types dialog box. This displays the selected standard
types in the selection field of the network element.
If you want to select only a single standard type, click Select. This closes the dialog box and
automatically enters the selected standard type as the standard type for the element.
October 2021 327

Screen Forms
Select the desired type from the list in the selection field. This list contains the typical characteristics
of the standard type (in this case the cable type, cross section, etc.). In front of the attributes you can
either see the character G or L. This specifies whether it is a global or local standard type.
When a standard type is selected, PSS SINCAL assigns all characteristics of the type to the element.
The screen form now shows all fields assigned the selected standard type blocked. These fields
contain the values of the selected standard type and cannot be changed.
The standard types that have been selected are stored in the current network. When you open the
network again these standard types are already there.
9.6.2 Edit Standard Types
The standard types are available in the Data – Standard Types menu.
The following example shows the screen form for standard types of lines.
328 October 2021

Screen Forms
The screen form for edit standard types has two sections:
● Browser for type selection

● Data screen area
The browser for type selection has the type selected for editing. PSS SINCAL displays all settings
for this type in the data screen area, where they can be modified.
Note: The data for global types cannot be modified since this information is a standard part of
PSS SINCAL and is maintained by Siemens. But data for local types can be modified, new types
can be added and existing types can be deleted. The copy function simplifies adding new types.
Toolbar
Use the toolbar to switch important functions of the browser ON to process the types.
Create new standard type
Copy selected standard type
Insert copied standard type
Delete selected standard type
Filter
Filter field
Clicking Create new standard type creates a new standard type. Note that new standard types can
only be created in the local standard type database.
Clicking Copy selected standard type prepares the standard type you have selected in the browser
on the clipboard so it can be inserted in the local standard type database.
Standard types copied to the clipboard with the Copy function can be inserted with Insert copied
standard type to the current position in the browser (but only in the local standard type database).
Clicking Delete selected standard type deletes the standard type selected in the browser. Only
local standard types can be deleted.
Click Filter to define filters for limiting standard types.
Entering filter text in the Filter field immediately reduces the amount displayed in the browser below.
October 2021 329

Screen Forms
Pop-Up Menu
Click the right mouse button on a standard type in the browser to display the pop-up menu.
This pop-up menu lets you edit the standard type directly. The functions Expand and Collapse open
or close the tree.
Filters for Standard Types
This filters the amount to be displayed of the standard types. Click Filter in the toolbar and
PSS SINCAL opens the dialog box for Filter and Visibility. For a precise description, see the chapter
on Filter Functions in Tabular View in the System Manual.
9.6.3 Creating a New Standard Database
File – Administration – New Standard Database creates an empty standard database that does
not belong to any network (see the section on New Standard Database in the chapter on Basic
Functions). Use the Options dialog box to assign the standard database.
9.6.4 Creating and Editing Standard Types
To create a new standard type, select the screen form of the element type you want (e.g.
synchronous machine) in the Data – Standard Types menu.
330 October 2021

Screen Forms
To create a new standard type, select Local Database in the browser for type selection and right-
click to call up the pop-up menu.
Select New to create a new standard type in the local standard database. PSS SINCAL shows the
data screen area where you enter the values of the new standard type.
To edit an existing standard type, simply select it in the browser and change the attributes in the data
screen area.
October 2021 331

Screen Forms
9.6.5 Copying Standard Types
If the standard types are only slightly different, it is easier just to copy them. Select the type to be
copied in the browser of the screen form for standard types and open the pop-up menu.
Select Copy in the menu to insert the selected standard type in the local database. Select the local
database in the browser and open the pop-up menu.
Select Paste in the menu to copy the standard type to the local database.
Before you can configure the new standard type, you have to select it in the browser of the local
database.
9.6.6 Update Standard Types Used
If you change data for standard types with PSS SINCAL’s update functions, the program
automatically updates the network elements.
If, however, you change standard types, directly in the database or assign another standard type
database to the network, update has to be done manually. To do this, click Data – Standard Types
– Update Standard Types in use in the menu.
332 October 2021

Screen Forms
Select the mode for updating the standard types has the basic functions of this dialog box:
● Update standard types

● Re-init standard types
● Verify standard types
In addition, Options can also be defined. These include behavior for incorrect standard type
assignments as well a check of type names.
Incorrect standard type assignments can be ignored or deleted.
Click OK to start the function. After the function terminates, PSS SINCAL displays an information
message with possible errors. PSS SINCAL also provides detailed messages in the message box.
Update Standard Types
PSS SINCAL tries to update the data according to type assignments.
Re-Init Standard Types
PSS SINCAL updates values of the types in use and assigns new standard types. It even compares
the key attributes of standard typed with the values of the element. If there is more than one
appropriate type, PSS SINCAL displays the following message.
October 2021 333

Screen Forms
If the user decides to assign types manually, PSS SINCAL displays the following dialog box.
The dialog box has three lists.
● Element:
This lists what types of elements need to be assigned manually.
● Old Standard Type:
This lists all old standard types where automatic assignment was not possible.
● New Standard Type:
This lists all possible assignments for the selected old standard type.
Click OK to leave the dialog box and PSS SINCAL updates any standard types assigned manually.
Verify Standard Types
PSS SINCAL only checks standard type assignments without changing element data.
9.6.7 Reload Standard Databases
The menu item Data – Standard Types – Reload Standard Databases tells PSS SINCAL to reload
the standard databases for the current network. This needs to be done, if there were changes in the
standard databases during the run.
9.7 Special Screen Form with Browser

This data screen form is used to manage and edit input data at the same time. It contains a browser
listing all the available records. When you select a record in the browser, PSS SINCAL displays its
data screen forms, making it easy for you to edit the data.
334 October 2021

Screen Forms
At the top of the browser there is a toolbar with important functions for managing records. These
functions are also available in the browser’s pop-up menu. The toolbar has the following functions:
Filter field
New
Delete
Create graphic
Select
Type in the Filter field to define a filter text reducing the amount displayed in the browser. The
browser then only displays records if their names match the filter criterion you have entered.
Entering a simple filter affects all the entries in the browser.
Enter a "=" to switch the enhanced filter ON and filter according to columns. The filter criteria are
separated by a "." for the columns. Wildcards are permitted. Press return to switch the filter ON and
reduce the amount displayed in the list according to filter criteria.
Click New in the toolbar to create a new record. Delete removes the selected record.
Create graphic creates a graphic for the element selected in the list of options. PSS SINCAL
automatically closes the dialog box and switches the editing mode ON in network view. In the current
version, this function is only available for Coupling Data.
October 2021 335

Screen Forms
A special feature in this screen form is the Select button. Click this button to select all the network
elements in the Graphics Editor assigned to the record in the screen form.
The right side of the data screen form displays the data for the entry selected in the browser. Data
can be created and edited here.
Click OK to close the screen form and apply and store any changes.
9.8 Screen Forms for Characteristics Input

PSS SINCAL has a special screen form for entering characteristics, which allows you to have both
the tables of input data and diagrams.
This screen form has the following main parts:
● Browser with filter field

● Toolbar
● Values in table or diagram form
If the characteristic curve screen is opened via the screen form of a network element, the selected
characteristic curve can be transferred directly to the input data of the network element. This is
carried out by clicking the Select button.
Browser with Filter Field
All available characteristic curves are displayed in the browser. The display range can be reduced
by entering a filter in the filter field.
Once the required entry is selected, the characteristic curve is displayed in tabular or diagram form.
Selection Field for the Characteristics
In the selection field, select the characteristic curve you want.
336 October 2021

Screen Forms
Toolbar
To select the different functions for editing the characteristic curve, use the integrated toolbar.
Create a new characteristic curve
Display basic data of the characteristic curve
Copy characteristic curve
Delete characteristic curve
Switch to Diagram preview
Switch to Table preview
Select in graphics
To generate a new characteristic curve, click create new characteristic curve. PSS SINCAL opens
a screen form in which to enter basic data of the characteristic curve.
To display and edit the basic data of the characteristic curve in a screen form, click display basic
data of the characteristic curve.
Copy existing characteristic curves by using the copy characteristic curve button. The selected
characteristic curve is copied.
To delete characteristic curves, click the delete characteristic curve button. The selected
characteristic curves are deleted. Note that a characteristic curve can be deleted only when no
network elements are assigned to it.
The control buttons for Diagram preview and Table preview are used to switch how characteristic
curve values are displayed.
A special feature in this screen form is the Select in graphics button. Click this button to select all
the network elements in the Graphics Editor assigned to the record in the screen form.
Values in Table Form
In this area, enter the values for the characteristic curve in a simple table. Right-click anywhere in
the table to open a pop-up menu that lets you copy, insert and delete lines.
October 2021 337

Screen Forms
Values in Diagram Form
This displays the values of the characteristic curve as a diagram. When at least two points are
entered in the value range of the table, PSS SINCAL displays the diagram and automatically updates
it with new entries.
9.8.1 Example of Generating a New Characteristic Curve
The following example shows how a characteristic curve for new motor start-up current is generated.
After opening the screen form, give the new characteristic curve a name and assign the basic data.
To do so, click create new characteristic curve.
After the characteristic curve is created, you can enter data for points in the characteristic curve in
the table form. Each line represents a point on the characteristic curve. You can switch the display
for the values to Diagram preview to check the accuracy of the characteristic curve.
After entering the characteristic curve points, click OK to close the screen form.
338 October 2021

Screen Forms
9.8.2 Example for Copying Data from Excel
The following example explains how to create a Time series with data from an Excel workbook.
After opening the screen form for characteristics input, a new time series is created by clicking the
button New (#1).
The general data for the new profile can be defined in the data screen form. Here the name is given
(#2) and it is also defined which data should be used for the profile (#3). These data differ depending
on the type of characteristic curve. However, detailed help on the fields in the screen form is available
at any time via the ? button in the title of the screen form.
After closing the data screen form, the new profile is displayed without data values in the screen form
for characteristics input.
If data from an Excel workbook are to be transferred, they must match the data used in the screen
form. Three values are required for the time series selected in the example:
● Time t in [h] as numerical value.
October 2021 339

Screen Forms
● History type of the profile as text. This selection value must match the language in the PSS
SINCAL user interface. The following selection values are permitted: "Continuous" and
"Discrete".
● Factor f in [pu] for power.
The following picture shows the corresponding data in an Excel workbook.
The three columns containing the data can now be selected in the Excel workbook and copied to the
clipboard.
The data must not contain a header, i.e. only those values are copied into Excel that are actually to
be inserted into the screen form for characteristics input. The correct configuration of the decimal
number representation is also important. The numerical values must be in the same form as they are
displayed in the PSS SINCAL user interface.
In the screen form for characteristics input in the PSS SINCAL user interface, all three columns of
the empty "*" data row are now selected (#4):
Afterwards the data can be transferred either with the pop-up menu via Paste or with the shortcut
Ctrl + V. For each line in the clipboard a data line is also created in the screen form for characteristics
input.
The following picture shows the characteristic curve screen form with the newly inserted profile data.
340 October 2021

Screen Forms
Another special method in the screen form for characteristics input is to update selected data rows.
Here only those rows are selected which are to be updated (#5).
When pasting, only the selected lines are then overwritten with the data from the clipboard (#6).
If there are fewer lines in the clipboard than have been selected in the screen form for characteristics
input, pasting is terminated after the last line from the clipboard.
October 2021 341

Network Browser
10. Network Browser
The Network Browser is a universal tool for displaying network structure in different ways. It even
has enhanced functions to let you update and complete missing network graphics. You can also
determine the best routes for lines and routes with the Network Browser.
The View – Network Browser menu opens the Network Browser.
The Network Browser has different basic functions that you can switch between with the selection
field.
● Topology
● Substations
● Network Element Group
● Graphic Element Group
342 October 2021

Network Browser
● Owner
● Scenarios
● Malfunction Scenario
● Master Resource
● Models
● Feeder
● Route
● Calculate Routes
10.1 Topology
The Network Browser has a function to display the network topology. Open this with the View –
Network Browser menu. Switch the topology display ON with the selection field.
Besides the display of the topology, this function also enables network elements without graphics
data to be updated manually (see chapter Update Graphics). Select the node that is connected to
these network elements from a list and place it in the network. Once the node has been added,
PSS SINCAL automatically generates all required network information.
The Network Browser is divided into two areas:
● Topology list
● Connected topology
The network elements are listed in such a way that both lists differentiate between network elements
that are graphically created in the active view and those without graphics. Network elements without
graphic data have gray lettering; network elements with graphics black lettering.
October 2021 343

Network Browser
Topology List
This section has a filter field to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list. The filter field even
has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
The menu has the following functions to customize how PSS SINCAL displays the list of options.
● Element Type:
Organizes the list according to types of network elements.
● Substation:
Displays network elements grouped according to substations.
● Network Level:
Displays network elements according to what network level they belong.
● Network Area:
Displays network elements grouped according to network areas.
● Network Zone:
Displays network elements grouped according to network zones.
● Show All Without Graphic:
If this option is enabled, only those elements that do not have a graphic will be displayed in the
network browser.
● Use Shortnames:
This option makes it possible to toggle the long and short names in the name display of the
network browser.
● Automatic Update Graphics:
This option enables network elements without graphics data to be updated automatically (see
chapter Update Graphics, section Example of Automatic Updating Graphics).
● Manual Update Graphics:
This option enables network elements without graphics data to be updated manually (see
chapter Update Graphics, section Example of Manual Updating Graphics).
● Manual Update Graphics Options:
The options for manual updating can be preset here (see chapter Options for Generations,
section Options for Manual Generation).
The Topology List is grouped according to a preset criterion. Network elements selected in the
Graphic Editor are automatically displayed in the list of options.
As soon as a node or network element is selected in the topology list, PSS SINCAL updates the
Connected Topology List.
You can use the topology list to update the nodes in the network diagram. Simply select the node
and drag it into the network diagram with drag & drop. This procedure updates the node graphically.
344 October 2021

Network Browser
Connected Topology
This list provides enhanced topological information for the selected element. Depending on what has
been selected, this list displays different data. If nodes have been selected, PSS SINCAL lists any
neighboring nodes and connected elements. If network elements have been selected, PSS SINCAL
displays the nodes for the element and any additional network elements connected to these nodes.
Double-clicking on an element in the topology list selects the element in the connected topology list.
Here you can also use drag & drop to drag the nodes for updating into the network diagram. Both
neighboring nodes and connected network elements are displayed. These cannot be edited with
drag & drop. PSS SINCAL generates them automatically as soon as the nodes have been created.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing network elements.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the network element selected for editing.
● Select:
Highlights the network element selected in the network diagram, if it was created graphically.
● Localize:
Same as Select, but modifies the section of the diagram in the Graphics Editor to display the
selected element.
● Delete:
The selected network element is deleted completely. This function is used to delete network
elements without graphics. This action cannot be undone.
● Select in Tabular View:
Selects the element selected in the Tabular View.
● Check Usage:
The selected element is checked for whether it is used by other elements. A detailed
description of the dialog box is provided in the chapter Check Usage.
● Check Graphics:
Opens the Check graphics dialog box.
● Set Nodes:
Opens the Set Nodes dialog box.
October 2021 345

Network Browser
● Create Elements:
Automatically generate all possible node elements and branch elements if the corresponding
nodes already exist in the network diagram.
● Create Text:
All missing graphics texts for the current selection are generated automatically in the network
graphics.
● Refill Dialog:
Updates the contents of the dialog box.
● Expand All:
Opens all group elements in the dialog box.
● Collapse All:
Closes all group elements in the dialog box.
10.1.1 Update Graphics
This function lets you manually update network elements without graphic data. Select the node that
is connected to these network elements from a list and place it in the network. Once the node has
been added, PSS SINCAL automatically generates all required network information.
The function for updating graphics is available in the Network Browser under Topology.
To configure Update Graphics, PSS SINCAL has the following selection possibilities in the filter field
menu:
● Automatic Update Graphics:

When you select this option after a node has been created, PSS SINCAL automatically
updates the network or the subnetworks.
● Manual Update Graphics:
One node after another is placed in the network diagram using drag & drop.
346 October 2021

Network Browser
● Manual Update Graphics Options:

This enables the options for manual updating to be preset.
Options for Generation
Depending on the mode selected in the filter field menu, different generation options are available
for the updating of the network or network sections.
Options for Manual Generation
Click Manual Update Graphics Options in the filter field menu to define manual generation options.
The Options for Update Graphics dialog box can make additional settings for the manual update.
This dialog box is used to set the node type and creating elements. PSS SINCAL has the following
selection possibilities:
● Node:
Updating in this way generates simple nodes manually.
● Busbar:
Updating in this way generates busbars.
● Use type of node:
What is generated depends on the type of node defined in the node's screen form.
Depending on what has been selected, PSS SINCAL generates either a node or a busbar.
If Create graphics only for nodes and busbars is switched ON, PSS SINCAL does not
automatically generate node elements and branch elements when nodes and busbars are placed.
The Create bends option is used to define whether the network elements are to be updated with or
without bends.
Options for Automatic Updating
The dialog box for configuring the automatic generation options appears after the node is placed in
the network diagram.
The Options for Update Graphics dialog box is used for additional settings for automatic updating.
October 2021 347

Network Browser
Create Options
The Mode selection field specifies the algorithm with which the network diagram is to be generated.
● Topology:
Arranges the network hierarchically in accordance with the updated node. PSS SINCAL
arranges connection points at nodes or busbars to place subordinate network elements, if
possible placed, without bends.
● Hierarchical:
Arranges the network hierarchically in accordance with the updated node. Connecting network
elements are used to position nodes or busbars. PSS SINCAL tries to organize network
elements to save as much space as possible.
● Hierarchical 2:
Arranges the network hierarchically in accordance with the updated node. PSS SINCAL
arranges connection points at nodes or busbars to place subordinate network elements, if
possible placed, without bends.
● Station:
In this mode, parts of the network are arranged that have a substation model. Depending on
the mode selected, the nodes and busbars are combined. When grouped according to fields,
the corresponding feeder is aligned in combination and in blocks. With the main busbar, the
nodes and busbars are arranged in blocks that are combined.
348 October 2021

Network Browser
● Station Overview:
The substation overview makes it possible to generate multiple substation graphics. The
individual substations are positioned by row and column in the overview. The elements within
the substation are automatically generated according to the criteria using the selected mode
(topology, feeder or main busbar). The elements between the individual substations are shown
with the reduced terminal display.
The Geographical mode positions all substation border nodes in the graphic. If the Use
geodetic coordinates from nodes option is activated, the latitude/longitude coordinates from
the node input data are used. If this is not available or the option is deactivated, the nodes are
aligned centrally in the substation. The substation center is determined from the surrounding
lat/long rectangle of all substation nodes. The Automatically align nodes option automatically
horizontally aligns the nodes with positions that do not come from the input data. This mode is
only available in a geographical network view.
The Criterion selection list is used to specify the number of nodes to be updated. In other words, if
All is selected, all nodes will be generated. Choosing Selection as the criterion restricts generation
to the items selected in the graphics view. If a topology criterion (e.g. network level) is selected, all
nodes are generated that fulfill the selected criterion. The Node Level criterion defines the maximum
distance to the start node by entering a specified number of nodes, i.e. the distance for each node in
the network is determined starting from the start node.
The Group selection field specifies the order of the nodes within the criterion.
Layout Options
This section defines general update options to generate graphics automatically.
The Orientation selection field specifies the direction in which the elements are created (down, up,
left or right).
The Node type selection list is used to select between the following options:
● Node:
Updating in this way generates simple nodes manually.
● Busbar:
Updating in this way generates busbars.
PSS SINCAL generates the updated node as a node or busbar with the help of the type
entered in the screen form.
● Autodetect:
PSS SINCAL generates the node as either a node or a busbar with the help of the connecting
elements. If a node has more than two network elements, PSS SINCAL creates a busbar;
otherwise, it creates a node.
If Create graphics only for nodes and busbars is switched ON, PSS SINCAL does not
automatically generate node elements and branch elements when nodes and busbars are placed.
The Create bends is used to define whether the network elements are to be updated with or without
bends.
The Max. Stations field makes it possible to specify the maximum number of substations per row
that can be created automatically in the Station Overview mode.
October 2021 349

Network Browser
The Create station graphic option defines whether the substation frame graphic for the created
substations is to be generated.
Start Nodes
In this section several start nodes can be defined for automatic generation. For this the required start
nodes are selected in the list.
In the Substation mode, all boundary nodes of the substation can be determined automatically via
the pop-up menu. This is done via the menu item Select Boundary Node.
In Station Overview mode, the substations to be created are selected instead of the start nodes.
The boundary nodes of the substation are automatically determined and used as start nodes.
The filter field is used to reduce the amount of display in the list.
Example of Manual Updating Graphics
The following example, using a basic PSS SINCAL network, briefly shows the sequence used to
update graphics.
The Network Browser contains the Update Graphics function. Open the Browser with the View –
Network Browser menu. The Manual Updating is activated in the topology display in the menu of
the filter field.
350 October 2021

Network Browser
In the Network Browser, PSS SINCAL displays the nodes that can be updated manually. In this
example, these are the nodes ORT1 and ORT2.
Use drag & drop and a pressed left mouse button to move the node ORT1 from the Graphics Editor’s
Network Browser to the position you want.
In the Graphics Editor, PSS SINCAL automatically creates the node and generates all connected
network elements.
To generate network elements, PSS SINCAL uses the current layer and the attributes (see Format
View) for the network element.
Example of Automatic Updating Graphics
The following example briefly shows the sequence used to update a PSS SINCAL network without
any graphic data. Network element data already exist in the network.
The Network Browser contains the Update Graphics function. Open the Browser with the View –
Network Browser menu. The Automatic Updating is activated in the topology display in the menu
of the filter field. This causes all elements corresponding to the generation options to be generated
automatically.
October 2021 351

Network Browser
After the options for automatic update are set, the node SS1 is dragged from the dialog box in the
Graphics Editor to the desired position. Left-click, then drag and drop. The Options for Update
Graphics dialog box appears after the node is placed.
352 October 2021

Network Browser
This dialog box is used to specify all the settings for automatic generation. In this case the Network
Level criterion is selected and a second start node specified. After the dialog box is confirmed with
OK the network diagram is displayed underneath the node with a hierarchical tree structure.
All feeding node elements are generated above the node, all the consuming node elements below
the node. The algorithm for positioning the network diagram tries to position all elements so that as
few bends are generated as possible but also with as few overlaps as possible.
To generate network elements, PSS SINCAL uses the current layer and the attributes (see Format
View) for the network element. PSS SINCAL determines the vertical distances between individual
layers (hierarchical levels) from the length of the branch elements’ connecting line. Horizontal
distances for nodes and busbars are determined by the length of the node elements’ connecting line.
PSS SINCAL calculates half the length of the connecting line as the horizontal distance.
PSS SINCAL selects distances between network elements connected to the busbars so they do not
conflict with the preset symbol size.
When graphics are automatically generated, sometimes they do not fit on the preset worksheet.
When this happens, PSS SINCAL displays a message that lets the user decide whether the current
worksheet should be automatically adjusted to the optimal size. This function can also be set
manually in File – Page Setup in the Page Size tab.
Set Nodes
This function automatically generates nodes that are not yet in the network diagram. To use this
function, you first have to enter the node’s coordinates correctly in the Node table.
Use Set Nodes in the Update Graphics dialog box’s pop-up menu to start this function.
October 2021 353

Network Browser
PSS SINCAL network diagrams use a Cartesian system of coordinates with any point of origin.
Positions in PSS SINCAL networks are defined in meters from the point of origin. This means that,
positions in the network need to be assigned using Latitude/Longitude or Gauß-Krüger
coordinates.
Latitude/Longitude
Latitude and Longitude can be used to connect the previously defined position in the view to a
geographic position.
The selection menu of the button can be used to switch the following functions ON.
Gauß-Krüger
The user also can enter the Longitude (from the Equator to the North or South Pole). PSS SINCAL
uses the position of longitude as zero position on the y-axis of the worksheet. The zero position of
the x-axis of the worksheet is the mean meridian of the node position.
Note that the x position always must be entered from a meridian.
In the Scale field, enter the factor for the enlargement or reduction. PSS SINCAL corrects the node
positions depending on this.
Position in Graphic View
This section is used to define X and Y position of the graphic view.
Click Create to generate the graphics for all the nodes. Note, however, that the Create button is
blocked if all the nodes already have graphic data.
10.2 Substations
The Network Browser has a function to display the substation topology. Open this with the View –
Network Browser menu. Switch the substation display ON with the selection field.
354 October 2021

Network Browser
The Network Browser has a filter field to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list. The filter field
even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
The menu has the following functions.
● Substations:
The entered filter is applied at the substations.
● Network elements:
The entered filter is applied at the network elements.
The substations with their equipments, bays and assigned elements are shown hierarchically in the
displayed list for each network area.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists has additional functions for editing list entries.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the element selected for editing.
October 2021 355

Network Browser
● Edit Master Resource:

Opens the screen form of the master resource of the selected element for editing.
● Select:
Highlights the element selected in the network diagram.
● Localize:
selected element.
Selects the elements of the selected group in the Tabular View.
● Refill Dialog:
● Expand All:
● Collapse All:
10.3 Network Element Group

This function defines network element groups used to group network elements like network areas.
Unlike network areas, however, a network element can be assigned to any desired network element
group, so you can you document different relationships and connections in the network.
PSS SINCAL calculation methods can also process network element groups – for example, to
generate voltage profile diagrams.
This function is integrated into the Network Browser and can either be switched ON with the Insert
– Network Element Group menu or the selection field in the Network Browser.
356 October 2021

Network Browser
The Network Browser is divided into three areas:
● List with network element groups

● Assigned network elements
● Evaluation
Network Element Groups
This list has all available network element groups. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to
be displayed in the list. The filter field even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
You can select between different filter criteria in the menu.
Click New to create a new network element group. This opens the data screen form for defining
network element groups. Click OK to close the data screen form, and PSS SINCAL displays and
preselects the new group in the list of Network Element Groups.
If evaluating the network element group is switched ON, PSS SINCAL displays the color selected at
each group. Simply click on the color to switch evaluation for this network element group ON or OFF.
The network elements can now be assigned to the network element group. Click Add Selection and
PSS SINCAL assigns the network elements selected in the Graphics Editor to the group.
Assigned Network Elements
The list of Assigned Network Elements has all network elements assigned to the selected group.
A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list of assigned network
elements. The filter field even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
October 2021 357

Network Browser
You can select between different filter criteria in the menu. You can also use Order in Group to
change the sequence of the assigned network elements. Select an entry, then hold down the SHIFT
key and use the cursor buttons to move it.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing network element groups
and network elements.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the network element group or network element selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected network element group or the selected network element.
● Add Selection:
Assigns the network elements selected in the Graphics Editor to the current network element
group. This menu item is only available in the list of assigned network elements.
● Select:
Highlights the network element group or network element selected in the network diagram.
● Localize:
selected element.
● Show All:
Switches evaluation ON for all network element groups. This menu item is only available in the
list of network element groups when evaluation is activated.
● Hide All:
Switches evaluation OFF for all network element groups. This menu item is only available in
the list of network element groups when evaluation is activated.
Evaluation
Evaluation lets you evaluate the network element group, i.e. this immediately displays the respective
elements in color in the Graphics Editor. To switch OFF the color display for the selections in the
Graphics Editor, click No Evaluation.
358 October 2021

Network Browser
You can change the attributes for coloring in the Evaluation dialog box. Click Evaluation to open
this dialog box.
For a detailed description of how to use this dialog box, see the section on Evaluations in the chapter
on Input Data and Results.
10.4 Graphic Element Group

This function defines graphic element groups to be used as the network element group for network
elements.
However, unlike the network element group, this group is for graphics. A polygon stored in the
database is used for this purpose.
The graphic element group is the basis for the graphical load group and the graphical supply area,
which are used as the basis for Network Development calculations.
October 2021 359

Network Browser
This function is integrated into the Network Browser and can either be switched ON in the Insert –
Graphic Element Group menu or with the selection field in the Network Browser.
● List with graphic element groups

Graphic Element Groups
This list has all available graphic element groups. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to
be displayed in the list.
Click New to create a new element group. This switches the insert mode ON for graphic element
groups in the Graphics Editor. Create a polygon to define the element group.
When you create the polygon, PSS SINCAL opens the following dialog box where a name can be
entered.
Click OK to close the dialog box. This creates the new group, which is immediately available for
editing. Insert mode remains active until you click the right mouse button or turn another insert mode
ON, which automatically turns this OFF.
360 October 2021

Network Browser
Assigned Network Elements lists all the network elements included in the selected graphic element
group. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list of assigned network
● All:
Lists all the elements in the graphic element group.
● Nodes:
Lists all the nodes in the graphic element group.
Lists all the network elements in the graphic element group.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing graphic element groups
and network elements.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the graphic element group or network element selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected graphic element group. This menu item is only available in the list of
graphic element groups.
● Select:
Highlights the graphic element group or network element selected in the network diagram.
● Localize:
selected elements.
● Select elements:
Highlights all network elements of the selected graphic element group in the network diagram.
● Localize elements:
Same as Select elements, but modifies the section of the diagram in the Graphics Editor to
display the selected elements.
October 2021 361

Network Browser

10.5 Owner
Owners are used to group network elements. A network element can be assigned to any desired
owner, so you can document different relationships and connections in the network.
There is a clearly arranged presentation of all the available owners in the network browser. Open
this with the View – Network Browser menu. Switch the owner display ON with the selection field.
● List with owners

● Evaluation
Owner
This list has all available owners. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be displayed in
the list of owners.
Click New to create a new owner. This opens the data screen form for defining owners. Click OK to
close the data screen form, and PSS SINCAL displays and preselects the new owner in the list of
Owners.
362 October 2021

Network Browser
The list of Assigned Network Elements has all network elements assigned to the selected owner.
In this list, network elements are marked if they have been selected in the Graphics Editor, so you
can see how network elements have been assigned.
● All:
Lists all the elements of the owner.
● Nodes:
Lists all the nodes of the owner.
Lists all the network elements of the owner.
The network elements can now be assigned to the owner. Click Add Selection and PSS SINCAL
assigns the network elements selected in the Graphics Editor to the owner.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing owners and network
elements.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the owner or network element selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected owner or the assignment to the selected network element.
● Add Selection:
Assigns the network elements selected in the Graphics Editor to the current owner. This menu
item is only available in the list of assigned network elements.
● Select:
Highlights the owner or network element selected in the network diagram.
October 2021 363

Network Browser
● Localize:
selected elements.
Selects the elements of the selected owner in the Tabular View.
Evaluation
Evaluation lets you evaluate the owner, i.e. this immediately displays the respective elements in
color in the Graphics Editor. To switch OFF the color display for the selections in the Graphics Editor,
click No Evaluation.
this dialog box.
10.6 Scenarios
The function for defining scenarios is integrated into the Network Browser and can either be switched
ON with the Insert – Scenario menu or the selection field in the Network Browser.
364 October 2021

Network Browser
● List with scenarios

● Scenario data
● Evaluation
Szenarios
This list has all available scenarios. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be displayed
in the list of scenarios.
Click New to create a new scenario. This opens the data screen form for defining scenarios. Click
OK to close the data screen form, and PSS SINCAL displays and preselects the new scenario in the
list of Scenarios.
Assigned Scenario Data
The list of Scenarios has all available scenarios. The list of Assigned Scenario Data has all
scenario data assigned to a scenario.
Using the checkbox in the first column, the scenario data can be activated or deactivated.
The existing scenario data can be re-sorted using the key combination Shift + arrow up/arrow down.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the Scenario list has additional functions for editing scenarios.
October 2021 365

Network Browser
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the scenario selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected scenario.
The elements that are influenced by the scenario are marked in the graphic editor.
The elements that are influenced by the scenario are marked in the tabular view.
● Scenario Comparison:
This function opens the view of the Scenario Comparison. The selected scenario is pre-
selected here in the scenario comparison.
● Variant from Scenario:
This function opens the dialog box for creating a Variant from Scenario. The selected scenario
is pre-selected here in the dialog box.
The pop-up menu of the Scenario data list has additional functions for editing scenario data.
● Add:
New scenario data can be created here. After closing the screen form with OK, the new
scenario file is displayed in the selection list Scenario data.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the scenario data selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected scenario data.
● Create Scenario File:
This function enables a new scenario file to be created. If no network element is selected, the
cursor appears for marking the element using the polygon. Otherwise the already selected
elements are used for creating the file.
● View with Default Diagram:
With this function the file can be edited directly. This opens the standard program for XML files
and you can edit the file directly with it.
366 October 2021

Network Browser
Evaluation
Evaluation lets you evaluate the owner, i.e. this immediately displays the respective elements in
color in the Graphics Editor. To switch OFF the color display for the selections in the Graphics Editor,
click No Evaluation.
this dialog box.
10.7 Malfunction Scenario

The malfunction scenario function defines network element groups for contingency analysis.
The function for defining malfunction scenarios is integrated into the Network Browser and can either
be switched ON with the Data – Fault Definition – Malfunction Scenario menu or the selection
field in the Network Browser.
October 2021 367

Network Browser
● List with malfunction scenarios

● Evaluation
Malfunction Scenarios
This list has all available malfunction scenarios. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be
displayed in the list. The filter field even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
The following scenarios are defined which have completely different functions.
● Malfunction:
This type defines precisely those elements as malfunctions that are defined in the scenario,
and the predefined resupply measures are also executed precisely. In other words, a special
malfunction is predefined precisely.
● Resupply:
This type defines a resupply measure. For this those elements are defined that are shut down
and reconnected. This is the resupply measure. The malfunctions for which this measure is to
be executed are also defined.
368 October 2021

Network Browser
Click New to create a new scenario. This opens the data screen form for defining malfunction
scenarios. Click OK to close the data screen form, and PSS SINCAL displays and preselects the
new scenario in the list of Malfunction Scenarios.
The list of Scenarios has all available malfunction scenarios. The list of Assigned Network
Elements has all network elements assigned to a malfunction scenario. In this list, network elements
or substations are marked if they have been selected in the Graphics Editor, so you can see how
network elements or substations have been assigned.
● All:
Lists all the elements in the malfunction scenario.
● Malfunction:
Only those elements are listed that are defined as a malfunction.
● Reconnect:
Only those elements are listed that are defined as a reconnect.
● Shutdown:
Only those elements are listed that are defined as a shutdown.
Click the Add Selection button to transfer the network elements selected in the graphics editor to
the currently selected malfunction scenario. A dialog is displayed before the transfer in which the
type can be selected. In other words, it is possible to define here whether the newly added elements
malfunction, are reconnected or shut down.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing malfunction scenarios and
network elements.
October 2021 369

Network Browser
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the malfunction scenario or network element selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected malfunction scenario or the selected network element.
● Add Selection:
Assigns the network elements selected in the Graphics Editor to the current malfunction
scenario. This menu item is only available in the list of assigned network elements.
● Add Scenario:
The Scenario dialog box is opened and the selected scenario is assigned to the current
malfunction scenario.
● Edit Definition:
This enables the editing of an element in the malfunction scenario. In other words, the status
can be changed between Malfunction, Reconnect and Shutdown.
● Select:
Highlights the malfunction scenario or network element selected in the network diagram.
● Localize:
selected elements.
Selects the elements of the selected malfunction scenario in the Tabular View.
Evaluation
this dialog box.
370 October 2021

Network Browser
10.8 Master Resource

In PSS SINCAL, master resources are used to assign different IDs to network elements and
equipment. There is a clearly arranged presentation of all the available master resources in the
network browser. Open this with the View – Network Browser menu. Switch the master resource
display ON with the selection field.
The Network Browser has a filter field to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list. The filter field
even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
● Element Type:
The list is organized according to the types of elements that have been assigned a master
resource.
● Master Resource:
The list is organized according to master resources and their categories.
The list of options is grouped according to preset criteria. Depending on the display mode selected,
the list at the bottom displays either assigned master resources or assigned objects.
As soon as an entry in the list of options is selected, the list at the bottom is updated.
Assigned Master Resource
This lists all the master resources for the selected object, including the categories.
October 2021 371

Network Browser
Assigned Objects
This lists all the objects grouped according to the object type assigned to the master resource.
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing the list entry.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the network element selected for editing.
● Edit Master Resource:
Opens the screen form of the master resource selected for editing.
● Select:
Highlights the network element selected in the network diagram.
● Localize:
selected element.
● Refill Dialog:
● Expand All:
● Collapse All:
10.9 Models
The models can be used to define special simulations for the behavior of network elements. This
makes it possible to simulate controllers for machines and equipment as well as define a special
behavior of network elements in the dynamic simulation and power flow calculation.
The function for defining models is integrated into the Network Browser and can either be switched
ON with the Data – Dynamics – Models menu or the selection field in the Network Browser.
372 October 2021

Network Browser
● List with models

● Functions
Models
This list has all available models. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be displayed in
the list. It is also possible to restrict the display to specific model types using the filter button.
Click New to create a model. This opens the dialog box for editing models. Click OK to close the
dialog box, and PSS SINCAL displays and preselects the new model in the list of Models.
October 2021 373

Network Browser
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing malfunction scenarios and
network elements.
● New:
Creates a new model.
● Edit:
This can be used to edit the selected model. Both the model parameters can be edited and the
model file (*.mac) opened.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected model.
● Duplicate:
Duplicates the selected model.
● Select:
All network elements to which the selected model is assigned are marked in the graphics
editor.
● Localize:
selected elements.
● Refill Dialog:
● Edit Model:
The ASCII file containing the model program code is opened for editing. This is carried out
either in PSS NETOMAC or in a text editor (depending on the setting in the Options dialog
box).
● Show Help for Model:
If the selected model file is provided with a help function, this can be displayed via this menu
item.
● Update used Models:
Updates all the models in the network. This synchronizes the parameters with the model-
program files (*.mac).
● Delete unused Models:
Deletes after confirmation all models, which are not assigned to a network element.
374 October 2021

Network Browser
Functions
The Selection Filter option enables the display in the model list to be reduced dynamically. Only
those models are listed that are assigned to the network elements marked in the graphics editor.
If the Dynamic Data selection button is activated, a menu can be activated that provides other editing
functions for dynamics.
● Variables for Dynamics

● Event for Dynamics
● Global Network Model
● Model Export Definition
● Plot Definition
10.10 Feeder
This function lets you analyze the structure of an electrical network. You can determine all feeders
starting from specially designated starting points and busbars. A feeder is a network supply area that
leaves from a substation. Feeders are determined by the switching state of the network elements.
This means the current network operational state is being observed. Therefore, feeders need to be
recalculated the network operational state has changed in any way.
The function for defining feeders is integrated into the Network Browser and can either be switched
ON with the Tools – Feeder menu or the selection field in the Network Browser.
To determine the feeders, click Determine. This starts the algorithm that analyzes the network and
fills the list in Overview feeders with available feeders.
October 2021 375

Network Browser
Once the feeders have been calculated, you can create feeder documentation, select feeders in the
network diagram or evaluate feeders. These functions are available below the feeder overview and
can be selected with the select button:
● Feeder Documentation
● Select in Graphic View
● Evaluation and Highlight
Overview Feeders
This section lists all available feeders once they have been determined.
The list can be shortened temporarily using the Filter field. When a filter is created, this immediately
reduces the amount displayed in the list below. Pay attention to capitals and small letters. This filter
field also has a control button. Click it to display a menu where the filter criteria (primary substation,
feeder, node in feeder or element in feeder) can be selected.
Feeders can be selected individually in the list of options. PSS SINCAL uses these feeders for feeder
documentation, select in graphic view and evaluation and highlight.
The pop-up menu for feeder overview has functions to simplify feeder selection.
● Select All:
Selects all feeders in the list.
● Deselect All:
Removes all selections in the list.
● Select Feeder at Graphic View:
Selects the feeder selected in the Graphics Editor.
● Select Primary Substation:
Selects the primary substation selected in the Graphics Editor.
● Select Longest Route:
This function selects elements from the longest supply route to an end node in the feeder.
● Select Feeder at Tabular View:
Selects the feeder selected in the Tabular View.
● Format Feeder:
Displays a dialog box where the feeder attributes for primary substation and feeder can be
defined.
Determine Feeder
After clicking the Determine button a selection list appears with the following functions:
● Start Determination:
Opens the dialog box for the feeder determination.
376 October 2021

Network Browser
● Refresh:
Performs the feeder determination once more with the selected settings.
● Reset:
All determined feeders are deleted.
● Auto Update:
If this option is active, the feeder determination is carried out automatically after each switching
action or change in operation (deactivated) in the network with the selected settings.
Start Determination
The Start Determination menu point starts an algorithm to analyze the network and determine
feeders. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box where the control parameters for feeder determination
can be set.
Feeder determination procedure controls how the algorithm basically behaves. You can select
between the following options:
● Simple:
When this option has been selected, PSS SINCAL only determines feeders from with specially
marked nodes or busbars. Existing container models, such as main busbars and substations,
are not considered.
● Advanced:
This option activates a more complex function for creating feeders. Both the selected nodes
and busbars and containers for substations and main busbars determine the feeders. All
elements inside a container are ignored.
When there are many substations the feeder is allocated to the substation with the higher rated
voltage.
October 2021 377

Network Browser
Generation of Feeder Name
In this section you can define which element is used to generate the feeder name. In the selection
field First element in feeder you can choose between the following selection values:
● None:
The feeder name is generated automatically.
● Net Station:
The feeder name is the first node in the feeder, which has the node type net station.
● Overhead Line/Cable:
The feeder name is the first line in the feeder that is not defined as a connection.
● Bay:
The feeder name is the name of the assigned bay in the first node of the feeder.
● Node:
The feeder name is the first node in the feeder, which is not defined as a joint.
The Optional fallback selection field offers a second option in case the name generation does not
provide a result. If the fallback is also unsuccessful, the feeder name will be generated automatically.
If the Consider Only Primary Substations option is activated, only those substations are
considered that are marked as primary substations.
Stop on opened switches and Stop on elements out of service limit how the feeder is determined.
The Consider establishment/shutdown date option activates the generation of feeders according
to date. In other words, only the network elements are considered that are available according to the
selected View Date in the calculation settings.
Delete attributes of unused feeders deletes attributes that can no longer be assigned to feeders.
If Save feeder in database is switched ON, the feeders created are also stored in the database.
Results – Tools can display these later in Tabular View. PSS SINCAL distinguishes between
Feeder Results and Feeder Element Results.
Feeder Documentation
The feeder documentation exports predefined feeder evaluations to an Excel file that can be used to
analyze feeders according to various criteria.
File name defines the desired Excel output file.
Click Options to display the following dialog box.
378 October 2021

Network Browser
The Documentation range list switches the following predefined evaluations ON or OFF.
● Feeder overview:
All the feeders are listed in this evaluation. In addition to the name of transformer primary
substation and feeder, PSS SINCAL also displays additional characteristics such as maximum
feeder length.
● Lines:
This evaluation lists all the lines of the feeder with their topological information, length and
cross section.
● Transformers:
This evaluation lists all the transformers of the feeder with their topological information,
maximum power and load.
● Switches:
This evaluation documents all the open feeder switches.
● Adjacent feeders:
This evaluation documents all feeders that can be switched ON with a single switching activity.
In addition to topological information, this shows the feeder’s actual current load and the
transmission reserve.
● Unsupplied network elements:
This evaluation lists all network elements that are not connected to any feeder.
The Limiting Elements selection list enables a network element group to be selected in which those
network elements are stored that are included in the feeder. If no network element group is selected,
all network elements in the feeder are included.
The Create Doc. button exports evaluations to the Excel file. Click the Excel button to open the Excel
file. Note that PSS SINCAL only considers feeders in the documentation selected in the feeder
overview. This lets you customize the feeder evaluation to meet your current needs.
After the documentation is finished, press the Excel button to open the Excel file.
For a detailed description of the Excel tables, see the section on Feeder Documentation in the
chapter on Technical Reference.
Select in Graphic View
This function defines options and parameters for selections in the graphics.
October 2021 379

Network Browser
You can select the following selection functions.
● Feeder:
Selects all the elements for feeders marked in the list in the Graphics Editor.
● Primary Substation:
Selects all the marked primary substations in the Graphics Editor.
● Longest Route:
Selects elements that have the longest supply route to an end node. All the feeders selected in
the list are considered.
● Unsupplied Network Elements:
Selects all the elements that have not been assigned to any feeder.
Press Select to start the selection function and find the network elements you want in the Graphics
Editor.
Click Options to display the following dialog box.
Add nodes and busbars to selection defines whether nodes and busbars will be included in the
selection.
Enable Zoom in selects a section of the diagram so that all selected feeders can be seen in the
Graphics Editor.
Evaluation and Highlight
This function lets you color or highlight feeders in the network.
380 October 2021

Network Browser
Note that PSS SINCAL only considers feeders selected in the feeder overview. This lets you
customize the evaluation and highlight to meet your current needs.
Click No Evaluation to switch OFF temporary network coloring and display the network diagram in
the original colors.
Feeder colors each feeder individually.
Feeder Substations assigns all the feeders of a primary substation the same color.
This only colors elements temporarily and disappears when you close the network.
Click Highlight if you want to highlight the feeders in the network diagram.
Click Options to display a dialog box for entering enhanced settings for highlighting.
Pen Width and Min. Pen Width can be entered in the Highlight Options section for highlighting
feeders.
The Alpha option enables the opacity of the highlighting to be defined. Values between 0
(transparent) and 255 (fully opaque) can be set.
The program uses these settings to highlight the selected results. A temporary PIC file is created in
order to highlight the results according to the set pen width. Min. pen width sets the lower display
limit for the PIC file. If the PIC file in a small zoomed section has a pen width below this value,
PSS SINCAL displays the PIC file with the limit so you can see the highlighting in small zoomed
areas as well.
Feeder Determination Prerequisites
Feeder determination is based on a network tracing, which starting with selected starting points
assigns all the topological connected network elements to a feeder. The algorithm works in different
ways, depending whether you have selected Simple or Advanced in the Build Feeder dialog box.
Simple Feeder Determination
The simple feeder determination is based on network node designation. It is started at

nodes/busbars, which are designated as Primary Substations.
October 2021 381

Network Browser
SS4
SS1
N3
N1
SS2
N2
SS3
The example above shows busbars SS1, SS2, SS3 and SS4 with the primary substation type. Nodes
N1, N2 and N3 are network stations. The Node Type field in the Node form assigns the node type.
Starting from with the busbars SS1, SS2, SS3 and SS4 which have been specified as substations,
PSS SINCAL starts network tracing until it finds an additional substation node or the criteria for
abortion (open switches, elements out of service) have been met.
The names of the feeders are determined by network tracing. PSS SINCAL analyzes all the nodes
in the feeder from the starting point and determines the first node specified as a network station. The
name of this node is used for the feeder name. If no appropriate node can be found, PSS SINCAL
automatically generates a name for the feeder.
Advanced Feeder Determination
Advanced feeder determination is basically the same as simple feeder determination, except for the
fact that container models for main busbars and substations are also considered.
The starting points for the feeder calculations are:
● Network nodes designated as substations

● Substations
● Main busbars
382 October 2021

Network Browser
The following illustration shows a simple network with different container models. The feeders have
different colors.
Substation STA1
Main
busbar
BUS1
SS4
SS1
N3
N1
SS2
N2
SS3
In this example, Busbar SS1 is part of a substation. Busbar SS2 is designated as a substation.
Busbars SS3 and SS4 have been combined with a container to a main busbar. Nodes N1, N2 and
N3 are designated as network stations. The Node Type field in the Node form assigns the node type.
The starting points for feeder determination are the container models of Substation STA1 and the
Main Busbar BUS1 as well as Node SS2 which has been specified as the substation. The network
elements inside the container models are not part of the feeder determination. Starting from the
starting points, PSS SINCAL starts network tracing until it finds either a container model or a
substation node. Preset criteria for abortion (open switches, elements out of service) also affect the
feeder determination.
The names of the feeders are determined by network tracing. PSS SINCAL analyzes all the nodes
in the feeder from the starting point and determines the first node specified as a network station. The
name of this node is used for the feeder name. If no appropriate node can be found, PSS SINCAL
automatically generates a name for the feeder.
10.11 Route
A route is the basis to laying lines.
There is a clearly arranged presentation of all the available routes in the network browser. Open this
with the View – Network Browser menu. Switch the route display ON with the selection field.
October 2021 383

Network Browser
● List with routes

● Assigned lines
Route
This list has all available routes. A filter field is available to reduce the amount to be displayed in
the list. The filter field even has a control button that you can click to display a menu.
You can select the filter criteria in the menu (cable route or overhead line route). The All option is
used to perform the search irrespective of type. The Element in route option is used to define
whether the filter text refers to the assigned lines.
As soon as an entry in the list of options is selected, the list at the bottom is updated.
Assigned Lines
The list of Assigned Lines has all lines assigned to a route. In this list, lines are marked if they have
been selected in the Graphics Editor, so you can see how lines have been assigned. A filter field is
available to reduce the amount to be displayed in the list of assigned lines.
384 October 2021

Network Browser
Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu of the lists of options has additional functions for editing routes and lines.
● Edit:
Opens the screen form of the route or line selected for editing.
● Delete:
Deletes the selected route or the assignment to the selected line.
● Select:
Highlights the route or line selected in the network diagram.
● Localize:
selected route or line.
Highlights all network elements of the selected route in the network diagram.
● Localize elements:
Same as Select elements, but modifies the section of the diagram in the Graphics Editor to
display the selected elements.
Selects the elements of the selected route in the Tabular View.
10.12 Calculate Routes

This function calculates and selects routes in the Graphics Editor. PSS SINCAL uses a specially
implemented routing algorithm for this. This is similar to a normal route planer that calculates the
best connecting route between starting and end points.
This function is integrated into the Network Browser. Either click Tools – Calculate Routes in the
menu or use the selection field in the Network Browser to switch this function ON.
October 2021 385

Network Browser
● List of calculated routes

● Elements of route
Calculated Routes
This list has two fundamentally different functions for calculating routing:
● Lines:
This function calculates the shortest line possible between prescribed start and end nodes in
existing lines.
● Routes:
This function calculates the best route for the new lines. This kind of routing is based on the
route model. This means the routes have already been created. Control settings are used to
calculate the shortest and most economical route for installing the new line.
To calculate routes, select one start and one end node. PSS SINCAL displays both these nodes in
the list at the top. To calculate the routes, click Calculate to open a dialog box for defining the
additional control setting for the calculation algorithm. Click OK to close the dialog box and start the
routing calculations.
Elements of Route
In this list PSS SINCAL shows the calculated routes.
386 October 2021

Network Browser
Pop-Up Menu
To make this easy to use, both lists have intelligent pop-up menus. Depending what was selected in
the list, you have the following functions:
● Set Start Node:

This menu item is only available in the pop-up menu of the first node. The node you select in
the Graphics Editor is defined as starting node for the route.
● Set End Node:
This menu item is only available in the pop-up menu of the second node. The node you select
in the Graphics Editor is defined as end node for the route.
● Set Start and End Node:
This menu item is available if two nodes have been selected in the Graphics Editor and defines
the start and end node simultaneously.
● Edit:
This menu item opens the screen form of the network element selected for editing.
● Select:
PSS SINCAL highlights the selected element in the network diagram. If you select a route all
elements of the route are highlighted.
● Localize:
This menu item is the same as Select, but it modifies the section of the diagram in the
Graphics Editor to make visible all selected elements.
10.12.1 Line Calculations
This function calculates the shortest line possible between prescribed start and end nodes. This kind
of routing is based on the existing network topology.
Calculate starts the algorithm that determines the line routes. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box
where you can set additional control parameters.
PSS SINCAL normally always calculates the routing according to the shortest length. PSS SINCAL
uses the line’s actual length. Since none of the other network elements has any length, PSS SINCAL
uses a minimum length of 0.0001.
Start Node selects the node for the start of the route.
End Node selects the node for the end of the route.
October 2021 387

Network Browser
Stop on opened switches and Stop on elements out of service set limits for the route
determination.
Calculate optional routes switches ON the calculations for additional routes. As a default, the
calculation algorithm only determines the shortest possible route. If this option is switched ON, the
routing calculations are based on heuristics. Depending on the kind of network topology, it then
calculates additional optional routes. However, these routes do not have to correspond to the
optimum, but simply represent the alternatives determined with the heuristics.
The Consider Impedance option can be used to change the method for determining routes so that
the smallest line impedance (absolute value of resistance and reactance) is used in electrical
networks instead of the line length.
The Consider Pipe Diameter option can be used to change the route calculation method so that the
largest pipe diameter is used in pipe networks instead of the length.
10.12.2 Route Calculations
This function calculates the best possible route when you install a new line. This kind of routing is
based on the route model. This means the routes must already have been created completely. This
function calculates either the shortest route or the one with the lowest installation costs.
Calculate starts the algorithm that determines the route calculation. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog
box where you can set additional control parameters.
Start Node defines the node for the start of the route.
End Node defines the node for the end of the route.
Route calculation defines the basic control settings for the algorithm. Type of route selects the
routing calculation method. PSS SINCAL provides following options:
● Shortest length
● Lowest cost
388 October 2021

Network Browser
If you select Shortest length, you can set a limit for costs in the Max. cost field. If you enter a value
not equal to zero, PSS SINCAL ignores all the routes that are above this limit.
If you select Minimum costs, you can set a limit for the maximum route length in the Max. route
length field. If you enter a value not equal to zero, PSS SINCAL ignores all the routes that are above
this limit.
Max. route node distance sets the maximum distance from the start and end node to the route
nodes. In routing calculations, PSS SINCAL only uses route nodes as start and end points if they are
within the prescribed distance.
Additional parameters defines enhanced control settings. If Consider route type is switched ON,
PSS SINCAL only considers routes of the selected type for the routing.
Consider route configuration switches ON the enhanced examination for technical route attributes.
PSS SINCAL only considers routes that can still add lines (i.e. those that are not completely full).
Use idle lines switches ON the preferential use of any free lines in the route. When you are creating
new routes, you often install lines that remain idle, since this – particularly in downtown areas – is
much more cost effective than the costs for installing a new line underground. These unused, but
already available lines, can be documented in the route. The routing algorithm gives preference to
these lines, since they create no installation costs.
Check establishment/shutdown time switches ON a date check. This means PSS SINCAL only
uses routes when their establishment time is less or equal to the current view date and they are still
in operation. You can set this view date globally for the entire network in the Calculation Settings.
10.12.3 Example of Line Calculations
The following example shows how you calculate lines. These are based on a geographic
PSS SINCAL network.
To start line calculations, first open the Network Browser. The easiest way to do this is with Tools –
Calculate Routes in the menu.
October 2021 389

Network Browser
Switch Lines ON in the selection list.
Then define the start and end nodes for the routing calculations. First, select the start node you want
in the Graphics Editor. Then use Set Start Node in the pop-up menu to assign the selected node to
the start node in the Network Browser.
Use the same procedure for the end node.
Click Calculate to start the actual line calculations. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box with control
options.
Click OK to close the dialog box and start the routing algorithm.
390 October 2021

Network Browser
If the calculations are not possible (e.g. if there is no topological connection), PSS SINCAL
documents this with a message.
If the route calculations are successful, the Network Browser lists the results.
Calculated Routes at the top of the dialog box lists all the routes that could be calculated using the
given control settings and network topology. The bottom of the dialog box has a detailed list of all the
elements in the routing.
The pop-up menu has enhanced editing functions that let you select the complete route in the
Graphics Editor.
10.12.4 Example of Route Calculations
The following example shows how you calculate routes. These are based on a geographic
PSS SINCAL network where the routes have already been calculated.
October 2021 391

Network Browser
The following illustration shows a sector of an inner-city network with routes.
To start the route calculations, first open the Network Browser. The easiest way to do this is with
Tools – Calculate Routes in the menu.
Switch ON Routes in the selection list.
Then select the start and end nodes you want for the new line in the Graphics Editor.
392 October 2021

Network Browser
Click Calculate to start the route calculations. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog box with control
options.
Click OK to close this dialog box and start the actual routing algorithm.
If the calculations are not possible (e.g. no topological connection, no free positions in the route),
PSS SINCAL documents this with a message.
If the route calculations are successful, the Network Browser lists the results.
Calculated Routes at the top of the dialog box lists all the routes that could be calculated using the
given control setting and network topology. The bottom of the dialog box has a detailed list of all the
sections of the route of the selected routing.
October 2021 393

Network Browser
The pop-up menu contains enhanced editing functions.
Click Select or Localize to display calculated routes in the Graphics Editor.
Create Line uses the route calculations to generate the new line. PSS SINCAL displays the screen
form of the line where you can enter the network data.
394 October 2021

Network Browser
Click OK to generate the new line in the network diagram.
October 2021 395

Result Browser
11. Result Browser
The Result Browser is a universal tool for displaying network results. This window lets you visualize
the results for individual calculation procedures without interrupting editing of the network.
If the calculations were error-free, PSS SINCAL automatically displays the results in the Result
Browser.
You can open this window later with View – Result Browser in the menu.
The Result browser displays the available results in the current network.
Selecting Results
Select the data you want to display with the selection field.
Depending on the type of calculations, the Result Browser is displayed in different ways.
PSS SINCAL has the following types of Results data:
● None
● Optimal Network Structure
● Optimal Branching
● Load Assignment
● Load Balancing
396 October 2021

Result Browser
● Resupply
● Load Allocation
● Compensation Power
● Capacitor Placement
● VoltVar Optimization
● DI Device – Settings
● Protection Route Calculation
● Contingency Analysis for Electrical Networks
● Contingency Analysis for Pipe Networks
October 2021 397

Signal Explorer
12. Signal Explorer
In the Signal Explorer, data from various sources suitable for presentation in diagrams can be
visualized. By default, these are the signals from the results databases, but data from other sources
can also be visualized. These signals can be transferred to diagrams by drag & drop.
To open the signal explorer, click View – Signal Explorer.
The signal explorer consists of a toolbar and a browser.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains all the functions needed to manage signals.
Open and close signal file
Filter
Insert a filter text for the signal explorer
Collapse all and expand all
Help
After clicking the Open Signal File button, a selection menu appears in which the Open Signal File
and Close Signal File functions are available. With the Open Signal File function an additional
signal file can be selected for visualization in the browser. With this function a signal file can be
closed. Selecting Close Signal File closes the selected signal file.
398 October 2021

Signal Explorer
The visibility of the signal sources can be controlled via the Filter selection field. The following
options are available here:
● Diagrams:
By PSS SINCAL calculation modules generated diagram signals, which are available in the
signal database.
● External Diagrams:
By PSS SINCAL calculation modules generated diagram signals from another network model.
● External Databases:
External databases generated by the time series calculation.
● CSV Files:
Any CSV files whose content can be used as signal source.
● COMTRADE Files:
File according to IEC 60255-24 standard for standardized information exchange of
instantaneous value records.
● PSS NETOMAC Result Files:
Binary result file (RES) generated by the dynamics simulation.
● PSS E Output Files:
Result files from the stability calculation of PSS E.
● Selected Elements:
Activates/deactivates the stored selection filter, i.e. only those signals are displayed which were
selected at the time of the Select in Signal Explorer function.
● Reset Selected Elements:
Removes the selection filter completely from the Signal Explorer.
You can enter filter text in the filter field and PSS SINCAL will only display signals in the browser if
their name meets these filter criteria. If a directory separator "\" is specified in the filter text, all signals
are displayed whose directory path matches the filter text. Wildcards are also supported in the filter.
With the help of an extended filter, which is introduced by an =, the input of several filter criteria is
possible. These can be logically linked by specifying the operator AND && or OR ||. The filter is
executed by pressing the Enter key. The extended filter checks the individual filter criteria with each
list entry. The use of the directory separator "\" is not possible here. The individual filter criteria are
automatically extended with the wildcard "*" at the beginning and at the end.
Help calls up PSS SINCAL online help.
Browser
All available signals are displayed in the browser. The visualization is organized hierarchically
according to result files. The results from the signal database for the current variant are visualized
by default at the beginning. The other signal files manually assigned in the browser are then
displayed.
October 2021 399

Signal Explorer
The Signal Explorer’s browser has a pop-up menu with different functions.
Depending on which entry you select in the browser, PSS SINCAL has an individual pop-up menu
with the appropriate functions.
● Open Signal File:

This allows an additional signal file to be selected for visualization in the browser. The following
file types are supported: External LP results databases of PSS SINCAL, PSS E OUT files,
PSS NETOMAC RES files and CSV files.
For CSV files it is possible to specify the 1st column as the date in format YYYY-MM-DD
HH:MM:SS.
● Close Signal File:
This function enables a signal file to be closed.
● Open Containing Folder:
The containing folder of the selected source (e.g. results database) is opened.
● Reload:
All assigned signals are reloaded and the Signal Explorer is updated.
● Copy Signal:
Copies the signal’s data to the clipboard. These data can then be inserted into other Windows
applications.
With a multiple selection all selected signals are copied to the Clipboard.
● Select:
If an object is defined in the selected entry, it will be selected in the network graphic.
● Localize:
selected element.
● Multiple Selection:
If this option is activated, several signals can be selected using the option buttons. These
selected signals can be graphically displayed by dragging them.
● Select All:
All signals are selected in the list.
400 October 2021

Signal Explorer
● Deselect All:
All selections will be removed from the list.
● Expand:
This function expands the tree structure of the selected entry.
● Collapse:
This function collapses the expanded tree structure of the selected entry again.
● Create Diagram Page:
Opens the wizard for creating a new diagram page.
External Data Sources Supported by the Signal Explorer
In addition to the PSS SINCAL signal databases and external result databases, various file formats
containing signals can also be visualized in the Signal Explorer.
CSV Files
Any CSV files can be used as signal source. Here, the 1st column is always used as the X-axis. All
further columns then contain the Y-axes of the signals.
COMTRADE Files
Signal Explorer offers the possibility to use all forms of COMTRADE files.
The COMTRADE data format defined in the IEC 60255-24 standard enables a standardized
information exchange of instantaneous value recordings for the analysis of transients during faults
and other events. On the one hand, these data can be used for validation of models and comparison
to simulation (EMT). On the other hand, they are used in the interaction of simulation (EMT) with
digital-analog amplifiers, for example, for testing protection devices and their algorithms.
The following standards are supported:
● COMTRADE version 1991:

ASCII or binary formats.
ASCII or binary formats.
Both the use of individual files (CFG, DAT) and the use of a combined file (CFF) are supported
here. The data can be processed both in ASCII format and in binary formats (integer/float).
PSS NETOMAC Result Files
Binary result files (RES) generated by the PSS NETOMAC dynamics simulation can be integrated in
the Signal Explorer.
PSS E Output Files
The binary result files (OUT) of the stability calculation of PSS E can be processed.
October 2021 401

Signal Explorer
Create New Diagram Pages
A wizard is available in the Signal Explorer that allows you to fill predefined signals with the diagram
data for selected calculation results. This is useful if, for example, different projections of a signal are
to be visualized. A typical example of this is the frequency response diagram page of the harmonic
calculation.
The wizard for creating the diagram page can be started via the Create Diagram Page pop-up menu
in the Signal Explorer. A list of available wizards is described in the Diagrams chapter, section
Diagram Page Wizard.
A distinction is made here between the dialog box for generating a single diagram page or the
simultaneous generation of multiple diagram pages.
The dialog box for generating multiple diagram pages is opened via the diagram group in the signal
explorer.
If the menu item is called via the pop-up menu of a single diagram entry, the dialog box for generating
the selected diagram page is opened.
402 October 2021

Signal Explorer
In both dialog boxes basic settings of the diagram page to be created are made.
In the Folder selection field the target folder is specified, which also supports multiple levels
separated by "\". If a path is entered that does not exist, it will be created automatically during diagram
generation.
In the Diagram pages selection list all diagrams to be generated can be selected. The name can be
renamed by editing the entry or via the pop-up menu.
The name of the new diagram page is defined via the Name input field.
The display type of the diagram page can be defined using the selection list Select data to be
shown. It is possible to choose between different display types according to the calculation method.
If the calculation method does not offer this option, this list is not available.
October 2021 403

Network Planning Tools
13. Network Planning Tools
Network planning tools help the user perform different planning and evaluation tasks in the network.
PSS SINCAL offers the following tools:
● Feeder
● Calculate Routes
● Determining Line Data
● Determining Load Data
● Determining Polygon Data
● Determining Pickup and Tripping Data
● Determining Compensation Impedance
● Determining Machine Data
● Load/Customer Load Switching
● Equipment Sizing
● Apply Measurement Data
● Apply Harmonic Impedances
● Create Protection Documentation
● Highlight Network Elements
● Heat-Map
● Background Images
● Remove Temporary Images
● Background Map
● Remove Background Map
● Check Graphics
● Check Names
● Check Usage
● Check Radial Network
● External Tools
13.1 Feeder
This function lets you analyze the structure of an electrical network. You can determine all feeders
starting from specially designated starting points and busbars. A feeder is a network supply area that
leaves from a substation. Feeders are determined by the switching state of the network elements.
This means the current network operational state is being observed. Therefore, feeders need to be
recalculated the network operational state has changed in any way.
Click Tools – Feeder in the menu to activate function.
For a detailed description of this function, see the section on Feeder in the chapter on Network
Browser.
404 October 2021

13.2 Calculate Routes

This function calculates routes in the network. Basically, PSS SINCAL distinguishes between simple
routing for lines and enhanced routing for routes.
Lines determines the best possible (i.e. shortest) route between a defined start and end node.
The enhanced Routes option is a special optimization procedure. It determines the best possible
course for a new line in accordance with an existing route structure. Various settings (installation
cost, line length etc.) set parameters for the objective of the optimization procedure.
Tools – Calculate Routes in the menu switches this function ON.
For a detailed description of this function, see the section on Select Route in the chapter on Network
Browser.
13.3 Determining Line Data

This function lets you evaluate data for selected lines, enabling simple determining impedance and
charging power in electrical networks or pipe volume in pipe networks.
Activate the function using the menu item Tools – Determining Data – Line Data.
PSS SINCAL displays all selected lines in the Graphics Editor in the dialog box clearly arranged in a
table. Whole routes can be selected with the function Select Route (see section Basic Functions) or,
in the Graphics Editor, the lines with a wide variety of functions can be highlighted.
For electrical networks, PSS SINCAL displays the following total values of the lines in the top part of
the dialog box:
● Total length
● Charging power and power zero-phase sequence
● Charging current and current zero-phase sequence
● Impedances for positive and zero-phase sequence:
The selection button can be used to display these either as R and X or Z and cosphi.
October 2021 405

● Capacitance for positive and zero-phase sequence
For pipe networks, PSS SINCAL displays the following total values:
● Total length
● Pipe volume
The Options button opens a selection menu. This can be used to select whether all selected lines
of the network are considered or only those that are active on the defined View Date. Furthermore,
it is also possible to select whether connections are to be considered or not.
Click the Copy button to copy the data for impedance and charging power (in electrical networks) or
of the pipe volume (in pipe networks) to the clipboard to insert the data later with the Paste function
to another application.
13.4 Determining Load Data

This function evaluates the data of selected node elements, so you can easily determine feeders and
loads.
Use Tools – Determining Data – Load Data. to switches this function ON.
The dialog box displays the network data of the node elements used to determine load data clearly
arranged in a table.
PSS SINCAL displays the following total values of the node elements in the top part of the dialog
box:
● Feeding
● Load
● Total
● Customers:
LF = the sum of all selected loads and customer loads
REL = the total number of the "supplied customers"
406 October 2021

The Options button opens a selection menu. The following options are available here:
● All Elements:
All selected node elements of the network are considered.
● Active Elements:
Only those selected node elements of the network are considered that are active at the defined
View Date.
● Power flow results:
If you switch ON this option, load-flow results are used for creating total values instead of input
data. Note that this option is only available for electric networks with power flow results and
pipe networks with steady-state results.
The list of options contains all selected node elements. You select any desired elements to display
in the tabular list.
Click the Copy button to copy the data for feeders and loads to the clipboard from where they can
be inserted later with Paste to another application.
13.5 Determining Polygon Data

This function evaluates data from a selected Graphic Element Group. This simplifies the
determination of areas and load density.
Tools – Determining Data – Polygon Data switches this function ON.
The dialog box shows how many individual network elements are assigned to the selected graphic
element group.
Click Copy to copy the data for polygon area and load density to the clipboard from where they can
be inserted later with Paste to another application.
13.6 Determining Pickup and Tripping Data

This function enables the data of protection devices to be evaluated which are marked in the graphics
editor or assigned to a diagram. This enables the minimum and maximum current values for phase
and ground to be defined easily.
Tools – Determining Data – Pickup and Tripping Data switches this function ON.
October 2021 407

PSS SINCAL displays all selected and to the diagram assigned protection devices in the dialog box
clearly arranged in a table.
PSS SINCAL displays the following total values of the protection devices in the top part of the dialog
box:
● Minimum and maximum current phase

● Minimum and maximum current ground
Click Copy to copy the data for protection devices to the clipboard from where they can be inserted
later with Paste to another application.
13.7 Determining Compensation Impedance

This function enables the impedances between a node and a two-winding transformer to be
determined automatically. These can then be used for transformer impedance controlling.
Tools – Determining Data – Compensation Impedance switches this function ON. However, this
is only available if the power flow results are active.
This dialog box is used to select a Transformer and a Node. If a transformer or a node are already
selected in the network diagram when the dialog box is opened, these are preselected.
If both elements are valid, the compensation impedances are calculated automatically. These are
then displayed in the Results list.
408 October 2021

Click the Create button to open a dialog box in which the name of the compensation impedance can
be specified. It is also possible to select whether the newly generated compensation impedance is
to be assigned to the selected transformer.
13.8 Determining Machine Data

This function enables the Parkian data to be determined for asynchronous machines by means of
the entered NEMA parameters.
This requires the activation of the dynamic data in the Calculation Methods. The dynamic data in the
Dynamics tab must be active for the particular asynchronous machines and NEMA must be selected
as ASM Input Type in the Basic Data tab.
After the required asynchronous machine is selected, the function is activated via Tools –
Determining Data – Machine Data.
The machines for which the data can be defined are then determined. This is displayed with the
following message.
The determined machine data is then entered and shown in the Dynamics tab of the relevant
October 2021 409

13.9 Load/Customer Load Switching

The use of customer load data allows very detailed modelling of the real consumption behavior in
electrical networks, however, customer load data is unsuitable and difficult to handle for many
calculation methods. The network planning tool for load/customer load switching can be used to
avoid this problem by simply switching the input status for the selected loads.
To start the load/customer load switching, the required loads first have to be selected in the graphics
editor. The menu item Tools – Determining Data – Load/Customer Load Switching is then
activated.
The Function section makes it possible to switch between load and customer load.
When switching from customer load data to load data, the power flow results can also be transferred
to the load data if required. This is done by activating the Assign power flow result data option.
410 October 2021

It is also possible to define whether to Use only selected loads.
13.10 Equipment Sizing

This network planning tool helps in the selection of a suitable line and transformer type. Types are
selected from a preselection of standard types that best meet the requirements in the network.
In order to start the equipment sizing, a line or a two-winding transformer must be selected. The
menu item Tools – Determining Data – Equipment Sizing is then activated.
The Wizard for line sizing or transformer sizing then appears, depending on the element selected.
13.10.1 Line Sizing
The line sizing evaluates the preselected standard types using set criteria and can assign the
appropriate standard type to a line.
The Configuration File stores all settings made in the Wizard and thus enables them to be called
again at any time.
The Name field can be used to define any designation for the equipment sizing. This is only used for
information purposes.
The preselected Standard Types are displayed in the list. The Wizard determines from these the
ones that best fit the network and the set specifications.
The Costs column enables the costs per km for particular types to be defined. They are loaded from
the configuration file and can be edited by pressing F2. When the dialog box is closed the set costs
are saved in the configuration file.
October 2021 411

Click the Preselect button to open the standard type selection dialog box. The selected standard
types are then displayed in the list.
The Clear button resets all data to the default value. The standard types are loaded from the network.
Configuration for Line Sizing
The System Voltage indicates the rated voltage of the line.
The Allowable Voltage Drop Series is used to set the limit of the maximum series voltage drop as
a percentage.
The Allowable Voltage Drop is used to set the limit of the maximum voltage drop.
The Thermal Limit Current specifies the maximum permissible thermal limit current. This value can
be imported from the power flow result data.
The Max. Short Circuit Current specifies the maximum short circuit current. This value can be
imported from the short circuit result data.
The Switch Delay field is used to define the switching speed of the switch. This value can be
imported from the network level.
The Motor R, X fields specify the reactance and capacitance of the connected motors. These values
can be loaded from the network data.
The Increase Factor field is used to specify the increase in power.
The Temperature Factor field can be used to specify a temperature increase.
412 October 2021

The Consider Costs option is used to activate or deactivate the economic efficiency based on the
line length for the results. I.e. the costs are also considered in the evaluation and determine the
ranking of the results.
Selection of the Suitable Line Type
The estimation is carried out on the basis of the following criteria.
Current Load:
The thermal limit current of the cable must be greater than the set thermal limit current multiplied by
an increase factor to be specified.
𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐾 ≥ 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐺 × 𝑓𝑍𝑈
Series Voltage Drop:
The maximum voltage drop on the cable must be set.
|𝐼 × 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐺 × 𝑓𝑍𝑈 × (𝑟 + 𝑗𝑥) × √3|

𝑣𝑠 ≥ × 100
𝑈𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡
Voltage Breakdown:
The maximum voltage breakdown on the cable must be set. The R/X ratio of the motor can also be
stated.
If the motor data is stated:
𝑉
( 𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡 )
𝐼 = √3
𝑍𝐿 + 𝑍𝑀
If the motor data is not stated:
𝐼 = 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐺
𝑉𝑑 = |𝑉𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡 − (𝑍𝐿 × 𝐼 × √3)|
𝑉𝑑
𝑣𝑑 ≤ 100 − × 100
𝑉𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡
Short Circuit Capacity:
The maximum permissible short circuit current and the switch delay must be set. The thermal
equivalent of the one second current of the cable must be greater than that of short circuit current
and switch delay.
𝐼1𝑠𝐾 × 𝐼1𝑠𝐾 ≥ 𝐼𝑘𝑚𝑎𝑥 × 𝐼𝑘𝑚𝑎𝑥 × 𝑡𝑠
fzu … Increase factor

I … Current with/without motor [kA]
I1sK … One-second current of the cable [kA]
Ikmax … Maximum permissible short circuit current [kA]
October 2021 413

IthG … Set thermal limit current [kA]

IthK … Thermal limit current of the standard type [kW]
l … Line length [km]
r … Line reactance [/km]
ts … Switch delay [s]
Vd … Voltage after breakdown [kV]
vd … Set voltage breakdown limit [%]
vs … Permissible voltage drop [%]
Vstart … Set system voltage [kV]
x … Line capacitance [/km]
ZL … Line impedance []
ZM … Motor impedance []
Results for Line Sizing
The list shows the standard types with the results according to the criteria. The following results are
provided:
● Rank:
Specifies the ranking by means of the cable cross section.
● Standard Type:
Supplies the designation of the standard type.
● vs[%]:
Specifies the series voltage drop as a percentage.
414 October 2021

● vd[%]:
Specifies the voltage breakdown as a percentage.
● I/In[%]:
Specifies the line utilization as a percentage.
● Pv[kW]:
Specifies the transmission losses in kW.
● Costs:
Specifies the calculated costs in the predefined currency.
Clicking the Details menu item in the pop-up menu of a list entry opens a clearly arranged dialog
box with the results of the particular entry.
The results vs and vd are applied according to the evaluations of the line. The results I/In and Pv are
calculated as follows:
𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐺
𝐼/𝐼𝑛 = × 100
𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐿
𝑃𝑉 = 𝐼𝑡ℎ𝐺 2 × 𝑅𝐿 × 1000
The selected standard type can be applied to the network element by clicking the Apply button.
13.10.2 Transformer Sizing
The Wizard for transformer sizing evaluates the preselected standard types using set criteria and
can assign the appropriate standard type to a two-winding transformer.
The Configuration File stores all settings made in the Wizard and thus enables them to be called
again any time later.
October 2021 415

The Name field can be used to define any designation for the equipment sizing. This is only used for
information purposes.
The preselected Standard Types are then displayed in the list. The Wizard determines from these
the ones that best fit the network and the set specifications.
The Costs column enables the cost per unit to be defined for particular types. They are loaded from
the configuration file and can be edited by pressing F2. When the dialog box is closed the set costs
are saved in the configuration file.
Click the Preselect button to open the standard type selection dialog box. The selected standard
types are then displayed in the list.
The Clear button resets all data to the default value. The standard types are loaded from the network.
Configuration for Transformer Sizing
The Max. Power field is used to define the maximum power that the transformer is to transmit. If
required, this value can also be imported directly from the power flow result data.
The Max SC Current Side 1 and Max. SC Current Side 2 fields define the maximum primary and
secondary short circuit current. These values can be imported from the short circuit result data.
The Switching Default Time indicates the switching speed of the switch. This value can be imported
from the network level.
The Increase Factor field is used to specify the increase in power.
The Consider Costs option is used to activate or deactivate the display of the costs for the results.
I.e. the costs are also considered in the evaluation and determine the ranking of the results.
416 October 2021

Selection of the Suitable Transformer Type
The estimation is carried out on the basis of the following criteria.
Load:
The maximum power of the two-winding transformer must be greater than the set power multiplied
by an increase factor to be specified.
𝑆max 𝑇 ≥ 𝑆max 𝑎𝑐𝑡 × 𝑓𝑍𝑈
Short Circuit Capacity:
The maximum permissible primary and secondary short circuit current and the switch delay must be
set.
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑇
𝐼𝑛 =
√3 × 𝑉𝑛
(𝐼𝑛 × 25)2 × 2 ≥ 𝐼𝑘𝑚𝑎𝑥 2 × 𝑡𝑠
The rated current is calculated for both sides (primary and secondary side).
fzu … Increase factor

Ikmax … Maximum permissible short circuit current [kA]
In … Rated current [kA]
Smaxact … Set power [MVA]
SmaxT … Maximum power of the standard type [MVA]
ts … Switch delay [s]
Vn … Rated voltage [kV]
October 2021 417

Results for Transformer Sizing
The list shows the standard types with the results according to the criteria. The following results are
provided:
● Rank:
Specifies the ranking by means of the rated apparent power.
● Standard Type:
Supplies the designation of the standard type.
● S/Sn[%]:
Specifies the ratio of the maximum power and the rated apparent power of the standard type.
● Ik/Ikmax[%]:
Specifies the ratio of the short circuit current to the maximum short circuit current.
● Costs:
Specifies the costs in the predefined currency.
Clicking the Details menu item in the pop-up menu of a list entry opens a clearly arranged dialog
box with the results of the particular entry.
The results S/Sn and Ik/Ikmax are calculated as follows:
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑎𝑐𝑡
𝑆/𝑆𝑛 = × 100
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑇
𝐼𝑘
𝐼𝑘 /𝐼𝑘𝑚𝑎𝑥 =
(𝐼 × 25)2 × 2
√ 𝑛
𝑡𝑠
The rated current is calculated for both sides (primary and secondary side).
The selected standard type can be applied to the network element by clicking the Apply button.
418 October 2021

13.11 Apply Measurement Data

This function enables the power flow results to be transferred as input values for a measured value.
This function is activated via Tools – Determining Data – Apply Measurement Data.
General
The Measured Value selection field is used to define how the power flow results (P and Q) are
converted to the input format of the measured value. The following options are available:
● Current
● Apparent power
● Active and reactive power
● Use settings:
The default settings for the input format of the measured value are retained here.
The Value Type field determines whether the power flow result is accepted as a standard measured
value or as a minimum measured value.
Options
The measured values can be either transferred for all measuring devices in the network or only for
those that are marked in the graphics editor. For this the Use only selected elements must be
activated.
October 2021 419

13.12 Apply Harmonic Impedances

This function enables the harmonic impedances from a previous calculation of the harmonic
contingency to be transferred. This function is activated via Tools – Determining Data – Apply
Harmonic Impedances.
The required harmonic impedances are selected in the list. Clicking the Create button causes these
to be generated as harmonic characteristic curves and are available as harmonic impedances and
harmonic impedance areas.
The transfer of the harmonic impedances requires the Single diagram mode to be activated at the
Harmonic Contingency calculation.
13.13 Create Protection Documentation

This function lets you create protection documentation. A new diagram page or a new view is
generated, in which the selected network elements and the characteristics are provided as grading
for the documentation. You need at least one open empty view and a selected grading in the current
view to do so. The creation of protection documentation can be found in the Overcurrent Time
Protection chapter in the Examples Electrical Networks Manual.
Tools – Create Protection Documentation opens the Create Protection Documentation Wizard.
420 October 2021

The Generation Mode function defines which network elements are used as the basis for the new
protection documentation.
● Selected network elements:

This uses the elements selected in the graphics editor. Bear in mind that the order of the
selection is the basis for the order of the generated network graphic.
● Network element group:
This uses network element groups of type protection route as the basis for the documentation.
The selection list in the Options section enables the network element groups to be selected for which
protection documentation is to be created. A multiple selection of network element groups is also
possible, by which a diagram page is generated for each selected group.
Options for Protection Documentation
This page of the Wizard allows extended control options to be defined for the protection
documentation.
Type selects whether a diagram page or a view is created.
The directory path for the diagram page can be specified or selected in the Folder selection field.
Name defines the name for the diagram page or view of the protection documentation. If the field is
left empty, the name of the network element group is used as the name.
The protection device characteristic type can be selected in the Data selection list.
● Phase
● Earth
● Phase & Earth
Page settings selects the paper format for the new protection documentation. Size defines the page
format.
October 2021 421

Additional options needed when creating protection documentation can be entered in the Network
Graphic section.
When a diagram page is generated, Create network diagram defines whether the diagram page
will have grading.
When protection documentation is created as a view, the type of node can be defined with the Node
symbol list. PSS SINCAL has the following selection possibilities:
● Node:
All nodes of the grading are generated as simple nodes.
● Busbar:
All nodes of the grading are generated as busbars.
The generation depends on the node type, which is defined in the node's screen form.
Depending on what has been selected, PSS SINCAL generates either a node or a busbar
when the grading is created.
● Determine automatically:
The node type is automatically determined by means of the connected elements. If a node has
more than two terminals in the grading path, this produces a busbar.
Press OK to close the dialog box, and PSS SINCAL creates a new protection documentation.
Depending on what type is selected, either Diagram View is switched ON and the protection
documentation diagram is selected, or the view is opened. The diagram page displays the network
graphics for the grading diagram selected along with the diagram.
422 October 2021

The protection documentation has two sections: The left half is the network graphics and the right
half the actual diagram.
When protection documentation is created as a diagram page, PSS SINCAL automatically generates
the network diagram. The Options dialog box or the Properties window can, however, be used to
change the display and formatting.
The network graphic can be edited interactively as usual. Besides the normal editing functions such
as move, delete etc., the Update graphics manually function is provided via the network browser.
The Annotation and Filter dialog box can be used to change the annotation scope for the network
graphics.
Note that changes in formatting and annotation will be used for all the protection documentation
diagrams.
13.14 Highlight Network Elements

This tool highlights network elements in the diagram with a wide polyline.
For the highlighting, PSS SINCAL creates a temporary PIC file that can be assigned in the
Background Images (Tools – Background Images menu) dialog box.
The advantage of this technique is the independence of the graphic display of the network elements.
Click Tools – Highlight Network Elements to open the following dialog box.
You enter any Image Name in the Common section.
Highlight Type is used to select a criterion for highlighting. PSS SINCAL has the following types of
highlighting:
● Common
● Network level
● Network area
● Network element group
● Layer
● Object type
October 2021 423

The second selection field defines the type of highlighting more specifically. Common has the
following options.
● Selected network elements:

Highlights the network elements selected in the graphics.
● Switched network elements:
Highlights all network elements that have a switch.
● Feeder of selected network element:
Uses network elements selected in the network diagram to identify feeders. These are
highlighted.
● Load allocation results:
Highlights the possible connection points from the load assignment. This is based on the
current results for load allocation.
When Exclude invisible network elements is ON, PSS SINCAL does not consider network
elements in invisible graphics layers in the selection.
Attributes defines the Line width and the Line color of the highlighting.
13.15 Heat-Map
This network planning tool lets you visualize various parameters in an area graphically by coloring it.
This kind of visualization is also known as Scattered Data Plotting.
To enable visualization, a temporary PIC file is created and displayed behind the actual network. The
Background Images dialog box (Tools – Background Images menu) can also be used to save this
PIC file permanently.
Click Tools – Heat-Map to open the following dialog box.
Enter any Image Name in the Common section.
If the Auto Update option is activated, the heat-map in the network graphics is automatically
generated with the new data, e.g. when scrolling results.
424 October 2021

Use the Visualization Type selection field to select the parameters for the visualization.
PSS SINCAL supports the following parameters:
● Input data loads (for all network types)

● Input data P and Q
● Height distribution (for all pipe networks)
● Power flow S, unbalanced power flow S (for electrical networks)
● Power flow V/Vn, unbalanced power flow V/Vn, Vmax/Vn (for electrical networks)
● Power flow deviation V/Vn, unbalanced power flow deviation Vln/Vn, Vll/Vn (for electrical
networks)
● Power flow P and Q
● Ik" and Sk" 3-phase short circuit (for electrical networks)
● uny and ua harmonics (for electrical networks)
● HU, QU, TU, WU, PU, KU and AU reliability (for electrical networks)
● Operating pressure (for all pipe networks)
● Flow time (for all pipe networks)
● Media quality (for all pipe networks)
● Difference in pressure (only for heating/cooling networks)
● Temperature (only for heating/cooling networks)
Click Options to switch the enhanced settings for heat-map generation ON for the visualization types
Flow time and Media Quality.
Area Definition defines the visualization area. This can be done either with points (network
coordinates) or supplementary graphics objects (frame or polygons) in the network. To simplify
selecting specific frames or polygons, PSS SINCAL selects the supplementary graphics object
highlighted in the Graphics Editor when the dialog box is opened.
Attributes sets the basic control parameters for generating the heat-map.
The heat-map acts as a grid for the selected visualization area. For each grid element, the function
value is determined and used to assign a color value. The function values of some grid elements are
determined by the current network elements. Function values for all other grid elements must be
determined by a proper interpolation type.
Select the procedure you want to use for the interpolation in the Interpolation Type field. The results
of the visualization depend greatly on which interpolation type you select. This is intended, since
different methods can lead to different weightings. Currently PSS SINCAL offers the following
Interpolation Types:
● Area Weight (special method to visualize loads)

● Shepard
● Shepard (Local)
● Kriging
● Quadratic
● Quadratic Inverse
● Thin Plate Splines
● Laplace/Poisson
The Visualization button defines enhanced settings for generating a heat-map.
October 2021 425

As already mentioned, this type of visualization is based on a grid placed over visualization area.
The entry in Subdivision Parts determines the number of grid elements. Note that the entry in this
field increases the main memory requirement and calculation time quadratically.
Gravity controls how much known data values influence interpolated neighboring elements.
The Base value defines a basis for the different interpolation types. Depending on which method is
used interpolation values converge to this basic value, assuming the known data values are still far
off.
To visualize parameters, you need to enter a Value Range. This is done to assign defined colors to
determined function values for individual grid elements.
An unusual feature is the button between the two input fields in the value range. Click this to apply
the minimum and maximum values for the present parameter to the respective input fields.
Color Range defines the colors you want to use for visualization. To add an additional color, click
with the left mouse button on the position you want under the shading (coloring). PSS SINCAL
displays another color arrow. Click the color arrow with the right mouse button to change the color.
Colors are deleted by pulling a color arrow from the shading.
Interpolation Types
Area Weight
This is a special interpolation type that is only available for visualizing load values (both for input data
and calculation results).
This function determines the area weight for each grid element. PSS SINCAL considers all the
present loads in the selected visualization area to determine this weight. The area weight of the grid
point is the total load weighted with an exponential function.
Shepard
The Shepard interpolation type is based on the inverse distance-weighted mean value for all known
data values.
F(x) = ∑ 𝑤𝑖 (𝑥) 𝑓𝑖
𝑖=1
The normalized weighting function is defined as follows:
𝜎𝑖 (𝑥)
𝑤𝑖 (x) =
∑𝑁
𝑗=1 𝜎𝑖 (𝑥)
Shepard (Local)
This interpolation type is a variation of the normal Shepard method. Data values are reduced even
more by a distance dependent gravity. This is done to get a local data value characteristic for the
visualization.
426 October 2021

Kriging
Kriging is an interpolation type developed by the South African engineer D.G. Krige. This interpolation
procedure is also known as Gaussian Progress Regression.
This relatively complicated interpolation procedure assures that known data values cannot be
falsified and that the interpolated values have the smallest possible statistical errors.
Quadratic
This interpolation procedure is one of the radial basis functions. The idea behind this interpolation
type is relatively simple and assumes that all the known values influence interpolated data values in
all directions. This influence is determined by a radial basis function (RBF).
𝑁−1
F(x) = ∑ 𝑤𝑖 ∅(|𝑥 − 𝑥𝑖 |)
𝑖=1
The RBF is defined as follows:
∅(r) = (𝑟 2 + 𝑟02 )1/2
The variable r0 is the weighting. In PSS SINCAL, this is defined with the help of gravity.
Quadratic Inverse
Quadratic Inverse interpolation is basically the same as quadratic interpolation. But here a negative
exponent is used. This method assures that interpolated data values depend on the distance from
zero (or from selected basic value).
∅(r) = (𝑟 2 + 𝑟02 )−1/2
Thin Plate Splines
The Thin Plate Spline interpolation type is another one of the radial basis functions. The characteristic
of this method is already implied by its name. The interpolation result can be compared to a thin plate
placed over known data values. If there is a data value, the plate bends upward. If there is not any
data value, the plate remains at the basic value.
∅(r) = 𝑟 2 log(𝑟/𝑟0 )
Laplace/Poisson
This interpolation type is based on of a matrix created for all grid points. Known data points are
entered in the corresponding matrix field. Unknown values are determined by solving the matrix. This
interpolation procedure is relatively complex and time-consuming depending on how many
subdivisions have been selected. It does, however, provide highest-quality interpolation results.
October 2021 427

Options for Flow Time
Click Options to open the following dialog box.
As the Visualization type you can select either Average flow time or Maximum flow time. Then
PSS SINCAL uses these values from the steady-state calculations to color the heat-map.
In Advanced Options you select whether or not PSS SINCAL considers the amount of consumption.
Then PSS SINCAL also includes consumption when it evaluates the selected flow time.
Options for Media Quality
Click Options to open the following dialog box.
Choose infeeder lists all infeeders in the network. You can switch this ON or OFF with the options
button in front of the entry in the list. Then PSS SINCAL considers the results for this infeeder in the
heat-map evaluation.
Individual infeeders can be weighted directly in the list with any factor you want.
In Advanced Options you select whether or not PSS SINCAL considers the amount of consumption.
Then PSS SINCAL also includes consumption when it evaluates the stopping time.
428 October 2021

Visualization Settings
Press the Visualization button and the following dialog box opens.
The options for Busbar contour or Element contour switch ON enhanced visualizations. Normally
parameters to be visualized are assigned to the respective grid element only at the center of the
network elements and busbars. If these options are switched ON, the assignment is made for the
entire contour. This means a lot more known data values need to be considered as a basis for the
interpolation. This greatly increases the work needed for the calculations and it takes longer to
generate the heat-map.
Show center graphically displays the center of the visualization value in the area you have selected.
You can set the size for this indicator symbol (this option is, however, only available in the
interpolation type for area weight).
The Create legend option is used to activate the automatic generation of a legend for the current
evaluation. In other words, a legend object is generated in the graphics editor, showing the colors
and the associated limit values of the current heat-map evaluation.
Use gradient switches ON an enhanced display procedure for grid elements. Normally individual
grid elements are only displayed with the determined color. If this option is switched ON,
PSS SINCAL marks individual grid elements with special shading, where color values interpolate
linearly from the outer borders to the center. This visualization result is absolutely homogeneous
shading, but this type of display is extremely time-intensive and if you want to print it can lead to a
number of driver problems.
The Alpha option enables the opacity of the background image to be defined. Values between 0
(transparent) and 255 (fully opaque) can be set. This makes it possible to recognize data (e.g.
background maps) also displayed behind the heat-map evaluation. Be aware that the option only
functions on screen displays. A transparent printout is not possible.
13.16 Background Images

This network planning tool inserts bitmap and vector graphics into PSS SINCAL networks. This
means PSS SINCAL can display graphics to scale as a "background image" under the actual
network. This lets you for example, place maps under a PSS SINCAL network. You draw over these
graphics to create a network to scale.
October 2021 429

Note that these background images cannot be modified.
To use background images, you must select a geographical network since this is the only way to
display for scaled fixing.
Tools – Background Images activates this function.
Image Formats Supported by PSS SINCAL
Bitmap-Graphics Formats
These are based on raster graphics. These can be as detailed as you want, but keep in mind you
may need a lot of main memory to display the graphics. A disadvantage of this format is that at large
zoom steps the quality will be worse.
● TIF files
● GIF files
● BMP files
● JPEG files
● PSP files (Paint Shop Pro)
● PNG files
● EPS files (Encapsulated Postscript)
The amount of memory an image file actually needs is normally not the same as that of the physical
file on the hard disk, since the file is not compressed in main memory. The memory needed is
calculated as follows:
𝐺𝑟𝑎𝑝ℎ𝑖𝑐 𝑤𝑖𝑑𝑡ℎ 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑖𝑥𝑒𝑙 × 𝐺𝑟𝑎𝑝ℎ𝑖𝑐 ℎ𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑖𝑥𝑒𝑙 × 32

𝑀𝑒𝑚𝑜𝑟𝑦 𝑖𝑛 𝑀𝐵 =
8 × (1024 × 1024)
430 October 2021

Vector-Graphics Formats
In this format, PSS SINCAL stores all character commands as vector graphics. The amount of
memory required is normally not very high, even with complex displays. An advantage of this format
is that you can zoom as you wish without losing quality. The disadvantage is that there is not as
much detail as with bitmap graphics.
● Windows metafiles (EMF and WMF)

● DXF files (9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and 18 version)
● DWG files (12, 13, 14, 15 and 18 version)
● DWF files (4, 5, 5.5 and 6 version)
● SVG files
● Printer Command Language (PCL, PRN and PRT files) (3.0 and 5.0 version)
● SHP files (ESRI Shape Format)
PIC Graphics Formats
These are vector graphic files found in the PSS SINCAL-specific ASCII format. The vector graphic
files can be converted to this format with the help program VecToPic.
Select Image
Select Image administers the background images. A PSS SINCAL network can have any number
of background images (image files).
Click the Add button to assign a new image file. A dialog box opens where you can select image
files.
Click Remove to remove an existing image file.
Click Save to store a temporary image file permanently (normally generated with help of the Network
Planning Tools).
You can control the visibility of the image file in the graphics with the option button, making it easy to
switch any associated image files ON or OFF. Depending on their format and size, background image
files can require a lot of main memory. For this reason, PSS SINCAL only loads image files that are
turned ON.
The sequence of image files listed in the dialog box is identical to the output sequence for the screen
and at the printer. Hold down the SHIFT key and press the cursor button to move the image file
selected in the list of options.
Attaching Image Files
Image Width and Height sets the size of the image file in the PSS SINCAL graphics. PSS SINCAL
automatically resizes the image file so that it assumes the size set in the graphics.
Left Image Corner at the Drawing defines the position of the image file in the graphics.
The Image Settings section contains parameters for displaying the image file.
October 2021 431

Click the Settings button to open a dialog box where you can edit the screen attributes of image
files.
The Preview button can only be selected with vector graphics and PIC files. Press this button to
display the selected image file in the preview area. With bitmap graphics, this preview is automatic.
Enhanced Settings
The Settings button opens a dialog box where you can add parameters for displaying image files.
This tab sets the attributes for all image files.
In PSS SINCAL, all image files are assigned to graphics layers. This is done in the list of Layer
options. By doing so, you can define the visibility on the screen and at the printer with layer
definitions.
Use the elevators for Brightness and Contrast or the fields behind them to adjust the values of the
image file.
If Use advanced graphic rendering is switched ON, an Alpha value can be entered here to prescribe
how the diagram is rendered. The values range from 0 (completely transparent) to 255 (no
transparency).
432 October 2021

This tab sets layer attributes for saved PIC files. This means this tab is unavailable for temporary
PIC files.
The list contains all the graphics layers in the PIC file. Every screen element of the PIC file is assigned
to one of these graphics layers. This dialog box lets you set both the visibility and the individual
screen attributes of all the objects in a layer. Note that PSS SINCAL uses attributes selected for the
layer instead of object attributes, letting you adapt your individual needs for displaying PIC files in
the Graphics Editor.
Depending on what you want to display, you can switch entire graphics layers ON or OFF. Simply
switch the options button ON or OFF in the list of graphics layers. You can also change the sequence
of graphics layers in the dialog box manually. Select the layer you want, hold down the SHIFT key
and then move the cursor buttons either up or down. This sequence also determines the display
sequence of objects in the Graphics Editor.
You can even select and edit more than one graphics layer at one time. Note, however, that attributes
with different values turn the option gray and that it will not be stored until it has been changed.
For a precise description of the attributes, see the LAYER section in the chapter for PSS SINCAL
PIC File.
13.17 Remove Temporary Images

To delete all temporary PIC files, click Tools – Remove Temporary Images in the menu.
If, however, you wish to remove a specific temporary PIC file, we recommend using the Background
Images dialog box.
13.18 Background Map

This network planning tool lets you insert geographical data from the Internet into PSS SINCAL
networks. These data are displayed with correct scale as "background maps" under the actual
network. Note that individual views can only have one map. Simply draw on this map to create a
network with the correct scale.
October 2021 433

The prerequisite for using background maps is that this is a geographic coordinates network, since
this is required for matching the scale of the map.
This function can be switched ON with Tools – Background Map in the menu.
434 October 2021

Displaying the Background Map
This tab sets display attributes for the background map.
The Provider section makes it possible to set which service is to be used to display background
maps for the current view. The Style-ID field enables the display form of the background map to be
defined. The basic configuration of the provider is carried out via the Options dialog box. The provider
settings are described in detail there. Press Test to check whether the data set in the options dialog
box are valid for the selected provider or a connection to the server is possible.
The background map is assigned to a Graphic layer selected from a list of options. When these are
assigned to a graphics layer, the visibility on the screen and at the printer can be defined with the
appropriate layer settings. Visible controls the visibility of the map in the network diagram.
Intensity determines the degree of coverage in the map. The values for Intensity range from 0
(invisible) to 255 (completely covered).
Max. detail determines the maximum level of detail used to display the background map. The entry
for the level can range from 1 to 18. The current level of detail is also displayed.
Print detail explicitly controls what level of detail will be used for printing the background map. If this
is 0, PSS SINCAL automatically determines the best possible level of detail for printing. If a value
other than 0 is used, this will be used for printing. The higher this level of detail is, the greater the
number of individual details will be for displaying or printing. High levels of detail can under certain
conditions result in longer waiting times.
To speed up the process, you can download tiles for the current view. This is carried out in the Zoom
Levels for Tile Load section. Enter the levels of detail for preloading in the input field.
Click Preload to begin loading the levels of detail. This downloads all the necessary tiles. Clicking
Refresh downloads all tiles. Already existing tiles are replaced.
Loading is done in the background until all the tiles have been downloaded, the Stop button is
pressed or PSS SINCAL terminates.
October 2021 435

Downloaded tiles are stored in the tile cache. The directory used for the tile cache can be defined in
the Options dialog box – Background Maps.
Displaying a Background Map
PSS SINCAL network diagrams use a Cartesian system of coordinates with any point of origin.
Positions in PSS SINCAL networks are defined in meters from the point of origin. The projection
system for background maps is based on entries for latitude and longitude. This means that,
background maps need to be assigned positions in the network using longitude and latitude.
To define the Position in graphic view, there are three possibilities:
● Node:
Select a node in graphic view for the position.
● Center:
Use the center of the graphic view for the position.
● Position:
Use coordinates to determine any position you want.
In the Position on map section, Latitude and Longitude can be used to connect the previously
defined position in the view to a geographic position.
The selection menu of the button can be used to switch the following functions ON.
436 October 2021

Fit In
Fit In positions the network diagram in the background map. The diagram is rotated to match the
background map selected.
Latitude and Longitude define the geographic position of the node.
In the node fields select three nodes in the current graphic view. The fields to the right define the
geographic position. These settings fit in the entire network diagram into Google Earth coordinates.
Note: To assure these results are as precise as possible when they are converted, select nodes
that are far away from one another. Ideally select one at the top left, one at the bottom left and one
at the bottom right.
The selection menu of the button can be used to switch the following functions ON:
Click Fit In to actually position the network diagram in the map. A message window is displayed here
in which the fit in method can be selected.
October 2021 437

The Geographic fit in changes the network diagram so that it corresponds to the positions on the
background map. A simple Mercator projection is used here. The Map Adjust option activates a
special algorithm for the fit in. This assumes that the network diagram with geographic coordinates
was derived from a GIS system using a transverse Mercator position or a Gauß-Krüger projection.
However, these kinds of coordinates do not fit with the simple Mercator projection that is used with
background maps. The function corrects the changes so that the network diagram fits with the
background map.
13.19 Remove Background Map

To remove the current background map, use Tools – Remove Background Map in the menu.
13.20 Check Graphics

This lets you check nodes or network elements for whether or not they have graphic data.
PSS SINCAL lists the results in the dialog box in a logical way after the data are checked.
Tools – Check – Check Graphics starts this function.
Select whether Nodes or Network elements should be checked.
Click Check and PSS SINCAL lists the names and types of all nodes or network elements without
graphic data. The list also shows the Status.
Edit opens the screen form for the network element selected in the list.
Delete removes network elements selected in the list without their graphics. Note that this procedure
is irreversible. This means that once you have okayed the deletion of the network elements in the
confirmation message, PSS SINCAL deletes them permanently.
438 October 2021

13.21 Check Names

This function lets you check the entire network or subnetworks for the existence of graphics or the
uniqueness of names. The results are listed clearly arranged in the dialog box after the data are
checked.
Tools – Check – Check Names starts this function.
First select the investigation method:
● Unique node names:

Checks whether names for nodes in the entire network are unique.
● Unique element names:
Checks whether names for network elements in the entire network are unique.
The second selection field determines whether the Names or Short Names are used for checking.
Click Check and PSS SINCAL lists the names and types of all nodes or network elements without a
unique name. The list also shows the Status.
Edit opens the screen form for the network element selected in the list.
Click Select to highlight all the network elements in the Graphics Editor with graphic data that have
been selected in the list.
13.22 Check Usage

This function makes it possible to check whether the selected element is used by other elements.
Tools – Check – Check Usage starts this function.
October 2021 439

This dialog box has a filter field. Entering the filter immediately reduces the amount displayed in the
list below. The filter field also has a control button. Pressing this button displays a menu.
The menu offers the following functions that can be used to adapt the display of the referred objects
in the list. It is possible to choose between All, Node, Element, Add Element and Substation. The
Use Short Name option is used to define whether the list shows the normal names of the elements
(long name) or their short name.
The list shows the Checked Object and its Referring Objects.
Click Select to select all network elements in the Graphics Editor that were selected in the list.
Click Edit to open the screen form of the network element selected in the list.
13.23 Check Radial Network

This function makes it possible to check whether the network at the selected node is radial or
meshed. The settings from the Options dialog box – Route Selection are used for the check.
The function can be started via the menu item Tools – Check – Check Radial Network.
After the network is checked, this is selected in the case of a meshed network.
13.24 External Tools

PSS SINCAL has different external tools with specialized functions. These include:
● Leika
● PSS NETOMAC
● SIGRA
440 October 2021

13.24.1 Leika
Tools – Leika in the menu starts the Leika program. Leika is used to calculate characteristics for
overhead lines and cables. Characteristics calculated in this way can be used directly in a standard
PSS SINCAL database.
LEIKA can calculate characteristics of overhead lines and cables in any order or of any type of
conductor cable or individual line:
● Overhead lines with with any number of systems of different voltage and any number of ground
cables
● Cables with concentric shielding or metal coating or armor, or additional shared shielding for 3-
phase current and for parallel ground conductors
● Grounded 1-phase systems
● 2-phase systems (alternating current systems for e.g. railway lines)
● 3-phase systems (3-phase current systems)
LEIKA calculates line identification data at operating frequency and at higher frequencies up to more
than one kHz.
To do these calculations you need to know the geometric sequence and the material values.
October 2021 441

13.24.2 PSS NETOMAC
Tools – PSS NETOMAC in the menu starts the PSS NETOMAC program. The PSS NETOMAC
Expert System offers extensive functions for analyzing dynamic procedures in electrical networks, in
both the time and frequency domains.
If dynamic calculations were done in PSS SINCAL, PSS NETOMAC uses the files with the current
results when it starts.
For a precise description of how PSS NETOMAC works, see the PSS NETOMAC System Manual.
13.24.3 SIGRA
Click Tools – SIGRA to start Siemens SIGRA 4.2. This program lets you visualize and evaluate
data structures in Comtrade format with ease. PSS SINCAL uses this tool to analyze the results
generated by dynamic calculations (PSS NETOMAC).
442 October 2021

Caution: SIGRA is an independent program that has to be installed separately.
SIGRA Functions
The SIGRA 4 system supports the analysis of fault records. Using the measured values recorded in
the fault record, SIGRA 4 calculates additional values, such as positive-sequence impedances, r.m.s.
values, etc. These measured and calculated variables and binary signals are graphically prepared
for display in the following view:
● Time signals
● Vector diagrams
● Circle diagrams
● Harmonics
● Table
Any number of diagrams can be assigned to a view, and any number of signals to a diagram.
SIGRA 4 processes all fault records in Comtrade format. If necessary, the settings can be adapted
to suit SIGRA 4 conventions via the Parameterize Network Nodes dialog and the Signal Properties
– Analog Values dialog.
SIGRA 4 supports fault record analysis with convenient tools, such as drag & drop, copy, delete,
paste, etc. (for diagrams, signals, and table headers).
These functions can also be used to export data of the fault record to other applications (e.g. Word,
Excel).
October 2021 443

Properties
14. Properties
The Properties window can display and modify graphics attributes for selected network elements and
supplementary graphics objects, as well as the view (workspace).
Click View – Properties to switch ON the Properties window.
The Properties window has a toolbar and a list of the properties for the selected element. The
information field under the list shows the property you have selected.
Toolbar
The toolbar has functions to control what is displayed in the Properties window.
Categorized display
Alphabetic display
Filter
Filter field
Help
Clicking Categorized display displays the properties in the list grouped by categories.
Clicking Alphabetic display sorts all the properties in "flat" alphabetically sorted order.
444 October 2021

Properties
Clicking Filter opens a pop-up menu where you can set a global filter for the properties. You can
select between two options: Show all properties and Show only base properties.
Assign a filter for properties in the Filter field. This immediately reduces the amount to be displayed
in the list of options below the field.
14.1 Editing Properties

The Properties window gives you standard access to all the graphic attributes. PSS SINCAL displays
the attributes in two columns. The left column shows the attribute’s name, the right column the
attribute value.
For attributes, PSS SINCAL distinguishes between normal numbers and text and enhanced
attributes. Normal attributes can be edited directly in the input field. For enhanced attributes, click
the following button in the selection field
to open an enhanced dialog box with the appropriate editing functions for the selected attribute. Click
the button
to display a list of options where you can select the property you want.
PSS SINCAL changes an attribute as soon as you press Return to stop editing and when you leave
the input field.
Properties Window Display
The Properties window displays the attributes of the selected element. In multiple selections, where
more than one element has been selected, PSS SINCAL displays the attributes of the determining
element. If different element types have been selected, PSS SINCAL displays only the attributes that
are available for all elements.
If no element has been selected, PSS SINCAL displays the attributes for the view.
14.2 Additional Ways to Edit Graphic Attributes

Network elements and supplementary graphics objects also have a special dialog box for editing
their properties. Format in the menu calls up these special dialog boxes.
October 2021 445

Messages
15. Messages
The message window shows calculations, faults, warnings, status messages and general
information. The content of the message box always refers to the network currently used.
The message window contains different categories that specify how "messages" are allocated.
● Calculations shows all the messages for the calculation method, including the status, time and
date the calculations were done.
● Errors are important problems in the network (calculations did not terminate successfully).
● Warnings are smaller network problems (calculations terminated successfully).
● Infos are general messages about calculation methods. These are used mainly for outputting
diagnostic information.
● State logs the calculation sequence. This section documents all the relations for input and
results accessed as well as the progress in the calculations.
To simplify editing messages, PSS SINCAL’s message window permits multiple selection. This
means more than one message can be selected with the mouse or keyboard.
For a detailed list of all messages from PSS SINCAL calculation methods, see the section on
Messages from Calculations in the chapter on Technical Reference.
15.1 Toolbar
The toolbar controls important message window functions.
Display messages in tree view
Display messages in flat view
Show log file
Filter options
Filter messages
446 October 2021

Messages
Show errors
Show warnings
Show infos
Open calculation log in result view
Save messages as an HTML file
Display messages in HTML browser
Select elements
Edit element data
Delete messages
Help
Click Display messages in tree view to display general messages in the message window with a
hierarchical structure.
Click Display messages in flat view to display general messages in the message window as a list.
Click Show log file to display other messages that depend on the type of calculations in the message
window.
Filter options determine the structure of the display in the browser. The following options can be
selected:
● Filter message text:

This filters the text in the messages as you type.
● Filter message numbers:
This is for the error numbers. Numbers can be entered individually or defined by a range.
Commas are used as separators (e.g. 2507,3310-3319). The entries E, W and I stand for the
filter for error, warning or info, respectively. Note that you have to press Enter to switch the
filter function ON.
Click Show errors to switch the error display in the message box ON or OFF.
Click Show warnings to switch the warning display in the message box ON or OFF.
Click Show infos to switch the info display in the message box ON or OFF.
Click Open calculation log in result view to open the enhanced calculation log.
You can enter any text you want in the Filter messages field to reduce amount displayed in the
browser.
October 2021 447

Messages
Select a file name and click Save as an HTML file to export the message window to an HTML file.
Click Display HTML to display additional messages in the standard HTML browser.
Click Select elements to select elements in the Graphics Editor for messages selected in the
browser.
Click Edit element data to display the screen forms for elements that have messages selected in
the browser. The data for the element can now be edited.
Click Delete messages to delete the current messages and the list of calculation procedures.
Help calls up PSS SINCAL online help.
15.2 Pop-Up Menu

The pop-up menu for the selected messages has enhanced functions for editing messages. Click
the right mouse button (or the menu button) to switch this ON.
● Select in Graphics:
Selects network elements for messages selected in the window in the Graphics Editor.
Selects network elements for messages selected in the window in the Tabular View.
● Edit Network Data:
Opens the screen form of network elements for messages selected in the window. If network
elements are of different types, PSS SINCAL displays the Select Element dialog box. Select
the type of network element you want and PSS SINCAL displays the data screen form for these
elements.
● Copy:
Copies messages selected in the window as text to the Windows clipboard for use in other
applications.
● Delete:
Deletes messages selected in the window after a confirmation message.
● Show Description:
Accesses PSS SINCAL Online Help with the technical reference for Errors, Warnings and
Infos.
15.3 Calculation Log in Result View

The relevant logs are created for each method that was calculated or called internally in a calculation.
These are stored in an SQLite database in order to output them later in a structure.
448 October 2021

Messages
The calculation log is displayed in the Result View. Simply select View – Result View in the menu.
The view used to display the calculation log has a toolbar, the Help button and the view area.
The Help button opens the Online Help.
General Information
This section of the result view shows the general information of the log.
Calculation Log
This section of the result view displays the actual calculation log in the form of a table.
The first column contains the Method of the current log message.
The Method Text column shows the additional text about the method.
The Code column shows the internal Code by which it is possible to search.
The Description column shows the log message text.
The Objects column shows the objects in the network related to the log message.
October 2021 449

Messages
The Job column shows the process in which this log message was written if the calculation was
carried out with several processes.
The Timestamp column shows when this message was written.
Control of the Display in the Result View
The display in the result view can be controlled via the option dialog box. This is opened by clicking
the Options button in the Calculation Log section.
The Options tab enables the display of the data sets to be controlled:
The View Options section makes it possible to specify the number of log messages to be displayed
on one page. The Display Topology selection field makes it possible to select whether the Name
or the Short name of the objects is to be displayed.
The Show method text, Show jobs and Show timestamp options enable the particular column to
be displayed or hidden.
The Highlight in Graphic View section provides the following highlighting functions:
● No highlighting:
No highlighting in the network graphic.
● Objects of selection:
Only the selected objects are highlighted.
450 October 2021

Messages
The Filter tab enables the following columns to be assigned a filter by double-clicking the Value
column or pressing F2:
● Method
● Code
● Description
● Objects
● Timestamp
The code can be filtered using the following syntax:
The prefixes S, L, I, W and E are available. Any number of numerical values can follow, separated
by a comma, semicolon, colon or a space. The next prefix can then follow, separated by a comma,
semicolon, colon or space (example: S1100,1134 L0013,0015).
These filters are then included in the display.
Activating or deactivating the check boxes enables the particular method to be displayed or hidden.
October 2021 451

Messages
This dialog box is provided with a pop-up menu.
● Select All:
All methods are selected.
● Deselect All:
All methods are deselected.
● Select Visible:
Only visible methods are selected, i.e. not hidden methods.
● Deselect Visible:
Only visible methods are deselected, i.e. not hidden methods.
Extended Filter and Methods Filter
The Extended filter and Methods filter check boxes enable the filters set in the Options dialog box
to be activated or deactivated.
Codes of the Calculation Log
Code Description
Initialization
L 0000 Simulation log
L 0001 Initializing
L 0002 Initialize electro calculation...
L 0003 Initialize flow calculation...
L 0004 Initialize done!
L 0005 Initialize failed!
Loading
L 0010 Loading
L 0011 Loading $$$!
L 0012 Load $$$ database|electro|flow
L 0013 Load records for DB: "$$$"
L 0014 # records successfully loaded!
L 0015 Loading table "$$$" $$$! Loaded records: #
Storing
L 0020 Storing
L 0021 Store results
L 0022 Store results for DB: "$$$" ...
L 0023 Writing table "$$$" succeeded! Stored results: #
L 0024 Writing table "$$$" failed!
L 0025 %i results successfully stored!
L 0026 Storing failed!
L 0027 Storing done!
Diagrams
L 0031 Protection diagram
Input data diagram
Motor diagram
L 0032 Errors
Warnings
Infos
L 0033 No Messages were generated
L 0034 Store diagrams to database
452 October 2021

Messages
L 0035 Store diagrams succeeded! Stored pages: #

L 0036 Store diagrams failed! Stored pages: #
L 0037 Store diagrams to COM
L 0038 Store diagrams succeeded! Stored pages: #
L 0039 Store diagrams failed! Stored pages: #
L 0040 Store diagrams to temp file '$$$'
General
L 0050 Yes
No
L 0051 On
Off
L 0052 succeeded
failed
L 0053 solved
failed
L 0054 Simulation
L 0055 Simulation state
L 0056 Simulation output
L 0057 Evaluation state
L 0058 Evaluation results
L 0059 HTML Evaluation results
L 0060 Element: $$$
L 0061 None
L 0062 Normal
L 0063 Extended
L 0064 Time: $$$
L 0065 Calculation
L 0066 Calculation done!
L 0067 Calculation done with errors!
L 0068 Results
Power Flow
L 0100 Loadflow Method
Newton Raphson
Admittanzmatrix
Current Iteration
Unbalanced (components)
Unbalanced (phases)
L 0101 Loadflow Options
Control Mode
Trafo Control
Area Control
Impedance load conversion
Time
L 0102 Switch Operation point
L 0103 Switching operation point done!
L 0104 Iteration
L 0105 Iter # Uacc:#.# Sacc:#.#
L 0106 Voltage Accuracy
L 0107 Power Accuracy
L 0108 Control used
L 0109 No convergence of PF
L 0110 Enable extended impedance load conversion
L 0111 Flat start
L 0112 $$$, delta P: # Q: #
L 0113 $$$: $$$
October 2021 453

Messages
Convergence
L 0150 Elements with low convergence
L 0151 Iter #: Convergence problems at Elements
L 0152 Iter #: Convergence problems at Nodes
Contingency Analysis
L 0300 Contingency Analysis
L 0301 Nr
Malfunction Elements
Detail Loadflow Info
L 0302 Nr
Value
Voltage Change
Isolated Consumers
Isolated Elements
Isolated Power
Isolated Active Power
Isolated Reactive Power
Element
L 0303 Pre Analyse Order Options
Sort by Voltage
Sort by Isolated Elements
Sort by Isolated Active Power
Sort by Isolated Reactive Power
Sort by Use maximal Voltage Drop
L 0304 CA Malfunction #
Reliability
L 0350 Calculate Reliability
L 0351 Results Reliability
L 0352 Calculate failure combination: #
Time Series
L 0400 Timestep
L 0401 # of #
Hosting Capacity
L 0450 Calculate current state
Node $$$ (#/#)
P = #.# MW, Q = #.# Mvar
L 0451 Calculate time step $$$
Node $$$ (#/#)
P = #.# MW, Q = #.# Mvar
L 0452 Calculate operating point $$$
Node $$$ (#/#)
P = # MW, Q = # Mvar
Information
L 0500 External Files
L 0501 Log File
454 October 2021

Projects
16. Projects
PSS SINCAL networks and any other data you want can be organized as projects. This has the
advantage that networks and additional information can be grouped according to tasks. This is a
quick and easy way to access files and switch between them. The projects only contain references
to files, and not the files themselves.
More than one project can be open at the same time. This means that if a new project is created or
an existing is opened, the already open projects are not automatically closed.
To open the project window, click View – Project.
The project window consists of a toolbar and a browser.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains all functions needed to manage project files.
New project, open project and close project
Add file
View files
Help
October 2021 455

Projects
After clicking the New Project button, a selection menu appears where the New Project, Open
Project and Close Project functions are available. The New Project function can be used to select
the location where the project will be stored. PSS SINCAL initially assigns the project name as the
file name, but this can be changed later. Click OK to create the project. To open an existing project,
click Open Project. This opens a dialog box where you can select a project. Click Close Project to
close the selected project.
Use Add file to add one or more PSS SINCAL networks or any files to the project. This opens a file
selection list where files can be selected. Click Open to close the file selection list and add the files
to the project.
Note that PSS SINCAL does not store the "entire" file in the project, only a reference. The name of
the reference normally is the same as the file name after it is created. This name can be modified
with the Properties function in the pop-up menu.
To open or activate the file selected in the browser, click View files. PSS SINCAL networks are
opened directly. To display all other files, first the program connected to the file extension is started.
Then the desired file is indicated.
Browser
The browser displays all networks and files assigned to the project. To open or activate a file, double-
click it.
16.1 Managing Projects

Right-click on a project (or use the menu button) to display the pop-up menu with the following
functions:
Add File
Select Add File in the menu to add one or more PSS SINCAL networks or any files you want to the
project. This opens a file selection list where files can be selected. Click Open to close the file
selection list and add the selected files to the project.
456 October 2021

Projects
Add Folder
Add Folder is used to add one or more networks or files to a project. A dialog box opens where you
can enter the name of the new folder.
Add Folder Link
Select Add Folder Link in the menu to link a local folder to the project. This opens the following
dialog box.
Enter a Name for the project folder link.
Enter the local directory in the Directory field.
The Filter field can be used to restrict the number of files to be displayed. You can enter more than
one filter separated by ";".
Use relative path to link the folder to the project create a relative path between the project and
the project file.
October 2021 457

Projects
Properties
Select Properties in the menu to open the following dialog box where you can change the project
properties.
Use the General Options section to edit general project settings.
Use the Name field to change the name of the project.
The File field shows where the project has been stored and is only for information.
Click Validate Project to check all files and folders in the project for validity. This automatically
removes files assigned to the project that no longer exist.
Keep documents opened on project close only refers to PSS SINCAL networks. If this option is
switched ON, PSS SINCAL does not automatically close all the open networks in the project.
Settings in the Default Program section are optional. You can set preliminary settings to open files
(except for PSS SINCAL networks). Program is used to select what application will open the files
assigned to the project.
When Use the default program for unknown file types is ON, all files that have not been assigned
to an application under Windows are opened with the indicated program. All files that have been
assigned to an application are automatically opened with the program designated.
Project Management
New Project generates new projects.
Open Project opens an existing project.
Close Project closes the current project.
458 October 2021

Projects
16.2 Managing Folders

Right-click on a folder (or use the menu button) to display the pop-up menu with the following
functions:
The menu items for Add File, Add Folder and Add Folder Link function like those for editing projects.
Properties
Click Properties to display an input dialog box where the name of the folder can be changed.
Remove from Project
Remove from Project deletes the folder and all the subordinate folders and files after a confirmation
message. Only the file references are deleted and not the files themselves.
16.3 Managing Folder Links

Right-click on a folder link (or use the menu button) to display the pop-up menu with the following
functions:
Refresh
Refresh updates the folder link according to its properties. The project browser displays the files
currently found in the linked folder.
Open Containing Folder
Select this to open the containing folder of the folder link.
Properties
Select this to open the Folder Link Properties dialog box. For a description of the dialog box, see
Add Folder Link in the pop-up menu of the project.
October 2021 459

Projects
Remove from Project
Remove from Project deletes the folder link after a confirmation message. This only removes the
reference to the local directory. The directory itself and the files in it remain unchanged.
16.4 Managing Files

Right-click on a file (or use the menu button) to display the pop-up menu with the following functions:
View
Click this menu item to open the file. If it is a PSS SINCAL network, the file is opened directly in the
Graphics Editor. The program tries to start any other file type with the application assigned under
Windows. If no application has been assigned, the program starts the default application assuming
this option is ON in Project Properties.
View with Default Program
This menu item is only available if a default application has been entered in project properties. This
lets you start file types with programs not registered under Windows.
This function can also be turned ON by holding down the CTRL key and double-clicking on the
respective file.
Open Containing Folder
Select this to open the containing folder of the file.
Properties
Properties opens the following dialog box so you can modify the file properties.
Use the Name field to change the name of the file for the browser.
460 October 2021

Projects
File shows where the file has been stored. You can select a different file if you want.
Use relative path to link the file to the project creates a relative link from the file to the project file.
Remove from Project
Remove from Project deletes the file after a confirmation message. Only the file references are
deleted and not the files themselves.
October 2021 461

Catalogues
17. Catalogues
A catalogue can have any combination of network elements and supplementary graphics objects.
These are managed in the catalogue and can be used in the current network. Generally, a catalogue
has plot headers or element legends created from supplementary graphics objects, or characteristic
function groups (e.g. motor feeder in industrial networks) created from network elements that you
use later.
To activate the catalogue window, click View – Catalogue.
In the catalogue window, PSS SINCAL displays the elements as icons. You can drag & drop these
icons to the current network and import the contents of the catalogue element.
The Catalogue window has a toolbar and the catalogue area.
Toolbar
The toolbar contains all functions needed to manage catalogues.
New catalogue, open catalogue and cose catalogue
Insert clipboard into catalogue
Remove catalogue element
Help
462 October 2021

Catalogues
After clicking the New Catalogue button, a selection menu appears where the New Catalogue,
Open Catalogue and Close Catalogue functions are available. Click New Catalogue to create a
new empty catalogue. To open an existing catalogue, click Open Catalogue. This opens a dialog
box to select a catalogue. Click Close Catalogue to close the selected catalogue.
The insert clipboard into catalogue button transfers the data from the clipboard to the catalogue.
This is an easy way to transfer any network elements copied into PSS SINCAL into the catalogue.
Click Remove catalogue element to delete the catalogue element selected in the catalogue area.
17.1 Using Catalogues

PSS SINCAL lets you create as many catalogues as you want and put them in the user interface.
In the catalogue window, PSS SINCAL displays all catalogues that have been loaded. They have a
title bar with the name of the catalogue. In the following example, the catalogue for Default has been
loaded.
To import a catalogue element into a network, click on it in the catalogue and drag it into the network.
This places the contents of the catalogue element into the network at the cursor position when you
release the mouse button.
To guarantee elements are positioned precisely in the network, PSS SINCAL displays a detailed
preview of the catalogue element in the network graphics when you drag & drop. Catalogue elements
have connecting points so they can be connected directly to the network.
October 2021 463

Catalogues
To edit catalogues and catalogue elements, use the pop-up menu. PSS SINCAL distinguishes
between the pop-up menu for the catalogue and the pop-up menu for the elements.
17.2 Managing Catalogues

To manage catalogues, right-click the title bar to switch the pop-up menu ON.
To create a new catalogue, click New Catalogue in the pop-up menu. PSS SINCAL displays a dialog
box to define the path to the storage location and the name of the catalogue.
After the dialog box for Catalogue save as closes, PSS SINCAL displays the new catalogue.
In the pop-up menu, click Open Catalogue to load an existing catalogue or Close Catalogue to
close it. If you have more than one catalogue, you can activate the one you want by clicking on the
catalogue title.
464 October 2021

Catalogues
Select View in the pop-up menu to customize the display of the individual catalogue elements.
PSS SINCAL offers you the following options:
● Symbols:
Multiple-column display of symbols and names for catalogue elements.
● List:
Single-column display of small symbols and names for catalogue elements.
17.3 Creating Catalogue Elements

To create a new catalogue element, select an area in the network and copy it to the Clipboard. The
Clipboard contents can be pasted in as a catalogue element by opening the pop-up menu of
catalogue elements.
PSS SINCAL displays the new catalogue element with a thumbnail for the element in the catalogue
element symbol.
To copy or delete an existing element from the catalogue, select it, then click Copy or Remove.
October 2021 465

Catalogues
17.4 Editing Catalogue Elements

The pop-up menu of the selected catalogue element contains additional editing functions.
The pop-up menu is divided into two functional groups. The top part is for editing selected catalogue
elements and the lower part for Managing Catalogues.
17.4.1 Catalogue Element Properties
Use Properties in the pop-up menu of catalogue elements to set additional options for inserting
catalogue elements in the Graphics Editor.
Catalogue is used to edit the Name of the catalogue element.
Reference Position defines the position of the cursor when you place catalogue elements in the
network diagram. These settings are used to position catalogue elements in the network diagram.
Use Connections defines whether PSS SINCAL considers the connecting points of the catalogue
element. These connecting points link catalogue elements directly with the network. PSS SINCAL
uses all the nodes (no busbars) of the catalogue element with a maximum of one connected network
element as connecting points. The connecting point’s color shows its status:
Show all the possible connections between a catalogue element and the network diagram
466 October 2021

Catalogues
Show connections between a catalogue element and the network diagram if the catalogue
element’s network elements are connected to the network diagram at the catalogue
element node
Copy Options defines general settings for copying catalogue elements.
Copy name of elements keeps the names of the network elements when they are inserted.
Generate a new unique name generates names for the network elements when they are inserted
that correspond to the settings in the Format View dialog box.
Click Copy Settings to open the following dialog box.
The Copy Settings dialog box defines how the attributes for layer, object type, network level and
network area are assigned when catalogue elements are copied. PSS SINCAL offers the following
functions:
● Actual:
This setting applies the attribute from the selected preliminary setting.
● Search:
This setting initiates a search for the appropriate attribute. PSS SINCAL automatically creates a
new attribute if no appropriate one is found.
● New:
This setting means PSS SINCAL always generates the new attribute when copying.
Catalogue Icon
Change Icon can be used to load an existing icon from a file.
October 2021 467

Toolbox
18. Toolbox
The Toolbox is a practical tool window with important editing functions that adapt dynamically
according to the context of the work situation. This means that functions for creating and editing
network elements appear when the Graphics Editor is open. When you open the diagram view, you
have functions for formatting diagrams and resizing diagram sections.
The View – Other Windows – Toolbox menu switches the Toolbox ON or OFF.
Sections in the toolbox are organized thematically. These sections can be opened or closed. Just
like with toolbar, you can click the appropriate icon to switch ON the function you want. PSS SINCAL
displays an icon assigned so you know which function is currently switched ON.
Type of Display in the Toolbox
Use the pop-up menus to select whether the functions are displayed as icons or lists in each section.
468 October 2021

Toolbox
The following functions are available:
● List View:
Displays the functions of the section in list view. If this is switched OFF, PSS SINCAL only
displays icons.
● Collapse All:
Closes all the sections.
● Expand All:
Opens all the sections.
October 2021 469

Calculate
19. Calculate
PSS SINCAL offers a wide range of calculation functions for electrical and pipe networks. These are
divided into the following areas:
● Electrical networks
o Core modules
o Advanced modules
o Protection modules
o PSS NETOMAC
● Pipe networks
o Gas modules
o Water modules
o Heating/cooling modules
The calculation modules are provided in the Calculate menu in the user interface. The scope of the
calculation functions displayed in the menu is dynamic. This is controlled both by Presetting the
Calculation Methods and by the modules activated in the license file.
470 October 2021

Calculate
Calculation Modules for Electrical Networks
The following figure shows the available calculation modules for electrical networks with their
classification according to the field of operation.
October 2021 471

Calculate
Calculation Modules for Pipe Networks
The following figure shows the available calculation modules for pipe networks with their
classification according to the field of operation.
19.1 Presetting Calculation Methods

Each of the PSS SINCAL calculation methods requires specific input data. For harmonics
calculations, for example, additional network-elements data must be entered to describe their
frequency dependency.
To display data in a clear arrangement, set the amount of input data to be displayed on the screen.
Click Calculate – Methods to open the Calculation Methods dialog box, where you determine the
amount of input data to be shown.
This dialog box determines the amount of data dialog boxes and screen forms can contain.
PSS SINCAL differentiates between the following kinds of data:
● Basic calculation methods

● Advanced calculation methods
472 October 2021

Calculate
● Model: symmetrical or unbalanced

When you select the option Unbalanced, individual zero-system data can be indicated for the
network elements. This option makes also possible attaching network elements in individual
phases.
19.2 Multiple Calculations

This function makes it possible to carry out several calculations simultaneously with all scenarios or
in all variants selected for the variant comparison. This is possible both in electrical networks as well
as in pipe networks and offers the advantage of allowing all results to be compared later with each
other.
Choose Calculate – Multiple Calculations in order to set the parameters for multiple calculations.
The Calculation mode section makes it possible to switch between variants and scenarios.
● Variants:
The selected calculation methods are carried out in each variant that was activated for the
variant comparison.
● Scenarios:
An additional selection field is used here to select the variant in which the individual scenarios
are to be created. The input field next to it is used to enter the name for the base scenario
variant. If this base scenario variant already exists, this is overwritten. A detailed description of
the scenarios calculation is provided in the chapter Calculate Scenarios.
All selected methods are shown in the Selected Methods selection list.
The Available methods selection list contains all calculation methods.
To add a new method to the multiple calculation, first select it from the Available Methods selection
list. The method below which the new method has to be inserted is then selected in the Selected
Methods selection list.
Use the
October 2021 473

Calculate
button to insert all methods selected in the Available methods list below the method selected in the
Selected methods or click the
button to remove it from the selected methods.
Use the
and
buttons to define the order of the selected methods.
Choose Edit in the pop-up menu or click the
button to edit the particular method if it has an associated dialog box.
The filter field enables the display range in the Available methods selection list to be restricted. This
makes it possible to select the required data easily even with large quantities of data.
The calculation can be started by clicking the Calculate button. This also saves the values of the
dialog box. Clicking the Close button only causes the values of the dialog box to be saved. Clicking
the Cancel button enables the process to be aborted and none of the values are saved.
The last method of the selected methods is activated in the graphic in order display the results.
474 October 2021

Input Data and Results
20. Input Data and Results
As network calculations finish, PSS SINCAL displays the results immediately and in easily readable
form. You can choose the most suitable from many different formats.
PSS SINCAL can display the results in both the graphics and in the tables or diagrams.
20.1 Displaying Input Data and Results in the Network Diagram

To select the input data or results to be displayed in the network diagram, click View – Input Data
and Results.
PSS SINCAL stores results of the different calculation methods in the current network. You can
access the results in the network any time you want without having to recalculate them.
In the dialog box for Show Input Data and Results, PSS SINCAL displays all calculations that have
been done before. To display input data or results in the Graphics Editor, click these in the list of
options.
Looking at the harmonics results in the dialog box, you see that these have additional subordinate
points. In harmonics calculations, you can select between additional results (for 250 Hz, 350 Hz, etc.
and for total values). PSS SINCAL automatically displays these subordinate points, if different
calculation results of a calculation method can be displayed in the Graphics Editor.
To help you switch easily between subordinate points of results, PSS SINCAL has a results toolbar.
20.2 Variant Comparison

The variant comparison function makes it easy to compare the results of different planning variants
in the user interface. The variant comparison function is available in:
● The network diagram

● Tabular View
● The screen forms for the results
October 2021 475

In the dialog box for variant management, you can select the variants you want to compare. For each
individual variant, you can decide whether to include it in the comparison.
The variant comparison function has to be switched ON when you load the results. For this the
Compare variants option must be activated. The extended result data is then loaded for the
comparison variants.
Variant Comparison in Network Diagrams
In the network diagram, PSS SINCAL offers variant comparison as aggregate functions. This means
that, in addition to displaying the resulting value for the current variant, you can display the values
for the results from an aggregate function. PSS SINCAL provides the following functions:
● Value:
Value of current variant
● Minimum:
Minimum value for all comparison variants
● Maximum:
Maximum value for all comparison variants
● Average:
Average value for all comparison variants
● Standard deviation:
Deviation of all values by the average for all comparison variants
The display in the result field of the network diagram looks like this (this is the annotation for a node
text):
GRB 220A
U/Un = 99,9 %
U/Un (Min) = 70,1 %
U/Un (Max) = 103,2 %
P = -37,26 MW
You can select the aggregate functions for each result field independently. Enter the settings in the
Annotation and Filter dialog box.
476 October 2021

Variant Comparison in Tabular View
Tabular View shows the all the results for all active variants for comparison. The different filtering
and sorting functions can be used to analyze the results.
Variant Comparison in Screen Forms for Results
When variant comparison is switched ON, the screen forms display the results of all variants. You
can scroll through the screen form, switching between the different results. The PSS SINCAL screen
form shows the current variant in the title bar.
20.3 Displaying Results in the Network Diagram using Tool Tips

This function displays input data and results of network elements using Tool Tips. PSS SINCAL
automatically displays these tips when the mouse cursor is over a network element.
Format view settings can be used to activate Tool Tips (see the section View Formatting in the
chapter on Graphics Editor).
The display range is configured in the Options dialog box via the Common Document Settings.
October 2021 477

20.4 Evaluations
Use this function to color the network diagram with the help of specific selection criteria. Use View –
Evaluation Settings.
After you have selected the Evaluation Type or Evaluation Item and the desired color, click OK to
display the selected network elements in the Graphics Editor in color. Click Apply to perform the
selected evaluation without closing the dialog box.
Every type of evaluation can color elements that will not be considered. This is done with the subtype
Not considered.
To terminate the evaluation, select No Evaluation in this dialog box. Alternatively, you can use the
drop-down menu of the Evaluation Settings button in the toolbar of the Graphics Editor.
PSS SINCAL colors elements temporarily according to the selected evaluation. Coloring is lost when
the network is closed.
20.4.1 Evaluation Types
No Evaluation
This function switches evaluations OFF.
Operating State
PSS SINCAL colors evaluations according to the control state for the element. The following
conditions are colored:
● Not considered
● Elements out of service
● Elements switched off
478 October 2021

● Elements with switched off terminal

● Elements in operation
● Future elements
● Shut down elements
● Status according to operating state
This evaluation is synchronized with the network data. This means that if the tripping state of the
element changes, the color changes when the evaluation is switched ON.
Supply
All supplied elements are shown in color. Elements are supplied if the network elements are
connected in the topology with a supply source.
With electrical networks this is a generator or a supply source of type voltage value and angle, which
balance the power value (= slack). If island operation is activated in the calculation settings, any
generator or supply source is included.
With pipe networks this can be a water tank, a centrifugal pump, a pressure supply or a pressure
maintenance.
Connection Type
This evaluation is available for electrical and heating/cooling networks.
PSS SINCAL colors the terminal according to type. In electrical networks, this is the number of
phases at the terminal (1-, 2- and 3-phase). In heating/cooling networks, this is the flow (forward line,
return line, forward and return line) of the element.
Phasing
This evaluation is only available for electrical networks.
The terminal is colored according to its phases (L1, L2, L3, L12, L23, L31, L123).
Establishment Time
The coloring shows when the network elements were created. These times are found in the data
screen forms of the elements.
When you enter a view date in the Calculation Settings, PSS SINCAL does not separately color
elements with establishment times before the view date, i.e. evaluation begins with the view date.
Variant
PSS SINCAL colors according to available variants in the network. PSS SINCAL colors elements
according to recording variants.
Network Levels
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to network levels.
October 2021 479

Network Areas
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to network areas.
Network Zones
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to network zones.
Network Element Group
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to assigning in the network element group.
Substations
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to their substations.
Owner
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to assigning to the owner.
Line Types
Lines are colored according to their type. If the line is a standard line, it will be colored accordingly.
If the line has not been assigned a standard type, PSS SINCAL colors the line according to the line
type (cable, overhead line or connection).
Scenarios
This evaluation is only available for electrical networks. This evaluation highlights in color elements
that are changed in the scenario.
Malfunction Scenario
The elements are colored according to the selected malfunction scenario.
Load Density
Set the parameters in the Load Density dialog box. To open this dialog box, either click on the
information text and press Edit or double-click the information text. PSS SINCAL colors graphical
load groups according to value range. This evaluation is synchronized with the data displayed in the
network diagram. As you browse through the output lists, PSS SINCAL updates the colors of the
graphical load groups.
If the load density evaluation is switched ON, PSS SINCAL displays any load density polygon
legends it finds in the network and updates them.
480 October 2021

Layers
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to graphics layers.
Object Types
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to object type.
Feeder
This evaluation is only available for electrical networks. There has to be a previous feeder
determination.
Elements are colored according to feeder allocation.
Feeder Substations
This evaluation is only available for electrical networks. There has to be a previous feeder
determination.
PSS SINCAL colors the elements according to transformer substation.
Contingency Analysis
This evaluation lets you visualize the results of the contingency analysis calculation method.
Malfunctions selected in the Contingency Analysis Results browser create the basis for coloring.
PSS SINCAL colors the failed elements.
Resupply
This evaluation is only available for electrical networks
This evaluation lets you visualize the results of the resupply calculation method.
Transformer Tap Results
This evaluation is only available for electrical networks. It lets you visualize the results of the
transformer tap detection calculations. Network areas with the same transformer tap positions are
colored in identical colors.
Power Flow Data Source
This evaluation can be used to visualize the data source of the balanced and unbalanced power flow
results.
Power Flow Result State
October 2021 481

This evaluation can be used to visualize the status of the terminal with balanced and unbalanced
power flow results.
Load Density
This function graphically displays the load density. PSS SINCAL colors all Graphical Load Groups
according to preset values.
The Load Density dialog box is available through the Evaluation dialog box. It can be opened in two
ways:
● Click the information text and press Edit

● Double-click the information text
This dialog box lets you color graphical load groups according to the determined load density. You
can visualize data (input data or network development results) displayed in the Graphics Editor.
PSS SINCAL does not consider the setting for the visualization type in the dialog box.
The section Common defines the data for the load density calculations. PSS SINCAL offers two
selections:
● Input Data
● Results (current results or times of the network development calculations)
Attributes sets the basic control parameters for load density. A range of colors shows the load
density. Select Use color range to switch this function ON. Every calculated load density is assigned
a specific color. You can select any Colors and automatically start the interpolation.
Use the Determine button to determine limits for load densities in the network. The values appear in
the Colors list. These values show what load densities actually exist in the network. Values in the
Colors list can be changed at any time.
Use New and Edit buttons to define new colors or change existing ones.
482 October 2021

The Delete button deletes the colors.
20.5 Annotation of Network Elements in the Network Diagram

PSS SINCAL lets you customize the details of the network element annotation in the network
diagram. A number of available attributes can be used to define the visibility of input data and results.
Configure the annotation settings with the Annotation and Filter dialog box. Click View –
Annotation and Filter in the menu to open it.
The left side of the dialog box has a browser with the main points Results, Element Input Data and
Additional Input Data.
The right side of the dialog box has detailed annotation and filter settings for the entry selected in
the browser.
Results
PSS SINCAL lists all the results in the network in the browser under Results. When one of the entries
is switched ON, the right part of the dialog box shows the annotation elements that can be displayed.
The amount displayed can be set for nodes, node elements and branch elements. All the elements
you want to display in the network graphics are switched ON in the list.
October 2021 483

Element Input Data and Additional Input Data
All available network elements and additional elements are listed in the browser under the main
points entering Element Input Data or Additional Input Data. From these, select the network
element to be edited.
After you select the desired network element in the browser, PSS SINCAL lists annotation elements
that can be display on the right side of the dialog box. Activate the annotation elements you want in
the list of Data. The Graphics Editor displays these are at the network elements.
Annotation and Filter Settings
The annotation and filter settings are on the right side of the dialog box. The attributes for the entry
selected in the browser can be edited.
The lists of options display annotation settings for the entry selected in the browser.
The check boxes let you configure the annotation scope individually. In the example, the annotation
settings for the results of node power flow have been assigned parameters. PSS SINCAL displays
the fields for name, V/Vn and phi in the network diagram for the node.
The filters are under the lists. You can define filter functions for coloring the network diagram.
Note: Annotations and filter settings for all the calculation results and input data can be configured
in this dialog box. The network diagram, however, only displays the data selected in the Show
Input Data and Results dialog box (see the section on Displaying Results in the Network Diagram).
The following illustration shows a network diagram with units and short names.
484 October 2021

20.5.1 Annotation Depending on the Object Type
In PSS SINCAL, object types can be assigned to any kind of network element. These let you hide
element annotations or display different kinds of data for the same types of elements.
All annotation and filter settings are assigned to an object type. PSS SINCAL displays the current
object type in the top part of the dialog box.
Click on the object type to open a menu that lets you switch between the various object types.
For a detailed description of the object types, see the section on Object Types in the chapter on
Graphics Editor.
Copying Object Type Settings
Click on the object type to open a menu with a menu point for Copy Object Type.
Click this to display the Copy Object Type Settings dialog box.
The settings for the object type selected can be copied to another existing object type. This lets you
transfer all the settings for a type of object.
October 2021 485

20.5.2 Format Text
PSS SINCAL lets you individually format the annotation in the network graphics.
Double-click on the desired annotation element or select Properties in the annotation element pop-
up menu to open the Format Text dialog box. Depending on what you select, PSS SINCAL opens
a dialog box where you can edit standard annotation elements or enhanced annotation elements.
Formatting Standard Annotation Elements
In the case of standard annotation elements, PSS SINCAL opens the following dialog box.
The Format Field section lets you customize the selected annotation element.
Use Show Formula Sign and Show Unit to turn the display of formula signs and units ON and OFF.
Note that both these options are only preliminary settings. The units and formula signs have to be
switched ON in the Annotation and Filter dialog box.
You can also enter the units you want by hand. Click the unit in Format Field and select it in the
menu.
Show Digits sets the number decimal places for annotation elements.
Click Settings in Variant Comparison to open another dialog box and configure how PSS SINCAL
displays variant comparison.
486 October 2021

Click Switch Unit to turn ON automatic unit conversion. PSS SINCAL automatically selects the next
smaller unit if the value is below the set limit. Alternatively, you can also simply change units in the
preview field.
Variant Comparison
This dialog box configures enhanced output attributes for the annotation in the network diagram and
for filter functions.
Switch variant comparison fields ON to select the following aggregate functions in addition to the
actual output field:
● Value:
Value of current variant
● Minimum:
Minimum value for all comparison variants
● Maximum:
Maximum value for all comparison variants
● Average:
Average for all comparison variants
● Standard deviation:
Deviation of all values from reference value for all comparison variants
Values in % based on current variant converts the aggregate functions to percentages. As the
basic value (= 100 %), PSS SINCAL uses the value of the current variant. This is particularly useful
when filter evaluations are performed for aggregate functions.
Note: You need to switch variant comparison ON when you load the results to display enhanced
attributes in the network diagram and color filters for these attributes.
Formatting Enhanced Annotation Elements
The user can select the enhanced annotation elements he wants. These include:
● Supplementary data for elements (ElementExt table)

● Supplementary data for nodes (NodeExt table)
For these annotation elements, PSS SINCAL opens the following dialog box.
October 2021 487

The Format Field section lets you customize the selected annotation element.
Use Show Formula Sign and Show Unit to turn the display of formula signs and units ON and OFF.
Note that both these options are only preliminary settings. The units and formula signs have to be
switched ON in the Annotation and Filter dialog box.
You can also enter the units you want by hand. Click the unit in Format Field and select it in the
menu.
Show Digits sets the number decimal places for annotation elements.
The filter field reduces the displayed data. Additional filter criteria can be entered separately by using
";". Wildcards can be used.
20.5.3 Options
Activate filter evaluations turns ON the filter evaluations set in this dialog box. This lets you turn
the filter display in the Graphics Editor ON or OFF without changing filter settings.
Click Options to open a dialog box with additional settings.
The Annotation Settings section has enhanced options for displaying the annotation in the network
diagram.
Show data and results displays input data and results in the network graphics simultaneously. This
option only exists for results. This lets you display, in addition to the results, the input data of the
network element.
488 October 2021

Show unit toggles display of the units ON or OFF in the annotation fields for the network element.
Show formula sign displays the short name in front of the entry in the annotation field so that it can
be more easily distinguished from the other values.
Filter Settings sets additional options for controlling filter functions.
Use filter color from node applies the node’s filter color to neighboring elements. Elements colored
by a filter are not changed.
Use filter from standard type assures that only Standard object type settings are used in filter
evaluations, allowing you to make quick filter evaluations when there are many different object types.
Use absolute values for filter assures that only absolute values are used for a filter evaluation.
Hide annotation without filter hides the text of elements that do not have any filters defined.
Color for Elements without Filter specifies a color for network elements with no assigned filter
criteria.
All settings of this dialog box are assigned to the respective type of result (e.g. power flow results, 3-
phase short circuit results, etc.). This lets you make individual settings for different types of results.
20.6 Filter Settings in the Network Diagram

Filter settings let you color the network elements with the help of range queries. The filter settings
are used mainly to detect problems in the network (overloaded network elements, being above or
below voltages etc.).
You access the filter settings with the dialog box for Annotation and Filter. The Set Filter at section
lets you define filters for coloring elements. None is the default.
After the filter has been selected, click the edit button next to it to open an additional dialog box.
PSS SINCAL differentiates between Three State Filter evaluation and Range Evaluation.
October 2021 489

20.6.1 Three State Filter Evaluation
Three State Filter Evaluation displays values in two or three colors (similar to a traffic light). You can
select any colors you want selected. Our description uses the default three state filter colors.
The range for color switching can be set by defining the lower limit (left input field) and the upper limit
(right input field) of the evaluation range.
Three Color Display
This type of display shows whether the maximum values have been exceeded.
If the lower limit is less than the upper, all network elements with values below the lower limit will be
in the lower (or permissible) range. All network elements with values above the upper limit will be in
the upper (or error) range. The values between the two limits will be in the middle (or caution) range.
In the example above, values in the network below 30 would be in green, those between 30 and 60
in yellow and those above 60 in red. This makes caution and error ranges clearly visible.
Two Color Display
This display shows whether the values being checked are in a permissible range.
Displaying ranges in two colors is called range evaluation.
If the lower limit is less than the upper, all network elements with values below the lower limit or
above the upper limit will be in the error range. The values between the two limits will be in the middle
(or permissible) range.
In the example above, values in the network below 99 and above 101 would be in red and those
between, and including, 99 and 101 in green. This lets you clearly visualize permissible range and
error ranges.
20.6.2 Range Evaluation
Along with upper and lower limits, additional limits can be set in the range evaluation and can be
assigned colors.
Click the Filter Range switch in the Symbol Filter dialog box.
490 October 2021

Click New to enter individual limits. Click Edit to edit existing limits. Ranges can be displayed in any
color. Because PSS SINCAL can display elements in any color combination, you can arrange the
network clearly with complementary shades.
20.6.3 Activating Filter Coloring and Evaluations
Simply click the toolbar of the Graphics Editor to switch ON or OFF the filters and evaluations.
The menu of the Evaluation Settings button lets you select between the standard network display,
the last active filter settings and the last active evaluation.
The menu of the Annotation and Filter button lets you select between the standard network display,
the last active filter settings and the last active evaluation.
Coloring the network diagram:
● Standard displays the network in standard colors.

● Filter turns ON the filter coloring in the network.
● Evaluation displays colorings that have been set for the evaluation.
October 2021 491

20.7 Visibility for Annotation

This function controls the way annotations are displayed in the network diagram and is only available
if the results of the unbalanced power flow are activated. Select View – Visibility for Annotation in
the menu to open the following dialog box.
Extended visibility for annotation switches on this function. Select the desired entries in the list
below to define their visibility.
PSS SINCAL reduces the annotation in the network diagram to the selected entries. This is only for
annotation text that meet group criterion (e.g. phase results). If nothing has been selected,
PSS SINCAL displays the entire annotation.
To help you switch ON phases more quickly, you can press a key (1 = L1, 2 = L2, 3 = L3, 4 = L12,
5 = L23, 6 = L31) to close the dialog box and switch the selected phase ON.
The menu of the Annotation and Filter button enables the easy switching of the scope of annotation.
It is possible to switch here between standard (function globally deactivated), L1, L2 and L3 without
opening the Visibility for Annotation dialog box.
20.8 Displaying Results in Screen Forms

Input data and results of the network elements can be displayed or edited in screen forms.
Select the desired network element and right-click the element in the network diagram to switch ON
the pop-up menu.
492 October 2021

Network Data is used to display and edit input data for the network element in a screen form.
Results (current) shows the most recent calculation results from the Graphics Editor in a screen
form.
The Results submenu shows all available calculations results. Click on them to display them in a
screen form.
Basically, PSS SINCAL displays these results in screen forms in the same way as input data. To
simplify the evaluation of comprehensive results, however, they can be displayed in lists. To do so,
activate the option Show results in lists (see the section on Common Settings for Screen Forms)
in the Options dialog box.
October 2021 493

Pop-Up Menu for Nodes and Busbars
The pop-up menu for nodes and busbars is a special menu. It provides the results of the node and
on top of that the results of all branches.
The branch shows the results of all node elements and branch elements connected to the node. Note
that branch elements have a branch connected to the starting node and one connected to the end
node.
20.9 Displaying Input Data and Results in Tabular View

Tabular View provides a particularly clear way to display both input data and results.
To open the Tabular View for the current network, click View – Tabular View.
Now you can select the desired input data or results in the browser of the Tabular View. Select the
point you want (in our example, the branch results have been selected) to display the data in tabular
form.
494 October 2021

For a detailed description of all functions of Tabular View, see the chapter on Tabular View.
20.10 Result View

The results can be displayed more clearly in Result View. Simply select View – Result View in the
menu.
October 2021 495

Basic elements of the user result view:
● Toolbar (#1)
● Control buttons (#2)
● View area (#3)
The view used to display the results has a toolbar, control buttons (depending on the type of result),
and the view area.
Toolbar
This toolbar switches ON the functions for displaying results.
Display the start page of the selection of results
Browse backwards
Browse forwards
496 October 2021

Update view
Select results
Select result file
Manage result files
Manage Result Files
Result files can be created, renamed and deleted via the Manage Result Files selection button.
In order to create a new result file or rename an already existing result file, a dialog box appears for
entering the name of the file.
If a new result file is created, this is automatically activated. If a created result file is deleted, the
standard file is automatically activated.
The Rename Result File and Delete Result File functions are not available with the standard file.
View Area
This area displays a page with information on each type of result selected. In the current version the
following kind of results can be displayed:
● No results
● Result Compilation
● Contingency Analysis
● Connection Conditions
● VoltVar Optimization
● Determining Fault Locations
● Protection Analysis
● Check OC Settings
● Transfer Capacity
● Hosting Capacity
● Calculation Log
20.11 Result Compilation

The result compilation function provides a result view that shows different result types in concentrate
based on terminals.
October 2021 497

20.11.1 Compiling Results
Choose Calculate – Result Compilation to compile the results.
All the selected topology and result fields are listed in the Selected Results selection list.
The Available results selection list contains all available topology and result fields.
To include a new field in the result compilation, this is first selected in the Available results selection
list. The required field below which the new field is inserted is then selected in the Selected Results
selection list.
Use the
button to insert all selected fields below the selected field in the selected results or click the
button to remove them from the selected results.
Use the buttons
and
to define the order of the selected fields.
The filter field enables the display range in the Available results selection list to be restricted. This
makes it possible to select the required data easily even with large quantities of data. The button in
the input field is a special feature. Clicking this button opens a menu.
498 October 2021

The menu offers the following functions for adapting the selection list.
● All:
All available fields in the list are displayed.
● Topology:
Only topology fields in the list are displayed.
● Result types:
Only fields of the selected result type are shown.
● Show only results with data:
Only those fields with available results are displayed.
The Filter column defines filter rules for an attribute. Select the attribute you want in the list and click
this button.
Now you can define the filter by entering an operator (=, <>, >, >=, <, <=) and a filter value. In text
queries, wildcards can be used. Several filter queries can be logically linked together using the AND
&& and OR || operators.
To link the data set correctly, use the AND operator for topology fields. In other words, the data set
is only displayed if it matches the filter of the field. This enables specific elements, nodes or terminals
to be selected.
For result fields on the other hand, the OR operator is used to link the data set. In other words, the
data set is only displayed if it matches one of the criteria of the result fields. This makes it possible
to display undesired or poor values concentrating on a particular terminal. These values are marked
in red in the table.
If the Variant Comparison is activated and several variants are selected for it, data sets of the same
terminal from several variants are only not displayed if no filter matches.
Check boxes enable entered filters to be activated or deactivated.
Use the
button to open a dialog box in which additional information for the result view can be entered.
October 2021 499

The Title field allows a text to be entered which is displayed in the title bar for identifying the current
compilation.
Additional texts can be entered in the two Info 1 and Info 2 fields. These texts are then shown in the
Information section.
500 October 2021

20.11.2 Displaying Results
After compiling the results, click the OK button to open the result view with the result compilation.
The view used to display the results has control buttons, a toolbar and the view area.
Toolbar
This toolbar switches ON the functions for displaying results.
Display the start page of the selection of results
Browse backwards
Browse forwards
Update view
Select results
Select result file
October 2021 501

Manage result files
Manage Result Files
Result files can be created, renamed and deleted via the Manage Result Files selection button.
In order to create a new result file or rename an already existing result file, a dialog box appears for
entering the name of the file. It is also possible here to select a file from which the settings are to be
imported in the new result file. This file can be found in the "_files" directory in the "CUSTOM" folder
of a network with an already created compilation of results.
If a new result file is created, this is automatically activated. If a created result file is deleted, the
standard file is automatically activated.
The Rename Result File and Delete Result File functions are not available with the standard file.
View Area
Various control buttons are provided in the header area of the view, by which the result compilation
can be started.
The Result Compilation button opens the dialog box for compiling various results. To load the data
for this dialog box, the result file selected in the Select result file field is used.
PSS SINCAL enables the result compilation to be exported as a report so that it can be used later in
other Windows applications. For this the memory location of the exported report can be selected and
the file name entered.
Use the Select in Tabular View button to select all terminals present in the Tabular View.
The Help button opens the Online Help.
Information
This section is only displayed if additional data was entered via the information button in the
compilation dialog box.
502 October 2021

Results
This section visualizes the compiled results in tabular form. Each row in the table shows the result of
a terminal of a variant. If the variant comparison is activated and several variants are selected for it,
several results are shown underneath each other for each terminal.
The Options function opens the Options dialog box.
The displayed/available Terminals and the number of Variants are then listed.
The Filters defined in the compilation dialog box are also displayed. These can be switched on or
off with option buttons.
If the variant comparison is activated and more than one variant is selected, the first column of the
table shows the variant names belonging to the data set.
The table names of the individual attributes selected in the compilation dialog box are shown in the
first header row of the table.
The second header row shows the selected fields with the unit (if present).
This is followed by the compiled data sets.
Fields that match the filter are marked in red.
The last row of the table shows the number of terminals just shown on this page and the total number
available.
Control of the Display in the Result View
The display in the result view can be controlled via the option dialog box. This is opened by clicking
the Options button in the Results section.
October 2021 503

The View Options section is used to define the maximum number of records to be displayed.
The Sort Results section is used to sort the results in ascending or descending order in relation to
a specific column. If the Variant Comparison is activated and several variants are selected, data sets
of the same terminals are kept together. The lowest value is used here for the sorting. The name of
the table and the selected field are displayed below the selection fields. The sorted column will then
be indicated in the table header of the table with either an upward (ascending) or downward
(descending) pointing arrow to indicate the respective direction of sorting.
The Highlight in Graphic View section provides the following highlighting functions:
● Nothing:
No highlighting in the network graphic.
● Displayed:
The network graphic highlights the terminals that are currently displayed in the table.
● All:
The network graphic highlights all terminals that were loaded for the result compilation.
Editing Highlighting Settings
The highlighting settings can be defined in the Options dialog box. This is opened by clicking the
Edit button in the Highlight in Graphic View section.
Pen Width and Min. Pen Width can be entered in the Highlight Options section for highlighting
terminals.
The Alpha option enables the opacity of the highlighting to be defined. Values between 0
(transparent) and 255 (fully opaque) can be set.
504 October 2021

Other Functions of the Result Compilation
The result compilation provides enhanced functions via the pop-up menu. This is opened by clicking
the right mouse button in the table. The functions provided in the pop-up menu are offered according
to the selected table field.
All the node results stored in the database for the selected terminal can be called via the Node
Results menu.
All the branch results stored in the database for the selected terminal can be called via the Branch
Results menu.
The selected terminal can be marked as selected in the graphic in the form of a node and network
element via the Select in Graphics menu.
The New Result File menu enables the result file to be saved under a different name in order to then
switch between several calculations. Switching is carried out in the toolbar via the Select result file
selection field. Default denotes here the currently calculated result file.
The Options function opens the Options dialog box.
Determining the Data Sets to Be Displayed
The result compilation processes all terminals of the network and collects nodes and network
elements. The visualized fields are then used to define the required result tables and thus all data
sets needed for the compilation.
If all data sets are compiled, each individual value is checked for whether they match the filter to
determine if these can be displayed. If the Variant Comparison is activated and several variants are
selected, data sets for each variant can be generated for a terminal. If one of these data sets matches
the filter, all the data sets belonging to the terminal are displayed.
October 2021 505

Multi-User Master Database
21. Multi-User Master Database
The Multi-User Master Database makes it possible for multiple users to work on a network
simultaneously. The Master Database works similar to a source control system and centrally
manages the changes of the different users. Users can still do the actual editing in local databases
assigned to them, and these can be synchronized with the Master Database.
21.1 Concept of the Master Database

The Master Database can be generated from any PSS SINCAL network. This network is simply
converted to a Master Database and individual users (called clients) make changes to a copy of the
network. This allows maximum flexibility in planning tasks, since no limits are placed on the users
still working as with a normal PSS SINCAL network.
Special synchronization functions with conflict management are used to transfer changes made by
the users to the global Master Database. This assures that the data in both the Master Database and
in the local client databases remain consistent.
Client database 1
Client database 2
Master database
Client database n
The basic philosophy behind the PSS SINCAL Master Database is the optimistic administration of
data versions. The advantages of this system are independent editing of the network by the user,
the mobility of the data, and the unlimited use of the local data by PSS SINCAL.
The Master Database acts as a data container that documents any changes in individual data
(repository).
To assure data consistency, variant information cannot be used in the Master Database. The client
database, on the other hand, has all the normal PSS SINCAL functions including variant
management.
Note the following: To work with a Master Database, you need a "proper" RDBMS, since large
amounts of data need to be managed. This means the Master Database is stored either in Microsoft
SQL Server or in ORACLE. You cannot use Access and SQLite.
506 October 2021

21.2 Accessing the Master Database

The PSS SINCAL User Interface accesses the Master Database. The program provides functions
for connecting to the data in the Master Database, synchronizing the data and disconnecting from
the Master Database.
Master database
Synchronizing with the Master

Database (Publishing)
Connect Disconnect
Synchronizing with the Client
Database (Refreshing)
Client database
Creating a Connection
This function transfers a replication of the internally consistent data from the Master Database to the
new client database. This is like a snapshot of the Master Database.
Disconnecting
This method permanently removes an existing connection between a client database and the Master
Database. You cannot reconnect to the Master Database.
Publishing Changes
You need to merge different data (replication), if different people are working on this data
simultaneously. This is done to match the data being worked on at separate locations at the same
time.
Updating Changes
This transfers any changes in data at the Master Database to the client database.
21.3 Conflict Management

Conflict management assures data consistency in the client databases and in the Master Database.
The individual data are synchronized to prevent inconsistent data.
October 2021 507

In conflict management, the "server wins" principle is always true. This means that any changes at
the COM server in the Master Database are given preferential treatment. If there are any conflicts,
the modifications in the client database will always be thrown out. This guarantees consistency in
the Master Database.
21.4 User Administration in the Master Database

PSS SINCAL User Administration determines how the Master Database and the client databases
are accessed.
PSS SINCAL has the following authorization levels:
● Administrator:
Administrators have completely unlimited access to the Master Database. They can also create
new users and have special functions for administering any modifications made by users. Only
administrators can release data modified by one user for other users.
● Power user:
The role of main user basically has the same rights as the administrator, only the user
management function is not provided.
● Normal User:
Normal users have the right to return any modifications to the Master Database. The
administrator can then approve them for access by all the other users.
● Guest:
Guests are limited to read-only access. They can, of course, transfer the data from the Master
Database to a client database, but they cannot return any data.
Connect creates the connection to the Master Database. To connect, the user needs to register with
a name and a password.
For a precise description how user administration works, see the Administration section in the chapter
on Master Database Administration.
21.4.1 Administering Modifications
Transferring modifications from a client database to the Master Database is a multi-stage process.
● Users first need to log on to the Master Database with a name and a password.
● Then they use publish function to transfer changes from the client database to the Master
Database.
● Changes made by users are stored in the Master Database, but other users still cannot access
them.
● To transfer the changes permanently to the Master Database so all the users can access them,
a user with administrator rights first has to use Publish All to transfer the changes permanently
to the Master Database.
● All the client databases can now use the Refresh function to access the user’s changes that
have been approved by the administrator.
508 October 2021

21.5 Functions for the Administrator

Administrators have unlimited access to the Master Database.
File – Multi-User Master Database in the menu contains the following functions for the
administrator:
● Convert to Master Database

● Master Database Administration
● Publishing by the Administrator
● Undo Changes
21.5.1 Convert to Master Database
Click File – Multi-User Master Database – Convert to Master Database to convert an existing
network (without variants) or an empty stored network into a Master Database. An additional
prerequisite is that the network is not based on an Access, SQLite or SQLite Server Express
database. PSS SINCAL displays the following dialog box:
Enter the user information (User name and Password) for the administrator of the Master Database
in the dialog box.
Click OK to close the dialog box, convert the network into a Master Database and create the
administrator. From this time on, the Master Database can be administered (User administration,
etc.) and users with a client database can be connected.
Caution: This Master Database can no longer be converted back to a normal PSS SINCAL
database.
October 2021 509

21.5.2 Master Database Administration
Click File – Multi-User Master Database – Master Database Administration in the menu to open
a view where you can administer the Master Database.
The view for Master Database Administration consists of a toolbar and the administration area.
Toolbar
This toolbar directly switches ON administrative functions.
Display the Start Page for Master Database Administration
Navigate backward
Navigate forward
Update page
Administration Area
This area is divided into a navigation bar, which can be used to switch to the individual functions of
the Master Database, and the area with the data of the active view.
The following views are available:
● Active Publications
510 October 2021

● History of Changes
● Administration
Active Publications
This view lists the current status of the master database as well as all unreleased publications of the
client users.
Administrators can access the following functions:
The search field reduces the amount of the active publications displayed. PSS SINCAL searches for
the filter text in all the fields.
Publish releases all the entries selected by the administrator. Changes by the individual user
become part of the Master Database and are now available to all the clients. This transfers active
publications to the History of Changes.
Check finds changes to the entries selected and displays them later in the Change Log.
Delete removes the entries selected.
After clicking Highlight Options, a dialog box opens in which the settings for highlighting (e.g. line
width and color) of the user changes can be made.
The table is divided into two display areas. The upper section indicates the current state of the master
view and shows whether a preview of a user change in the network view is active. The following
actions are available for this section:
Open preview:
This function switches ON the current Master View displaying the Master Database in its
last state.
October 2021 511

Undo preview:
All the changes made by the administrator as well as the preview of changes made by the
user are thrown out in the Network View.
Admin publish:
The changes in the network are transferred into the Master Database. For a description of
how this works, see the chapter on Publishing by the Administrator.
The table section Active Publications lists client user’s publications that still have not been
approved. They first need to be checked by an administrator and released. Each publication is shown
in one line. The following actions are available to the administrator for the respective publication:
Preview:
Preview applies all the changes of the selected entry and so the administrator can examine
them in Network View. The administrator can use evaluation of the variants to display any
changes made by the user in color.
Check and show changes:

The respective entry is checked and any changes are displayed in the change log.
Highlight changes:
When the preview of the publication is active, the user's changes can be visualized in the
network graphic according to the highlight options.
Refuse:
The administrator refuses the user’s changes and they are not enabled for other users.
Click this function to display a dialog box where you can enter a comment explaining the
reason for refusing the changes.
The comment of the publication is displayed as tooltip at the respective data row.
History of Changes
Click Show History of Changes to display the History of Changes page. This lists any activities
and changes made by the administrator.
512 October 2021

The search field reduces the amount of the history displayed. PSS SINCAL searches for the filter
text in all the fields.
Label assigns a label to the current state of the Master Database. This lets you determine exactly
what state of the Master Database is used in an empty database. A dialog box opens where the
name and a comment for the label can be defined.
Administrators can also take specific actions involving the entry. These are:
● Check and Show Changes:

The respective entry is examined and any changes are displayed in the change log.
● Restore Label:
This restores the state of the Master Database to an empty network. Select the empty network
in the Restore Label dialog box. A prerequisite is that the empty network is not based on an
Access, SQLite or SQLite Server Express database.
● Delete:
Deletes the documentation on changes in the Change Log, but not the changes themselves.
● Undo:
Refused entries become valid once again and are displayed in the section on Active
Publications.
The latest entry of type Publish all can also refused. This means that all the changes in the
entries are thrown out.
Change Log
Click Check and Show Changes to open the Change Log. This function is found in the Active
Publications section on the History of Changes page.
This log documents any changes of an entry. Changes are displayed in fields for individual records.
You can see both the new and old values.
October 2021 513

Administration
The Administration view is divided into two areas, the User Administration and the Connected
Databases.
User Administration
This section is for user administration.
The search field reduces the amount of the user list displayed. PSS SINCAL searches for the filter
text in all the fields.
Click Add to open the dialog box for creating new users where you can enter the login information
(user name and password) as well as the user’s role.
Edit modifies the selected user.
Click Delete to remove the user.
The User Role determine the access rights within the Master Database.
● Administrator:
The role of administrator is to administer the Master Database.
● Power user:
The role of main user basically has the same rights as the administrator, only the user
management function is not provided.
● User:
Users are allowed to create client connections to a Master Database. They can also send back
any changes to the Master Database to be checked and released by the administrator.
● Read only:
Read-only limits the authorization of the client. The client cannot send back changes in the
client network to the Master Database.
514 October 2021

Connected Databases
This lists all the connected client databases. Client databases currently linked to the Master
Database are listed in lines at the bottom of the page. This shows which user created the connection,
when the data were last refreshed or published, or whether the Master Database has been blocked
for this client.
The Reset locks activity can be used to force the administrator to release the Master Database. This
is only done if there were fatal problems when an action was executed in the Master Database and
automatic release was not possible.
21.5.3 Publishing by the Administrator
File – Multi-User Master Database – Publish in the menu is used to transfer any changes in the
network to the Master Database. The following dialog box opens.
Login Credentials displays the current login information (User name and Password).
You can enter a Name and a Comment about the publication in the Comment section.
Click OK to close the dialog box and release any changes in the Master Database for all users.
Caution: Publication by an administrator in the Master Database releases these changes directly
for all users. This means the changes are published without actually being rechecked in the Master
Database Administration.
October 2021 515

21.5.4 Undo Changes
File – Multi-User Master Database – Undo Changes in the menu undoes any changes made by
the administrator and removes the preview of changes by the user from the Network View.
21.6 Functions for the User

Users have the right to make changes in the client databases and send these back to the Master
Database.
File – Multi-User Master Database in the menu offers the following user functions:
● Connect to Master Database

● Change Password
● Publishing by the User
● Check for Updates
● Refresh
● Reload
● Preview from Master Database
● Disconnect from Master Database
21.6.1 Connect to Master Database
This connects an empty network to the Master Database. Click File – Multi-User Master Database
– Connect to Master Database in the menu to display the following dialog box.
This dialog box can be used to select the Master Database to which the connection should be made.
To proceed, you need to enter the client’s login information (User name and Password).
Press OK to confirm the login information. When the verification is successful, the last valid state of
the Master Database is transferred to the client database.
21.6.2 Change Password
After clicking File – Multi-User Master Database – Change Password the following dialog box
appears where the user can change the password after entering the old and the new password.
516 October 2021

21.6.3 Publishing by the User
File – Multi-User Master Database – Publish is used to transfer any changes in the network to the
Master Database. The following dialog box opens.
Login Credentials displays the current login information (User name and Password). Users with
read-only status can change the user and release their changes.
The section at the bottom has a Name and optionally a Comment for the publication.
Click OK to close the dialog box and transfer any changes to the Master Database where they can
be checked and published by the administrator.
21.6.4 Check for Updates
The File – Multi-User Master Database – Check for Updates function is used to check whether
changes have been made to the Master Database since the last Refresh or Reload. The result of the
check is shown to the user by a message box. The user can synchronize his own network if changes
in the master database are present. The Automatically check for updates option can be used to
specify whether this check should be performed each time the client database is opened.
October 2021 517

21.6.5 Refresh
Click File – Multi-User Master Database – Refresh to transfer publications approved by the
administrator to the client database.
21.6.6 Reload
Click File – Multi-User Master Database – Reload to load all the current data in the Master
Database to the client database. This throws out any modifications in the client database.
21.6.7 Preview from Master Database
This function lets the user call up an overview of all the changes in the master database since the
last reload. This means the user can have an overview of the existing conditions before reloading
and synchronizing any changes in the Master Database.
Click File – Multi-User Master Database – Preview from Master Database in the menu to display
a dialog box for entering a user name and password. After successful login, PSS SINCAL displays
a window with status information for the Master Database.
Published tasks from Master Database displays all the published tasks defined since the last
reloading.
Pending and refused tasks from User displays the user’s last publication or eventually any refused
tasks.
518 October 2021

21.6.8 Disconnect from Master Database
File – Multi-User Master Database – Disconnect from Master Database in the menu removes the
connection between a client database and the Master Database.
You can no longer reconnect to the Master Database.
21.7 Configuration and Use of the Master Database

The following description provides an overview of the uses of the master database by means of
typical applications.
User DB
SINCAL
DB
Master DB
User DB
RDBMS LAN SINCAL
DB
User DB
SINCAL
DB
The illustration above shows the operating principle of the master database. The central data storage
is implemented in an RDBMS (SQL server or Oracle). The users process local working copies that
are synchronized with the master database. In order to use the RDBMS, the users must be provided
with the appropriate access authorizations.
Procedure for Master Database Administrator
Configuring the DB Server for Use via PSS SINCAL
Master DB
Administrator User
RDBMS
The users that are to later have access to the master database must be registered on the DB server
(Oracle, SQL Server). The Windows user name and password are ideally used here.
October 2021 519

Specifying Access Data for the DB Server
SINCAL
The access data of the DB server must be entered in the Options dialog box. The configuration must
be carried out according to the selected RDBMS.
Saving an Existing Network on the DB Server
SINCAL network local
sin + DB
open
SINCAL
SINCAL network in RDBMS
save as
RDBMS + sin
An existing PSS SINCAL network is opened (irrespective of the particular database system). The
PSS SINCAL network is saved via File – Save As in the RDBMS specified in the Options dialog box.
Converting to Master Database
Master DB
SINCAL RDBMS + sin

convert
Clicking File – Multi-User Master Database – Convert opens a dialog box in which the administrator
is specified for the database. This can be used to later reopen the master database. The
PSS SINCAL network thus becomes the master database.
520 October 2021

Creating Users in the Master Database
SINCAL
The master database view is opened via File – Multi-User Master Database – Master Database
Administration. All users who can later be connected to the master database and publish can be
defined here in User Administration.
Procedure for Master Database Users
Specifying the Database System for the User Database
SINCAL
As the users presumably work with local databases, the database system must be changed
accordingly in the Options dialog box.
Creating an Empty PSS SINCAL Network
SINCAL network local
SINCAL sin +
save DB
An empty network can be created and saved via File – New.
October 2021 521

Connecting with a Master Database
Master DB
RDBMS + sin
connect
SINCAL
User DB
sin + DB
The sin file of the master database is selected via File – Multi-User Master Database – Connect
to Master Database. It must be possible to access the sin file and the _files directory. The login is
made with the user name which was defined in the master database by the administrator.
Making Changes in the User Database
User DB
SINCAL sin +
edit DB
Changes can be carried out in the PSS SINCAL network as required. These can also be made
"offline", i.e. access to the master database is not required for this.
Publishing Changes
User DB
publish sin + DB
SINCAL
Master DB
publish
RDBMS
Click File – Multi-User Master Database – Publish. It must be possible to access the master
database. The login is made with the user name which was defined in the master database by the
administrator. All changes made in the PSS SINCAL network are transferred to the master database.
522 October 2021

Change Management
Releasing Changes via the Administrator
Master DB
publish
SINCAL RDBMS
for all
The changes published by users in the master database must be released by the administrator.
The administrator opens the sin file of the master database via File – Open and logs in with the
appropriate administrator account. The master database view is then opened via File – Multi-User
Master Database – Master Database Administration. All the changes made by the user are listed
in the Active Publications section. These can be checked by the administrator and published for all
users.
Transferring Changes in the Master Database to the User Database
Master DB
RDBMS
reload
SINCAL
User DB
reload
sin + DB
A local user database is synchronized with the master database via File – Multi-User Master
Database – Reload. This causes all publications released by the administrator to be transferred to
the local database.
October 2021 523

Technical Reference
22. Technical Reference
Technical reference contains descriptions of the important internal PSS SINCAL structures and
functions. This information has been designed primarily for experienced users and is intended to
provide insight into the structure of PSS SINCAL.
The following points are detailed:
● Shortcuts
● File Formats
● Databases
● Directories
● Converting Signals with Formulas
● Help Program VecToPic
● Help Program PSS Tool
● Help Program for Creating PSS SINCAL Databases
● User Menus
● Feeder Documentation
● Optimization Documentation
● Messages from Calculations
22.1 Shortcuts
The following shortcuts simplify and accelerate using PSS SINCAL.
Shortcuts Description
Alt + 1 Working environment Standard
Alt + 2 Working environment Edit
Alt + 3 Working environment Analysis
Alt + Backspace Undo
Alt + Left arrow Browser back
Alt + Right arrow Browser forwards
Alt + Page down Go to next node
Alt + Pos1 Browser Home
Alt + M Execute command
Ctrl + Ins Copy
Ctrl + A Select all
Ctrl + B Open/close Network Browser
Ctrl + C Copy
Ctrl + D Open the pop-up menu with additional data for selected network element
Ctrl + F Find
Ctrl + H Replace (only available in Tabular View)
Ctrl + N New
Ctrl + O Open
524 October 2021

Technical Reference
Ctrl + P Print
Ctrl + R Open Result Browser
Ctrl + S Save
Ctrl + T Open the pop-up menu for topology objects
Ctrl + V Paste
Ctrl + W Switches
Ctrl + X Cut
Ctrl + Z Undo
Ctrl + Shift + P Command pallet
F1 Help
Shift + F1 Start page of Online Help
F2 Standard cursor for selecting objects
F3 Zoom – select area
Shift + F3 Zoom viewer
Ctrl + F3 Last zoom
F4 Hand tool
Alt + F4 Exit PSS SINCAL
Shift + F4 Zoom selected objects
Ctrl + F4 Close the active window
F5 Update active window
F6 Starting last calculation
Ctrl + F6 Next window
Ctrl + Shift + F6 Last window
F7 Network data of the selected network element
Shift + F7 Format the selected network element
F8 Current results of the selected network element
Shift + F8 Current results of the selected network element in Tabular View
F9 Activate/deactivate Tabular View
Ctrl + F9 Selecting in Tabular View
F10 Activate/deactivate Diagram View
F11 Report view
F12 Open/close message box
October 2021 525

Technical Reference
22.2 File Formats

This section details the PSS SINCAL file formats and their functions.
Network
PSS SINCAL networks have a folder pair, containing a file (a SIN file) and a directory.
● {networkname}.sin
● {networkname}_files
The file with extension ".sin" is a PSS SINCAL User Interface help file to simplify network
management. Most network-specific settings of the user interface and the supplementary graphics
objects of the network are stored in this file. When a network is opened with the Open dialog box,
this file is selected.
The directory with the "_files" suffix contains all other network data. This directory contains the
general network database, the diagram file and various other results and log files.
Example Ele1.sin
Example Ele1_files
| database.ini
| database.mdb
| database.dia
|
\---NETO
network.bat
network.ctl
...
The file with the ".ini" ending is a configuration file that configures how PSS SINCAL uses the
database.
The file with the extension ".mdb" is the network database in Microsoft Access format. All data that
describe the network are stored in this file. Detailed information on the construction of network
database is in the Database Description Manual.
The file with the ending ".dia" contains format descriptions and data for diagrams. You do not always
need this file to edit PSS SINCAL networks. PSS SINCAL automatically generates the file as needed.
Catalogue
The following file describes a catalogue:
● {catalog name}.cat
A catalogue contains combinations of network elements and supplementary graphics objects. These
are stored in the catalogue file and can be applied to a network as needed.
For a detailed description, see the chapter on Catalogues.
526 October 2021

Technical Reference
Workspace
Different settings of the user interface are stored in the workspace, organized as a XML file.
● {workingarea}.xml
PSS SINCAL workspaces can be imported and exported. There is a detailed description in the
chapter on Importing and Exporting.
22.3 Databases
PSS SINCAL stores and organizes all files in relational databases, usually in Microsoft Access files.
PSS SINCAL's modular construction lets you use other database systems as long as they have
appropriate ODBC interfaces.
Essentially, PSS SINCAL differentiates among three types of databases:
● Network Database
● Standard Type Database
● Protection Device Database
Network Database
The network database has – as the name indicates – real network: input data for all network elements
(supply sources, consumers, lines, etc.) needed to simulate the real network in the data model.
Calculation results are also stored in the network database.
Standard Type Database
The standard type database contains standardized descriptions of common network elements. This
lets you use characteristic settings for these network elements instead of having to key in numerous
descriptive values.
PSS SINCAL has standard types for the following network elements:
● Synchronous machines
● Power units
● Network feeder
● Asynchronous machines
● Shunt reactor
● Shunt capacitor
● Lines
● Two-winding transformers
● Three-winding transformers
● Overcurrent protection
● Substation
● Bay
● Equipment
● Route
October 2021 527

Technical Reference
A guide for using standard types is in the section on Standard Types of Screen Forms in the Screen
Forms chapter.
Protection Device Database
The protection device database has detailed descriptions of all PSS SINCAL protection devices,
including the types, functions and different settings for protection devices.
For a detailed description of PSS SINCAL's data model, see the Database Description Manual.
22.4 Directories
This section describes the directory structure of the PSS SINCAL Platform. Essentially the data is
stored at three different locations, depending on type:
● Installation directory
● User-specific application data
● User-specific documents
Installation Directory
The installation directory contains all the data of the PSS SINCAL Platform as well as the
corresponding executable program modules and libraries.
● Bin:
This directory contains programs and all required DLLs.
● HlpGer/HlpEng:
This directory contains all PSS SINCAL help files. The HlpGer directory contains the German
online help, and the HlpEng directory contains the English online help. PSS SINCAL provides
all help texts in the HTMLHelp format (*.chm). The start file for help is "sincal.chm".
● Install:
This directory contains auxiliary files that are generated during the installation.
● Leika:
This directory contains the program for calculating line and cable parameters.
● Models:
This directory provides the global models of PSS SINCAL. These models are used both for
dynamic simulation and also in the power flow.
● Neva:
This directory contains the NEVA program for eigenvalue analysis.
● Netomac:
This directory is used for storing control and configuration files for PSS NETOMAC.
● Pdms:
This directory is used for storing control and configuration files for PSS PDMS.
● Sincal:
This directory is used for storing control and configuration files for PSS SINCAL.
528 October 2021

Technical Reference
User-Specific Application Data
The user-specific application data is stored in the directory "%Appdata%\PTI\SINCAL". These

contain control and data files which the user can also modify. The data is created in this directory
when the application is started for the first time. The template for this is the Appdata.zip archive,
which is stored in the installation directory.
● Database:
This directory contains different SQL scripts for database administration. The standard type
and protection devices databases are also found here.
● Reports:
This directory contains user-defined reports prepared from the PSS SINCAL report generator.
● Tools:
This directory is used for storing user-specific tools and programs. The individual user menu
configuration (Tools.ini) is also available here.
User-Specific Documents
The user-specific documents are normally stored in the subdirectory "PSS Files\Sincal" of the "My
Documents" folder provided by the operating system. When PSS SINCAL is started, it checks
whether this folder already exists. If this is not the case, this is created and the default data is copied
to this file from the Userdata.zip archive.
● Batch:
This directory contains automation scripts and examples.
● Cataloge:
This directory contains user-specific catalogs.
● Export:
This directory is reserved for export settings.
● Image:
This directory is the default memory location for background pictures.
● Network:
This directory is reserved for user-specific networks. The available example networks are also
copied to this directory if required by the user.
● Samples:
Prime examples.
● Samples Mod:
Extended prime examples for FACTS, WIND and Manufacturer models.
● Tiles:
This directory is the default memory location for background maps downloaded from the
Internet.
● Workspace:
This directory is reserved for workspace settings.
22.5 Converting Signals with Formulas

PSS SINCAL has a universal formula parser for converting signal values.
Examples of signal conversions:
● Voltage in [pu] to [kV]: Y * Vr / Sqrt(3.)
October 2021 529

Technical Reference
● Current from [MVA] to [kA] : Y / (Sqrt(3.)*Vr)
The syntax used to enter the formula is relatively simple. Basic arithmetic operations are supported
and there are a number of mathematical functions. There are also a number of variables and
predefined constants available.
Available Variables and Predefined Constants
Variable Description
X Current time
Y Current signal value for conversion
Y0 First signal value (at the beginning of the recording)
Vr Rated voltage assigned to the signal
Sr Rated apparent power assigned to the signal
_e Basis of the nat. Logarithm e (2.71828182845904523536)
_pi pi (3.14159265358979323846)
_pi_2 pi / 2 (1.57079632679489661923)
_pi_4 pi / 4 (0.785398163397448309616)
_2_pi 2 * pi (6.283185307179586476926)
_sqrt2 Square root of 2 (1.41421356237309504880)
_sqrt3 Square root of 3 (1.73205080756887729353)
_torad pi / 180 (0.01745329251994329577)
_todeg 180 / pi (57.29577951308232087679)
Available Mathematical Functions
Function Description
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
^ X to the power of y
sin(x) Sine
cos(x) Cosine
tan(x) Tangent
asin(x) Arc sine
acos(x) Arc cosine
atan(x) Arc tangent
sinh(x) Hyperbolic sine
cosh(x) Hyperbolic cosine
tanh(x) Hyperbolic tangent
asinh(x) Hyperbolic arc sine
530 October 2021

Technical Reference
acosh(x) Hyperbolic arc cosine

atanh(x) Hyperbolic arc tangent
log2(x) Logarithm – base 2
log10(x) Logarithm – base 10
log(x) Logarithm – base 10
ln(x) Natural logarithm – base e (2.71828...)
exp(x) e to the power of x
sqrt(x) Square root
sign(x) Sign, i.e. -1 for x < 0; 1 for x > 0
abs(x) Absolute value
Note the following:
● Arguments must be entered as radiants in all the angle functions.

● Capitalization is considered in variables and constants.
● Capitalization is optional in functions, i.e. Sin(x) = sin(x) = SIN(x).
22.6 Help Program VecToPic

The help program VecToPic converts vector graphics into PIC files. These PIC files can be used
both to display the background picture and to import graphic objects into PSS SINCAL.
The PIC file contains vector graphics in a specific PSS SINCAL format. Compared to other vector
graphic formats, these have the advantage of being able to be processed very efficiently and even
have possibilities for editing them in PSS SINCAL.
The program VecToPic can be started by:
● Graphic User Interface

● Command Prompt
October 2021 531

Technical Reference
22.6.1 Starting VecToPic from the Graphic User Interface
VecToPic can be started from the graphic user interface using the Windows Program menu.
Opening the Vector Graphics File
Either use the Open button or drag & drop to open the vector graphics file you want to convert. Drag
& drop simply drags the file from the Windows Explorer into the VecToPic program window.
Preview Window
This window displays the open vector graphics file.
The section of the diagram can be modified interactively. You can zoom in with either the mouse
wheel or the rectangle-selecting tool. Full Picture recreates the full picture preview.
General Setting for Conversion
You can define the attributes for exporting PIC files. If no changes are made to the settings,
PSS SINCAL uses the attributes of the vector graphics file.
Click Options to open the dialog box for Settings for PIC File Export.
532 October 2021

Technical Reference
In the Scale section, you can enter a factor for resizing all the vector graphic objects. All the
coordinates will be multiplied by this factor when they are exported. If you enter 1.0, the size of the
elements remains unchanged.
Coordinates left image corner defines the position of the PIC file. X and Y are for the point of origin
of the diagram. To define of the point of origin, PSS SINCAL uses the smallest coordinate (bottom
left) of all the elements in the vector graphics file. If this value changes, it moves all the elements so
that the smallest coordinate is at the indicated point.
Image size shows the width and the height of the PIC file to be exported. These depend on what
scaling factor has been entered.
File info tells the number of layers and objects.
Starting the Conversion
Click Save to convert the open vector graphics file into a PIC file. This opens a file selection dialog
box where you have to enter the storage location and the name of the PIC file.
22.6.2 Starting VecToPic with a Command Prompt
Vector data can also be converted to PSS SINCAL PIC format by command prompt. In this case,
there is no graphic user interface and the program is controlled exclusively by start parameters.
After the program has started without parameters, PSS SINCAL displays the following information:
C:\> vectopic
Usage: VecToPic /if:InputFile /of:OutputFile [/sc:Scale /ox:OffsetX /oy:OffsetY]
converts vector graphic files into SINCAL-PIC files
/if:InputFile ... input filename

/of:OutputFile ... output filename
optional parameters (if not specified values will be taken from the vector file)
/sc:Scale ... scale facor (e.g. 1.0)

/ox:OffsetX ... offset x to add (e.g. 0.0)
/oy:OffsetY ... offset y to add (e.g. 0.0)
The parameters for "if" and "of" are required. These parameters define input and output files.
All other parameters are optional. They control the conversion procedure.
The scale of data is controlled with the general parameter "sc", which allows graphic data to be
enlarged or reduced. This factor converts the data from the input file into the PSS SINCAL coordinate
system based on [m].
The general parameters "ox" and "oy" let you move the converted data within the PSS SINCAL
coordinate system. The values for the movement are input in [m].
Example of the Conversion of a DXF File
C:\> vectopic /if:corpa.dxf /of:corpa.pic /sc:1000
Status
October 2021 533

Technical Reference
======
input file: corpa.dxf
output file: corpa.pic
objects : 4330
scale : 1:1000
offset(x/y): 0.000000 0.000000
In the above example, the DXF file "corpa.dxf" is changed into the PSS SINCAL PIC file "corpa.pic".
The scale factor is 1:1000, which means that a DXF unit is converted to 1000 mm in the PSS SINCAL
PIC file.
22.6.3 Integrating PIC Files into PSS SINCAL
PSS SINCAL can display PIC files in two different ways:
● As Background Pictures
● As Imported Graphic Objects
Background Pictures
PSS SINCAL displays background pictures to scale beneath the actual networks. You can, for
example, use maps or cadastral maps for PSS SINCAL networks. Simply draw on top of these to
create a network to scale. The background pictures are only used for visualization, the objects cannot
be edited. This lets you display that background pictures with several thousand objects extremely
quickly.
The network-planning tool Background Images integrates background pictures.
Importing Graphic Objects
This function imports vector graphics in PSS SINCAL PIC format into PSS SINCAL networks. Unlike
the background images, these graphic objects can be modified once they are imported.
The Importing Graphic Objects function imports the objects.
22.7 Help Program PSS Tool

The PSS SINCAL Platform help program PSS Tool contains general system information and can be
used for administering the Registry settings and Com-services. It also lets you check communication
with the PSS SINCAL Platform license server.
PSS Tool has a user-friendly interface to let you use different administration operations without
starting up the respective programs.
Use the Windows menu to start the PSS Tool program.
534 October 2021

Technical Reference
System Information
The System information tab is only for information.
Information on the computer name and the machine number are found in the section Computer
Identification. This information is used for licensing the PSS SINCAL Platform.
The General section contains information on the operating system and the computer.
Click Export to export the current system information to a text file.
Administration
The Administration tab is used to edit Registry settings and Com-Services.
Registry edits PSS SINCAL Platform Registry settings for the current user.
October 2021 535

Technical Reference
Clicking the Reset button opens a dialog box in which it is possible to select whether the registry is
reset or deleted. Reset assigns default values to the registry when PSS SINCAL is started again.
Deleting removes all user-specific registry settings in the section
"HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Siemens\<Application name>".
The Load function enables the PSS SINCAL Platform registry settings to be loaded from a REG file.
Save lets you store the PSS SINCAL Platform Registry settings in a file.
Com-Services is used to register or unregister Com-Services. This should be done only if there are
problems with Com-Servers.
Configuration
The Configuration tab can be used to configure the language settings for PSS SINCAL and
PSS NETOMAC.
Settings lets you select the language in which the PSS SINCAL application starts.
The Save Projects in AppData directory option defines that the project data of the PSS SINCAL
Platform applications is stored in the AppData directory and not in the user directory.
The Use local AppData directory option specifies that the application data is always stored locally
on the computer. If this option is deactivated, the storing is carried out in the standard AppData
directory (roaming), which is then synchronized via the network with a server computer depending
on the IT configuration.
The License File section lets you select the license file for the applications of the PSS SINCAL
Platform.
536 October 2021

Technical Reference
License Server
The License Server tab lets you check communication with the license server.
After you enter the Servername, click the Test button to check whether a connection to the license
server is possible. This is displayed in the output window.
State lists the active license server groups in the output window. This list contains detailed operating
information on the active groups. It also lists, which users have checked out licenses.
22.8 Help Program for Creating PSS SINCAL Databases

Use the PSS SINCAL help program SinDBCreate to create PSS SINCAL databases.
SinDBCreate lets you create PSS SINCAL network databases as well as standard and protection-
device databases without the PSS SINCAL user interface. This help program is intended mainly for
developers of external solutions (e.g. GIS connections). It can simply be integrated in script form into
external solutions.
The program must be started in a command prompt. There is no graphic user interface, i.e. start
parameters control the program. Different settings from the PSS SINCAL Registry are also used (e.g.
Oracle database configuration), if these have not been entered as parameters.
When you the start the program without parameters, PSS SINCAL displays the following information:
C:\> SinDBCreate.exe
Usage:
SinDBCreate /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /TYPE:xxx [Options] [IMPORT-DB]
Create a new SINCAL-Database.
SinDBCreate /SAVEAS /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /TYPE:xxx [Options] [TARGET-DB]

Convert an existing SINCAL-Database to an other database system.
SinDBCreate /LIST /DBSYS:xxx /ADMIN:User/Password /SRV:xxx

List all Databases on a server.
October 2021 537

Technical Reference
SinDBCreate /DELETE /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /ADMIN:User/Password /SRV:xxx

Delete a SINCAL-Database on a database server.
SinDBCreate /UPDATE /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /USER:User/Password /SRV:xxx

Update a SINCAL-Database.
/DBSYS:{ACCESS|SQLITE|ORACLE|SQLSERVER|SQLEXPRESS}
Database-System
/FILE:{Database}
MS Access: Path and FileName of the MDB-File
SQL Server Express: Path and Filename of the MDF-Datafile
SQLITE: Path and Filename of the DB-Datafile
ORACLE: User/Password@Instance
SQL Server: Database@Instance
/ADMIN:User/Password Administrator-Login for Database-Servers

/USER:User/Password Login Information for Database-Servers
/SRV:Instance Database Service Name/Server Name
/TYPE:{E|W|G|H} Network-Type (E)lectro|(W)ater|(G)as|(H)eating
--- Importing data from an existing database.
/IMPORTDBSYS:{ACCESS|SQLITE|ORACLE|SQLSERVER|SQLEXPRESS}
/IMPORTFILE:{Database}
/IMPORTADMIN:User/Password
/IMPORTUSER:User/Password
/IMPORTSRV:Instance
--- Convert existing database to an other database system.
/TARGETDBSYS:{ACCESS|SQLITE|ORACLE|SQLSERVER|SQLEXPRESS}
/TARGETFILE:{Database}
/TARGETADMIN:User/Password
/TARGETUSER:User/Password
/TARGETPWD:Password
/TARGETSRV:Instance
--- Options
[/DB:{NET|STD|PROT}] Database-Type (Network-Database is default]
[/DATA] Fills STD-DB and Prot-DB with default data
[/LANG:{ENG|GER}] Language for database (default is ENG)
[/SIN:Filename] Path and filename of the SIN-file.
The SinDBCreate help program has the following functions:
● Create a PSS SINCAL Database

● Convert PSS SINCAL Database
● List PSS SINCAL Databases
● Delete a PSS SINCAL Database
● Update a PSS SINCAL Database
Create a PSS SINCAL Database
The main function of SinDBCreate is to create PSS SINCAL databases. All the settings needed for
this must be indicated as parameters.
SinDBCreate /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /TYPE:xxx [Options] [IMPORT-DB]
Create a new SINCAL-Database.
538 October 2021

Technical Reference
Required Parameters
Database-System
/FILE:{Database}

/TYPE:{E|W|G|H} Network-Type (E)lectro|(W)ater|(G)as|(H)eating
Optional Parameters
--- Importing data from an existing database.

/IMPORTDBSYS:{ACCESS|SQLITE|ORACLE|SQLSERVER|SQLEXPRESS}
/IMPORTFILE:{Database}
/IMPORTADMIN:User/Password
/IMPORTUSER:User/Password
/IMPORTSRV:Instance
--- Options
The "DBSYS" parameter determines which database system is used. You can select between
ACCESS (Microsoft Access), SQLITE, ORACLE, SQLSERVER (SQL Server) and SQLEXPRESS
(SQL Server Express).
The "FILE" parameter designates the PSS SINCAL database name. Depending on which database
system is used, this parameter must be entered in different ways. In Microsoft Access, SQLite and
SQL Server Express, you need the complete path and file name. In Oracle, you need the user name,
password and server name in the format "User/Password/@Server". When you use the SQL Server,
you need the database name and server name in the format "DBName@Server".
"ADMIN" is required for Oracle and SQL Server database systems. This is needed for the main user
managing the PSS SINCAL networks. This parameter is defined in the format "User/Password". If
this parameter has not been entered, the settings are loaded from the PSS SINCAL registry.
"USER" is required when the SQL Server is used as a database system. This provides information
on who is using the SQL Server and is defined in the format "User/Password".
"SRV" is used to make an explicit entry for the database server. If this parameter has not been
entered, the server name is loaded from the PSS SINCAL registry.
The "TYPE" parameter indicates the network type. You can select E (electricity), W (water), G (gas)
and H (heating/cooling) networks.
All other parameters are optional and control the generation procedure.
October 2021 539

Technical Reference
The optional parameter with the prefix "IMPORT" makes it possible to specify a database to be
imported in the new database. The parameters must be used in exactly the same way as the required
parameters.
To define the type of database to be created, use the parameter for "DB". The default is network
database (NET). Additional values for these parameters are STD for standard type database and
PROT for protection device database.
The "DATA" parameter fills the standard database or protection-device database with standard
types or standard devices.
"LANG" lets you select the language (English, German) of the network database.
"SIN" lets you enter the PSS SINCAL network file. This parameter is only for creating network
databases.
Example of Creating a Network Database
C:\> SinDBCreate.exe /DBSYS:ACCESS /FILE:C:\Temp\dbnet.mdb /TYPE:E
The above example creates the Access database "dbnet.mdb" for an electrical network in the
"C:\Temp" directory in English.
Example of Creating a Standard Database
C:\> SinDBCreate.exe /DBSYS:ORACLE /FILE:OraSTDFL/pwd123@ORA10 /TYPE:W /ADMIN:SINCAL/SINCAL /DB:STD

/DATA
In the above example, an Oracle standard database has been created for pipe networks in English.
This database has "OraSTDFL" for the Oracle user and the password "pwd123". Additionally the
database is filled with standard types.
Example of Creating a Protection Devices Database
C:\> SinDBCreate.exe /DBSYS:ACCESS FILE:C:\Temp\stdprot.mdb /TYPE:E /DB:PROT
The above example creates an Access protection device database for electrical networks in English.
The "stdprot.mdb" database is created in the directory "C:\Temp". An empty database is created.
Convert PSS SINCAL Database
Besides creating the PSS SINCAL database, it is possible to convert an existing PSS SINCAL
database to another database system with the SinDBCreate auxiliary program. This function is
activated with the "SAVEAS" parameter.
SinDBCreate /SAVEAS /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /TYPE:xxx [Options] [TARGET-DB]
Convert an existing SINCAL-Database to an other database system.
Note: After a successful conversion to the new database system, the configuration file for the
network databases (_files\database.ini) is updated and the existing database is deleted (only file
based database systems such as Microsoft Access and SQLite).
540 October 2021

Technical Reference
Required Parameters
Database-System
/FILE:{Database}

Optionale Parameter
--- Convert existing database to an other database system.

/TARGETDBSYS:{ACCESS|SQLITE|ORACLE|SQLSERVER|SQLEXPRESS}
/TARGETFILE:{Database}
/TARGETADMIN:User/Password
/TARGETUSER:User/Password
/TARGETPWD:Password
/TARGETSRV:Instance
--- Options
system is used, this parameter must be entered in different ways. In Microsoft Access, SQLite and
SQL Server Express, you need the complete path and file name. In Oracle, you need the user name,
The parameter with the prefix "TARGET" makes it possible to specify the parameters for the target
database.
October 2021 541

Technical Reference
List PSS SINCAL Databases
In addition to creating PSS SINCAL databases, the SinDBCreate help program can be used to list
all the databases at a database server. Switch ON this function with the "LIST" parameter.
SinDBCreate /LIST /DBSYS:xxx /ADMIN:User/Password /SRV:xxx
List all Databases on a server.
Required Parameters
/DBSYS:{ORACLE|SQLSERVER}
Database-System

ORACLE and SQLEXPRESS (SQL Server).
Example
C:\> SinDBCreate /LIST /DBSYS:ORACLE /ADMIN:SINCAL/SINCAL /SRV:ORA10
The above example lists all available PSS SINCAL databases. First of all a connection to the
ORACLE instance with the name "ORA10" and the user "SINCAL" is established. If the connection
is successfully, the available databases are displayed line by line.
Delete a PSS SINCAL Database
In addition to creating PSS SINCAL databases, the SinDBCreate help program can be used to delete
a PSS SINCAL database at a database server. Switch this function ON with the "DELETE"
parameter.
SinDBCreate /DELETE /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /ADMIN:User/Password /SRV:xxx
Delete a SINCAL-Database on a database server.
Required Parameters
/DBSYS:{ORACLE|SQLSERVER}
Database-System
/FILE:{Database}
ORACLE: User
SQL Server: Database

ORACLE and SQLSERVER (SQL Server).
542 October 2021

Technical Reference
system is used, this parameter must be entered in different ways. When using Oracle, enter the user
name. When using the SQL Server, enter the database name.
Example
C:\> SinDBCreate /DELETE /DBSYS:ORACLE /FILE:SINCAL_TEST /ADMIN:SINCAL/SINCAL /SRV:ORA10
The above example deletes the PSS SINCAL "SINCAL_TEST" database. First of all a connection to
the ORACLE instance with the name "ORA10" and the user "SINCAL" is established. Deleting the
PSS SINCAL database cannot be undone.
Update a PSS SINCAL Database
SinDBCreate lets you update existing PSS SINCAL databases to the current database version. The
"UPDATE" parameter switches this function ON.
SinDBCreate /UPDATE /DBSYS:xxx /FILE:xxx /USER:User/Password /SRV:xxx
Updates the specified SINCAL-Database to the current version.
Required Parameters
Database-System
/FILE:{Database}

system is used, this parameter must be entered in different ways. In Microsoft Access and SQL
Server Express, you need the complete path and file name. In Oracle, you need the user name,
October 2021 543

Technical Reference
Example for Updating a PSS SINCAL Database
C:\> SinDBCreate.exe /UPDATE /DBSYS:ACCESS /FILE:C:\Temp\dbnet.mdb
The above example updates the PSS SINCAL "dbnet.mdb" database in the "C:\Temp" directory to
the current version.
22.9 User Menus

PSS SINCAL lets you include external programs in the PSS SINCAL user interface. Elements
selected in the Graphics Editor can be sent to an external program. User-specific menu points are
found in the Extras menu.
The user menu can be configured directly in the user interface with the Options dialog box or
manually by using the control file "Tools.ini".
This control file is found in the user-specific directory "SINCAL Projects\Tools". PSS SINCAL
installation automatically generates the "Tools.ini" file. This file can be edited. You can add additional
programs if you wish.
Control File Tools.ini
*
* Configuration file to add User-Tools to SINCAL Extras Menu
*
* Available environment variables:
* SIN_NETTYPE ... 1 = Electro, 2 = Water, 3 = Gas, 4 = Heating/Cooling
* SIN_FILE ... Active Network (Drive:\Path\Name.sin")
* SIN_DB ... Active Database
* SIN_DBPWD ... Database Password (Access: -, Oracle: "Password")
* SIN_DBSTD ... Local Standard Database
* SIN_DBSTDGLO ... Global Standard Database
* SIN_DBPROT ... Local Protection Database
* SIN_DBPROTGLO ... Global Protection Database
* SIN_SELECTION ... Filename for SelFile (IDs of selected elements are saved to this file)
* SIN_TOOLS ... Tools Directory
[Main]
SelFile=%TEMP%\SincalSel.txt
MenuElectro=SampleMenuEl
MenuWater=SampleMenuWater
MenuGas=SampleMenuGas
MenuHeating=SampleMenuHeating
[SampleMenuEl]
* Name,fWait,Command,Path,Arguments
ZView,0,MSACCESS.EXE,.,"$$$IN_TOOLS%\ZView.mdb"
___
Notepad,0,Notepad.exe,.,"$$$IN_SELECTION%"
Shell,0,cmd.exe,.,/k
[SampleMenuFlow]
* Name,fWait,Command,Path,Arguments
Notepad,0,Notepad.exe,.,"$$$IN_SELECTION%"
544 October 2021

Technical Reference
In the Main section, the SelFile key is used to enter the file for element selection. The path can
contain environment variables. You can define your own user menu for individual network types,
using the keys MenuElectro, MenuWater, MenuGas and MenuHeating.
Individual elements of the user menu are defined in a section. The example above shows the
SampleMenuEl section for electrical networks and the SampleMenuFlow section for all pipe
networks.
The syntax for the individual lines is as follows:
● Menu point title:

This is the title displayed in the user menu.
● Wait for end of program:
This parameter controls whether PSS SINCAL waits to terminate a program (= 1) or not (= 0).
● Executable program:
This is the program to be started.
● Path:
This is the path for the start directory of the program.
● Control parameters for the program:
Control parameters can assign any number of arguments to the program being started. Note in
particular PSS SINCAL’s predefined environment variables (see the commentary in the
example).
You can also create Rules in the menu with three underlines ("___").
22.10 PSS SINCAL PIC File

The PSS SINCAL PIC file was originally conceived for SINCAL V3.5x. Because of its simple structure
(structured ASCII file), PSS SINCAL 18.0 uses it for system-independent storage of vector graphics.
22.10.1 Structure of the PSS SINCAL PIC File
Example of a PSS SINCAL PIC File
CADBOX V_2.0
LAYER.
1 1 "0"
2 1 "water" DEFAULT -1.0 4 MINUS45 4 FILLED
3 1 "building" DEFAULT -1.0 -1 PLUS45 -1 FILLED
4 1 "roads+ways" DEFAULT -1.0 -1 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
5 1 "forest" DEFAULT -1.0 2 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
6 1 "bridges"
7 1 "UW-network-separation"
8 1 "network-plan"
9 1 "plandocument" SOLID -1.0 -1 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
......
PLIN..
2 0
SOLID 0 6
0 0
97983.220 31618.410 0
97962.770 31536.050 0
97936.020 31438.770 0
97912.900 31360.130 0
......
October 2021 545

Technical Reference
PLIN..
8 0
DASHED 0 7
0 0
8755.970 31465.000 0
11735.970 31465.000 0
11735.970 28615.000 0
8755.970 28615.000 0
......
VTXT..
8 0
0.00 4 1 0 0 font.cmd 30339.265 52269.784
0.000000 592.666667 0
592.666667 0.000000 0
"2000 – 2002"
......
VTXT..
9 0
0.00 7 1 0 0 font.cmd 13.167 55027.558
0.000000 508.000000 0
508.000000 0.000000 0
"© \H0.75x; All rights reserved."
......
HEADER
The header is the first line in a PIC file. It specifies the version of the file.
CADBOX V_2.0
LAYER
This section contains information on the available layers and must directly follow the HEADER!
LAYER.
1 1 "0"
3 1 "building" DEFAULT -1.0 -1 PLUS45 -1 FILLED 0.5 1.0
4 1 "roads+ways" DEFAULT -1.0 -1 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
5 1 "forest" DEFAULT -1.0 2 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
6 1 "bridges"
7 1 "UW-network-separation"
8 1 "network-plan"
9 1 "plandocument" PS_SOLID -1.0 -1 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
......
1st to nth Line – Layer Information
Each line defines one layer.

1st Attribute – LayerNummer:

0-n → number has to be unique
2nd Attribute – Visible:

0|1 → 0 = invisible layer, 1 = visible layer
546 October 2021

Technical Reference
3rd Attribute – LayerName:

"String"
4th Attribute – Penstyle:

[DEFAULT SOLID DASHED DOTTED DASHED_DOTTED DASHED_DOTTED_DOTTED]
5th Attribute – PenWidth:

[-1.0|0.0-n] → -1 = value of the object, otherwise new line width
6th Attribute – PenColor:

[-1|0-n] → -1 = line color of the object, otherwise new line color
7th Attribute – FillStyle:

[DEFAULT HOLLOW FILLED VERTICAL HORIZONTAL PLUS45 MINUS45 CROSS
DIAGCROSS]
8th Attribute – FillColor:

[-1|0-n] → -1 = color filling object, otherwise new color
9th Attribute – Filled:

[DEFAULT FILLED]
10th Attribute – Minimum zoom levels for visibility:

[0.0…10.0] → Visibility of the objects in this graphic layer over the zoom level indicated. If this
attribute is 0.0, it will not be considered.
11th Attribute – Maximum zoom levels for visibility:

[0.0…10.0] → Visibility of the objects in this graphic layer up to the zoom level indicated. If this
attribute is 0.0, it will not be considered.
Attributes 1-3 (layer number, visible, layer name) are required; the other attributes are optional.
These attributes are assigned to all graphic elements assigned to this layer. This allows you to
overwrite individual attributes of the graphic elements globally.
Examples
Color all objects of the “water” layer blue, set the pattern to MINUS45 and fill the pattern:
Assign the fill pattern PLUS45 to all objects of the “building” layer and fill the objects:
3 1 "building" DEFAULT -1.0 -1 PLUS45 -1 FILLED
Set all objects of the “plandocument” layer PenStyle to SOLID:

9 1 "plandocument" PS_SOLID -1.0 -1 DEFAULT -1 DEFAULT
COLOR
Use this section to define any color table you want for the PIC file.
October 2021 547

Technical Reference
This section is optional; i.e. it is not normally contained in the PIC file. Colors are assigned from a
fixed color table.
If you want to define colors manually, you need to add this section right after the LAYER section in
the PIC file!
COLOR.
0 255 255 255
1 255 0 0
2 0 255 0
3 255 255 0
4 0 0 255
5 255 0 255
6 0 255 255
7 0 0 0
......
1st to nth Line – Color Table
Each line defines one entry in the color table.

0 255 255 255
1st Integer:
color number (also enter for the following objects)
2nd Integer:
amount of red in the color (0-255)
3rd Integer:
amount of green in the color (0-255)
4th Integer:
amount of blue in the color (0-255)
VTXT – Graphic Text
This element describes text.

VTXT..
1 0 112
0.00 7 0 0 0 font.cmd 5342.40 5236.25 0
0.00 500.00 0
500.00 0.00 0
"Txt Text"
"xx"
......
1st Line – Layer Information
1 0 112
1st Integer:
number of the graphics layer (see information on the layer in the header)
548 October 2021

Technical Reference
2nd Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Char:
short name for variant (only used if the graphic element has been included in a variant! In the
above example "1.1.2")
2nd Line – Screen Attributes
0.00 7 0 0 0 font.cmd 5342.40 5236.25 0
1st Double:
text spacing (not used, always 0)
2nd Integer:
text color (0-8)
3rd Integer:
horizontal alignment (0 = left, 1 = center, 2 = right)
4th Integer:
vertical alignment (not used, always 0)
5th Integer:
??
6th Char:
name of selected vector font (historically related, not considered)
7th Double:
x position in area [m]
8th Double:
y position in the area [m]
9th Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Line – Text Vector Height

0.00 500.00 0
1st Double:
vector – x content [m]
2nd Double:
vector – y content [m]
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
The actual text height is calculated from the vectors as follows:

double vtext_height( cadObject *o )
October 2021 549

Technical Reference
{
double height = (SQARE( o->typ.vtxt.ch.x ) + SQARE( o->typ.vtxt.ch.y ));
height = sqrt( ABS(height) );
return height;
}
4th Line – Text Vector Width
500.00 0.00 0
1st Double:
2nd Double:
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
5th to nth Line – Text Lines
"Txt Text"
"xx"
These lines contain the text to be actually displayed.
Comments
The text position is the bottom of the first text line and not the upper left fixing point of the rectangle
around it.
The text vector – height and text vector – width also precisely determine the rotation and slant of
the text.
PLIN – Polyline
This element describes simple or unbroken lines.

PLIN..
1 0
SOLID 0.00 7
0 1
11545.84 4768.98 0
12931.55 5687.41 0
......
1 0 112
1st Integer:
550 October 2021

Technical Reference
2nd Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Char:
short name for variant (only if the graphic element has been included in a variant)
SOLID 0.00 7
1st Char:
line type ("SOLID", "DASHED", "DOTTED", "DASHED_DOTTED" or "SMALLDOT")
2nd Double:
line width [m]
3rd Integer:
line color (0-8)
3rd Line – Visibility (Dummy)
0 1
1st Integer:
dummy (not used)
2nd Integer:
element visibility (de facto always "1")
4th to nth Line – Definition Points
11545.84 4768.98 0
12931.55 5687.41 0
1st Double:
x position [m]
2nd Double:
y position [m]
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
POL – Polygon
This element describes polygons.

POL...
1 0
HOLLOW 2 1 3
6
11739.20 5671.30 0
14655.62 7685.40 0
October 2021 551

Technical Reference
11739.20 5816.31 0
12158.13 7330.92 0
13092.67 6831.42 0
14236.69 7685.40 0
14655.62 6928.10 0
12802.64 5671.30 0
......

1 0
1st Integer:
2nd Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Char:
HOLLOW 2 1 3
1st Char:
fill pattern ("HOLLOW", "VERTICAL", "HORIZONTAL", "PLUS45", "MINUS45", "CROSSED",
"CROSSED45" and "FILLED")
2nd Double:
line width [m]
3rd Integer:
line color
4th Integer:
background color
3rd Line – Number of Points
1st Integer:
number of polygon points (can be ignored, since PSS SINCAL always reads up to the end
signature!)
4th Line and 5th Line – Cover, 6th to nth Line – Definition Points
11739.20 5671.30 0
14655.62 7685.40 0
11739.20 5816.31 0
12158.13 7330.92 0
13092.67 6831.42 0
552 October 2021

Technical Reference
1st Double:
x position [m]
2nd Double:
y position [m]
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
Caution: The 4th and 5th lines include the bounding box of the polygon. The actual polygon points
do not appear before the 6th line!
KRE – Circle or Ellipse
This element describes circles and ellipses.

KRE...
1 0
HOLLOW 2 1 3
0
12319.26 4849.54 0
514.10 514.10
......

1 0
1st Integer:
2nd Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Char:
HOLLOW 2 1 3
1st Char:
"CROSSED45", "FILLED", "BRICK", "LIGHT_GREY" and "SHADOW")
2nd Double:
line width
3rd Integer:
line color
October 2021 553

Technical Reference
4th Integer:
background color
3rd Line – Dummy
1st Integer:
dummy (not used)
4th Line – Center of the Circle/of the Ellipse
12319.26 4849.54 0
1st Double:
x position [m]
2nd Double:
y position [m]
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
5th Line – Radius

514.10 514.10
1st Double:
x radius [m]
2nd Double:
y radius [m]
If both radii have the same values, it is a circle.
RHOMB – Rectangle or Diamond
This element describes rectangles and diamonds.

RHOMB.
1 0
HOLLOW 2 1 3
0
14510.60 5139.57 0
15896.31 5139.57 0
15896.31 5993.55 0
14510.60 5993.55 0
......
1 0
554 October 2021

Technical Reference
1st Integer:
2nd Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Char:
HOLLOW 2 1 3
1st Char:
2nd Double:
line width
3rd Integer:
line color
4th Integer:
background color
3rd Line – Dummy

0
1st Integer:
dummy (not used)
4th to 7th Line – Definition Points
14510.60 5139.57 0
15896.31 5139.57 0
15896.31 5993.55 0
14510.60 5993.55 0
1st Double:
x position [m]
2nd Double:
y position [m]
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
October 2021 555

Technical Reference
PIE – Arc of a Circle or Circle Segment
This element describes arcs and segments of circles.

PIE...
1 0
HOLLOW 2 1 3
0
3120.810 1594.348 0
3.000 3.000
270 180
......
1 0
1st Integer:
2nd Integer:
dummy (not used)
3rd Char:

HOLLOW 2 1 3
1st Char:
2nd Double:
line width
3rd Integer:
line color
4th Integer:
background color
3rd Line – Object Selection
1st Integer:
0 = arc of a circle or 1 = circle segment
4th Line – Center of the Circle/Ellipse

3120.810 1594.348 0
556 October 2021

Technical Reference
1st Double:
x position [m]
2nd Double:
y position [m]
3rd Integer:
dummy (not used)
5th Line – Radius
3.000 3.000
1st Double:
x radius [m]
2nd Double:
y radius [m]
If both radii have the same values, it is a circle.
6th Line – Angle
270 180
1st Double:
angle at start [°]
2nd Double:
angle at end [°]
GRP_START/GRP_END – Groups
This element defines a group for those elements.

GRP_START
......
n-elements…
GRP_END..
......
These elements contain no other information.
GRP_START is the beginning of a group. GRP_END is the end of the group. All elements (e.g.
PLIN.., VTXT.., KRE..., etc.) between GRP_START and GRP_END are grouped.
October 2021 557

Technical Reference
Comments
Groups are only available if the PIC file has been imported to PSS SINCAL 18.0 as a graphic
element.
22.10.2 Help Program VecToPic
The help program VecToPic converts vector graphics into PIC files. These PIC files can be used
both to display the background picture and to import graphic objects into PSS SINCAL.
The PIC file contains vector graphics in a specific PSS SINCAL format. Compared to other vector
graphic formats, these have the advantage of being able to be processed very efficiently and even
have possibilities for editing them in PSS SINCAL.
The program VecToPic can be started by:
● Graphic User Interface

● Command Prompt
Starting VecToPic from the Graphic User Interface
VecToPic can be started from the graphic user interface using the Windows Program menu.
Opening the Vector Graphics File
Either use the Open button or drag & drop to open the vector graphics file you want to convert. Drag
& drop simply drags the file from the Windows Explorer into the VecToPic program window.
Preview Window
This window displays the open vector graphics file.
The section of the diagram can be modified interactively. You can zoom in with either the mouse
wheel or the rectangle selecting tool. Full Picture recreates the full picture preview.
558 October 2021

Technical Reference
General Setting for Conversion
You can define the attributes for exporting PIC files. If no changes are made to the settings,
PSS SINCAL uses the attributes of the vector graphics file.
Click Options to open the dialog box for Settings for PIC File Export.
In the Scale section, you can enter a factor for resizing all the vector graphic elements. All the
coordinates will be multiplied by this factor when they are exported. If you enter 1.0, the size of the
elements remains unchanged.
Coordinates left image corner defines the position of the PIC file. X and Y are for the point of origin
of the diagram. To define of the point of origin, PSS SINCAL uses the smallest coordinate (bottom
left) of all the elements in the vector graphics file. If this value changes, it moves all the elements so
that the smallest coordinate is at the indicated point.
Image size shows the width and the height of the PIC file to be exported. These depend on what
scaling factor has been entered.
File info tells the number of layers and objects.
Starting the Conversion
Click Save to convert the open vector graphics file into a PIC file. This opens a file selection dialog
box where you have to enter the storage location and the name of the PIC file.
Starting VecToPic with a Command Prompt
Vector data can also be converted to PSS SINCAL PIC format by command prompt. In this case,
there is no graphic user interface and the program is controlled exclusively by start parameters.
After the program has started without parameters, PSS SINCAL displays the following information:
>vectopic
Usage: VecToPic /if:InputFile /of:OutputFile [/sc:Scale /ox:OffsetX /oy:OffsetY]
converts vector graphic files into SINCAL-PIC files
/if:InputFile ... input filename
October 2021 559

Technical Reference
/of:OutputFile ... output filename
optional parameters (if not specified values will be taken from the vector file)
/sc:Scale ... scale factor (e.g. 1.0)

/ox:OffsetX ... offset x to add (e.g. 0.0)
/oy:OffsetY ... offset y to add (e.g. 0.0)
The parameters for "if" and "of" are required. These parameters define input and output files.
All other parameters are optional. They control the conversion procedure.
The scale of data is controlled with the general parameter "sc", which allows graphic data to be
enlarged or reduced. This factor converts the data from the input file into the PSS SINCAL coordinate
system based on [m].
The general parameters "ox" and "oy" let you move the converted data within the PSS SINCAL
coordinate system. The values for the movement are input in [m].
Example of the Conversion of a DXF File
NT>vectopic /if:corpa.dxf /of:corpa.pic /sc:1000
Status
======
input file: corpa.dxf
output file: corpa.pic
objects : 4330
scale : 1:1000
offset(x/y): 0.000000 0.000000
In the above example, the DXF file "corpa.dxf" is changed into the PSS SINCAL PIC file "corpa.pic".
The scale factor is 1:1000, which means that a DXF unit is converted to 1000 mm in the PSS SINCAL
PIC file.
Integrating PIC Files into PSS SINCAL
PSS SINCAL can display PIC files in two different ways:
● As background pictures
● As imported graphic objects
Background Pictures
PSS SINCAL displays background pictures to scale beneath the actual networks. You can, for
example, use maps or cadastral maps for PSS SINCAL networks. Simply draw on top of these to
create a network to scale. The background pictures are only used for visualization, the objects cannot
be edited. This lets you display that background pictures with several thousand objects extremely
quickly.
The Importing Graphics function integrates background pictures.
560 October 2021

Technical Reference
Importing Graphic Objects
This function imports vector graphics in PSS SINCAL PIC format into PSS SINCAL networks. Unlike
the Importing Graphics function, these graphic objects can be modified once they are imported.
The Importing Graphic Objects function imports the objects.
22.11 PSS SINCAL Symbol Files

PSS SINCAL lets you create user-defined symbols for network elements in electrical and pipe
networks. These symbols are defined with simple XML files.
22.11.1 General Remarks
PSS SINCAL symbols are in a system of coordinates from 100/100 to -100/-100.
Symbol files have a specific design as can be seen in the examples below. In addition to language
elements to define symbols, PSS SINCAL also has predefined sections, which have to be used and
need to be entered in a specific sequence.
The following illustration shows examples of symbols.
100 100
80 80
60 60
40 40
20 20
-100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100
-20 -20
-40 -40
-60 -60
-80 -80
-100 -100
PSS SINCAL has element symbols as well as add symbols. Element symbols can be created for all
node and branch elements. Add symbols represent all the attachments at nodes or terminals.
22.11.2 Storage Locations for User-Defined Symbol Files
PSS SINCAL lets you keep user-defined symbol files in different storage locations. This makes user-
defined symbol files much easier to use and at the same assures that there will not be any problems
when pass on networks with user-defined symbols to third parties.
PSS SINCAL has three different levels for loading user-defined symbol files.
● Level 1, Highest Priority: Network directory (xxx_files\Symbols)

If this directory already contains the user-defined symbol file, PSS SINCAL loads it.
October 2021 561

Technical Reference
● Level 2, Medium Priority: User directory (Sincal Projects\Symbols)

This is the previous storage location for the user-defined symbol file. If no proper file was found
in the network, PSS SINCAL loads it from this storage location.
● Level 3, Lowest Priority: Installation directory (Installdir\Symbols)
If no user-defined symbols have been loaded yet, PSS SINCAL loads Default Symbols from the
PSS SINCAL installation directory.
22.11.3 Example for the Symbol File

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<Shapes>
<Library>

<UserSinglePort>
<Symbol Name="User-Symbol" Code="999">
<Terminal No="1" TerminalX="0" TerminalY="-100">
Drawing command
</Terminal>
</Symbol>
</UserSinglePort>

<UserTwoPort>
Drawing command
</Terminal>
<Terminal No="2" TerminalX="0" TerminalY="100">
Drawing command
</Terminal>
</Symbol>
</UserTwoPort>

<UserThreePort>
Drawing command
</Terminal>
<Terminal No="2" TerminalX="0" TerminalY="95">
Drawing command
</Terminal>
<Terminal No="3" TerminalX="120" TerminalY="0" ConnectX="60" ConnectY="0">
Drawing command
</Terminal>
</Symbol>
</UserThreePort>
</Library>

<AddSymbols>
<Symbol ID="1" Name="User Fault" X1="-90" Y1="0" X2="90" Y2="0">
<Common>
Drawing command
</Common>
<Open>
Drawing command
</Open>
<Close>
Drawing command
</Close>
</Symbol>
</AddSymbols>

<AddSymbolBreaker>
<Symbol ID="999" Name="User Breaker" X1="-10" Y1="0" X2="10" Y2="0">
<Common>
562 October 2021

Technical Reference
Drawing command
</Common>
<Open>
Drawing command
</Open>
<Close>
Drawing command
</Close>
</Symbol>
</AddSymbolBreaker>
</Shapes>
22.11.4 Symbols for Network Elements
To define a symbol file for PSS SINCAL, predefined language elements and a specific order for them
are required.
Pre-Defined Sections for Element Symbols
<Library>

<UserSinglePort>
Symbol definitions
</UserSinglePort>

<UserTwoPort>
Symbol definitions
</UserTwoPort>

<UserThreePort>
Symbol definitions
</UserThreePort>
</Library>
A library section is started with the <Library> tag. This contains the predefined XML sections
<UserSinglePort> for node elements, <UserTwoPort> for branch elements (with 2 terminals) and
<UserThreePort> for branch elements (with 3 terminals, only for electrical networks).
Symbol Definition for Network Elements
To define the actual symbol, you need the following section:

<Symbol Name="Cross X" Code="1">
<Line X1="-100" Y1="-100" X2="100" Y2="100"/>
<Line X1="-100" Y1="100" X2="100" Y2="-100"/>
</Terminal>
</Symbol>
Attribute Data type Description

ID String ID
Name String Name
Code Long Integer Code mask for symbol overlay
Left Long Integer X position of the top left corner of the symbol rectangle
Right Long Integer X position of the bottom right corner of the symbol rectangle
Top Long Integer Y position of the top left corner of the symbol rectangle
October 2021 563

Technical Reference
Bottom Long Integer Y position of the bottom right corner of the symbol rectangle
RefX Long Integer X position of the reference point
RefY Long Integer Y position of the reference point
TrackingX Long Integer X position of the tracking point
TrackingY Long Integer Y position of the tracking point
PenWidth Long Integer Line width
PenStyle Selection List 0, "SOLID", "-----": Continuous line
1, "DASH", "- – -": Dashed line
2, "DOT", ". . .": Dotted line
3, "DASHDOT", "- .": Dash-dot line
4, "DASHDOTDOT", "- . .": Dash-dot-dot line
FillColor Selection List (separated by ",") "FORE": Foreground color
"BACK": Background color
"BASE": Basic color
"NOPEN": No line
"NOBACK": Transparent
NoPen Boolean No line
HitTest Boolean Check mouse hits
Rotate Boolean Rotate symbol
The section consists of an ID and the required attributes. Within this section, the number of the
terminal sections is defined which contain the individual drawing instructions.
Terminal Section
Depending on the element, the symbol consists of up to 3 terminal sections which divide the
individual symbols between the particular terminals of the network elements.
<Ellipse Left="-100" Right="100" Top="100" Bottom="-100" FillColor="BACK"/>
<Text X="0" Y="0" Size="45" TextRotate="0" Text="M" Left="0" Right="0" Top="0" Bottom="0"/>
</Terminal>

No Integer Terminal number
TerminalX Long Integer X position of the terminal connection point
TerminalY Long Integer Y position of the terminal connection point
ConnectX Long Integer X position of the terminal point
ConnectY Long Integer Y position of the terminal point
Predefined Sections for Additional Element Symbols
<AddSymbols>
<Symbol ID="1" Name="User Fault" X1="-90" Y1="0" X2="90" Y2="0">
<Common>
Drawing command
</Common>
<Open>
Drawing command
</Open>
<Close>
Drawing command
</Close>
</Symbol>
564 October 2021

Technical Reference
</AddSymbols>
<AddSymbolBreaker>
Symbol definitions (<AddSymbols>)
</AddSymbolBreaker>
Additional element symbols are begun with the <AddSymbols> or <AddSymbolBreaker> tag. The
<AddSymbolBreaker> tag is only used for the switch additional elements. Symbols are defined for
all other additional elements with the <AddSymbols> tag.
These sections contain symbol definitions with the predefined section <Common>, which defines
the general symbol. Besides this symbol it is possible to extend this according to the switching state
of the additional element. This is done via the sections <Open> and <Close>.
Overlay Section
To define overlays, the following section at the end of the library section is necessary:
<Overlays Library="1">
<Overlay ID="1" Name="Transformer Winding">
<Symbol Code="1">
<Line X1="0" Y1="-18" X2="-20" Y2="18"/>
<Line X1="0" Y1="-18" X2="20" Y2="18"/>
<Line X1="-20" Y1="18" X2="20" Y2="18"/>
</Symbol>
<Symbol Code="2">
<Line X1="0" Y1="0" X2="0" Y2="-18"/>
<Line X1="0" Y1="0" X2="20" Y2="18"/>
<Line X1="0" Y1="0" X2="-20" Y2="18"/>
</Symbol>
<Symbol Code="3">
<Line X1="0" Y1="0" X2="0" Y2="-10"/>
<Line X1="0" Y1="0" X2="9" Y2="9"/>
<Line X1="0" Y1="0" X2="-9" Y2="9"/>
<Line X1="0" Y1="-10" X2="9" Y2="-18"/>
<Line X1="9" Y1="9" X2="9" Y2="18"/>
<Line X1="-9" Y1="9" X2="-20" Y2="9"/>
</Symbol>
</Overlay>
</Overlays>
Overlays can only be defined in the predefined symbol files. However, they can also be used in the
user symbol files.
22.11.5 Drawing Command
PSS SINCAL supports the following drawing commands:
● Line
● Rectangle
● Ellipse
● Circular arc
● Circular sector
● Polyline
● Polygon
● Text
October 2021 565

Technical Reference
● Dynamic Text
● Overlay
Base Attributes

PenWidth Long Integer Line width
PenStyle Selection List 0, "SOLID", "-----": Continuous line
1, "DASH", "- – -": Dashed line
2, "DOT", ". . .": Dotted line
3, "DASHDOT", "- .": Dash-dot line
4, "DASHDOTDOT", "- . .": Dash-dot-dot line
FillColor Selection List (separated by ",") "FORE": Foreground color
"BACK": Background color
"BASE": Basic color
"NOPEN": No line
"NOBACK": Transparent
NoPen Boolean No line
HitTest Boolean Check mouse hits
Rotate Boolean Rotate symbol
Fill Pattern
The following values are permitted for the fill pattern argument:
Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Pattern
Line

X1 Long Integer X position of the start point
X2 Long Integer X position of the end point
Y1 Long Integer Y position of the start point
Y2 Long Integer Y position of the end point
Lines are defined from X1/Y1 (starting point of the line) to X2/Y2 (end point of the line).
Rectangle

Left Long Integer X position of the top left corner
Right Long Integer X position of the bottom right corner
Top Long Integer Y position of the top left corner
Bottom Long Integer Y position of the bottom right corner
Visible Boolean Visible/invisible
Hatch Long Integer 1: Upward hatch ////
2: Horizontal and vertical crosshatch ++++
566 October 2021

Technical Reference
3: Crosshatch xxxx
4: Downward hatch \\\\
5: Horizontal hatch -----
6: Vertical hatch |||||
<Rect Left="-5" Right="5" Top="50" Bottom="-20" Hatch="3" FillColor="BACK" Visible="No"/>
A rectangle is defined with the specified fill pattern from the top left corner of the rectangle to the
bottom right corner of the rectangle.
Ellipse

3: Crosshatch xxxx
<Ellipse Left="-100" Right="100" Top="100" Bottom="-100" FillColor="BACK"/>
Ellipses are defined in a rectangle and given a fill pattern.
Circular Arc

left/top X1/Y1
X2/Y2
right/bottom
October 2021 567

Technical Reference
In the indicated rectangle (left/top – right/bottom), circular arcs are defined from the starting point
X1/Y1 to the end point X2/Y2.
Start and end points do not have to be located directly on the circular arc.
Circular arcs are created clockwise (from the starting point to the end point).
Circular Sector

3: Crosshatch xxxx
<Pie Left="-30" Right="30" Top="-80" Bottom="-30" FillColor="FORE" Rotate="0" X1="30" Y1="-55"

X2="-30" Y2="-55"/>
left/top X1/Y1
X2/Y2
right/bottom
In the indicated rectangle (left/top – right/bottom), circular sectors are defined from the starting point
X1/Y1 to the end point X2/Y2.
Start and end points do not have to be located directly on the circular arc.
Circular sectors are created clockwise (from the starting point to the end point).
Polyline
<Polyline> 30,90|-15,10|30,10|-15,-90|-40,-90|15,0|-30,0|30,90| </Polyline>
A polyline defines a line with multiple line segments and is defined by specifying XY pairs
(X1,Y1|X2,Y2|…Xn,Yn|).
568 October 2021

Technical Reference
Polygon
<Polygon FillColor="BACK">-35,50|35,50|0,100|</Polygon>
A polygon is defined filled with the indicated coordinates (X/Y pairs) and with the indicated fill pattern.
Text

X Long Integer X position
Y Long Integer Y position
Size Long Integer Text size
Font String Font name
Text String Displayed text
TextRotate Boolean Rotation of the text with the symbol
Style Selection List (separated by ",") ITALIC
BOLD
UNDERLINE
STRIKEOUT
<Text X="-15" Y="-75" Size="15" TextRotate="0" Text="MF"/>
Text is defined at the indicated position X/Y and the size.
Dynamic Text

X Long Integer X position
Y Long Integer Y position
Size Long Integer Text size
Font String Font name
Text String Displayed text
DynText String Displayed text with &[ token support
TextRotate Boolean Rotation of the text with the symbol
Style Selection List (separated by ",") ITALIC
BOLD
UNDERLINE
STRIKEOUT
Text is defined at the indicated position X/Y and the size. The text is aligned and rotated on the basis
of the angle of the entire symbol.
Overlay

Type String Overlay type
Terminal Integer Terminal number
Overlay Long Integer Overlay ID
X Long Integer X position of the overlay
Y Long Integer Y position of the overlay
October 2021 569

Technical Reference
OverlayRotate Boolean Rotation activated/deactivated
<Overlay Terminal="1" Overlay="1" X="-10" Y="-55" Rotate="0"/>
An overlay defines an overlaid symbol for the indicated terminal. This symbol is provided from the
overlay section.
22.12 Feeder Documentation

The feeder documentation lets you export different predefined feeder evaluations to an Excel file.
Both the input data for network elements and the results from the power flow calculations are used,
so you need to calculate the power flow before you create feeder documentation. With an unbalanced
network, the extended information is generated for the individual phases as part of the
documentation. These are provided in the form of additional result lines in the Excel file.
In PSS SINCAL, network elements have four different loads (one basic load and three additional
ones). The feeder documentation, however, only uses one load per network element. The Determine
Rating field in the Calculation Settings determines which of the four loads will be used in the feeder
documentation.
Feeder Overview
All feeders are listed in this evaluation. Along with the name of primary substation and feeder,
PSS SINCAL displays additional characteristics. The transmission reserve and the load are used to
evaluate the feeders. This documentation only considers feeder lines.
Field name Description

SubStation Name of the primary substation
Feeder Feeder name
Phasing Phase information
l max [km] Maximum length of a supply route at the feeder
Node Start Name of initial node
Vstart/Vn [%] Voltage of initial node at the feeder
Node Max Length Name of the node farthest away
V/Vn [%] Voltage at node farthest away
Node Min Name of the node with smallest voltage at a feeder node
Vmin/Vn [%] Smallest voltage at a feeder node
q min [mm²] Minimum line cross section at the feeder
q max [mm²] Maximum line cross section at the feeder
Transmission reserve of the feeder:
This is the minimum value from the thermal limit current of the line minus
Res I [kA] the current from power flow result.
IRes = ITherm – ILf
Thermal limit current (from the preset calculation settings) of the network
Res In [kA]
element at the feeder with the smallest transmission reserve.
Res Iload [kA] Smallest current from power flow result
570 October 2021

Technical Reference
Line cross-section for minimum Res I [kA]:

Res q [mm²] This is the line cross section of the line at the feeder with the smallest
Maximum element load at the feeder:
I/In [%] This is the maximum element load from the power flow results of a line at
the feeder.
In [kA] Largest thermal limit current of a line at the feeder
Iload [kA] Largest current from power flow result
Line cross-section for maximum I/In [%]:
q [mm²] This is the line cross section of the line at the feeder with the maximum
load.
Active power losses of the network elements at the feeder.
Pl [MW] Are determined from the power flow results LFBranchResult or
ULFBranchResult.
Reactive power losses of the network elements at the feeder.
Ql [Mvar] Are determined from the power flow results LFBranchResult or
ULFBranchResult.
Lines
This evaluation lists all lines of the feeder with their topological information, length and cross section.

Feeder Feeder name
Node1 Node at Terminal 1 of the line
Node2 Node at Terminal 2 of the line
Name Line name
Type Line type
l [km] Line length
q [mm²] Line cross section
Ith [kA] Thermal limit current (from the preset calculation settings)
fPar [1] Number of parallel systems
fRed [1] Reduction factor for thermal limit current
Transformers
This evaluation lists all transformers of the feeder with their topological information, maximum power
and load.

Feeder Feeder name
Node1 Node at Terminal 1 of the transformer
October 2021 571

Technical Reference
Node2 Node at Terminal 2 of the transformer

Name Transformer name
S max [MVA] Full load power (from the preset calculation settings)
VcGrp Vector group of the transformer
S/Smax [%] Power to full load power from power flow results
Pl [MW] Active power losses from power flow results
Switches
This evaluation documents all open feeder switches.

Sub Name of the primary substation
Feeder Feeder name
Node1 Node at Terminal 1 of the branch element
Name Branch element name
Feeder2 Name 2 of the feeder
Sub2 Name 2 of the primary substation
Switched@Node Node name of the switched terminal
Adjacent Feeders
This evaluation documents all feeders that can be switched ON with a single switching activity. In
addition to topological information, this list shows the feeder’s actual current load and the
PSS SINCAL evaluates switching measures from the transmission reserve during switchover by
simulating the switchover from Feeder 1 to Feeder 2. Feeder 1 is disconnected from the primary
substation and fed from Feeder 2. PSS SINCAL calculates the transmission reserve of Feeder 2
after the switchover.

Sub Name of the primary substation
Feeder Feeder name
Name Branch element name
Feeder2 Name 2 of the feeder
Sub2 Name 2 of the primary substation
Switched@Node Node name of the switched terminal
F1 Ith [kA] Smallest value for permissible thermal limit current in Feeder 1
F1 I max [kA] Maximum current from power flow results for Feeder 1
572 October 2021

Technical Reference
Transmission reserve of Feeder 1:

This is the smallest value for the permissible limit current in Feeder 1 minus
F1 Res I [kA] the current from the power flow result.
IResF1 = ITherm – ILf
F2 Ith [kA] Smallest value for permissible thermal limit current in Feeder 2
F2 I max [kA] Maximum current from power flow results for Feeder 2
Transmission reserve of Feeder 2:
This is the smallest value for the permissible limit current in Feeder 2 minus
F2 Res I [kA] the current from the power flow result.
IResF2 = ITherm – ILf
Transmission reserve during switchover:
This is the transmission reserve of Feeder 2, if Feeder 1 has to be supplied
out capacity [kA] as well.
IResSwi = IResF2 – ImaxF1
Unsupplied Network Elements
This evaluation lists all network elements not connected to any feeder.

Node1 Node at Terminal 1 of the network element
Node2 Node at Terminal 2 of the network element
Name Network element name
Type Network element type
NetwLevel Network level of the network element
22.13 Optimization Documentation

The optimization documentation lets you export different results for optimal network structure to an
Excel file.
This Excel file contains the entire results for all the selected documentation. PSS SINCAL creates
one sheet for the overview and one sheet for each individual combination.
Overview
All combinations are listed in this evaluation. Along with the name of the combination, PSS SINCAL
displays sum results.

Name Name of the combination
Weight Weight
Cost Costs [€]
Length Length [km]
Power Power [MW]
October 2021 573

Technical Reference
Losses Losses [kW]

Cash Value
Cash Value Power [€]
Power
Cash Value
Cash Value Losses [€]
Losses
Algorithm Calculation algorithms used that led to the combination results.
Name of the base optimization. This value is only filled if the combination is
Base
a post-optimization.
General comments created by the calculations for this combination of
Comment
results.
Combination Details
This evaluation lists all results of a combination with their topological information.

The name assigned by the calculations. This name comes from the names of
Route
the primary substation and the first network station.
Name Name of the network element
Node 1 First node of the network element
Node 2 Second node of the network element
Weight Weight
Cost Costs [€]
Length Length [km]
Power Power [MW]
Losses Losses [kW]
Cash Value
Cash Value Power [€]
Power
Cash Value
Cash Value Losses [€]
Losses
Switched Name of the node where the breaker is placed.
22.14 Messages from Calculations

This section lists important messages of PSS SINCAL calculations.
Calculation methods generate different messages. These are used, among other things, to show
problems in the input data. After the calculations have terminated, PSS SINCAL displays the
messages in the message box (see the section on Messages in the User Interface chapter).
The calculations’ messages can essentially be categorized in the following groups:
● Errors:
These refer to crucial calculation errors indicating that the calculations could not be performed
properly.
574 October 2021

Technical Reference
● Warnings:
These indicate tolerable calculation errors.
● Infos:
These provide general information during calculations.
Structure of the Descriptions
The messages are separated into groups and sorted according to message numbers.
Each message is listed with its number and text. Additional information on the message and
appropriate actions to remedy the situation are included.
22.14.1 Errors
E 1001 Usage: SimulateCon [/?] [LANG] [DB_USR] [DB_PWD] [DB_MODE] <DB>

<MODUL>
Problem: Program parameters are wrong.
Solution: Check program parameter or contact the product support.
E 1002 Error: Unknown database type'$$$'!

E 1003 Error: Database type already specified ($$$)!

E 1004 Error: Unknown mode '$$$'!

E 1005 Error: Unknown parameter '$$$'!

E 1006 Network needs a drive letter

Problem: To use the selected calculation method, network or path name has to begin
with a drive letter (e.g. C:\).
Solution: Change network /pathname (e.g. by saving file on a physical drive C:\).
E 1007 Point character sign not allowed in network name

Problem: If you continue to process interface files, this can create problems.
Solution: Use another network name.
October 2021 575

Technical Reference
E 1008 No differential protection zone specified!

Problem: No differential protection zone has been specified at a differential protection
device.
Solution: Enter the differential protection zone.
E 1010 No memory for #.# bytes

Problem: Insufficient main memory free.
Solution: Contact the product support.
E 1020 Internal ERROR $$$

Problem: Internal error in program logic.
E 1021 Unknown type of simulation '$$$'

Problem: Wrong text for calculation method.
Solution: Use valid text.
E 1022 Unknown type of simulation #

E 1023 Global calculation data not available

E 1024 No calculable nodes available

Problem: No nodes detected in this network.
Solution: Create a correct network.
E 1025 Unknown interactive diagram #

Problem: Wrong values for interactive type of diagram.
Solution: Use a valid value for the diagram type.
E 1030 No license
Problem: You have no license for this calculation method.
Solution: Obtain a license. You can get more information from the product support or
from your PSS SINCAL contact.
E 1031 There are # nodes. Only # nodes are permitted for Simulation
Problem: Your license only lets you calculate networks with a limited number of
nodes.
Solution: Reduce network size or obtain a license without any node limit.
E 1032 No active items available

Problem: Your network has no active network elements.
Solution: Add active network elements.
576 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 1033 No network level found

Problem: Invalid values in the database.
E 1043 Node isolated in simulation. Check operation of connected element.

Problem: A node in the calculations is isolated.
Solution: Check how adjacent network elements (current or flow source) operate and
how they are allocated (network area or forward line/return line).
E 1047 Element has to be connected to the same phases at all terminals

Problem: The element is connected to different phases.
Solution: Check the connections.
E 1049 Element is unbalanced

Problem: PSS SINCAL has no unbalanced simulation for the current calculation type.
Solution: Change the calculation settings or enter the element symmetrically.
E 1050 Unable to open output file '$$$'

Problem: File cannot be opened.
Solution: Check the access permissions.
E 1051 Unable to open input file '$$$'

E 1052 Error closing file '$$$'

E 1061 Element is out of service

Problem: For these calculations, the element must be in service.
Solution: Switch out of service option OFF.
E 1062 No license for models and/or BOSL models

Problem: You do not have any license for models or BOSL models.
Solution: Purchase the proper license.
E 1545 Unexpected error while reading from file $$$

Problem: Unexpected error occurred when reading the file.
Solution: Check whether the file is valid or whether the connection to the network
drive was interrupted.
E 1556 There are no master resources

Problem: There are no master resources for the network reduction.
Solution: Insert master resources.
October 2021 577

Technical Reference
E 1557 No objects for reduction are given

Problem: No objects found for the reduction.
Solution: Check the definition of the objects to be reduced.
E 1558 Invalid version for XML reduction file

Problem: You are using a file with an obsolete format.
Solution: Use the current format for the XML file.
E 1559 Invalid mapping file

Problem: The file is not valid for the mapping for import/export.
Solution: Ensure that you are using a valid file.
E 2001 Unknown mode for opening the database

Problem: Invalid parameter when calculations started.
E 2002 File '$$$' is missing

Problem: Invalid parameter when calculations started.
E 2003 Database could not be opened

Problem: Wrong version of data access layer.
E 2004 Table '$$$.$$$' could not be opened

Problem: Wrong version of data access layer or wrong network for selected
calculation method.
E 2009 Data record does not match method

Problem: Wrong pipe network for selected calculation method.
E 2011 Record # not found in table '$$$.$$$'

Problem: Invalid values in database.
E 2012 Required database $$$ not specified

Problem: Invalid database entry.
Solution: Use Extras – Options in the menu to reassign the database.
E 2013 No protection type database specified

Problem: Protection calculations require a protection type database.
Solution: Select a protection type database under the menu item Extra – Options.
E 2015 Connection key #.# entered in one network more than once
Problem: At least one connection key was entered more than once.
Solution: Check the connection keys.
578 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2016 Networks connected by nodes with different voltages

Problem: Networks are connected by nodes with different voltages.
Solution: Connect the networks with nodes of the same voltage.
E 2018 Data record does not belong to base variant

Problem: Data are not yet included in variant management.
Solution: Deactivate or delete the record.
E 2019 Unable to link data record

Problem: Data reference could not be resolved.
Solution: Check data and set data references again.
E 2020 False number of terminals: # expects, # found

E 2021 Invalid Terminal Connection Number #

E 2022 Terminal Connection Number # already used for Element #.#

E 2023 Node #.# also connected via Terminal #.# to Element #.#
E 2024 Terminal with Connection Number # missing

Solution: Contact the product support
E 2025 Element ID #.# cannot be used in table '$$$.$$$'

E 2026 Database $$$ was created by a previous application version. Please update the
database.
Problem: This network database was created with an earlier version.
Solution: Update the network database or open the network with the current version.
E 2027 Include network $$$ has been created by a previous application version.
Please update the network.
Problem: A include network was created with an earlier version.
Solution: Update the include network database or open the include network with the
current version.
October 2021 579

Technical Reference
E 2028 Database $$$ was created by a later application version.

Problem: This network database was created with a later version.
Solution: Install the newer version.
E 2029 Include network $$$ was created by a later application version.

Problem: A include network was created with a later version.
Solution: Install the newer version.
E 2030 Network level #.# not found

E 2031 No data record found in table #.#

E 2032 Only one data record permitted in table 'CalcParameter'

E 2033 Input data missing

E 2035 Node #.# not found

E 2036 Unknown value # in field '$$$'

E 2038 Element #.# not found

Problem: Invalid values found in the database.
Solution: Check assignments to groups, or contact the product support.
E 2039 Data incomplete or defined more than once

Problem: This user entry is insufficient for error-free processing.
Solution: Complete the data.
E 2040 Terminal not found

Problem: The terminal was not found.
Solution: Assign the terminal again.
E 2041 Group not found

Problem: The group was not found.
Solution: Check and correct the assignment.
580 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2042 Protection device not found in teleprotection

Problem: An assigned protection device in the teleprotection could not be found.
Solution: Check the assignments for teleprotection.
E 2045 Node and/or element not assigned

Problem: An assignment for a node or element is missing in the input data.
Solution: Assign the missing data.
E 2047 Impedance area not assigned for frequency #.# Hz

Problem: The assignment for the impedance area is missing in the input data.
E 2049 Index restriction in #.#

Problem: This function contains an index violation.
Solution: Change the variant, delete the variant, or contact the product support.
E 2051 Simulation method $$$ not allowed in master-database mode

Problem: The calculation method is not allowed in the master-database mode and
cannot be used.
Solution: Use a local client database instead of the master database.
E 2052 There are no valid scenarios for the calculation

Problem: To calculate scenarios, they must be entered and active.
Solution: Create scenarios and ensure that they are active.
E 2053 The scenario has no active scenario files

Problem: The scenario to be calculated must have specified active scenario files.
Solution: Add files to the scenario and ensure that they are active.
E 2054 The scenario file doesn't exist

Problem: The scenario file cannot be found.
Solution: Make sure that the scenario file exists.
E 2060 The function group has more than one renewable machine
Problem: The function group must only have one supply.
Solution: Change the function group or deactivate the supply.
E 2061 The function group has more than one connection to the network
Problem: The function group must only have one connection to the remaining
network.
Solution: Change the topology so that there is only one connection to the remaining
network.
E 2062 Variants for scenarios couldn't be inserted

Problem: Not all variants for the scenarios could be created.
Solution: Contact the technical support.
October 2021 581

Technical Reference
E 2130 Item #.# for multiple fault not found

Problem: There are invalid values in database.
E 2131 Multiple fault only permitted for lines

Problem: Multiple fault found at an element without a line.
Solution: Remove multiple faults from this element. Multiple faults are permitted only
in lines.
E 2132 Node #.# for multiple fault not found

E 2135 The line cannot be coupled with itself

Problem: In trying to connect the lines, you entered the same line for both sides.
Solution: Specify different lines for the connection.
E 2136 Item #.# is not a line

Problem: In making a connection, you selected an element that was not a line.
Solution: Enter the connection between two lines.
E 2151 Protection device #.# not an overload time protection device

Problem: This protection device is not an overload time protection device.
E 2152 Protection device #.# not a remote protection device

Problem: The protection device is not a remote protection device.
E 2153 Protection device #.# has no user-defined settings

Problem: This protection device could not be assigned settings.
E 2155 No ID indicated for protection device type

Problem: No ID has been assigned for the protection device type.
E 2156 Overcurrent time protection devices are not licensed

Problem: You do not have a license to use overcurrent time protection devices in
protection simulation.
Solution: You need to get another license.
E 2157 Distance protection devices with general areas are not licensed
Problem: You do not have a license to use distance protection devices with general
areas in protection simulation.
582 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2158 Distance protection devices with predefined settings are not licensed
Problem: You do not have a license to use distance protection devices with
predefined areas in protection simulation.
E 2159 No license for network development

Problem: You need a license for network development to switch ON the option for
network development.
Solution: Switch OFF network development option or purchase a license for network
development.
E 2160 The differential protection zone includes protection devices with different
model types
Problem: The differential protection zone contains protection devices with different
models.
Solution: Correct the models.
E 2161 Measuring point $$$ for the differential protection zone '$$$' is missing
Problem: At least two measuring points must be defined for the calculation.
Solution: Create measuring point 1 and measuring point 2.
E 2162 Measuring point $$$ for the differential protection zone '$$$' entered more than
once
Problem: The measuring points must be unique for the calculation.
Solution: Check the measuring points of the differential protection devices.
E 2164 The protection object is not valid for this network element
Problem: Protection object type does not match.
Solution: Change the protection object type.
E 2165 Adjustment factor can not be determined. Measuring point $$$ is not active
Problem: Adjustment factor could not be determined.
Solution: Ensure that the measuring points are active.
E 2166 The currents of the current transformer does not match the measuring point
Problem: The measuring points have different currents.
Solution: Correct the currents.
E 2211 Protection device has no settings

Problem: This protection device could not be assigned set values.
E 2212 Characteristic #.# cannot be used. Protection device type # expected, # found
October 2021 583

Technical Reference
E 2221 Distance protection device possesses no set values

Problem: A distance protection device could not be assigned settings.
E 2224 Range already exists

Problem: There is more than one value range for protection device settings.
E 2302 Failed to select variant ($$$) in database ($$$)!

Problem: The indicated variant could not be switched ON in the database.
Solution: Check the spelling of the variant name or the database ID.
E 2401 Error at reactive power control data

Problem: The data for the reactive power controller is not correct.
Solution: Correct the data.
E 2402 Reactive power control data: #.#

Problem: The specified condition was not observed for the reactive power controller
data.
E 2501 Invalid power factor for cos-phi. It can have values only between -1.0 and 1.0
Problem: Invalid values for power factor.
Solution: Correct power factor.
E 2502 Invalid rated power factor for cos-phi. It can have values only between -1.0 and
1.0
Problem: Invalid values for rated power factor.
Solution: Correct rated power factor.
E 2505 Voltage limits used for changing tap position not valid at side #
Problem: The voltage range for controlling this side of the three-winding transformer
is incorrect.
Solution: Correct the voltage range.
E 2506 C value outside valid technical range

Problem: The C value is less than 0.9 or greater than 1.2.
Solution: Change the C value.
E 2512 Neutral point connection impossible

Problem: Either the entry for transformer neutral points in the vector group does not
match the entry for the neutral point treatment, or there is a neutral point connection
from a common neutral point to a common neutral point, or a neutral point has no
recursive connection.
Solution: Correct vector groups and neutral point data.
584 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2513 Zigzag vector group – neutral point connection impossible

Problem: Neutral points cannot be interconnected in zigzag coils.
Solution: Change vector group.
E 2514 Pre-fault voltage value outside valid technical range

Problem: Pre-fault voltage must be between 0.9 and 1.2 pu
Solution: Change pre-fault voltage.
E 2517 Master element needs identical type!

Problem: Master element for controlling must be the same type as active element.
Solution: Change entry for master element.
E 2520 Connection of common neutral point to common neutral point is not allowed
Problem: There is a connection from a common neutral point to a common neutral
point. A common neutral point cannot have a common neutral point.
Solution: Correct neutral point data.
E 2521 Rated voltage is less than network rated voltage

Problem: The rated voltage is at least 25 percent less than the node rated voltage.
Solution: Increase rated voltage.
E 2522 Self reference to master element

Problem: Self reference to master element.
Solution: Change master element.
E 2523 Controller data not identical!

Problem: Controller data must enable identical values.
Solution: Change controller data.
E 2525 Fine power step has to be less than rough power step
Problem: The fine power step to determine the compensation powers must be less
than the rough power step.
Solution: Correct the power steps.
E 2526 Power factor definitions not valid

Problem: To determine the compensation power, the inductive power factor must be
greater than 0.0 and the capacitive power factor less than 0.0.
Solution: Change the power factors.
E 2528 Coupling at zero-phase system enabled only on symmetrical line in each phase
Problem: Coupling in zero-phase is only possible for symmetrical lines in all phases.
Solution: Change the network data.
E 2529 Capacity of positive-phase system is less than capacity of zero-phase system

Problem: The capacity in positive phase must be greater than or equal to the
capacity of the zero-phase system.
Solution: Change the data.
October 2021 585

Technical Reference
E 2530 Startup current ratio equal to zero

Problem: The current ratio at start-up is equal to zero.
Solution: Correct current ratio at start-up.
E 2532 Line length not physically possible

Problem: The line length must be less than the speed of light times a half period
Solution: Enter a shorter line length.
E 2533 Rated current equal to zero

Problem: The rated current is zero.
Solution: Correct rated current.
E 2534 Power flow data has to be available to calculate the network

Problem: There are no data for power flow calculations.
Solution: Check input data or contact the product support.
E 2535 Power flow and short circuit data have to be available to calculate the network
Problem: There are no data for power flow and short circuit calculations.
Solution: Check input data or contact the product support.
E 2540 Upper or lower voltage limit equal to zero

Problem: Either the upper or lower voltage limit is zero.
Solution: Correct the voltage limits.
E 2541 Rated voltage equal to 0.0 volts

Problem: The rated voltage is 0.0 volts. This is not permitted.
Solution: Correct the rated voltage.
E 2542 Different voltages

Problem: A voltage is outside the range of 75 to 125 percent of the node or network
level rated voltage.
Solution: Correct the voltage.
E 2546 Rated active power equal to zero

Problem: The rated active power is zero.
Solution: Correct rated active power.
E 2551 Initial short circuit power equal to zero

Problem: The initial short circuit power is zero.
Solution: Correct the initial short circuit power.
E 2552 Rated apparent power equal to zero

Problem: The rated apparent power is equal to zero.
Solution: Correct the rated apparent power.
586 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2553 Rated apparent power at side # equal to zero

Problem: The rated apparent power of this side of the three-winding transformer is
zero.
Solution: Correct the rated apparent power on this side of the three-winding
transformer.
E 2554 Neutral point impedance not available

Problem: The ground with impedances has no neutral point impedance.
Solution: Check neutral point treatment or contact the product support.
E 2555 Only controlling of power possible

Problem: The type of control does not match the power flow type.
Solution: Change control or power flow type.
E 2556 Only controlling of voltage possible

Problem: The type of control does not match the power flow type.
Solution: Change control or power flow type.
E 2557 Saturated subtransient reactance has to be less than non-saturated

subtransient reactance
Problem: The input data for subtransient reactance are not possible.
Solution: Correct values for subtransient reactance.
E 2558 Condition that subtransient reactance < transient reactance <= synchronous
reactance not fulfilled
Problem: The subtransient reactance must be less than the transient reactance and
this, on the other hand, must be less than or equal to the synchronous reactance.
Solution: Correct the data for the serial and/or shunt axis.
E 2559 Subtransient (saturated or non-saturated), transient or synchronous reactance

equal to zero
Problem: The entries for reactance cannot be zero.
Solution: Correct the data for the serial and /or shunt axis or the value for the
saturated subtransient reactance.
E 2560 Minimum tap position must be less than main position, and maximum tap
position more than main position
Problem: In PSS SINCAL the center of the controller is always 0. The minimum tap
position therefore must be less than 0 and the maximum tap position greater than 0.
Solution: Correct tap data.
E 2561 Minimum tap position at side # must be less than main position, and maximum
tap position more than main position
Problem: In PSS SINCAL the main position of the controller is always 0. This means
for this side of the three-winding transformer, the minimum tap position must be less
than 0 and the maximum tap position must be greater than 0.
Solution: Correct controller data of this side.
October 2021 587

Technical Reference
E 2563 Primary rated voltage equal to zero

Problem: The primary rated voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct primary rated voltage.
E 2564 Secondary rated voltage equal to zero

Problem: The secondary rated voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct secondary rated voltage.
E 2565 Tertiary rated voltage equal to zero

Problem: The tertiary rated voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct tertiary rated voltage.
E 2566 Power specification at controller incorrect

Problem: The additional power per step is either 0 or the additional power in
minimum tap position is less than the rated power.
Solution: Change the controller data.
E 2569 Synchronous machine with block data must be connected uniquely to a

transformer
Problem: According to VDE, block data always have to be entered jointly at
transformers and generators.
Solution: Check that the generator is attached to only one transformer.
E 2570 Common grounding via nodes with different positive-phase voltage is invalid
Problem: The neutral points at the common neutral point of a transformer have
different rated voltages.
Solution: Correct switching of transformer neutral point.
E 2571 Short circuit voltage equal to zero

Problem: The short circuit voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct short circuit voltage.
E 2572 Short circuit voltage at side # equal to zero

Problem: The short circuit voltage of this side of a three-winding transformer is zero.
Solution: Correct short circuit voltage for this side.
E 2576 Rated voltage equal to zero

Problem: The rated voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct the rated voltage.
E 2577 Referenced series reactor voltage is zero

Problem: The reference voltage for the series reactor is zero.
Solution: Correct reference voltage for the series reactor.
E 2579 Unknown vector group '$$$'

Problem: The vector group of a transformer could not be determined.
Solution: Check vector group entry or contact the product support.
588 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2580 Zero-phase data does not correspond to grounding. Input is not possible via
ZABNL, ZBANL and ZABSC.
Problem: No-load and short-circuit zero-phase impedances cannot be used to enter
the zero-phase data for a one-sided grounded transformer.
Solution: Select another input form for the zero-phase sequence data.
E 2581 Subtransient reactance equal to zero

Problem: The subtransient reactance is zero.
Solution: Correct subtransient reactance.
E 2583 Unable to calculate zero-phase system impedance

Problem: The zero-phase impedance cannot be calculated.
Solution: Check zero-phase sequence data.
E 2585 Type # invalid for specifying zero system data

Problem: Program logic error.
E 2586 Serial impedance equal to zero

Problem: The serial impedance is zero.
Solution: A serial impedance equal to zero creates a singular matrix and therefore
cannot be zero. Correct zero-phase impedance.
E 2587 Quality data forces one of the following RLC Types: Serial or High Pass R
Problem: R L and C calculations are only implemented for serial resonant circuits.
Solution: Change the type of resonant circuit.
E 2590 Voltage on generator side equal to zero

Problem: The generator side voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct the voltage on the generator side.
E 2591 Voltage on network side equal to zero

Problem: The network side voltage is zero.
Solution: Correct the voltage on the network side.
E 2592 Invalid definition of impedance area

Problem: Unable to calculate the area because of the definition for the resonance
network’s impedance area.
Solution: Correct the input data of impedance area.
E 2595 Neutral point impedance or common neutral point impedance is equal to zero
Problem: An impedance value of zero is a direct connection.
Solution: Enter "fixed ground" for the neutral point or select "none" as the neutral
point impedance in the field for common neutral point impedance.
October 2021 589

Technical Reference
E 2602 Current for switching from wye to delta circuitry is less than or equal to zero
Problem: Wye/delta start-up requires a switching current greater than zero.
Solution: Use another circuitry for the start-up or a switching current greater than
zero.
E 2603 Short circuit impedance is equal to zero

Problem: Supply source has values for both R and for X that are equal to zero. No
short circuit impedance can be determined.
Solution: Enter at least one value that is not equal to zero.
E 2605 Generators have different voltages

Problem: Generators with different voltage found at the same node.
Solution: Correct the voltage for the generators.
E 2606 Topology of protection device has to agree with topology of transformer

Problem: Location of the protection device is not the same as the location of the
transformer(s).
Solution: Check the locations of the protection device and its transformer(s).
E 2609 Working point requires constant power consumption

Problem: You cannot enter a reference voltage with an operating point. Power
tapping needs to be removed constantly.
Solution: Set the power flow type to P and Q constant.
E 2610 Setting impossible

Problem: Setting is not possible.
Solution: Modify the setting at the protection devices.
E 2616 Unable to determine thermal load limit

Problem: Thermal load limit cannot be determined.
Solution: Enter thermal limit current.
E 2617 No load data incorrect

Problem: The no-load data are incorrect.
Solution: Check the no-load data.
E 2618 Ohmic part short circuit voltage is zero

Problem: The Ohmic part of short circuit voltage is zero.
Solution: Enter a value other than zero.
E 2619 Reliability simulation needs limit data

Problem: Limit data need to be entered for the reliability calculations.
Solution: Enter limit data.
E 2620 Power frequency characteristics equal zero

Problem: The primary power number is zero.
Solution: Enter a value other than zero.
590 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2622 Reliability simulation doesn’t permit negative active power

Problem: Negative active power has been entered for a load.
Solution: Correct the active power.
E 2625 Sum of all hours has to be # (currently # hours)

Problem: The annual load duration curve has to have a sum of # hours.
Solution: Correct the points of the annual load duration curve.
E 2626 Value of referenced load has to be between 0.001 and 100 percent
Problem: You have entered a reference load outside the permissible range.
Solution: Correct the entry of the standard load.
E 2627 Length of common route has to be greater than 0.0

Problem: In common fashion groups with lines, the length of the common route has
to be greater than 0.0.
Solution: Specify a length.
E 2628 Group needs to have at least two network elements

Problem: The group has no, or only one, network element.
Solution: Delete the group, or assign elements to the group network.
E 2629 Group needs to have at least two lines

Problem: The group has no, or only one, line.
Solution: Delete the group or assign lines to the group.
E 2630 Group can have only lines

Problem: A multiple line group can contain only lines.
Solution: Delete all other elements of the group.
E 2631 Reconnecting data are not correct

Problem: The reconnecting data are not correct.
Solution: Correct the reconnecting data.
E 2632 Missing busbar for busbar or load transfer

Problem: You have not entered any busbar for the busbar change or the load
transfer.
Solution: Enter a busbar.
E 2633 Busbar for busbar or load transfer has different voltages

Problem: One of the busbars for the busbar or the load transfer has a different rated
voltage.
Solution: Enter a busbar with the same rated voltage.
E 2634 Busbar or load transfer – time equal to 0.0

Problem: No time has been entered for a busbar or a load transfer.
Solution: Specify a time.
October 2021 591

Technical Reference
E 2635 Reliability simulation doesn’t permit unsupplied loads

Problem: The network contains unsupplied consumers.
Solution: Connect the consumer to a generator.
E 2636 Busbar or load transfer permitted at help node

Problem: An help node has data for a busbar or load transfer.
Solution: Delete this data or switch OFF the setting for the auxiliary node.
E 2637 Amount of transferable load equal to zero

Problem: In load transfer data, the amount of movable load cannot be 0.0.
Solution: Enter a higher percentage or delete the transfer data.
E 2638 Reliability simulation doesn’t permit multiple busbar transfer

Problem: You have entered a busbar transfer for more than two busbars.
Solution: Limit simulation to two busbars.
E 2639 Busbar transfer has different time specification

Problem: You have entered different times for the same busbar transfer.
Solution: Delete one of the busbar transfers or enter the same time.
E 2640 Busbar change or load transfer is only possible between different busbars
Problem: You have not entered any busbar or the same busbar more than once.
Solution: Enter busbars that have differences.
E 2641 For busbar transfer, busbars must be connected by a line

Problem: Busbars for busbar transfer are not connected by a line.
Solution: Connect the busbars with a line.
E 2643 Replacement generator has to operate with P and Q constant

Problem: The working point of the generator cannot be used in the reliability
calculations.
Solution: Change the working point.
E 2644 No dynamics data specified

Problem: No dynamics data have been indicated.
Solution: Extend the dynamics data.
E 2645 Current simulation does not permit load current and losses
Problem: This calculation procedure does not permit load current or iron losses.
Solution: Set the values to 0.0.
E 2646 Current simulation does not permit controller data

Problem: The current calculation procedure does not permit controllers.
Solution: Deactivate the controller.
592 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2647 Time specification impossible

Problem: There has been an error in the entry for times. The starting time has to be
less than the end time.
Solution: Correct the entry for time.
E 2648 Model not yet implemented for this simulation

Problem: The current calculation procedure does not permit models.
Solution: Modify the operating point data.
E 2649 Power flow impedance has to be specified

Problem: A power flow impedance with 0.0 ohm is not possible.
Solution: Enter an impedance.
E 2650 Short circuit impedance has to be specified

Problem: Short circuit impedance with 0.0 ohm is not possible.
Solution: Specify a value for impedance.
E 2652 No criteria activated for dimensioning

Problem: All-important criteria for the crating fuses are switched OFF.
Solution: Activate a criterion.
E 2653 No consumer at selected consumer node

Problem: For the reliability results, you have created a node as the consumer node
where there is no consumer.
Solution: Correct the input data.
E 2654 One single main supply has to be specified

Problem: You have to enter a specific supply source as the slack. Network supplies
must be entered as slack generators.
Solution: Change the supply sources.
E 2655 Only radial networks permitted

Problem: You have specified a meshed network, but IEC 61363 permits only radial
networks.
Solution: Change the configuration.
E 2656 Working voltage must be less than or equal to rated voltage

Problem: You have entered a working voltage that is greater than the rated voltage.
IEC 61363 prohibits this.
Solution: Change working voltage.
E 2660 Standard prohibits block or direct feed data

Problem: You have specified supplementary data for short circuit current
calculations. IEC 61363 does not permit supplementary data.
Solution: Delete supplementary data or change the norm for the short circuit current
calculations.
October 2021 593

Technical Reference
E 2661 Standard prohibits element

Problem: You have a generator unit to the network. This is not permitted according to
IEC 61363.
Solution: Delete generator unit or change the norm for the short circuit current
calculations.
E 2662 Element can only be assigned to one function group

Problem: The element is assigned to more than one function group. The definition
prohibits this.
Solution: Change group assignment.
E 2664 Unbalanced not implemented for current simulation

Problem: PSS SINCAL has no unbalanced simulation for the current element.
Solution: Enter the element symmetrically or use other elements for the simulation.
E 2666 Condition # not possible

Problem: You have specified a condition that is logically or technically impossible.
Solution: Correct the condition.
E 2668 Duration is equal to 0.0 hours

Problem: The duration is 0.0 hours.
Solution: Specify a time length.
E 2669 No condition specified

Problem: You have not specified any condition. At least one condition has to be
specified.
Solution: Specify a condition.
E 2670 Type of switching impossible

Problem: Elements that are turned off can only be turned on and elements that are
turned on can only be turned off.
Solution: Modify the type of switching.
E 2671 Model type not yet implemented

Problem: The selected model type has not been implemented yet.
Solution: Change the model type or contact the product support.
E 2672 Water level impossible due to water tank characteristics

Problem: The water level is not between minimum and maximum filling height.
Solution: Correct the water level or the minimum and maximum filling height.
E 2673 Water level used at start/stop impossible

Problem: The water level at start or stop cannot be used for filling.
Solution: Check that the initial value is less than the stopping value and that both are
between maximum and minimum level.
594 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2674 Initial value for water level cannot be 0.0 meters

Problem: The initial value for the water level for water tanks is 0.0 meters.
Solution: Change the initial value.
E 2676 At least # points necessary

Problem: The characteristic curve does not have enough points.
Solution: Add additional points.
E 2677 Temperature has to be above 20 degrees Celsius

Problem: According to VDE, a temperature above 20 degree has to be entered to
calculate small short circuit currents.
Solution: Enter a higher temperature.
E 2679 Reliability doesn’t permit loads less than #.# kVA

Problem: The load is too small for reliability calculations.
Solution: Increase the load.
E 2682 View period not specified

Problem: The time period for economic efficiency calculations is incorrect.
Solution: Correct the time period in the calculation settings for economic efficiency.
E 2683 Operating period incorrect

Problem: The operating period cannot be determined.
Solution: Correct the setup time, shutdown time and duration.
E 2684 Substation not available

Problem: The topology of the economic efficiency data is wrong.
Solution: Correct the substation.
E 2685 Bay not available

Solution: Correct the bay.
E 2686 Bay not available at substation

Solution: Correct the substation or the bay.
E 2687 Switching only permitted with impedance load behavior, power equal to zero or
constant voltage and angle
Problem: You need to have impedance load behavior to simulate switching in
dynamics calculations.
Solution: Change the load behavior.
E 2688 Minimum or maximum short circuit voltage does not match short circuit
voltage
Problem: The minimum short circuit voltage must be less and the maximum short
circuit voltage must be greater than the short circuit voltage.
Solution: Correct the short circuit voltages.
October 2021 595

Technical Reference
E 2689 Only one reference machine permitted

Problem: You have designated more than one machine as a reference machine.
Solution: Change the machine data.
E 2690 Delayed switching permitted only in 3-phase switching

Problem: Time delays are possible only in 3-phase circuitry.
Solution: Switch the element to 3-phase.
E 2691 Start date must be prior to end date

Problem: The dates for starting and finishing load calculations are incorrect.
Solution: Correct the entries for dates.
E 2692 Missing load data date specification

Problem: To calculate network development, you have to enter a reference date for
the loads.
Solution: Enter a reference date for the loads.
E 2693 Start date prior to base date not allowed

Problem: Network development calculations cannot contain consumption before the
reference date.
Solution: Correct entries for dates.
E 2697 Unbalanced transformer with given vector group forbidden

Problem: The circuitry entered is impossible with a 1-phase transformer.
Solution: Change the Vector Group! Vector Group YNYN is needed to technically
transfer power!
E 2698 Unbalanced transformer controller forbids rotation

Problem: Rotation is technically impossible at a 1-phase transformer.
Solution: Change the additional voltage angle to 0.0 degrees in the controller data.
E 2699 Unbalanced transformer or supply source with ground connections forbidden

Problem: Interconnected neutral points are impossible at a 1-phase transformer.
Solution: Enter the transformer without interconnected neutral points.
E 2700 Element needs to be connected in at least two phases

Problem: Current flow is only possible when the element is connected in at least two
phases.
Solution: Check and expand connections to the feeder.
E 2701 NEMA motor data incorrect

Problem: This NEMA motor data cannot be used to simulate a motor.
Solution: Check the data and modify them.
E 2702 Evaluating motor operating conditions due to NEMA data impossible

Problem: This NEMA motor data and operating state data cannot be used to
calculate the operating state.
Solution: Check the data and modify them.
596 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2703 Voltage outside control range

Problem: The generator voltage is outside the control range.
Solution: Correct the voltage or the control range.
E 2704 Model name includes invalid character or is too long

Problem: The name of the model has been assigned an invalid character for the
interface.
Solution: Change model name.
E 2705 Condition Td2 < Td1 not fulfilled

Problem: The subtransient time constant must be less than the transient time
constant.
Solution: Correct the data for the serial and /or shunt axis.
E 2706 Subtransient or transient time constant equal zero

Problem: The time constants cannot be zero.
Solution: Correct the data for the serial and/or shunt axis.
E 2707 Short circuit due to IEC61363 or G74 needs compensation data

Problem: IEC61363 or G74 short circuit calculations require compensation data and
not winding data.
Solution: Enter compensation data.
E 2708 Different switch delay – minimum (#.# s) is used

Problem: The time dependent impedance model needs uniform switch delay times.
Solution: Enter the same switch delay time at each network level.
E 2709 Measurement data equal zero

Problem: No maximum values have been entered for load assignment.
Solution: Enter either a maximum current or a maximum power.
E 2710 Protection device not valid for locking

Problem: For locking, only OC and distance protection devices are valid.
Solution: Limit mutual locking to these device types.
E 2712 Establishment and/or shutdown time impossible

Problem: The establishment and/or shutdown time of the node are not possible for
the element.
Solution: Correct establishment and/or shutdown time.
E 2713 Unbalanced network data/calculation method – please activate "unbalanced" at

Calculate – Methods
Problem: There are unbalanced network elements in the network, but "unbalanced"
has not been selected for the network model.
Solution: Switch unbalanced network model ON under calculate – methods.
October 2021 597

Technical Reference
E 2714 Element input data considered as physically not reasonable

Problem: The network element you have created is physically impossible.
Solution: Check and correct data for network element.
E 2716 Target voltage of controlled node outside controller range

Problem: The target voltage must be within the voltage limits of the control range.
Solution: Change the target voltage or the voltage limits of the control range.
E 2717 Protection devices on connector line not allowed

Problem: Conductor lines cannot have protection devices.
Solution: Remove protection device or change line type.
E 2719 Surplus voltage per tap position and phase shift per tap position less equal to
zero
Problem: PSS SINCAL needs to have a phase shift or surplus voltage for tap
positions to change the transformer ratio for the controlling.
Solution: Enter the phase shift and surplus voltage in the transformer controller data.
E 2720 Surplus voltage per tap position and phase shift per tap position at side # less
equal to zero
Problem: PSS SINCAL needs to have a phase shift or surplus voltage for tap
positions to change the transformer ratio at the respective side for the controlling.
Solution: Enter the phase shift and surplus voltage in the transformer controller data
for the respective side.
E 2721 Distance protection settings (#.#) specified more than once

Problem: Phase or ground has multiple settings.
Solution: Delete multiple settings.
E 2722 There is no non-directional MHO tripping

Problem: Entry for direction is not possible.
Solution: Change entry for direction.
E 2724 Controlled terminal on connector line not allowed

Problem: Terminals of an impedance-free connector line cannot be used for
controlling.
Solution: Use a terminal of another element.
E 2726 Line reactor not allowed on connector line

Problem: Connector lines without impedance cannot have line reactor.
Solution: Perform the line reactor on another line or change the line type.
E 2727 Vector group of Side 1 must be identical with vector group of Side 2
Problem: The vector group entry has to be the same at Side 1 and Side 2 for an
autotransformer.
Solution: Correct entry for vector group.
598 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2728 Vector group of Side 3 must correspond to a delta stabilizing winding

Problem: An autotransformer needs a delta stabilizing winding at Side 3.
Solution: Enter a delta winding at Side 3.
E 2729 Rated voltage of Side 1 must be larger than rated voltage of Side 2
Problem: For an autotransformer, the rated voltage at Side 1 has to be greater than
the rated voltage at Side 2.
Solution: Correct the entries for voltage or the input direction.
E 2730 Center tapped transformer only with single winding

Problem: A transformer with center tap can have only one winding (W1 , W2 or W3).
Solution: Change the entry for winding.
E 2731 Autotransformer with ground connections forbidden

Problem: Interconnected neutral points are not possible at an autotransformer.
Solution: Enter the autotransformer without interconnected neutral points.
E 2732 Center tapped transformer only solid grounded

Problem: Neutral points are not possible at a transformer with center tap.
Solution: Enter the transformer with neutral points that have a solid ground.
E 2733 Negative value for loading evaluation not possible

Problem: Load calculations can have only positive reference values.
Solution: Change the reference values for the load.
E 2734 Additional loading without base loading

Problem: No base load can be determined.
Solution: Specify a reference value for base loading.
E 2737 Value of duration has to be between 0.001 and #.# hours

Problem: Your entry for duration is outside the permitted range.
Solution: Correct the entry for the duration.
E 2738 Reactance is too small

Problem: Reactance is too small for the current calculation.
Solution: Increase the reactance.
E 2740 Reactance is too large

Problem: Reactance is too large for the current calculation.
Solution: Reduce the reactance.
E 2741 Zero-phase data does not correspond to grounding. Input is only possible via
ZABNL, ZBANL and ZABSC.
Problem: No-load and short-circuit zero-phase impedances must be used to enter the
zero-phase data for a two-sided grounded transformer.
Solution: Select the appropriate input form for zero-phase sequence data.
October 2021 599

Technical Reference
E 2743 Export format does not support unbalanced elements. Cannot export.
Problem: Export format cannot recreate unbalanced elements.
Solution: Use a different export format.
E 2744 No negative sustained short circuit current

Problem: You have entered a negative sustained short circuit current.
Solution: Correct the sustained short circuit current.
E 2745 No negative amount of supplied customers

Problem: You have entered a negative number of supplied customers.
Solution: Correct the number of supplied customers.
E 2747 Harmonic number at resonance has to be larger than #.#

Problem: Harmonic numbers greater than #.# must have a resonance.
Solution: Enter a larger harmonic number for resonance.
E 2749 Reliability simulation doesn’t permit more than one supply source per node
Problem: Reliability calculations permit only one supply source per node.
Solution: Change the network topology.
E 2752 Shutdown not possible before establishment

Problem: The shutdown date is before the establishment date.
Solution: Correct the date.
E 2753 Referenced voltage is zero

Problem: The transformer’s reference node voltage is 0.0.
Solution: Enter a valid reference node voltage.
E 2758 Unable to determine reactive power or reactive power limit

Problem: Reactive power cannot be determined.
Solution: Check the input data. Maybe you entered a power factor of 0.0.
E 2759 Specified through power technically not possible

Problem: The two smaller or all three output loads have to be identical.
Solution: Correct the output loads.
E 2760 Specified supply source is no valid supply source

Problem: The indicated supply source is not a valid supply source.
Solution: Enter a valid supply source (not slack supply).
E 2761 Specified supply source has to have identical network group

Problem: The supply source entered in the network level data has to be in this
network level.
Solution: Correct the network level or the supply source data.
600 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2762 Defining a transfer power at network area data allows only one neighbour
network area
Problem: If a network area has more than one adjacent network area, the transfer
must be specified by means of network area transfer data.
Solution: Specify network area transfer data.
E 2763 Network area not specified

Problem: Network area transfer can only be between two different network areas.
Solution: Enter two different network areas.
E 2764 Network area specified identically

Problem: Network area transfer can only be between two different network areas.
Solution: Enter two different network areas.
E 2767 No-load current and iron losses not specified

Problem: For dynamic calculations, no-load zero-phase impedance refers to the no-
load positive-phase impedance.
Solution: Enter a no-load current and iron losses.
E 2771 Missing observation period specification

Problem: For network development calculations, you need to have an observation
period.
Solution: Enter an observation period.
E 2772 Conditional probability greater than 1.0

Problem: The conditional probability cannot be greater than 1.0.
Solution: Enter a value less than or equal to 1.0.
E 2775 Neutral point impedance is neither a common neutral point impedance nor
assigned to an element
Problem: There is no connection between the neutral point impedance and a network
element.
Solution: Assign the neutral point impedance to an element or specify this as
common neutral point impedance.
E 2776 Invalid harmonic number

Problem: The harmonic number is invalid.
Solution: Enter a valid harmonic number.
E 2777 Using quality X/R in harmonics data needs an inductance not equal to zero
Problem: Quality X/R cannot determine the impedance for the harmonic calculations
without inductance.
Solution: Enter a value for inductance or use another method to create the
impedance.
E 2778 Transformer for phase data are not allowed to be fed via a neutral point
Problem: Transformers for phase data measure current or voltage for a neutral point.
Solution: Enter data for a transformer that measures data from a terminal.
October 2021 601

Technical Reference
E 2781 Transformer controller has to have at least two positions

Problem: For controlling, PSS SINCAL needs at least two tap positions.
Solution: Enter the missing tap positions.
E 2782 Factors for resistance and inductivity equal to zero

Problem: When resistance and inductance are zero, no impedance can be
determined.
Solution: Enter factors not equal to zero.
E 2786 Characteristic curve has to start with 0.0/0.0

Problem: The first point of the characteristic curve has to be at the origin of the
coordinate.
Solution: Enter the missing point.
E 2787 3-phase delta autotransformer has to have identical controller position in each
phase
Problem: Technically only identical operation in all phases is possible.
Solution: Change the state of the tap position to fixed or node.
E 2789 Controller in combination with operating model not possible

Problem: The network element’s operating model is determined either by a model for
operating points or by controller data. It is impossible to do both at the same time.
Solution: Switch OFF either the controller data or the dynamics data.
E 2790 Exactly one inverter and one rectifier have to be assigned

Problem: The assignment for rectifier and inverter is incomplete.
Solution: Assign precisely one rectifier and one inverter.
E 2791 Converter type has to be a two-state model

Problem: Switching is impossible due to the simplified modeling of the serial DC
element.
Solution: Insert lines to carry out the desired action.
E 2792 Desired inverter DC voltage equal zero

Problem: The voltage to be reached at the inverter cannot be zero.
Solution: Enter a voltage greater than zero.
E 2793 Measurement data and switch time at serial DC element not allowed
Problem: The supplementary data entered are not permitted at serial DC elements.
Solution: Create an additional line for the supplementary data.
E 2795 Number of bridges has to be greater than or equal to 1

Problem: An AC/DC converter must have at least one bridge.
Solution: Enter a number greater than or equal to 1.
602 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2796 Element needs currents of harmonic current source entered in Ampere

Problem: The network element does not have any unique reference value for
harmonic currents, so currents entered have to be in amperes.
Solution: Enter the currents in amperes.
E 2797 A two-winding transformer has to be assigned

Problem: AC/DC converters must be assigned a two-winding transformer.
Solution: Assign a two-winding transformer.
E 2798 Primary resistance, secondary resistance or main reactance equal zero

Problem: One of the listed values is zero at a current transformer.
Solution: Enter a value not equal to zero.
E 2800 Mechanically coupled machine has to operate as generator

Problem: Mechanical coupling is only possible between machines operating as
generators.
Solution: Change how the machine works.
E 2802 Voltage has to fit with the voltage of the controlled node
Problem: The voltage of the supply source does not match the voltage of the
controlling node.
Solution: Correct the voltage of the supply source.
E 2803 Negative-phase sequence data only valid at symmetrical network elements

Problem: Negative-phase sequence data are only permitted at symmetrical network
elements.
Solution: Simulate the network element symmetrically.
E 2804 Coupling data not specified

Problem: Coupling data line type needs to have coupling data.
Solution: Enter coupling data.
E 2805 Specifying a harmonic current source and a harmonic voltage source is not
possible at identical frequency
Problem: Simultaneous entries for sources of harmonic current and harmonic voltage
at the same frequency are impossible.
Solution: Create a second element.
E 2806 CIGRE model in combination with coupling data not possible

Problem: The model you want is not possible in harmonic calculations.
Solution: Select another model.
E 2807 Impedance characteristics in combination with coupling data not possible

Problem: The model you want is not possible in harmonic calculations.
Solution: Select another model.
October 2021 603

Technical Reference
E 2808 Switching model not possible at 2-phase element

Problem: This switching model cannot be used with a 2-phase element.
Solution: Either use a different switching model or change the phase of the element.
E 2810 Element in phase '#.#' has to be set in phase '#.#'!

Problem: The current phase cannot yet be processed.
Solution: Enter the element in the suggested phases.
E 2812 Frequency equal to zero

Problem: The frequency indicated was zero.
Solution: Specify a frequency larger than zero.
E 2813 Different frequencies

Problem: A node has network elements with different frequencies.
Solution: Attach only network elements with same frequency to a node.
E 2815 Control characteristics not specified

Problem: When regulating transformers, transformer control characteristics also need
to be entered.
Solution: Specify transformer control characteristics.
E 2816 Error initializing coupling data

Problem: An error has been detected when initializing the coupling data.
Solution: Correct the coupling data.
E 2817 Project name not specified

Problem: No name has been assigned to the project.
Solution: Assign the name of a MAC file generated by LEIKA.
E 2818 Error during read of MAC file

Problem: The MAC file could not be read properly.
Solution: Use a file created by LEIKA.
E 2820 Different ripple control frequencies

Problem: A node has network elements connected to it with different ripple-control
frequencies.
Solution: Attach only network elements with same ripple-control frequency at a node.
E 2821 System # already assigned

Problem: The system has been assigned to the coupling data more than once.
Solution: Assign the system only once.
E 2822 Systems not assigned correctly

Problem: Not all systems have been assigned correctly to the coupling data.
Solution: Assign the systems correctly.
604 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2823 Project file does not have enough systems

Problem: Too many systems have been assigned to the coupling data.
Solution: Assign precisely the same number of systems that exist in the project file.
E 2825 A line with coupling data (including nodes) needs to have voltage as specified
in MAC file.
Problem: The lines within the coupling have different rated voltages.
Solution: Only enter lines with the same rated voltage.
E 2830 Coupled lines are connected to equal nodes

Problem: Couplings with the same starting/end nodes are not possible.
Solution: Enter a short line for this node.
E 2831 No connection to zero phase system

Problem: There is no connection to the zero-phase sequence.
Solution: Enter zero-phase sequence data at the connected elements.
E 2834 Neutral point ground impedance is equal to zero

Problem: Zero has been entered for the ground impedance.
Solution: Specify a ground impedance.
E 2836 Return line with coupling data not allowed

Problem: A return conductor cannot be simulated using coupling data.
Solution: Change the entry for the phase or the impedance.
E 2837 Zone # not available

Problem: The specified zone is not available for the protection device.
Solution: Set the direction/status of the zone to "Off".
E 2838 Saturated subtransient reactance has to be less than saturated transient

reactance
Problem: The indicated saturated reactances are not correct.
Solution: Correct the reactances.
E 2839 Position #.# multiple defined at transformer controller

Problem: The transformer tap must not have multiple identical tap positions.
Solution: Check the tap positions on the transformer tap.
E 2843 A connector is not allowed as external element in a model

Problem: Nodes of connections collapse. The tapping of data is therefore not
possible.
Solution: Change the line type.
E 2844 AC/DC converter type has to be identical

Problem: The operating method of the AC/DC converters of a serial DC element
must be identical.
Solution: Correct the operating method.
October 2021 605

Technical Reference
E 2846 Teleprotection: In case of defining a group the total receiver data have to be
identical
Problem: The logical output of a signal link can only act on the input of a tripping unit
of a protection device.
Solution: Correct the receiver data.
E 2847 Controlled voltages do not match

Problem: The controlled voltage was often specified and is not identical.
Solution: Ensure that the controlled voltage is identical.
E 2848 Asynchronous machine with block data must be connected uniquely to a

transformer
Problem: According to VDE regulations block data must always be entered together
for transformers and asynchronous machines.
Solution: Ensure that the asynchronous machine is connected to a single
transformer.
E 2854 No or isolated nodes selected for filter design

Problem: There is no valid node for the placing of filters.
Solution: Change the node selection.
E 2855 Unable to determine harmonic voltage limit

Problem: There is no maximum harmonic voltage to determine the safety margin.
Solution: Change the type of evaluation or extend the voltage limits.
E 2856 Island operation only at symmetrical element possible

Problem: Only a symmetrical element can take on voltage stability in island
operation.
Solution: Choose a different element for island operation.
E 2866 Auto transformer not allowed at splitted winding transformer

Problem: An autotransformer for a transformer with a split winding is not yet
available.
Solution: Use star windings.
E 2868 Power priority reactive power not possible with power flow type active power
and voltage
Problem: The selected power priority is not possible.
Solution: Change the power priority or power flow type.
E 2871 System # not assigned to a line

Problem: The designated system of coupling data is not assigned to any line.
Solution: Assign the system to a line.
E 2901 MATRIX: Not symmetrical

606 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 2876 For this protective device, the earthing impedance factors R0 and X0 cannot be
applied
Problem: This input type of ground impedance factors is not provided for this
protection device.
Solution: Please change the input type of earth impedance factors.
E 2878 Transformer tap characteristic is not assigned

Problem: Transformer controller was activated, but the characteristic curve was not
assigned.
Solution: Check the controller data of the transformer.
E 2902 MATRIX: Not of type Cnode

E 2903 MATRIX: Not of type Celem

E 2904 MATRIX: Object list is empty

E 2905 MATRIX: Size of solution vector is wrong – # instead of #

E 2910 PIC: Error getting type #

E 2911 PIC: Unknown type #

E 2912 PIC: Error setting type #

E 2913 Network topology modified. Network has to be reloaded from database.

Problem: A calculation method changed the network topology.
Solution: Reload the network from the database.
E 2914 Power specification at controller incorrect. Additional power is zero.

Problem: The controller data are not correct.
Solution: Specify additional power in the controller data.
October 2021 607

Technical Reference
E 2915 Power specification at controller incorrect. Minimal position power is less than
nominal power.
Problem: The controller data are not correct.
Solution: Correct the minimum controller position or the rated power.
E 2916 A line assigned coupled line data is not allowed to have a parallel system
Problem: The coupling must be entered individually line for line.
Solution: Change the line data.
E 2917 A line modeled with coupling data is not allowed to have a parallel system
Problem: The coupling must be entered individually line for line.
E 2918 Coupled line data and modeling with coupling data not possible
Problem: The coupling for the zero-phase sequence is already in the coupling data.
E 2919 A line assigned coupled line data has to be modeled as cable or overhead line
Problem: Entries for coupling in the zero-phase sequence are not possible.
E 2921 Network element not possible in network level for two-conductor networks
Problem: A supply source with a constant voltage between two phases is not
possible.
Solution: Place the supply source in a three-phase network level and supply the two-
conductor network via a transformer.
E 2922 Restricted ground fault protection without assigning or assigning more than
one neutral point current transformer
Problem: A neutral point differential protection contains precisely one ground current
transformer.
Solution: Assign precisely one ground fault transformer within the differential
protection group.
E 2924 Formula Protection Device Characteristics: #.#

Problem: The protection device type is not correctly configured.
Solution: Change the configuration of the protection device type.
E 3001 SC: Illegal object on active list

E 3002 SC: Count of nodes # does not match #

608 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3004 Kappa value could not be evaluated

Problem: Unable to determine Kappa values for calculations of surge current.
E 3006 SC: Node not prepared for short circuit

E 3007 Zero-phase impedance not specified or larger #.# Ohm

Problem: The zero-phase impedance is either not specified or too large. When
unbalanced networks are recreated, the zero-phase impedance cannot be too large.
Solution: Correct the zero-phase impedance.
E 3008 No fault node found

Problem: The short circuit has no node with a fault (c value).
Solution: Enter short circuit data at the network levels.
E 3009 Fault node is isolated

Problem: Current and voltage distribution cannot be determined for an isolated node.
Solution: Select a node that is not isolated.
E 3011 Unable to consider element according to VDE

Problem: This element cannot be considered in a correct manner at a unit generator
node.
Solution: Delete the element.
E 3012 Element not connected in all necessary phases

Problem: For this fault, the node has to be supplied for multiple phases.
Solution: Check and increase the connections to the supply source.
E 3013 Voltage is going up – please check zero sequence data

Problem: Voltage is increasing.
Solution: Check the zero-phase sequence data.
E 3016 Short circuit is solved with phase data and not with component data
Problem: As ground data was entered in the network, the calculation can no longer
be carried out strictly according to the standard with component data.
Solution: Integrate the ground data in the zero-phase sequence data.
E 3101 Power flow: no convergence – break after # iterations

Problem: The power flow calculations do not converge. The voltage in the network
will fail from overloading.
Solution: Activate the conversion of fixed loads in impedance loads. Turn off parts of
the network to find the overload. Check the transformer output and short circuit
voltage.
Check line impedances and lengths.
Check operating points of the generators.
Check voltages of generators.
October 2021 609

Technical Reference
E 3102 Power flow: unknown module #

E 3104 Diakoptics model(s) allowed only in admittance matrix calculation

Problem: Diakoptics models are only supported in the admittance matrix power flow
procedure.
Solution: Use the admittance matrix power flow procedure.
E 3121 Current iteration: mesh error

E 3130 Node belongs to more than one graphical supply area

Problem: A node belongs to more than one graphical supply area.
Solution: Change the position of the graphical supply area.
E 3131 Operating series incorrect

Problem: The operating series contains incorrect data.
Solution: Check and change the factors, power and time entries for the series.
E 3132 Time distance of operating points has to be less than 1 year

Problem: The time between the operating points has to be less than one year).
Solution: Check the input for times or insert an additional operating point.
E 3133 Network breakdown at #.#

Problem: For this date, the network cannot be calculated.
Solution: Check the development series or modify the network.
E 3140 Load assignment stopped after # iterations

Problem: The required accuracy could not be attained within this number of
iterations.
Solution: Increase either the number of iterations or the power accuracy.
E 3141 There are no measurement data for load assignment

Problem: To trim loads, measurements must be entered.
Solution: Enter measurements.
E 3142 For load assignment, no elements were assigned to the measured data
Problem: Trimming is only possible if loads have measurements.
Solution: Create loads with measurements.
E 3144 Load measured values or network elements specified more than once
Problem: At least two measuring devices have been connected to the same
consumers or branches.
Solution: Check measurement directions and measuring devices locations.
610 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3146 Phase specification does not match network phase specification

Problem: The measurement data contain phase data inconsistent with the network
data.
Solution: Correct phase entry.
E 3164 No valid operating points specified

Problem: The controlled voltage was often specified and is not identical.
Solution: Ensure that the controlled voltage is identical.
E 3165 Type of operating series incorrect

Problem: The profile was assigned with an incorrect function.
Solution: Ensure that you have selected a valid function.
E 3201 Unknown fault definition in multiple fault data

Problem: The error message for calculating multiple faults is unknown.
E 3202 No active item for multiple fault

Problem: This network has neither a generator nor a motor.
Solution: Create a generator or motor in this network.
E 3203 No multiple fault package

Problem: This network has no error messages with package entries to calculate
multiple faults.
Solution: Create an error message with package entry for this network.
E 3204 No viewed network item available

Problem: This network does not have any viewed network element. Calculating
multiple faults provides only results for viewed network elements.
Solution: Designate a network element as a filtered network element.
E 3205 NOTIMPL multiple fault on line not implemented

Problem: The indicated type of fault in the line has not been implemented yet.
E 3206 Unknown phase definition in multiple fault data

Problem: The phase entry for calculating multiple faults is unknown.
E 3207 Phase definition does not match fault definition in multiple fault data
Problem: The number of phases in the phase definition does not match the number
of phases in the fault definition.
Solution: Correct the definition for the phases or faults.
E 3208 Fault at generator or motor node not allowed

Problem: You cannot have a fault at a generator node in multiple fault calculations.
Solution: Add a short line between fault node and generator or delete multiple fault
entry at generator node.
October 2021 611

Technical Reference
E 3209 Unable to connect to fault event

Problem: Fault observation cannot be assigned to the fault event.
Solution: Check fault events and assignments.
E 3210 No fault observation connected to fault events

Problem: Multiple fault calculations could not detect any fault events attached to the
fault observations.
Solution: Assign fault events to fault observations.
E 3211 No ripple control transmitter

Problem: The network contains no ripple control transmitters. For ripple control
calculations, you need at least one ripple control transmitter.
Solution: Create a ripple control transmitter.
E 3212 Distance has to be between 0 and 100 percent

Problem: The indicated relative distance is invalid.
Solution: Enter a relative distance between 0 and 100 percent.
E 3213 Fault at line with coupling data not allowed

Problem: A line with coupling data cannot have a fault.
Solution: Divide the line and set a fault at the node.
E 3214 No connection to conductor L#

Problem: The specified fault phase is not present.
Solution: Change the fault phase or the network topology.
E 3221 HAR: Illegal object on active list

E 3225 Only one resonance network per topologically separated subnetwork is

allowed
Problem: Harmonic calculations can work only with a single active resonance
network.
Solution: Deactivate or delete all resonance networks except for one.
E 3227 No resonance network values are specified

E 3229 Consumer not prepared for calculation

Problem: No memory assigned for the harmonics data of one consumer.
612 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3230 Neither frequency characteristics nor harmonic current or voltage supply

found
Problem: This network has no frequency course and no harmonic current or voltage
supply. Harmonic calculations will not return results.
Solution: Either add network element frequency response to the network or define
harmonic current or voltage supply.
E 3231 No starting up asynchronous machine available

Problem: This network has no accelerating asynchronous machine. Only machines
with load characteristics, speed current characteristics and speed torque
characteristics are considered accelerating asynchronous machines.
Solution: Complete the machine’s characteristic data or create a machine and enter
characteristic data.
E 3232 Interpolation in current course impossible

Problem: Current motor torque is outside the torque entered in the speed current
characteristics.
Solution: Correct current characteristics or the number of pole pairs for the motor.
E 3233 Interpolation in load course impossible

Problem: Current motor torque is outside the torque entered in the load
characteristics.
Solution: Correct the load characteristics or the number of pole pairs for the motor.
E 3234 Interpolation in torque course impossible

Problem: Current motor torque is outside the torque entered in the torque
characteristics.
Solution: Correct torque ^^ or the number of pole pairs for the motor.
E 3235 No intersection point with the Heyland circle

Problem: The concentric motor circuit does not intersect the Heyland circle for the
motor.
Solution: Check motor data.
E 3236 Intersection point with the Heyland circle is under the X-axis
Problem: The intersecting point of the concentric motor circle with the Heyland circle
of the motor is below the X-axis.
Solution: Check motor data.
E 3237 Load torque characteristics for motor not found

Problem: An accelerating motor has no load torque characteristics.
Solution: Enter a characteristic curve.
E 3238 Not all asynchronous machines started

Problem: Not all motors designated as accelerating have started.
Solution: Enter a later stopping time in the parameters for the motor start-up
calculations.
October 2021 613

Technical Reference
E 3239 Asynchronous machine has not been started

Problem: The motor designated as accelerating has a start-up time after the stopping
time for the motor’s start-up calculations.
Solution: Change starting time of motor or stopping time for motor’s start-up
calculations.
E 3240 Synchronous speed for asynchronous machine not reached

Problem: The motor designated as accelerating has not yet completely accelerated.
Solution: Change stopping time for motor’s start-up calculations.
E 3241 Start-up current characteristics for motor not found

Problem: The start-up current characteristics for motor was not found.
E 3242 Inertia less than, or equal to zero

Problem: The inertia of the accelerating motor is zero.
Solution: Enter the inertia.
E 3243 Identical characteristics for wye and delta

Problem: Start-up calculations for the motor have the same characteristic curve for
the motor's wye and delta connections. A characteristic curve can only be for one
circuit.
Solution: Enter either two different characteristics for wye or delta connections or only
the characteristics for one of the two circuits. If there are no characteristics for a wye
circuit, PSS SINCAL multiplies these values by one-third of the delta characteristics.
If there are no characteristics for a delta circuit, PSS SINCAL multiplies these values
by three times the wye characteristics.
E 3245 Motor torque less than load torque after #.# seconds at speed #.# 1/min
Problem: Star or delta start-up has a motor torque under the load torque. The
switching current has not yet been attained, you have changed to delta connection.
The motor cannot start like this.
Solution: Check motor and load data.
E 3246 No torque curve available

Problem: The characteristic curve of the motor‘s torque current was not found.
E 3247 Rated speed #.# [1/min] does not correspond with pole pair number # [1]
Problem: Motor data are incorrect.
Solution: Correct the motor data.
E 3248 Maximum current less than or equal to 0.0

Problem: The maximum current for the current limit at start-up is less than or equal to
0.0.
Solution: Correct the current.
614 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3249 Autotransformer data used for current limiting impossible

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot determine any pre-switching impedance from the
entries for the autotransformer or the time entered is 0.0.
Solution: Change the autotransformer data.
E 3250 Capacitor data used for current limiting impossible

Problem: Pre-switching impedance cannot be determined from entries for the
capacitor battery or the time entered is 0.0.
Solution: Change capacitor battery data.
E 3255 Motor torque at speed #.# [1/min] is less than load torque
Problem: Motor torque is insufficient.
Solution: Check motor data or use a stronger motor.
E 3256 Torque is negative at speed #.# [pu] or #.# [1/min]

Problem: Torque must be positive at this speed.
Solution: Correct entry for speed or torque.
E 3257 Torque is positive at speed #.# [pu] or #.# [1/min]

Problem: Torque must be negative at this speed.
Solution: Correct entry for speed or torque.
E 3258 Voltage break down to less than #.# percent

Problem: Voltage at node has collapsed.
Solution: Change power flow procedure. Reduce power or strengthen inlet pipe.
E 3260 Harmonic current against large impedance at harmonic number #.#

Problem: Harmonic-current supply causes at the indicated harmonic number a very
large increase in voltage.
Solution: Check and correct the impedances of the network elements.
E 3261 Motor operation needs speed lower than and generator operation needs speed
higher than synchronous speed
Problem: The speed does not match the work method.
Solution: Correct the speed.
E 3273 No time series data available

Problem: No consumer with time series data detected in this network.
Solution: Enter time series data for at least one consumer.
E 3280 No fuse in fuse area

Problem: There is no fuse for the fuse dimensioning.
Solution: Add fuses for the fuse dimensioning.
E 3281 Fuse area has more than # fuses

Problem: There are more than the fuses shown for fuse dimensioning in the fuse
area defined by the limiting node.
Solution: Reduce the size of the protection zone.
October 2021 615

Technical Reference
E 3282 Feeding side without fuse

Problem: All departing branches need a protection device for fuse dimensioning.
Solution: Create fuses for fuse dimensioning.
E 3293 Unable to determine permissible short circuit current (time period one second)
Problem: The protection device cannot determine the damage limit.
Solution: Check the one-second current at the protection device or at the built-in
element of the protection device.
E 3294 Only one fuse per terminal possible!

Problem: Only one fuse is permitted per terminal.
Solution: Check the number of fuses.
E 3296 Unable to link element loading characteristic with type current to element
Problem: A data link could not be resolved.
Solution: Check/change the element and type of the characteristic curve.
E 3297 Unable to link element loading characteristic with type apparent power to
element
Problem: A data link could not be resolved.
Solution: Check/change the element and type of the characteristic curve.
E 3301 No protection device available

Problem: This network has no protection devices for protection observation.
Protection devices are needed for protection observation.
Solution: Add protection devices.
E 3302 No fault for protection

Problem: This network has no fault location entries for protection observation. Fault
location entries are needed for protection observation.
Solution: Make fault location entries for protection observation.
E 3303 At least one protection device is tripping at normal load operation

Problem: At least one protection device is tripping due to the load current at normal
network conditions.
Solution: Check data for protection devices and network circuitry.
E 3304 At least one protection device is tripping power flow operation of remaining
network
Problem: At least one protection device is tripping with the load current after clearing
a fault in the rest of the network.
Solution: Check data for protection devices and network circuit.
E 3310 Evaluating the tripping time of at least one protection device failed
Problem: Unable to determine tripping time of a protection device.
Solution: Check data for protection devices.
616 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3311 No protection device available for generating a selective distance tripping

diagram
Problem: This network has no protection devices for generating the tripping diagram.
Solution: Designate at least one protection device for generating the tripping
diagram.
E 3312 Error in step for calculating switch off time

Problem: Unable to determine the tripping time of active tripping step.
Solution: Check settings of protection device.
E 3313 Key $$$: range does not exist

Problem: There are no protection device settings.
E 3314 Key $$$ '$$$': value out of range. Min #.# Max #.# Value #.#
Problem: One setting is outside the range of settings.
Solution: Correct setting.
E 3315 Key $$$ '$$$': value less than or equal to 0, value set to #.#
Problem: One setting in the range is zero. This is not permitted.
Solution: Correct the setting.
E 3319 No protection devices determine settings in active network

Problem: The network still has no protection devices to determine the settings.
Solution: Create protection devices to calculate the settings.
E 3320 Protection device has no settings

Problem: Unable to assign settings to a protection device.
E 3321 Unable to determine protection device type

Problem: Unable to determine type of protection device.
E 3322 Unable to determine rated current for phase-fault tripping

Problem: Unable to determine the rated current for the tripping data for phase-fault
tripping.
Solution: Check the data for protection devices.
E 3323 Unable to determine rated current for ground-fault tripping

Problem: Unable to determine the rated current for determining the tripping data for
ground fault tripping.
Solution: Check the data for protection devices.
October 2021 617

Technical Reference
E 3326 Connector protection device not yet implemented

Problem: The standard protection database cannot have connector protection
devices. These protection devices can only be added externally. Tripping time
calculations have not been implemented at this time.
E 3328 Differential protection via topologically separated networks not possible

Problem: Topologically separated subnetworks cannot be used for differential
protection.
Solution: Check the protection zones.
E 3329 Unable to determine tripping area

Problem: PSS SINCAL could not determine the tripping area for a distance protection
device zone.
Solution: Correct the settings.
E 3332 Protection device without characteristics

Problem: Protection device type database could not detect any tripping
characteristics.
Solution: Add these data to the protection device type database.
E 3333 Only one fault observation per line possible

Problem: There is more than one fault observation on a line.
Solution: Divide up the line.
E 3334 Settings for phase and ground must have the same protection device type
Problem: When phase and ground settings are entered separately, the same type of
protection device has to be used.
Solution: Correct the type of protection device.
E 3337 Due to the distance specified at fault observation opposite terminal is reached.
This is not possible in dynamic simulation.
Problem: Fault observations for dynamic calculations cannot reach terminals on the
opposite side.
Solution: Create the fault observation at the terminal on the opposite side.
E 3338 Currents for current limiting must be greater than zero

Problem: The currents for the current limit must be greater than zero.
Solution: Enter currents greater than zero.
E 3339 Invalid specification for current limit. Check minimum and maximum values.
Problem: There is an error in the entry for currents in current limiting. Maybe the
minimum and maximum values have been switched.
Solution: Correct the currents for current limiting.
E 3340 No contingency data specified

Problem: The contingency analysis needs data.
Solution: Enter contingency data in the network areas.
618 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3341 Characteristic curve without value pairs

Problem: You entered a characteristic curve without value pairs to specify the curve.
Solution: Add the value pairs.
E 3344 More than one voltage protection setting specified

Problem: As only one voltage protection setting can be entered, the entry of several
setting values is invalid.
Solution: Delete the unnecessary setting values.
E 3345 More than one frequency protection setting specified

Problem: As only one frequency protection setting can be entered, the entry of
several setting values is invalid.
Solution: Delete the unnecessary setting values.
E 3346 Current transformer not specified

Problem: The input variables of the protection device cannot be determined.
Solution: Enter the missing transformers.
E 3347 Voltage transformer not specified

Problem: The input variables of the protection device cannot be determined.
E 3351 Protection device does not support this measurement type

Problem: The measurement type you specified is not supported by this type of
protection device.
Solution: Correct the entry for measurement type in the protection device input data.
E 3360 Lines modeled with coupling data need to have parts with identical length
Problem: Lines with coupling data can only be divided into identical lengths.
Solution: Change the data for the fault observation of the lines.
E 3378 Zone factor equal to zero

Problem: Either the selective grading factor for the first, second or third zone is zero,
or the selective grading factor for automatic reclosure and teleprotection is zero, and
this zone is active.
Solution: Enter a selective grading factor other than zero.
E 3379 Tripping time equal to zero

Problem: The tripping time for the first, second or third zone is zero.
Solution: Enter a tripping time.
E 3381 Strategy to evaluate settings not yet implemented

Problem: The strategy selected for determining the settings of distance protection
devices has not been implemented yet.
Solution: Change the entry for strategy in the supplementary data to Distal or line
impedances.
October 2021 619

Technical Reference
E 3382 No protection devices to determine settings

Problem: There are no protection devices with predefined area settings in the
network.
Solution: Add this type of protection device.
E 3383 Error exporting DVG data

Problem: There was an error exporting DVG data.
Solution: Check other error messages. If you cannot find any reason for the errors,
contact the product support.
E 3384 Primary boundary impedance equal to 0.0 Ohm

Problem: The primary boundary impedance is 0.0 ohm.
E 3385 No pickup in first zone – unnecessary device

Problem: There is no protection device energizing in the first zone.
Solution: Check the network topology.
E 3387 Zone # has to be active

Problem: To determine settings for distance protection devices, the appropriate zone
must be switched on.
Solution: Modify the input data of the zone.
E 3390 Compensation power is only evaluated for transformer lower voltage nodes in
activated network levels
Problem: Since there are no transformers in the network or no network levels are
switched ON for the compensation power calculations, PSS SINCAL cannot evaluate
the compensation power.
Solution: Create transformers or modify network level data.
E 3391 Compensation to ground not possible

Problem: In a network with unbalanced elements, you need to compensate to the
ground. The transformer does not, however, have a ground connection.
Solution: Create a ground connection.
E 3392 Primary settings not possible

Problem: Protection device can only have secondary settings.
Solution: Change the setting type to secondary.
E 3396 Differential protection zone allows only one transformer, only one variable
serial element or only one DC serial element
Problem: The differential protection cannot protect the elements contained in the
protection zone.
Solution: Divide up the protection zone.
E 3398 Differential protection zone contains less than two protection devices
Problem: At least two protection devices are required for differential protection.
Solution: Add the missing protection data.
620 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3402 Network element not allowed in chosen simulation

Problem: The network element is not permitted for the selected calculation type.
Solution: The network contains network elements that are not permitted for this
calculation type. Perhaps you are trying to calculate a gas network with water
network (or similar) calculations.
E 3403 Node not available in supply circuit

Problem: Unable to find this node in the supply line.
Solution: You have connected a network element in the supply line to a node found
only in return lines. Check the entries for the circuit.
E 3404 Node not available in return circuit

Problem: The node in the return line does not exist.
Solution: You have connected a network element in the return line to a node found
only in supply lines. Check the entries for the circuit.
E 3411 Line length equal to zero

Problem: The line length is zero.
Solution: Specify a line length.
E 3412 Curve factor equal to zero

Problem: The curve factor is zero.
Solution: Specify a curve factor.
E 3413 Diameter equal to zero

Problem: The side diameter is zero.
Solution: Specify an inside diameter.
E 3414 Altitude at start node not equal to altitude at end node

Problem: The elevation at the inlet node is not the same as the elevation at the outlet
node. This is only permitted in lines.
Solution: Check the node data, and maybe create an additional line.
E 3415 Network element has to be in supply and return cycle

Problem: The network element must be in the supply and return lines.
Solution: Check the entries for the circuit.
E 3416 Network element only useful in supply or return circuit

Problem: This network element only makes sense in a loop, otherwise it creates a
lack of convergence in the calculations.
Solution: Check the entries for the circuit.
E 3417 Pump data incorrect

Problem: This curve of pump characteristics is not possible.
Solution: Check the pump type and the pump speed.
October 2021 621

Technical Reference
E 3418 Temperature of 0 C. not allowed

Problem: A supply or return temperature with 0 degrees C. has been entered in the
heating/cooling network calculations.
Solution: Check the entry for temperature.
E 3419 A density of #.# kg/m3 is not possible for a gas network

Problem: The value entered for density is much too large.
Solution: Correct the value for density.
E 3421 Limits for flow or power are identical. Limits are ignored.
Problem: To stay within the limits, the values for limits need to be different.
Solution: Enter different limits.
E 3422 Limits for flow or power are specified inversely. Limits are flipped.
Problem: The minimum value is greater than the maximum value.
Solution: Enter a minimum value less than the maximum value.
E 3423 #.# - #.# exceeds limit values: #.# = #.# #.# [Min = #.# Max = #.#]
Problem: The output value has to be within the indicated limits.
Solution: Correct the output value or the limits.
E 3427 Pump characteristics data not assigned

Problem: No pump characteristics curve has been selected.
Solution: Select a pump characteristics curve.
E 3450 Error importing data at line # containing #.#

Problem: There has been an error importing data to the identified line.
Solution: Check the data being imported.
E 3501 Pipe simulation – no convergence – break after # iterations

Problem: The pipe calculations do not converge.
Solution: Switch off parts of the network to find overloading.
Check pump data. Check pipe length and inside diameter.
E 3502 Temperature evaluation – no convergence – break after # iterations

Problem: The temperature determination does not converge.
Solution: Check heating conduction losses.
Check data from temperature regulator.
E 3506 No operating point or time available in geo-stationary simulation

Problem: Geo-stationary calculations do not have any operating points or time
settings.
Solution: Specify operating series or time series.
E 3508 Unable to close valve during geo-stationary simulation

Problem: A valve opened in output state cannot be closed in the geo-stationary
calculations.
Solution: Close the valve in the output state.
622 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3514 Networks connected via nodes with different altitudes

Problem: Networks are connected via nodes with different altitudes.
Solution: Connect the networks to nodes with the same altitude.
E 3516 Fire hydrant is isolated

Problem: The hydrant is isolated.
Solution: Change the network configuration.
E 3517 No nodes selected for fire water calculations

Problem: No nodes have been selected for the fire water calculations.
Solution: Switch ON the fire water calculation data for the network areas.
E 3518 No fire hydrants selected for fire water calculations

Problem: No fire hydrants have been selected for the fire water calculations.
Solution: Select hydrants before you calculate fire water.
E 3519 Unable to keep specified operating limits

Problem: The determined operating point is outside the limits.
Solution: Correct the entries for the operating point.
E 3520 Operating group must have 1 element and 1 node

Problem: Operating group must have exactly one node and one element.
Solution: Reduce or increase the operating group to one element and one node.
E 3600 Missing record #.# at element #.#

Problem: This record is missing in the interface.
Solution: Check the interface data.
E 3650 Error exporting DVG data

Problem: There was an error exporting the DVG data.
Solution: Check more error messages. If you cannot find any reason for the errors,
E 3652 Error exporting group data

Problem: There was an error exporting group data.
Solution: Check the group data.
E 3653 Import of type #.# not supported

Problem: Importing for Type #.# is not supported yet.
Solution: Create an interface that does not contain this type.
E 3654 Import is for version #.# data is of version #.#

Problem: Import is for a specific version of the data.
Solution: Check the version of the data.
October 2021 623

Technical Reference
E 3655 Type #.#: only R1, L1 and C1 or R1, L2 and C3 is imported

Problem: Only data entered from the 3 RLC blocks of the data exchange format are
imported.
Solution: Create a new PSS SINCAL network element with by summing elements.
E 3656 Type #.#: import is parallel to network element with switched terminal
Problem: PSS SINCAL does not allow importing attachments to the terminal. This
creates a parallel element.
Solution: Correct this after the network topology has been implemented.
E 3658 Equivalent serial element imported as a line

Problem: No more imports are possible at this time.
Solution: Check the imported element.
E 3659 Equivalent shunt element imported as a network feeder

Problem: Another import is impossible at this time.
E 3660 Equivalent shunt element imported as a load

Problem: Another import is impossible at this time.
E 3661 Equivalent feed must have P and Q constant

Problem: An equivalent feed must have P and Q constant in the interface to be
applied.
Solution: Change the operating point.
E 3662 Record #: unable to import node – Type 1

Problem: Importing UCTE data impossible.
E 3663 Record #: node already exists

Problem: The UCTE interface has a double entry for a node.
Solution: Correct the interface file.
E 3664 Record #: non-existent node

Problem: The UCTE interface has an invalid node.
E 3665 Record #: non-existent transformer

Problem: The UCTE interface has an invalid transformer.
E 3667 No import of controller-dependent data

Problem: Controller-dependent data cannot be imported.
Solution: Check and extend the data in PSS SINCAL.
624 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3668 Node code structure not corresponding to UCTE specification. Please check
the short name.
Problem: Short name does not meet UCTE format specification.
Solution: Adapt short names to meet specification.
E 3669 Voltage level code different from voltage level. Please check the short name.
Problem: Voltage level encoded in the short name is not the same as voltage level
set at the node.
Solution: Change either short name or node voltage level.
E 3700 Error in reliability

Problem: There is an error in the reliability calculations.
Solution: See the log file for more detailed information on this error and how to
correct it.
E 3702 Invalid installation directory for reliability or dynamics '$$$'

Problem: An invalid directory has been found.
Solution: Check the directory or contact the product support.
E 3703 Unable to create reliability or dynamics export data '$$$'

Problem: There was an error creating the reliability export structure '$$$'.
Solution: Check more error messages. If you cannot find any reason for the error,
E 3704 Reliability module '$$$' not available

Problem: There is no external reliability module.
E 3705 Error executing reliability or dynamics module '$$$'

Problem: There was an error starting the reliability module.
E 3706 There is no annual load duration curve

Problem: There is no annual load duration curve.
Solution: Add an annual load duration curve.
E 3708 No results in reliability interface

Problem: The reliability calculations do not have any available results.
Solution: Check the direct messages of the reliability calculations, or contact the
product support.
E 3709 Element overloaded at base power flow

Problem: Elements are overloaded in base power flow.
Solution: Modify the concerned elements.
E 3710 Error executing external program '$$$'

Problem: During execution of the external program, an error has occurred.
Solution: Check further error messages.
October 2021 625

Technical Reference
E 3713 No values specified for diagram output

Problem: Dynamic calculations cannot create output diagrams.
Solution: Define values for dynamics output diagrams.
E 3714 Time sequence of disturbances or switching actions not possible

Problem: You have indicated contradictory times for fault data or switching.
Solution: Correct the entries for times.
E 3715 Reference data for dynamics result diagrams incorrect or defined more than
once
Problem: You have entered impossible reference data or the same reference data
more than once.
Solution: Correct the reference data.
E 3716 Simultaneous start/end of fault or switching not possible in dynamics

Problem: Starting or stopping switching or faults Is not possible in dynamics
calculations.
Solution: Change the time entries times for the switching or faults.
E 3718 There is no active synchronous machine in the network

Problem: Stability limits can only be determined for synchronous machines.
Solution: Create a synchronous machine.
E 3720 Minimum rotor angle has to be less than 0.0 degree and maximum rotor angle
has to be larger than 0.0 degree
Problem: There has been an error exporting data to PSS NETOMAC.
Solution: Check the other error messages.
E 3725 Network element modeling in unbalanced networks not implemented for

electromagnetic transient
Problem: The program cannot simulate network elements for electromagnetic
transients yet.
Solution: Select another type of simulation.
E 3726 Network overloaded at base power flow

Problem: Elements in the base power flow are already overloaded or the voltage
limits have been exceeded.
Solution: Increase the voltage limits or modify network element data to comply with
the voltage limits and assure that there are no overloads.
E 3728 Assigned model is not a speed controller

Problem: The assigned model could not be recognized as a BOSL model for a speed
controller.
Solution: Check the structure of the speed controller.
626 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3729 Assigned model is not a voltage controller

Problem: The assigned model could not be recognized as a BOSL model for a
voltage controller.
Solution: Check the structure of the voltage controller.
E 3730 Assigned model is not a power system stabilizer

Problem: The assigned model could not be recognized as a BOSL model for power
system stabilizer.
Solution: Check the structure of the power system stabilizer.
E 3731 Voltage controller has no input of a power system stabilizer

Problem: The attached voltage controller still has no inlet for the signal of a power
system stabilizer.
Solution: Add the missing inlet at the voltage controller.
E 3732 Assigned model is not a voltage controller for a doubly fed induction generator
Problem: The doubly feeding asynchronous generator has a special voltage
controller.
Solution: Assign a Type U_DFIG voltage controller.
E 3733 Voltage controller has no input for a minimum excitation limiter

Problem: The attached voltage controller still has no input for the signal of a minimum
excitation limiter.
Solution: Add the missing input to the voltage controller.
E 3734 Voltage controller has no input for a maximum excitation limiter

Problem: The attached voltage controller still has no input for the signal of a
maximum excitation limiter.
Solution: Add the missing input to the voltage controller.
E 3735 Power flow type has to correlate with machine model due to type of input data
from dynamic parameters
Problem: The work method does not match the machine model. The power flow type
DFIG also requires dynamic input data for the DFIG.
Solution: Correct the power flow type or the input data from dynamic parameters.
E 3736 Assigned model is not an operating state model

Problem: The assigned model is not an operating state model.
Solution: Assign a variable PQ, variable I or variable Y model.
E 3737 A DFIG needs a speed controller

Problem: A DFIG requires a speed controller for dynamics.
Solution: Assign a speed controller.
E 3738 Assigned model is not a limiter

Problem: The assigned model is not a limiter for the voltage controller.
Solution: Assign a limiter model for a voltage controller.
October 2021 627

Technical Reference
E 3740 Assigned model is not a COMP controller

Problem: The assigned model is not a COMP controller.
Solution: Replace the model used in dynamics with a COMP controller model.
E 3743 Protection device at auxiliary node without switching for reliability not allowed
Problem: Areas for auxiliary nodes without switching must not extend beyond
protection zones.
Solution: Change the reliability type of the node.
E 3744 Group for auxiliary node without switching is not in the same function group
Problem: The area of the auxiliary node without switching goes beyond a function
group.
Solution: Change the function group or types of the nodes.
E 3750 Error exporting data to PSS NETOMAC

Problem: There has been an error exporting data to PSS NETOMAC.
Solution: Check the other error messages.
E 3751 Zigzag vector group not supported for PSS Netomac export
Problem: Unique zigzag vectors cannot be exported.
Solution: Modify the vector group.
E 3752 Maximally # parallel lines can be exported

Problem: The maximum number of parallel lines for export has been exceeded.
Solution: Reduce the number.
E 3753 Characteristics need # coordinates at maximum

Problem: You have exceeded the maximum number of coordinates for exporting to
PSS NETOMAC.
Solution: Reduce the number of coordinates.
E 3754 Controlling has to be done by an individual model in dynamics simulation

Problem: There is no analogous behavior in dynamic calculations for controlling
current or the voltage or power factor.
Solution: Change the operating point or switch control OFF.
E 3755 Internal reactance, additional rotation and dependent short circuit voltage are
not supported in Netomac export
Problem: These entries are not supported when you export to PSS NETOMAC.
Solution: Set the entries to zero.
E 3780 Asynchronous machine not found

Problem: Could not find the asynchronous machine to be exported for motor
identification.
628 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3781 Torque characteristic of rated operating circuitry not found

Problem: Could not find the torque characteristics for the rated operating circuitry.
Solution: Either check the rated operating circuitry or enter torque characteristics.
E 3783 Network Reduction needs identical frequency at all network levels

Problem: Network reduction can only be performed for a single network frequency.
Solution: Modify the network so that there is only one frequency.
E 3786 The external element of the macro is ignored

Problem: The element used in the macro is inactive.
Solution: Activate or remove the element.
E 3787 The external element has to be a line with a capacitance of zero

Problem: Only data from lines without capacitances can be determined.
Solution: Create this kind of line for determining the data.
E 3788 Controller imported at side 1

Problem: According to UCTE regulations all transformer controller data is always on
side 2. The optional voltage refers only to side 1. The controller is therefore imported
to side 1.
Solution: The provider of the data must write the UCTE file correctly.
E 3789 Tripping $$$ has to be active

Problem: The indicated tripping must be active.
Solution: Activate the tripping.
E 3792 Armature resistance and direct current time constant equal zero
Problem: Armature resistance and DC time constant equals zero.
Solution: Enter a value for the armature resistance or DC time constant.
E 3793 Element not controlled

Problem: The element cannot carry out any control.
Solution: Look at the other messages for the element to determine the cause of the
problem and correct the data.
E 3801 Import is only for PSS Netomac data with equal frequency for all elements
Problem: The PSS NETOMAC file contains data for importing that have not been
implemented yet.
Solution: Modify the data or contact the product support.
E 3802 Unable to set network level. Line # content #.#

Problem: A network level cannot be assigned.
Solution: Check the data.
E 3803 Unbalance not supported, NSN file cannot be used

Problem: The NSN file cannot be used for unbalanced networks.
Solution: Ensure that the network is not unbalanced.
October 2021 629

Technical Reference
E 3810 Only one feeding network element permitted per node

Problem: The UCTE interface has left data from the feeding elements at the node.
Solution: Change the network topology.
E 3830 CIM version mismatch: $$$ – $$$

Problem: The CIM versions do not match.
Solution: Select the correct CIM version.
E 3850 Data not corresponding to PSS E 27 or PSS E 29

Problem: The data being imported are not in PSS E 27 or PSS E 29 format.
Importing is, however, only possible for these two formats.
E 3856 Unable to determine version of PSS E data

Problem: The version of the PSS E data could not be determined. PSS E data
versions are only listed in the data starting with Version 32.
Solution: Enter the version of the PSS E data.
E 3880 No asynchronous machine available

Problem: There are no asynchronous machines in the network.
Solution: Create asynchronous machines.
E 3882 No motor start-up in generator operations

Problem: The asynchronous machine selected for the start-up works as a generator
operation. For motor start-up, machines have to operate as motors.
Solution: Change the operational method of the machine.
E 3900 Dynamics error: $$$

Problem: The following error has occurred in the dynamic calculations.
Solution: Analyze the message and correct the data.
E 3950 Unknown HUB file versions

Problem: The version of the HUB file and its constants are unknown.
Solution: Save data in or convert data to one of the valid versions.
E 3951 HUB file without network parameter

Problem: The HUB file does not have any network parameters, so it does not have
any standard power.
Solution: Correct HUB file.
E 3959 No valid Arc Flash configuration was specified

Problem: No arc flash configuration is present in your network.
Solution: Enter at least one arc flash configuration at the node.
E 3960 Ratio Iarc/Ibf is greather then 1.00001 at the node

Problem: The program parameters are incorrect.
Solution: Check the arc flash configuration.
630 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 3961 Determination of arcing current/energy was not successful

Problem: Internal program logic error.
E 3965 Bolted fault current Ibf is not valid

Problem: Internal program logic error.
E 3967 Node has to have a network level with 180 degree phase angle
Problem: A DN winding requires a voltage in opposition.
Solution: Assign a network level with a 180 degree voltage type.
E 3973 Safety factor has to be greater than zero and less than or equal to one
Problem: An invalid safety factor was specified in the start dialog box of the thermal
destruction analysis.
Solution: Specify a valid safety factor.
E 3974 Clearing time has to be larger than zero

Problem: An invalid fault-clearing time was specified in the start dialog box of the
thermal destruction analysis.
Solution: Specify a valid fault-clearing time.
E 3975 Unable to connect different dependability factors to fault summary

Problem: Fault observations assigned to the fault event must be assigned the same
excitation reliability factors.
Solution: Check the pickup dependability factor in the assigned fault observations
under Additional Data Fault.
E 3976 Pickup dependability factor has to be greater than or equal to one

Problem: Please make sure that the pickup dependability factor is greater than or
equal to one.
Solution: Check the pickup dependability factor.
E 4000 Controller has to be at Side 1 of transformer

Problem: PSS E only recognizes transformer controllers on Side 1 of the transformer.
Solution: Place controller on Side 1.
E 4004 Export format does not support transformer controlling via a characteristic
curve. Cannot export.
Problem: The data cannot be transferred.
Solution: Delete the data.
E 4005 Export rotation of the additional voltage or a transmission ratio change in

combination with a rotation. Cannot export.
Problem: The data cannot be transferred.
Solution: Modify the data so it complies with the limits of the export format.
October 2021 631

Technical Reference
E 4094 Model could not be found

Problem: An incorrect model ID was specified.
Solution: Check the parameters.
E 4095 Calculation can only be executed for one substation

Problem: Elements were selected at different feeders from different substations.
Solution: Select only elements/nodes at a single feeder.
E 4100 No elements joining load balancing

Problem: There are no loads for load balancing.
Solution: Create unbalanced consumers or motors. Switch load balancing ON in the
network level data.
E 4150 Load allocation is only possible in geographical networks

Problem: Distances can only be determined in geographical networks.
Solution: None.
E 4200 To resupply element is not supplied

Problem: Supply can only be restored in supplied elements.
Solution: Create a supply for the element in the outlet state.
E 4202 The resupply group with the ID # couldn't be found

Problem: No ResupplyGrpResult with the ID was found.
Solution: Check whether there are any results. If not, a resupply must be calculated.
E 4250 There are no active nodes with 3 phases having equipment data assigned
Problem: Arc Flash is only calculated for nodes connected in all three phases with
equipment data.
Solution: Assign equipment data to nodes connected in all three phases.
E 4251 There are no protection devices for clearing the fault

Problem: There are no protection devices that can switch OFF the fault.
Solution: Check the directional settings for the protection devices. Create protection
devices that can clear the fault.
E 4253 Nodes of connectors have to have identical arc flash equipment configuration
Problem: Nodes of connections must have the same configuration for Arc Flash.
Solution: Enter no configuration or the same configuration.
E 4254 Rated voltage, gap or working distance equal zero

Problem: The rated voltage, conductor gap and working distance cannot be zero for
Arc Flash calculations.
Solution: Enter values that are not equal to zero.
632 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 4255 According to IEEE the manufacturer has to be contacted for currents higher
than #.# kA
Problem: IEEE 1584 only defines the current limit of Class RK1 and Class L fuses up
to the indicated current.
Solution: Use an individual current limit.
E 4256 Current limiting not possible for given fuse class

Problem: IEEE 1584 only defines the current limit of Class RK1 and Class L fuses for
prescribed rated currents, a voltage of 600 V and a working distance of 455 mm.
E 4257 Direct determination of incident energy not possible for given breaker type
Problem: IEEE 1584 prescribes direct calculations for breaker incident energy only
for currents from 0.7 to 106 kA at a working distance of 460 mm and a voltage less
that 480 V or a voltage between 575 and 690 V and definite rated currents.
E 4258 Current due to individual current limiting is higher than unlimited current
Problem: The current must not increase due to the individual current limit.
Solution: Correct the data for the individual current limit.
E 4260 Nodes of connectors have to have identical rated voltages

Problem: Connectors can only be between nodes with the same rated voltage.
Solution: Enter the same voltage levels or a voltage level with the same rated
voltage.
E 4261 Nodes of connectors must have identical harmonic configuration

Problem: Connections can only be specified between nodes with the same rated
voltage.
Solution: Enter also the same voltage limits for the network level data.
E 4300 Error initializing BOSL Dll

Problem: The BOSL Dll could not be initialized successfully.
E 4301 BOSL error: #.#

Problem: A BOSL operation caused this error.
Solution: Correct the model data.
E 4302 BOSL: Type # not implemented for this element

Problem: The type in the BOSL model cannot be used yet for this element.
Solution: Use another type or another element.
E 4303 BOSL: Unable to set parameter #.#

Problem: The parameter you entered could not be set.
Solution: Check the model and the model data.
October 2021 633

Technical Reference
E 4304 BOSL: Unable to set input value #.#

Problem: The input value you entered could not be set.
Solution: Check the model and the model data.
E 4306 Specified model is not a BOSL model

Problem: The specified model is not syntactically the same as that for a BOSL model.
Solution: Correct the model or specify a correct BOSL model.
E 4350 No network transfer marked for import/export transfer capacity

Problem: Only the marked transfers are used.
Solution: Mark the import/export for the network area transfer.
E 4351 There are less than # transfer elements

Problem: The indicated number must be achieved due to the n-1 criterion.
Solution: Create transfer elements.
E 4352 There are less than # supplies with active power control
Problem: The indicated number must be achieved due to the n-1 criterion.
Solution: Create network feeders or synchronous machines with control limits for the
active power.
E 4353 The required transfer power of #.# MW was not respected #.#
Problem: The network is too weak to observe the required transfer power.
Solution: Add supply sources. Increase the power bands of the supply sources.
E 4354 Listed controlling have to be activated: Generator controlling, area interchange

and redistribute power
Problem: The calculation of the transfer capacity is not possible without these control
options.
Solution: Activate these controllers.
E 4400 No or only out of service protection devices marked for protection analysis
Problem: There are no active protection devices for the protection analysis.
Solution: Select the active protection devices.
E 4401 The minimum distance for protection analysis is #.# percent

Problem: Value below the indicated minimum distance.
Solution: Enter a higher distance.
E 4402 The parameters for the recalculation are invalid

Problem: The number of the route or the result was not correctly transferred or does
not exist.
Solution: Recalculate the protection analysis or check the result file.
E 4403 Determining of the protection routes failed

Problem: The determination of the protection routes has gone wrong.
Solution: Try to calculate the protection routes for the selected protection devices and
observe the warnings and information.
634 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 4404 There are no protection routes available

Problem: No protection routes could be determined for the selected protection
devices.
Solution: Try to calculate the protection routes for the selected protection devices and
observe the warnings and information.
E 4405 Determining the calculation positions failed

Problem: No points can be used for the analysis.
Solution: Check whether the protection routes are valid.
E 4406 An error occurred during creation of the fault observation(s)

Problem: An error occurred when a fault observation was created.
Solution: Check whether the terminal exists on which the fault is located.
E 4407 The calculation of the positions failed

Problem: The calculation of the points on the protection routes has gone wrong.
Solution: Check the messages.
E 4409 The network element group couldn't be found

Problem: The specified network element group could not be found.
Solution: Ensure that you have selected a valid network element group.
E 4500 Load not found

Problem: No selected load could be found.
Solution: Select a load.
E 4501 Load is isolated

Problem: The selected load is isolated.
Solution: Supply the load.
E 4502 Factors defining development series must be not equal to 1.0

Problem: No increase can be determined for factors that are equal to 1.0.
Solution: Enter factors unequal to 1.0.
E 4550 There are no nodes or only isolated nodes selected for capacitor placement
Problem: Capacitor can only be placed at selected nodes in the network.
Solution: Select nodes that are not isolated before starting the capacitor placement.
E 4551 No energy costs specified

Problem: PSS SINCAL needs to have energy costs for optimization.
Solution: Switch economic efficiency calculations ON and enter energy costs in the
calculation settings.
E 4554 The capacitor placement is not possible

Problem: The capacitor placement could not place any available capacitors in the
network.
Solution: Check the warnings for more precise information.
October 2021 635

Technical Reference
E 4601 Function for evaluating characteristic curve not known

Problem: The function assigned to calculate the curve is unknown.
Solution: Check the assignment for the function.
E 4602 Parameter '$$$' for evaluating characteristic curve not specified

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot calculate the characteristic curve due to a missing
parameter.
Solution: Add the missing parameter.
E 4604 Function for evaluating characteristic curve needs a current definition related
to the transformer current
Problem: This function calculates a value for rated current. Entries for current in the
basic data for this type of protection device must be related to the rated transformer
current.
Solution: Change the entry for current in the basic data for this type of protection
device to the entry required.
E 4605 Parameter '#.#' must be larger than 1.0

Problem: The parameters of the function depend on one another. The entry you
made contradicts this.
Solution: Enter a parameter that meets the condition.
E 4606 Parameter '#.#' must be larger than parameter '#.#'

Problem: The parameters of the function depend on one another. The entry you
made contradicts this.
Solution: Enter parameters to meet the condition.
E 4607 Error evaluating tripping time via specified function

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot calculate the tripping time (e.g. division by 0.0,
negative function value, etc.).
Solution: Check the values of the parameters for the function.
E 4650 Error creating visualization data for optimal network structure $$$
Problem: Visualization data for optimal network structure could not be created.
Solution: Check the access rights for the help files.
E 4703 Element is not a line

Problem: The selected element is not a line.
Solution: Select a line and restart the calculation.
E 4704 No element has been selected

Problem: No element was selected.
Solution: Select an element and restart the calculation.
E 4705 No feeder found

Problem: No feeder found.
636 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 4707 No valid results found

Problem: No calculation results were produced that match the conditions.
Solution: Change the conditions or the network topology.
E 4711 Input data error. Check the voltage limits

Problem: The input data of the voltage limits are not valid.
Solution: The limits must not be equal 0 and must not be even.
E 4712 The fault could not be isolated

Problem: The fault cannot be isolated with the existing physical switches.
Solution: Carry out the procedure without physical switches.
E 4715 The limit of the capacitors must be greater than 0 if the compensation power is
fixed
Problem: If the compensation power is not determined, the maximum number of
capacitors must be specified.
Solution: Set the max. number of capacitors to a value higher than 0.
E 4750 No boundary node

Problem: There are no boundary nodes.
Solution: Correct the selection of the elements for network reduction.
E 4751 No nodes for reduction

Problem: There are no nodes for network reduction.
Solution: Correct the selection of the nodes for network reduction.
E 4752 No elements for reduction

Problem: There are no elements for network reduction.
Solution: Correct the selection of the elements for network reduction.
E 4753 Nodes of connectors have to have identical behavior in reduction

Problem: Nodes of connections must be treated the same in the network reduction.
Solution: Define the area for network reduction so that all affected nodes are reduced
or retained.
E 4773 Parallel processes are not allowed with Calculate all Scenarios activated
Problem: Parallel processes cannot be used if all scenarios are to be calculated.
Solution: Change the calculation settings.
E 4774 The network area couldn't be found

Problem: The network area specified could not be found.
Solution: Make sure to specify an existing network area.
E 4775 No power was specified for the calculation

Problem: No S was entered for the calculation.
Solution: Change the parameters for the calculation.
October 2021 637

Technical Reference
E 4776 The accuracy must be given for the calculation

Problem: No accuracy was specified for the calculation.
Solution: Change the settings for the calculation.
E 4777 There are no nodes for calculation

Problem: No valid nodes for the calculation could be found with the settings.
Solution: Change the settings for the calculation. Ensure that there are nodes that
apply to the area criteria.
E 4782 Invalid version for XML ICA file

Problem: You are using an old file for the ICA calculation.
Solution: Restart the calculation via the user interface.
E 4783 Include networks are not allowed for this calculation

Problem: Include networks are not allowed for this calculation.
Solution: Perform the calculation without include network.
E 4784 The variant with ID # doesn't exist

Problem: A variant ID was specified that does not exist.
Solution: Check the parameters of the calculation and use a variant ID that exists.
E 4785 The vulcanus scaling failed

Problem: Check the messages.
Solution: Check whether the parameters are correct and the network can be
calculated.
E 4789 No valid elements for variations

Problem: No valid elements found for the calculation.
Solution: Ensure that the elements are not isolated/switched off.
E 4791 No harmonic numbers are given

Problem: No harmonic numbers are specified.
Solution: Ensure that harmonic numbers were specified in the parameters.
E 4792 No PCC node was found

Problem: The network tracing starting from the machine could not find any PCC
node.
Solution: Check whether the network is suitable for the analysis.
E 4793 Multiple PCC nodes in the analysis area are not allowed
Problem: Only one PCC node must be found starting from the machine.
E 4794 Multiple connections to the PCC node are not allowed

Problem: Only one PCC node must be found starting from the machine.
638 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 4797 No valid calculation data was specified

Problem: No valid data was specified or could not be determined.
Solution: Ensure that the data is after the view date.
E 4795 The PCA node is outside the analysis area

Problem: The PCA node must be inside the analysis area.
Solution: Select a node in the analysis area.
E 4902 Calculation can only be executed for one feeder

Problem: Elements were marked in different feeders.
Solution: Select only elements/nodes in a single feeder.
E 4903 Couldn't save results in database $$$'

Problem: The results could not be saved in the database.
E 4904 Model could not be found

Problem: You have not specified a valid storage model for the calculation.
Solution: Make sure that a valid storage model has been selected for the calculation.
E 4906 The network element group IDs ($$$) were not found
Problem: The network element group IDs of the parameters could not be found.
E 4907 Nodes are not allowed to be in multiple network element groups

Problem: Nodes must only be in one network element group.
Solution: Ensure that the node is only assigned in one network element group to be
calculated.
E 4908 No valid connection data was given

Problem: A valid connection point was not specified.
E 4909 No valid calculation object data was given

Problem: No valid mobile consumers or decentralized supply sources were specified.
E 4910 Network element groups can only be assigned once to a date

Problem: Network element groups must only be specified once for each date.
E 4915 No valid connection data

Problem: There are no valid connection points.
Solution: Check whether the connection points are isolated or whether the
parameters are invalid. A power value and a max. connection greater than 0 must be
specified.
October 2021 639

Technical Reference
E 4916 No valid calculation object data

Problem: There are no valid mobile consumers or decentralized supply sources.
Solution: Check the parameters. Data with a power value and a number greater than
0 must be specified.
E 4917 Symmetrical calculation objects cannot be placed at unsymmetrical nodes

Problem: Symmetrical mobile consumers and decentralized supply sources can only
be connected to 3-phase nodes.
Solution: Check the selected modeling.
E 4920 No valid placements possible

Problem: No placings are possible.
Solution: Check the power of the connection points and the mobile consumers or
decentralized supply sources.
E 5034 The system library XMLLite.dll is not installed on the system!

Problem: System-DLL XMLLite.dll is used to evaluate XML files. This library cannot
be found.
Solution: Install the XML Lite components onto your system.
E 5035 Invalid version for DGS format

Problem: The file is not valid for the DGS import/export.
Solution: Make sure you are using a valid file.
E 5036 Error creating the export file ($$$)

Problem: The export file could not be created.
Solution: Check the directory.
E 5039 No power stations found

Problem: No power stations were found.
Solution: Check the station type in the node station data. Add at least one power
station to your network.
E 5042 The library SIZip.dll could not be found!

Problem: The DLL SIZip.DLL is used to create or unzip ZIP archives. This library
cannot be found.
Solution: Please contact the product support.
E 5500 CreateInstance of PSSESimulationSrv.dll failed

Problem: The Com component "PSSESimulationSrv" has not been registered
properly.
E 5501 PSSESimulationSrv COM function failed

Problem: The Com component "PSSESimulationSrv" has caused an error.
640 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 5502 Init of PSS E failed

Problem: PSS E could not be initialized.
E 5503 PSS E: read of file '#.#' failed

Problem: Reading the RAW file in PSS E failed.
E 5504 PSS E: close of file '#.#' failed

Problem: Closing the RAW file in PSS E failed.
E 5505 PSS E: read of database '#.#' failed

Problem: Opening the database in PSS E failed.
E 5506 PSS E: power flow failed

Problem: The power flow calculations in PSS E failed.
E 5507 PSS E: power flow did not converge

Problem: PSS E power flow calculations terminated without convergence.
E 5508 PSS E: power flow has not been calculated

Problem: PSS E power flow has not been calculated.
E 5509 Mapping of PSS E results failed

Problem: There were errors assigning the results.
E 6000 A general license system error occurred!

Problem: The license system had a general error.
E 6001 The license file couldn't be found!

Problem: No license file could be found.
Solution: Check whether the license file exists or order a new license file.
E 6002 Invalid license file!

Problem: The license file is either invalid or faulty.
Solution: Order a new license file.
E 6003 Update of the license information is not possible!

Problem: The license information could not be updated.
E 6004 Start on this computer not allowed!

Problem: PSS SINCAL does not yet have any license for this computer.
Solution: Purchase a license for this computer.
E 6005 Module $$$ expired!

Problem: The time-limited license ran out.
Solution: Purchase a license with a new time period.
October 2021 641

Technical Reference
E 6006 No license available for the module $$$!

Problem: The desired module is not licensed.
Solution: Purchase a license for this module.
E 6007 Initialization of license system failed!

Problem: The license system could not be initialized.
E 6008 Unable to create directory $$$

Problem: The directory cannot be created.
Solution: Remove any write-protection or check the rights.
E 6014 Zero-phase sequence system (rR and xR) has to be activated with phasing N
Problem: The phase N is switched ON, but the zero-phase sequence is not switched
ON or not of Type rR and xR.
Solution: Change the phase or switch ON the zero-phase sequence of type rR and
xR.
E 6015 Check the establishment date

Problem: The establishment date is earlier than that of any assigned
substations/bays.
Solution: Check the establishment dates of assigned substations/bays.
E 6016 Check the shutdown date

Problem: The shutdown date is later than that of any assigned substations/bays.
Solution: Check the shutdown dates of assigned substations/bays.
E 6213 The XML file $$$ could not be loaded

Problem: The XML file cannot be loaded.
Solution: Check the file path.
E 6214 The XML file $$$ could not be saved

Problem: The XML file cannot be saved.
Solution: Check the file path.
E 6215 The base power flow failed

Problem: The base power flow is not convergent.
Solution: Calculate a power flow and correct possible errors.
E 6216 The machine does not exist

Problem: The stated machine does not exist.
E 6217 The generation unit under test is not connected to the network
Problem: The stated machine is ignored.
Solution: Check whether the machine is isolated.
642 October 2021

Technical Reference
E 6218 Failed to initialize simulation

Problem: The initialization of the DES calculation has failed.
E 6219 Failed to determine observation area

Problem: The determination of the observed network area has failed.
E 6220 Short circuit simulation for connection point failed

Problem: The short circuit calculation at the connection point has failed.
Solution: Calculate a short circuit at the connection point or contact the product
support.
E 6221 Short circuit simulation failed

Problem: The short circuit calculation has failed.
Solution: Calculate a short circuit or contact the product support.
E 6225 Terminal ($$$) of element ($$$=$$$) has an invalid node association

Problem: The stated network with the CIM rdf:ID could not be found.
Solution: Check whether the CIM file is valid.
E 6332 Selected network elements are meshed!

Problem: You are using meshed feeders, this is not possible for this calculation.
Solution: Do not use meshed feeders.
E 6333 Assigned model is not a stator current limiter

Problem: The assigned model could not be identified as a BOSL model of a stator
current limiter.
Solution: Check the structure of the stator current limiter.
E 6366 Modeling of DC Network as a DC serial element allows only 2 terminals (#

terminals found)
Problem: A DC subnetwork was found in the CIM that is connected to the network via
several terminals.
Solution: SINCAL only supports direct DC subnetworks.
E 6396 No or only out of service nodes are marked for earth fault compensation data
Problem: There are no nodes for which this calculation can be performed.
Solution: In the selection field network area enter all, a selection or a network
element group with active nodes.
E 6403 TSDI database type should be '$$$', but is '$$$'

Problem: The parameters in the TSDI database are not correct.
Solution: Make sure you are using the correct database and database structure.
E 6404 TSDI database is not valid

Problem: The database does not correspond to the given database structure.
Solution: Make sure you are using the correct database and database structure.
October 2021 643

Technical Reference
E 6406 Table 'DataI' only allows measuring devices with type Current
Problem: In the DataI table, only data for measuring devices with the current type
may be used.
Solution: Change the measuring device type or remove the master resource.
E 6410 The mapping with MRID must be unique

Problem: The assignment between PSS SINCAL and the external database via the
MRID must be unique. Multiple assignments are not permitted.
Solution: Check the warnings and make sure that the objects use unique MRIDs.
22.14.2 Warnings
W 1044 Diagram preparation stopped after # diagrams

Problem: There are too many diagrams to evaluate the results.
Solution: Change input data or network connections to reduce the number of
diagrams.
W 1045 Element partially isolated. Check terminals

Problem: A connection to a feeder with constant voltage or a neutral point connection
could not be assigned.
Solution: Check the terminals and neutral point connections.
W 1046 Element used symmetrically in simulation

Problem: The current calculation type only permits symmetrical network elements.
Solution: Enter the network symmetrically.
W 1048 Element unbalanced and ignored

Problem: PSS SINCAL has no unbalanced element for the current calculation type.
Solution: Enter the element symmetrically.
W 1054 Element partially isolated. Check terminals (L1)

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot assign a connection to a feeder in L1 with constant
voltage.
Solution: Check the terminals in L1.

voltage.

voltage.
644 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 1057 Element partially isolated. Check terminals (zero system)

Problem: PSS SINCAL could not assign a connection to a neutral point.
Solution: Check the neutral point connections or the zero system.
W 1058 Extended calculation – #.# – not released

Problem: Extended calculation method selected has not been released at this time.
Solution: Select another extended calculation method or contact the service
personnel in charge.
W 1322 Ignoring station. Insufficient power at primary substation. Need P: #.# Q: #.#!
Problem: The primary substation does not deliver enough power.
Solution: Increase the power.
W 1530 Job # had a fatal error and crashed

Problem: The job process has failed during the calculation.
W 1531 Create job # failed

Problem: The job process could not be created.
W 1532 Initialize job # failed

Problem: The job process could not be initialized.
W 1533 Job # failed to load database dump file ($$$)

Problem: The job process could not load the database dump.
Solution: Check whether the stated path is valid and whether the job process can
access it.
W 1534 Job # failed to save result dump file ($$$)

Problem: The job process could not save the result dump.
Solution: Check whether the stated path is valid and whether the job process can
access it.
W 1535 Job # finished calculation with an error

Problem: The job process has finished with an error.
Solution: Check whether the job process has produced messages.
W 1536 Job # couldn't load the distribution file ($$$)

Problem: The job process could not load the distribution file.
Solution: Check if the stated path is valid and whether the job process can access it.
W 1537 Failed to save the distribution file ($$$)

Problem: The distribution file could not be saved.
Solution: Check whether the stated path is valid and whether you can access it.
October 2021 645

Technical Reference
W 1542 Failed to open result file $$$

Problem: The result file could not be opened.
W 1543 Merging of result file $$$ failed

Problem: The merging of the result file has failed.
W 1544 Merging of results failed

Problem: The merging of the result files has failed.
Solution: Check the messages.
W 2014 Network #.# defined by include network more than once

Problem: One or more include networks have multiple entries.
Solution: Check the include networks.
W 2017 Network: '$$$' is using variant: '$$$', Include Network: '$$$' is using variant:
'$$$'. Please use the Sync. Variant function to synchronize the variants before
simulation.
Problem: The variant for the include network is different from the basic network
variant. However, the preset variants are used.
Solution: Check the variant data or use the function Sync. Variant.
W 2043 Node #.# not found. Data or node specification is ignored

Problem: Unable to assign a node ID. Presumably, the node has somehow been
deleted.
Solution: Reassign the node.
W 2044 Element #.# not found. Data or element specification is ignored

Problem: Unable to assign an element ID. Presumably, the element has somehow
been deleted.
Solution: Reassign the element.
W 2045 Node and/or element not assigned

Problem: An assignment for a node or element is missing in the input data.
W 2048 Malfunction scenario not found

Problem: An assignment to a malfunction scenario could not be made.
Solution: Correct the data for malfunction scenarios.
W 2054 The scenario file does not exist

Problem: The specified scenario file does not exist.
Solution: Correctly set the file path or remove/deactivate the scenario file.
W 2055 The scenario file could not be read

Problem: The specified scenario file could not be read.
Solution: Ensure that the scenario file has a valid format and that you open the file.
646 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2058 Scenario calculation failed

Problem: The calculation of the scenario was completed with errors.
Solution: Only calculate this scenario and note the warnings and errors.
W 2124 Factor for multiplication is zero. Factor is set to 1.0

Problem: One of the multiplication factors is zero and therefore is ignored.
Solution: Set multiplication factor to a value other than zero.
W 2137 Control node #.# not found

W 2163 Differential protection device cannot be used for the transformer

Problem: Differential protection for the transformer not permissible.
Solution: Check the transformer.
W 2138 Reference node #.# not found

W 2403 Protection devices are only considered in stability simulation

Problem: Protection devices can only be considered in the stability simulation.
Solution: Deactivate the Consider protection devices option.
W 2503 Controlled node is isolated. Element not controlled (tap position unchanged)
Problem: Node where the voltage is controlled is an isolated node.
Solution: Check transformer controller data. Check the network circuitry.
W 2504 Voltage limits used for changing tap position invalid

Problem: In the controlling voltage range, the voltage upper limit is less than the
voltage lower limit.
Solution: Correct the voltage limits of controller data.
W 2507 C-value of short circuit data does not fit with c-value of working voltage
Problem: A bias in c value creates a bias in short circuit power.
Solution: Match the c values.
W 2508 Efficiency equal to zero. Efficiency is set to 1.0

Problem: The efficiency of the motor is zero. The calculations use an ideal efficiency
of 1.0.
Solution: Correct the efficiency.
W 2509 Ripple control frequency equal to zero

Problem: The ripple control frequency for the ripple control calculations is zero. The
network frequency is used as ripple control frequency.
Solution: Correct ripple control frequency in the ripple control calculation parameters
October 2021 647

Technical Reference
W 2510 Factor reducing maximum short circuit current for 1-phase short circuit is set
to 1
Problem: The factor for reducing the maximum short circuit current for 1-phase
ground faults is zero and was set to 1.0.
Solution: Correct the reduction factor for maximum short circuit current.
W 2511 Factor reducing thermal current is set to 1

Problem: The factor for reducing the thermal limit current is zero and was set to 1.0.
Solution: Correct the reduction factor for thermal limit current.
W 2515 Controlled node is isolated. Element not controlled (tap position unchanged)
Problem: Terminal to be controlled is isolated.
Solution: Change the terminal or modify the network circuit.
W 2516 Controlled terminal not a branch terminal. Element not controlled (tap position
unchanged)
Problem: Controlled terminal does not belong to a branch element.
Solution: Change controlled terminal.
W 2518 Master element is isolated. Standard controlling is used.

Problem: Master element is isolated! Controlling is according to entries for controller
data.
Solution: Change master element or modify network circuit.
W 2519 Concatenation of master elements!

Problem: Master elements need to be calculated first to achieve an identical
operating state. This is impossible with concatenation!
Solution: Change master element.
W 2527 Controlled terminal needs a direct connection to the node of the controlling
element. Element not controlled (tap position unchanged).
Problem: A direct connection is needed to distinguish between inductive and
capacitive reactive power.
Solution: Attach the controlled element to a node of the element that is controlled.
W 2531 Parallel systems are not available in reliability data model

Problem: Only one line with corrected impedance can be considered.
Solution: Enter 1 as number of parallel systems.
W 2536 Propagation speed of #.# km/s is greater than the speed of light
Problem: The propagation speed cannot exceed the speed of light.
Solution: Correct the reactance and/or capacitance.
W 2539 Element behavior not defined in standard ($$$). Element is ignored

Problem: The element behavior of the designated element is not defined according to
the standard.
Solution: Activate the element behavior via the Individualizations Short Circuit
options.
648 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2543 Area element # has illegal object index #

Problem: Invalid values in the database.
W 2545 Amount of parallel systems is set to 1

Problem: The number of parallel systems is zero. It is set to 1.
Solution: Correct number of parallel systems.
W 2562 Iron losses greater than no-load losses

Problem: The iron losses of the transformer are greater than the no-load losses.
Solution: Correct iron losses or no-load current.
W 2567 No short circuit due to VDE. Group data ignored

Problem: Transformer group data are special short circuit data for calculating the
short circuit according to VDE. The transformer group data have to create the initial
load. These data are ignored in short circuit calculations with power flow.
Solution: Calculate short circuit without initial load or delete transformer block data.
W 2568 Transformer with block data also needs a synchronous machine having block
data at start or end node. Block data is ignored!
Problem: To implement transformer blocks, the transformer’s starting node needs a
generator.
Solution: Check input direction of transformer.
W 2569 Synchronous machine with block data must be connected to a transformer

with block data. Block data will be ignored!
Problem: According to VDE, generator unit data always must be entered
simultaneously for the transformer and generator.
Solution: Enter generator unit data for the transformer as well or delete the generator
unit data for the synchronous machine.
W 2573 Short circuit voltage is set to 0.1 percent

Problem: The absolute value of the short circuit voltage is less than 0.1 percent. It will
be calculated at 0.1 percent.
W 2574 Real part of short circuit voltage greater than short circuit voltage. Program
sets vr = vk
Problem: The real part of the short circuit voltage is greater than, or equal to, the
short circuit voltage.
W 2575 Voltage lower limit already greater than actual limit

Problem: The lower limit of the node voltage is too low.
Solution: Correct the voltage limits in the parameters for the power flow calculation.
Correct the lower voltage limit.
October 2021 649

Technical Reference
W 2578 Voltage upper limit already lower than actual limit

Problem: The upper limit of the node voltage is too low.
Solution: Correct the voltage limits in the parameters for the power flow calculation.
Correct the upper voltage limit.
W 2582 Impedance equal to zero

Problem: The serial impedance in the positive-phase sequence of the element is
zero.
Solution: Correct positive-phase data.
W 2584 Invalid zero-phase data input mode

Problem: The input mode for the zero-phase sequence data is unknown.
W 2588 Unsupplied nodes or subnetworks

Problem: Not all network elements are connected to a feeder that determines the
pressure.
Solution: Modify the network circuitry or create additional network elements as
connections.
W 2589 Maximum generator voltage equal to zero

Problem: The maximum generator voltage is zero. PSS SINCAL calculates with 100
percent voltage.
Solution: Correct transformer group data.
W 2593 No frequency dependency available. Quality X/R constant = #.# is used.

Problem: No frequency dependency has been entered for the positive-phase
impedance for the harmonic calculations. PSS SINCAL calculates with the Q-factor
for X/R const.
Solution: Enter harmonics data for the element.
W 2597 Ratio R/X has been set to #.#

Problem: You have entered a R/X less than 0.001. The value that meets the
respective norm will be used.
Solution: Enter a value greater than 0.001 for R/X.
W 2598 Vector group only possible with special structure

Problem: The transformer vector group is not the same as any structure normally
used.
Solution: Check and correct the vector group.
W 2599 Controller at start node – transformer is exported with flipped terminals

Problem: The interface accepts only transformers with controllers at the end nodes.
Solution: Swap the transformer terminals.
W 2601 Saturation factor less than or equal to zero even though set at 1.0
Problem: The factor for magnetic saturation is zero.
Solution: Enter a saturation factor for the acceleration data.
650 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2600 Wrong phase rotation from transformer group

Problem: A transformer has different phase rotations in the network topology.
Solution: Correct network circuit or vector group entries for transformers.
W 2604 Different definition for typified or absolute consumer. Definition used from the
ganglia
Problem: The entry for consumption for the consumer is different than the one for the
time series.
Solution: Check the data for consumers and time series and change the values in the
"Standardized" field.
W 2607 Predefined device data ignored

Problem: There are protection devices with predefined area settings in the network.
The supplementary data specify not to use these.
Solution: Change the supplementary data.
W 2608 User defined device data ignored

Problem: There are protection devices with freely defined area settings in the
network. The supplementary data, however, indicate there should not be any.
Solution: Change the supplementary data.
W 2611 Speed reference value changed to #.# 1/min

Problem: The reference value for speed was inconclusive and has been modified.
Solution: Check the reference value of the speed.
W 2612 Current reference value changed to #.# Ampere

Problem: The reference value for current was inconclusive and has been modified.
Solution: Check the reference value of the current.
W 2613 Torque reference value changed to #.# Newtonmeter

Problem: The reference value for torque was inconclusive and has been modified
Solution: Check the reference value for torque
W 2614 Check motor data because of large difference between electric power #.# kW
and mechanical power #.# kW
Problem: Input and output data deviate greatly.
Solution: Check the motor data.
W 2615 Check motor data because of electrical power #.# kW is less than mechanical
power #.# kW
Problem: Output data are inconclusive.
Solution: Check the motor data.
W 2621 Power exceeds limits: $$$

Problem: The starting power is out of the limits.
Solution: Adjust the starting power or the limits.
October 2021 651

Technical Reference
W 2623 Reliability simulation does not permit voltage dependent loads. Load is
considered with P and Q constant in reliability.
Problem: The reliability calculation can only use constant loads.
Solution: Change the power flow type.
W 2624 Reliability simulation doesn’t permit more than one generator with operating
state, voltage and constant angle
Problem: Reliability simulation can only have one feeder with operating state, voltage
or constant angle. If the feeders are in topologically linked areas, they are converted
to feeders with operating state voltage and controlled active power.
Solution: Change the operating method for the synchronous machines, power units
or network feeders.
W 2642 Busbar or load transfer is to an isolated node/busbar – data ignored

Problem: A busbar or a load transfer has been entered at an isolated node or busbar.
Solution: Modify the operating state in the network.
W 2657 Standard prohibits frequency

Problem: IEC 61363 and VDE 0102 allow only 50 or 60 hertz as the network
frequency.
Solution: Change network frequency.
W 2658 Standard prohibits voltage

Problem: The voltage entered is not permitted according to IEC 61363.
Solution: Change voltage.
W 2663 Customer data insufficient or incorrect

Problem: Customer data are either insufficient or incorrect.
Solution: Complete or correct the customer data.
W 2665 Default tripping times of distance protection devices have been changed to t1
= #.#, t2 =#.#, t3 = #.# and ts = #.# seconds
Problem: The default tripping time are not the same as the electro-technical
specifications.
Solution: Change the tripping times in the calculation parameters
W 2667 Correcting factor cannot be evaluated due to VDE

Problem: There are not enough data to determine the VDE correcting factor.
Solution: Complete the data.
W 2675 Evaluating fill flow failed – no filling

Problem: The water tank pressure is outside of the pressure range for the curve of
pump characteristics for filling.
Solution: Correct the data for filling.
652 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2678 Temperature set to 20 degrees Celsius for short circuit

Problem: According to VDE, a temperature of 20 degrees Celsius has to be used to
calculate maximum short circuit currents.
Solution: Enter 20 degrees.
W 2680 C-Value evaluated from working voltage does not fit with standard
Problem: You are calculating the minimum short circuit current.
Solution: Change the driving voltage.
W 2681 Maximum or minimum short circuit data incorrect

Problem: The maximum or minimum values for the short circuit calculations are
either 0.0 or are not the same as the user defined values for the short circuit
calculations.
Solution: Correct the short circuit data.
W 2694 Wrong phase rotation from transformer group (L1)

Problem: A transformer in L1 produces different phase rotations for the network
topology.
Solution: Correct the network circuitry or the vector group entries for the transformers
in L1.

topology.
in L2.

topology.
in L3.
W 2711 Zone/Element used for interlock/transfer trip not available at protection device
Problem: Locking has been entered for a level for a protection device that does not
exist.
Solution: Check the protection device and the levels.
W 2714 Element input data considered as physically not reasonable

Problem: One of the following entries for data indicated does not make sense
technically: Elements with a rated current above 1500 amperes, negative active
power for a converter for photovoltaics, fuel cell, renewable energy or micro turbine,
a machine with a rated voltage above 60 kV and synchronous machine as a wind
machine.
October 2021 653

Technical Reference
W 2715 Target voltage of controlled node not specified. Target voltage is set to
medium of control range
Problem: Transformer control in dynamic calculations requires a target voltage.
Solution: Enter a target voltage.
W 2718 Parallel branch elements to connector line not allowed. Branch is ignored.
Problem: Branches parallel to connector lines cannot have current flow.
Solution: Correct the data for the line or the connector line.
W 2725 Fault observation not allowed on connector line

Problem: In the multiple calculation zero-impedance couplings cannot have a fault
observation. The coupling is treated as a line.
Solution: Perform the fault observation on another line or change the line type.
W 2734 Additional loading without base loading

Problem: Full load power from the network element is zero.
Solution: Check the full load power and, if necessary, the first, second and third
additional load.
W 2735 Synchronous machine is neither block nor direct feeding

Problem: VDE/IEC currently requires that a synchronous machine is direct feeding or
operated as a block.
Solution: Switch ON the feed type for the synchronous machine.
W 2736 Frequency does not match network frequency

Problem: The frequency at element conflicts with one of the calculation parameters
Solution: Correct the entry for frequency.
W 2739 Rated voltage of block generator does not match rated voltage of node
Problem: According to current VDE/IEC, the rated voltage of the block generator
node has to match the rated voltage of the block generator.
Solution: Correct the entry for voltage.
W 2746 Connector line only in all 3 phases allowed. Connector line is treated as a cable
Problem: Connector lines are only permitted in all 3 phases.
Solution: Change the phase entry for the connector line.
W 2750 Duration of disconnection and/or reconnection equal 0.0

Problem: The time before disconnecting and/or reconnecting is 0.0.
Solution: Enter switching times.
W 2751 Duration until reconnection is less than duration until disconnection

Problem: You cannot reconnect before you disconnect.
Solution: Correct the connecting times.
654 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2755 Combination of elements not technically meaningful

Problem: The technical data for these elements do not make any sense in this
combination.
Solution: Correct the technical data for the elements.
W 2756 No dynamics data specified. Machine is handled with constant subtransient

reactance.
Problem: For dynamic calculations, you have to enter the dynamic behavior of the
machine. The machine is simulated with constant subtransient reactance.
Solution: Enter dynamics data.
W 2757 Transformer recognized as block transformer

Problem: The generator connected is specified as a block transformer.
Solution: Switch on generator block information for the transformer.
W 2765 Interchange power does not match total of network area transfer data. An
interchange power of #.# is used.
Problem: The interchange power entered in the network level data does not agree
with the sum of all the network area transfer data.
Solution: Correct the interchange power.
W 2768 For network areas joining a supply source with power flow type voltage and
voltage angle there is no interchange power determining
Problem: A supply source that has a voltage and voltage angle power flow type is
needed for the missing power in the network.
Solution: Use a different power flow type or configure the network areas in a different
way.
W 2769 Given interchange power of #.# MW could not be kept. Deviation: #.# MW
Problem: The interchange power could not be maintained.
Solution: Check and correct the powers of the network elements in the network area.
W 2770 Element network area doesn't match node network area

Problem: The element’s network area is not the same as the node’s network area.
Solution: Change the network area for the element so it matches to the node.
W 2773 Power equal to zero

Problem: The power is zero.
Solution: Enter a power or set the element out of service.
W 2774 Dynamics data supplemented with NEMA data

Problem: You have not entered all the dynamics data.
Solution: Enter all the dynamics data.
October 2021 655

Technical Reference
W 2777 Using quality X/R in harmonics data needs an inductance not equal to zero
Problem: Quality X/R cannot determine the impedance for the harmonic calculations
without inductance.
Solution: Enter a value for inductance or use another method to create the
impedance.
W 2779 Transformer controller without main position

Problem: The transformer controller needs to have a position with surplus voltage
that is equal to zero.
Solution: Add the main position at the transformer controller.
W 2780 Position #.# not available in assigned transformer tap values

Problem: The specified current tap position is not present in the transformer
controller.
Solution: Add the controller data or enter a valid tap position.
W 2783 Reference current was evaluated from input data with #.# Ampere. (User input:
#.# Ampere)
Problem: The reference current does not match the input data.
Solution: Specify the indicated reference current or a reference current of 0.0.
W 2784 Reference voltage was evaluated from input data with #.# kV. (User input: #.#
kV)
Problem: The reference voltage does not match the input data.
Solution: Specify the indicated reference current or a reference current of 0.0.
W 2785 Characteristic segments do not have a decreasing upward gradient

Problem: The characteristic segments need a decreasing gradient.
Solution: Enter the characteristics so that there is a decreasing gradient.
W 2788 Model formation #.# only possible via model type equivalent circuit
Problem: The required network model has to be defined by a model.
Solution: Create a model for the indicated frequency domain.
W 2794 Minimum and maximum voltages are entered backwards

Problem: The indicated minimum voltage is greater than the maximum voltage.
Solution: Correct the entries for voltage.
W 2801 Harmonic numbers from harmonic voltage and current sources have to be
equal to or greater than #.#
Problem: The harmonic number for the voltage and current source is too small.
Solution: Increase the harmonic number.
W 2814 Coupled lines with different line length

Problem: The coupled lines have different entries for length. Normally, coupling
changes if the lengths are not the same.
Solution: Determine the couplings for the different line lengths and divide the lines
properly.
656 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2824 All lines within one coupling must have identical operating
Problem: Not all of the lines in a coupling indicate the same operating condition.
Solution: Create the same operating condition within the couplings.
W 2826 No view date specified. The current system date is used.

Problem: No observation date has been indicated.
Solution: Specify a date in the calculation settings.
W 2827 Due to VDE the controller is placed at the generator side of the power unit
Problem: According to VDE, the controller must be on the generator side.
Solution: Check and modify the data for the controller.
W 2835 Symmetrical components should already include ground impedances

Problem: In calculations based on symmetrical components, ground impedances
already need to be integrated in the zero-phase sequence data.
Solution: Enter the corrected zero-phase sequence impedances instead of the
ground impedance.
W 2840 Tripping time changed to #.# milliseconds $$$

Problem: The tripping time of the zone is zero and is therefore technically not
achievable. The tripping time was set to a technically meaningless minimum time.
Solution: Enter a tripping time not equal to zero.
W 2845 There are not transfer elements between the network areas
Problem: There are no transfer elements between network areas.
Solution: Create transfer elements.
W 2849 Machine with block data has to operate as generator. Block data is ignored!
Problem: According to VDE regulations block data can only be used for machines in
generator operation.
W 2851 Protection route factor of overcurrent protection device has been changed to
#.#
Problem: The set factor for the protection route could not be applied. The factor for
the particular protection device was determined internally.
Solution: Check the characteristics of the protection device.
W 2852 Switching action is ignored

Problem: The switch action was repeated and does not have any effect on the
element.
Solution: Check the order of the switching actions.
W 2856 Island operation only at symmetrical element possible

Problem: Only a symmetrical element can take on voltage stability in island
operation.
Solution: Choose a different element for island operation.
October 2021 657

Technical Reference
W 2857 Voltage equal to zero

Problem: A voltage equal to 0.0 was entered.
Solution: Enter a valid voltage.
W 2858 DC losses very high! DC voltage of #.# kV correct?

Problem: The DC losses are very high.
Solution: Correct the DC voltage and the losses of the converters.
W 2859 No PCC configuration data specified. Unable to evaluate TDD

Problem: No PCC configuration was entered for determining the TDD. The TDD
cannot be determined.
Solution: Enter PCC configuration data.
W 2860 No harmonic limits specified at PCC configuration data. Unable to use node as
a PCC
Problem: There are no harmonic limits for the PCC configuration. A node cannot be
used as point of common coupling.
Solution: Assign harmonic limits or select IEEE 519 as the values for the harmonic
limits. There are predefined harmonic limits for EEE 519.
W 2861 No connection to neutral point. Connected elements can not feed a zero
system current
Problem: The harmonic currents divisible by three are modeled as zero current. No
zero current can flow without a neutral point connection.
Solution: Establish a connection to a neutral point or model the currents of the
harmonic current supply sources of the connected elements as positive-phase
sequence currents.
W 2863 Resonance network ignored in frequency characteristics

Problem: Resonance networks on the node have been deactivated.
Solution: Activate the resonance networks for the harmonics calculation parameters.
W 2864 Tripping not active: #.#

Problem: A selected tripping is not available.
Solution: Change the settings for the trips.
W 2867 Unsymmetrical slack is handled like a symmetrical slack

Problem: The voltages are identical and the voltage angle was specified
symmetrically.
Solution: Check/change the data of the supply source.
W 2869 Active and reactive power in sum exceed the rated apparent power
Problem: The apparent power calculated from active and reactive power is higher
than the rated apparent power.
Solution: Reduce active and/or reactive power or increase the rated apparent power.
658 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 2870 Earthing disconnector not considered in simulation

Problem: Earthing disconnectors can only be considered at isolated elements with
couplings.
Solution: Open the earthing disconnector.
W 2872 Coupling data #.# multiple used

Problem: The assignment of coupling data is not unique. This can lead to problems if
not all lines of the coupling data are in operation.
Solution: Use different coupling data.
W 2873 Coupled line data is only used at modelling with symmetrical components
Problem: Coupled lines in the zero-sequence system are only considered when
modeling with symmetrical components.
Solution: Change the modeling of the network.
W 2875 Boundaries of the intervals (1st/2nd, 2nd/3rd and 3rd/4th) must be entered in
ascending order
Problem: The interval limits for power determination must be specified in ascending
order.
Solution: Enter the interval limits in ascending order.
W 2877 Rated short time equal zero. A rated short time of #.# is used
Problem: The rated short time is 0.0 seconds. A rated short time of #.# seconds is
calculated.
Solution: Enter a rated short time not equal to 0.0 seconds.
W 2879 Element behavior disabled due to calculation settings short circuit (%ls).
Element is ignored
Problem: The element behavior of the designated element has been disabled.
Solution: Activate the element behavior via the Individualizations Short Circuit
options.
W 2880 Tap position #.# not valid. Tap position set to #.# ($$$)
Problem: The tap position used is not within the limits, it was not found in the
transformer controller, or a non-integer value was specified for a discrete tap position
value setting.
Solution: Complete the controller data or enter a valid controller position.
W 2881 Tap position #.# not valid. Tap position L# set to #.# ($$$)
Problem: The individual tap position used is not within limits, was not found in the
transformer controller, or a non-integer value was specified for a discrete tap position
value setting.
October 2021 659

Technical Reference
W 2883 Tap position #.# not valid. Tap position side # set to #.# ($$$)
Problem: The used tap position of the side is not within the limits, was not found in
the transformer controller, or a non-integer value was specified for a discrete tap
position value setting.
W 2920 Controlled phase not available at controlled node. Element controlling can
cause problems
Problem: The phase to be controlled is not present at the controlled node.
Solution: Correct the phase entry for the controller.
W 2923 Reactance method for impedance determining not supported by protection

device
Problem: The protection device does not support the type of impedance
determination.
Solution: Use the standard method.
W 3005 Evaluating of no-load voltages stopped with a deviation of #.# percent

Problem: Determining no-load voltages for short circuit calculations according to VDE
stopped at an accuracy of #.# percent.
Solution: Check short circuit powers of generators.
W 3015 Singular couple matrix due to data of coupled lines

Problem: Couplings for a singular matrix cannot be considered.
Solution: Change the zero-phase sequence data for the lines or the data for the
coupled lines.
W 3016 Short circuit is solved with phase data and not with component data
Problem: As ground data was entered in the network, the calculation can no longer
be carried out strictly according to the standard with component data.
Solution: Integrate the ground data in the zero-phase sequence data.
W 3017 Due to network modelling with positive, negative and zero phase sequence
system there is always a ground fault with return conductor fault
Problem: The zero phase sequence system contains the complete return path
without distinguishing between return conductor and ground.
Solution: Activate the conductor data in the short circuit calculation settings.
W 3018 Phase network modelling not necessary – symmetric component models are
used
Problem: There are no elements in the network that make modelling with conductor
data necessary.
Solution: Deactivate the conductor data in the short circuit calculation settings.
W 3104 Diakoptics model(s) allowed only in admittance matrix calculation

Problem: Diakoptics models are only supported in the admittance matrix power flow
procedure.
Solution: Use the admittance matrix power flow procedure.
660 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3122 Power balance not achieved\n Pin: #.# MW Pout: #.# MW Qin: #.# MVAR Qout:
#.# MVAR difference: #.# MVA
Problem: The sum of the power flowing to and from the node is greater than the
prescribed power accuracy.
Solution: Increase the load accuracy in the power flow calculation parameters.
Diminish voltage accuracy in the power flow calculation parameters.
W 3129 Unable to keep voltage limits

Problem: The controller could not stay within in the voltage range.
Solution: Change the controller data or the voltage limits.
W 3134 Impossible node loading

Problem: Required power cannot be transferred to node.
Solution: Reduce power or strengthen inlet pipes.
W 3135 Initial value determination – no convergence

Problem: Initial value determination for power flow calculations is not convergent.
Solution: Increase the node accuracy or number of iterations, or switch OFF initial
value determination.
W 3136 Unable to keep active power limits! P = #.# MW Pmin = #.# MW Pmax = #.# MW
Problem: Prescribed reactive-power limits could not be satisfied.
Solution: Increase the load band or change the power feeds.
W 3137 Unable to keep reactive power limits! Q = #.# Mvar Qmin = #.# Mvar Qmax = #.#
Mvar
Problem: Prescribed reactive-power limits could not be satisfied.
Solution: Additional load band or change network power sources.
W 3138 Limit violation after/during power flow initial value determination

Problem: The starting power flow violates the required limits for voltage, power, etc.
There are penalties from the initial power flow in optimization. This can influence the
optimization algorithm negatively.
Solution: Change the limits.
W 3143 Currents or power of sub measurement data too large

Problem: The currents or powers of the subordinate measuring devices are greater
than those at the measuring device itself.
Solution: Correct the measurements.
W 3145 Negative trim power

Problem: Either you entered negative measurements or the power of loads being
trimmed is negative.
Solution: Check measurements and power of elements not being trimmed.
W 3147 Voltage drop in compensation impedance was limited to #.# percent

Problem: The compensation impedance has a very high drop in voltage.
Solution: Specify a smaller impedance.
October 2021 661

Technical Reference
W 3149 Given power could not be kept – deviation: #.# KW and #.# kvar
Problem: The specified power could not maintained.
Solution: Correct the circuitry or the power data for the load.
W 3150 Problem connecting NETOMAC power flow results

Problem: Not all PSS NETOMAC power flow results are connected properly.
W 3151 Trim power is less than or equal to zero

Problem: The trimming power is less than or equal to zero.
Solution: Enter a power value or deactivate the measured value.
W 3152 Unable to keep power

Problem: The required active or reactive power could not be kept.
Solution: Change the default for power or the controller data.
W 3156 Given voltage could not be kept – deviation: #.# percent

Problem: The required voltage could not be kept.
Solution: Check and modify the prescribed voltage or the work method of the network
elements.
W 3157 Maximum current of measurement data exceeded

Problem: Load assignment determined a current above the maximum value entered.
Solution: Correct the maximum current.
W 3163 Maximum active power of measurement data exceeded

Problem: The load assignment has calculated an active power higher than the stated
maximum.
Solution: Correct the maximum active power.
W 3166 No power flow convergence at operating point $$$

Problem: The power flow calculations do not converge for this operating point. The
voltage in the network will fail from overloading.
Solution: Activate the conversion of fixed loads in impedance loads. Turn off parts of
the network to find the overload. Check the transformer output and short circuit
voltage.
W 3167 Newton Raphson power flow does not support closed earthing disconnector
Problem: Closed earthing disconnectors cannot be handled in the Newton Raphson
power flow.
Solution: Change the power flow method.
662 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3222 There is no frequency response

Problem: One node in this network has no definition for calculating the frequency
response. Harmonics calculations determine only the harmonic current and voltage
distribution.
Solution: Define a frequency response.
W 3228 There is no harmonic current or voltage supply

Problem: This network has no harmonic current or voltage supply. The harmonics
calculations produce only frequency response diagrams.
Solution: Define a harmonic current or voltage supply.
W 3259 Impedance loop not available. Frequency characteristic is not evaluated.

Problem: There is no impedance loop for frequency characteristics.
Solution: Change the entry for the impedance loop or increase the phase entry of the
network elements.
W 3262 Motor start-up data ignored due to generator operation

Problem: Motor start-up data cannot be used for generator operation.
Solution: Switch OFF the motor start-up data.
W 3270 Unable to consider controlled current at time series

Problem: Unable to consider the control current for determining the consumer power
in the time series.
Solution: Change operating point of consumer.
W 3271 Time series simulation allows only a fixed consumption of load

Problem: Time series have constant load behavior.
Solution: Change power flow type.
W 3272 Time series cannot consider simultaneity with a mesh inside the bordering
network
Problem: Unable to consider simultaneity in the time series because it would create a
mesh in the subsequent network.
Solution: Check network circuit.
W 3274 No power flow convergence at time $$$

Problem: The power flow calculations do not converge for this time. The voltage in
the network will fail from overloading.
Solution: Set the view date to this point in time in the calculation settings and activate
the necessary data in the load data. Activate the conversion of fixed loads in
impedance loads. Turn off parts of the network to find the overload. Check the
transformer output and short circuit voltage.
Note that energy storages are only charged or discharged in the time series.
October 2021 663

Technical Reference
W 3275 Error occurred on diakoptics init

Problem: Fault in the diakoptics interface.
W 3276 Error occurred on diakoptics call

Problem: Fault in the diakoptics interface.
W 3279 The cross-section must be greater than #.# mm²

Problem: The conductor cross section in a fuse area must not be less than the
conductor cross section at the location of the fuse.
Solution: Create an additional fuse.
W 3283 Fuse area has more than 3 picked-up fuses

Problem: The fuse area for the limiting node has more than 3 fuses.
Solution: Convert to several fuse areas, each with 3 or fewer limiting fuses.
W 3284 All fuses of fuse area have a current less than # ampere
Problem: All the fuses in the fuse area for the limiting node have a current less than
the above.
Solution: Check the zero-phase sequence data for the network elements.
W 3286 Restriction 'I load' > 'I fuse max' appears # times
Problem: The restriction I last > I ð max was found the above number of times in the
network.
Solution: Evaluate results of fuse dimensioning. Since you cannot select higher
fuses, your need to modify the network topology.
W 3287 Restriction 'I fuse installed' > 'I fuse max' appears # times
Problem: The restriction ‘I fuse installed’ > ‘I fuse max ‘ was found the above number
of times in the network.
Solution: Evaluate results of fuse dimensioning. Select fuses with lower rated
currents.
W 3288 Restriction 'I fuse installed' < 'I load' <= 'I fuse max' appears # times
Problem: The restriction for I fuse installed < I load <= I fuse max found the above
number of times in the network.
Solution: Evaluate results of fuse dimensioning. Select fuses with higher rated
currents.
W 3295 Used field #.# of dynamic data is different to basic data

Problem: The affected field of the dynamic data is different to the basic data.
Solution: Check the basic data.
W 3305 Unable to clear fault

Problem: Unable to clear a fault.
Solution: Check data for protection devices and network circuit.
664 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3306 Load tripping at #.# seconds (#.# #.# #.#)

Problem: The load current is tripping the protection device.
Solution: Change settings of protection device so that tripping takes place at a higher
current.
W 3307 Protection device pickup at isolated subnetwork impossible

Problem: You are attempting a fault observation in an isolated subnetwork.
Solution: Delete the fault observation or connect the fault observation to a network
that can be computed.
W 3308 Damage to network element possible

Problem: PSS SINCAL continuously monitors the thermal load for network elements
when checking for energizing. The fault observation has discovered at least one
network element will be destroyed before the fault is removed.
Solution: Check the thermal load of the network elements or change settings of the
protection devices so that the fault can be cleared immediately.
W 3309 Thermal load of #.# ampere and #.# seconds exceeded. Maximum clearing time
#.# seconds
Problem: PSS SINCAL continuously monitors the thermal load for network elements
when checking for energizing. This network element will be destroyed before the fault
is removed.
Solution: Check the thermal load of the network elements or change settings of the
protection devices so that the fault can be cleared immediately.
W 3317 Protection device not valid for tripping in loop #

Problem: The protection device is not allowed to trip in this loop. It is not the one
closest to the fault location.
Solution: Check settings of protection devices.
W 3324 No phase fault tripping

Problem: No tripping characteristics for phase faults were detected for the protection
device.
W 3325 No ground fault tripping

Problem: No tripping characteristics for ground faults were detected for the protection
device.
W 3335 All inrush data have to be larger than #.#

Problem: Program cannot display smaller values in the logarithmic diagram system.
Solution: Enter larger values.
W 3342 More than one differential protection setting specified

Problem: Since only one differential protection zone can be specified, it makes no
sense to use multiple settings.
Solution: Delete the unnecessary settings.
October 2021 665

Technical Reference
W 3346 Current transformer not specified

Problem: The input values of the protection device cannot be determined.
W 3347 Voltage transformer not specified

Problem: The input values of the protection device cannot be determined.
W 3348 Protection device command time cannot be applied

Problem: The idle time is not included in the calculation for OC protection devices of
the fuse or bimetal type.
Solution: Check the input data of the protection device.
W 3352 Measuring changed to standard measuring (#.#)

Problem: Measurement type set is not supported by protection device.
Solution: Change measurement type at protection device.
W 3358 Third zone not evaluated. Identical to the second zone.

Problem: The third zone is not switched ON or there is no third zone.
Solution: Switch this zone ON.
W 3359 Second zone not evaluated. Identical to the first zone.

Problem: The second zone is not switched ON or there is no second zone.
Solution: Switch this zone ON.
W 3376 Factor second zone is #.# percent and lower than minimum reach of #.#
percent
Problem: The minimum selective grading factor entered in the supplementary data
has not been attained.
Solution: Change the settings of the protection device or the minimum selective
grading factor.
W 3377 When third zone is planned with maximum network impedance of the second
zone, the factor for the third zone must be greater than 100 percent
Problem: If the selective grading factor for the third zone is less than 100 percent, the
settings for the area will not be completely protected.
Solution: Enter a selective grading factor greater than 100 percent.
W 3380 Maximum impedance of first zone having #.# Ohm + j #.# Ohm not protected
by second zone
Problem: The second zone cannot protect a stub cable in the first zone.
Solution: Increase the second zone.
W 3384 Total export of zero sequence data impossible

Problem: Zero-phase sequence data cannot be exported properly.
Solution: Zero-phase sequence data in DVG data exchange format are not
considered.
666 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3386 No pickup in second or third zone. No settings evaluated

Problem: The protection device does not have any energizing for the second or third
zone. No settings are being evaluated.
W 3393 Not all zones active for determining of protection device settings
Problem: Calculations for settings are based on Zones 1 to 3. If these zones are not
switched ON, this can lead to settings you do not want.
Solution: Switch ON the necessary zones.
W 3394 Zone # – direction not forward. Settings for this zone and all following zones
are not evaluated
Problem: Settings for zones can only be calculated forwards.
Solution: Change the direction of the zone to forward.
W 3399 The individual currents could not be displayed because the protection device
has several converter polarity settings
Problem: The individual currents cannot be determined if several converter polarity
settings have been specified and the device does not trip.
Solution: Check the converter polarity settings.
W 3401 Branch not included in both supplier subnetworks. Branch will be disabled
Problem: The network element is designed to exchange flow rates and energy
between two networks. Pressure losses cannot be determined.
Solution: Check network circuit.
W 3405 Branch not included in starting node of supplier subnetwork Branch will be
disabled
Problem: PSS SINCAL can check the operating point of this network element only if it
is supplied by the starting node.
Solution: Be sure that the starting node supplies this network element.
W 3420 Line length less than altitude difference

Problem: The line length is less than the difference in altitude for the nodes.
Solution: Enter a larger line length.
W 3424 Temperature outside usual technical range

Problem: The temperature entered is outside the normal technical range.
Solution: Correct the entry for temperature.
W 3425 Temperature conflict supply line/return line

Problem: The supply-line temperature is less than the return-line temperature in
heating and cooling networks. The supply-line temperature is greater than the return-
line temperature in cooling networks.
Solution: Check and correct the entries for the temperature at infeeders and
consumers.
October 2021 667

Technical Reference
W 3426 Pressure conflict supply line/return line

Problem: The supply-line pressure is less than the return-line pressure.
Solution: Check and correct the entries for pressure and amount at infeeders and
consumers.
W 3428 Pump speed not found at pump characteristic data

Problem: The indicated pump speed could not be found in the characteristics.
Solution: Specify an existing speed in the pump characteristics curve.
W 3429 Output flow outside pump characteristic data

Problem: The indicated output flow is located outside the characteristic curve.
Solution: Correct the output flow.
W 3430 Maximum flow change specified too small

Problem: The flow step selected is very small and can lead to a large number of
iterations.
Solution: Specify a larger flow step.
W 3504 Flow balance not achieved! Qin: #.# Qout: #.# difference #.#
Problem: The total flow rates in and out at the node is greater than the accuracy.
Solution: Increase the flow accuracy in the calculation parameters
W 3505 Temperature difference supply – return identical 0 degrees Celsius

Problem: Changes in the operating point cause this situation.
Solution: Change the accuracy and the flow step.
W 3507 Water tank is empty

Problem: The water tank has no water.
Solution: Change the data for the water tank or filling.
W 3503 Cycleflow – Network track and mixing only partially evaluated

Problem: The medium run times and mixings could not be defined uniquely.
Solution: Reduce the calculation accuracy.
W 3509 Unable to determine route

Problem: The elements in the group do not produce any route in the network.
Solution: Correct the elements in the group.
W 3513 Unable to keep pressure. Deviation #.# mBar internal pressure drop #.# mBar
Problem: The required pressure could not be maintained.
Solution: Strengthen the supply lines, use higher pressure for supply or use a
controller with larger dimensions.
W 3515 Pressure regulator without flow always control the pressure at the outlet node
Problem: Regulation at an remote node in the network is only possible if the regulator
also has a flow.
Solution: Attach consumers.
668 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3519 Unable to keep specified operating limits

Problem: The calculated operating point is outside the limits.
Solution: Correct the entries for the operating point.
W 3651 Total export of zero sequence data impossible

Problem: Zero-phase sequence data cannot be exported properly.
Solution: Zero-phase sequence data in DVG data exchange format are not
considered.
W 3666 Record #: incomplete data

Problem: The UCTE interface contains a record with incomplete data.
W 3701 Reliability Warning: $$$

Problem: There was a warning from the external reliability program.
Solution: Check other warning messages. If you cannot find any reason for the
warning, contact the product support.
W 3707 Protection device at auxiliary reliability node

Problem: There is a protection device at an auxiliary node for reliability.
Solution: Check the node data and the protection device topology.
W 3717 Output of signal (#.#) not possible

Problem: Cannot produce a signal for dynamic calculations.
Solution: Check whether you have all necessary prerequisites for signal output
(transient dynamic calculations, controller, etc.).
W 3722 Output of signal (#.#) not implemented yet

Problem: Plotter output will be implemented later.
Solution: Separate output and blending of output signals.
W 3723 Plotter output of machine values only via function Machine (Plot definition #.#)
Problem: Machine values cannot be displayed by functions for current, power, etc.
Solution: Use the function for machine.
W 3724 Output of signal (#.#) in unbalanced network not possible

Problem: The signal you entered cannot be displayed in unbalanced networks.
Solution: Switch OFF the signal output, or enter the network symmetrically.
W 3739 Unable to identify model parameter $$$ with value $$$ in network data
Problem: The model parameters could not be identified.
Solution: Check the model parameters.
W 3741 Initial short circuit power was set from 0 to 1000 MVA.
Problem: When importing a DVG file supply sources that have an initial short circuit
current power of 0 MVA are set to 1000 MVA.
Solution: None.
October 2021 669

Technical Reference
W 3742 Error in Line #. Element $$$ couldn't be imported.

Problem: The element was connected to itself in the DVG file.
Solution: None.
W 3745 Homogeneous line needs l, r, x, c, x0 and c0 greater than zero

Problem: The wave resistance in the positive- and zero-phase system cannot be
determined.
Solution: Specify the value greater than zero.
W 3757 Zig-Zag vector group is handled as star circuitry in PSS NETOMAC

Problem: The zig zag vector group cannot be simulated in PSS NETOMAC.
Solution: Change the vector group.
W 3790 Generators have different voltages. Average voltage is used

Problem: There are generators with different voltages on the same node or at nodes
of connections.
Solution: Enter the same voltages.
W 3791 Additional voltage smaller or larger than #.# percent

Problem: The additional voltage is smaller or larger than shown.
Solution: Specify a smaller additional voltage.
W 3792 Armature resistance and direct current time constant equal zero
Problem: Armature resistance and DC time constant equals zero.
Solution: Enter a value for the armature resistance or DC time constant.
W 3793 Element not controlled

Problem: The element cannot carry out any control.
Solution: Look at the other messages for the element to determine the cause of the
problem and correct the data.
W 3825 Elements having only a ground and no phase connection are not imported (#.#)
Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot store only ground data for branch elements.
Solution: None.
W 3826 Voltage larger than #.# or less #.# percent. Voltage is set to #.# percent
Problem: CIM data contain technically impossible voltage entries.
Solution: Correct voltage entries in CIM interface.
W 3827 Voltage limits are set to #.# and #.# percent

Problem: The CIM interface contains prohibitively high or low voltage limits.
Solution: Correct the voltage limits in the CIM interface.
W 3828 Different voltages (#.# and #.#)

Problem: A voltage is outside 80 to 125 percent of the node rated voltage or network
level rated voltage.
Solution: Correct voltage in the CIM file.
670 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3851 #.# data ignored during import

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot identically simulate the data being imported.
Solution: Check and change the data being imported into PSS SINCAL.
W 3852 No import of step-up transformer data

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot identically simulate the step-up transformer data being
imported.
Solution: Check the data you want to import into PSS SINCAL and modify them if
possible.
W 3853 No import of block data

Problem: PSS SINCAL cannot import the block data.
Solution: Check and extend the data in PSS SINCAL.
W 3854 Power outside control range. Set power into range #.#
Problem: A violation of power limits was found during the data import.
Solution: Correct the power values in the external data.
W 3855 No import of model #.#

Problem: This model was not imported.
Solution: None – Enhance the model data in PSS SINCAL.
W 3857 Voltage setpoint not achieved. Deviation #.# percent

Problem: The generator voltage setting in the RAW file is different to the node
voltage.
Solution: Check the PSS E data.
W 3858 Branch element from a bus to itself (Bus ID: '$$$')

Problem: The network element is not permissible.
W 3874 Load torque characteristics not found

Problem: No load torque characteristics have been entered.
Solution: Enter load torque characteristics.
W 3881 Asynchronous machine is isolated

Problem: The asynchronous machine is isolated.
Solution: Modify network configuration.
W 3901 Dynamics warning: $$$

Problem: There has been the following warning in the dynamic calculations
Solution: Analyze the message and correct the data.
W 3952 Unable to import ground data

Problem: The PSS SINCAL data model does not have ground data in this form at this
time and these data have not been imported.
Solution: None.
October 2021 671

Technical Reference
W 3953 Transformer vector group imported as YNYN0

Problem: The transformer vector group has been set to YNYN0.
Solution: None.
W 3954 Speed impossible with network frequency

Problem: The indicated speed is impossible at current frequency.
Solution: Correct the frequency or the speed.
W 3955 Missing data in interface (efficiency, rated power factor, ...)

Problem: The interface does not contain all required data for the import.
Solution: None.
W 3956 PhNode not found (line #)

Problem: A reference to a "PhNode", existing in the interface, could not be resolved.
Solution: Examine the interface file.
W 3957 Reconnecting data not valid on auxiliary node without switching

Problem: Reconnection data on the auxiliary node without switching is not
permissible.
Solution: Deactivate reconnection data or change the node type.
W 3963 Invalid enclosure data was supplemented with W=508mm, H=508mm and
D=508mm
Problem: The height, width and depth for determining the system type (typical or
shallow) are supplemented.
Solution: Check the enclosure dimensions.
W 3966 More than # routes

Problem: More than the selected number of routes were determined.
Solution: Use the parameters in the start dialog box in order to restrict the number of
routes.
W 3968 Node ignored, because the voltage is not in the model range between 0.208 kV
and 15 kV
Problem: The model only supports a specific voltage range.
Solution: Check the rated voltages.
W 3970 Consideration of teleprotection not possible

Problem: The assignment from the signal transmission is not possible.
Solution: Check that there are transmitters and receivers for the protection devices.
W 3971 Number of sections has to be larger than zero. A sections number of # is used
Problem: An invalid number of subdivisions was specified in the start dialog box of
the thermal destruction analysis.
Solution: Specify a valid number here.
672 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 3972 Section length has to be larger than zero. Section length is ignored
Problem: An invalid subdivision length was specified in the start dialog box of the
thermal destruction analysis.
Solution: Specify a valid subdivision length.
W 4001 Restricted export of controller data due possibility of interface

Problem: Controller possibilities in PSS SINCAL are more comprehensive than in the
external program.
Solution: Consult controller possibilities of external program and adapt controller data
to match.
W 4002 Name not unique

Problem: Name given does not meet export criteria.
Solution: Change name.
W 4003 Name not allowed

Problem: The prescribed name is not permitted for export format.
Solution: Consult the specifications for creating names and change the name.
W 4101 No changeable connecting type detected

Problem: Load balancing was unable to find a better connection phase.
Solution: Create new unbalanced loads.
W 4151 Lines modeled with coupling are not separated into sections for connecting
the load
Problem: Lines simulated by coupling data were not divided when loads were
connected.
Solution: Use a cable or an overhead line.
W 4201 Load shedding already at normal power flow conditions

Problem: In the normal load conditions, the voltage was already below the lower limit.
Solution: Correct the node voltages.
W 4203 Maximum export power of #.# MW exceeded

Problem: The maximum export power set was exceeded.
Solution: Reduce the transfer powers or increase the maximum export power.
W 4204 Maximum import power of #.# MW exceeded

Problem: The maximum import power set was exceeded.
Solution: Reduce the transfer powers or increase the maximum import power.
W 4252 Distance protection devices are not intended for Arc Flash calculations
Problem: Calculating and examining pickup with arc current produces incorrect
tripping times at distance protection devices.
Solution: Use OC protection devices.
October 2021 673

Technical Reference
W 4259 Total fault current not between 700 A and 106 kA. Arc Flash is not evaluated.
Problem: According to IEEE, Arc Flash is only calculated for total fault currents
between 700 A and 106 kA.
Solution: Remove the configuration entry at the node.
W 4553 The available capacitors must be defined

Problem: There are no capacitors available for the capacitor placement.
Solution: Create the available capacitors.
W 4555 The available capacitors could not be placed

Problem: The capacity of the available capacitors is too large for them to be placed in
the network.
Solution: Create the available capacitors with a smaller capacity.
W 4456 The reactive power at the node is not inductive

Problem: The reactive power at the node for the capacitor placement must be
inductive.
Solution: Select another node.
W 4600 Type name does not match naming convention. Characteristic curve is used
for determining tripping.
Problem: The naming convention only distinguishes between characteristic curves
that are displayed in diagrams, and characteristic curves that are displayed in
diagrams and calculate tripping.
Solution: Change the type name to comply with the naming convention.
W 4709 The feeder is not radial

Problem: The feeder, which starts with the element, is not radial.
Solution: None.
W 4710 No result in range found for phase $$$

Problem: No result within limits can be determined.
Solution: Increase or decrease the limits, increase the power of the capacitor or
connect the option for the transformer.
W 4713 No optimized result was found for the feeder

Problem: An optimized result for this feeder could not be found.
Solution: Edit the initial values.
W 4714 Compensation power allows no capacitors with this power. Max. compensation
power is #.# MVar
Problem: The compensation power is lower than the power of the capacitors.
Solution: Do not determine the compensation power automatically or adjust the
power of the capacitors.
674 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 4717 The feeder can't be used, because it has a connection to another primary
substation
Problem: A feeder must only contain one primary substation in order to be radial.
Solution: Disconnect the primary substations.
W 4718 The feeder ends on its start node

Problem: The feeder reaches its start node and is therefore no longer radial.
Solution: Prevent the feeder from having a connection to its start node.
W 4778 There are no elements in the analysis area with a loading result
Problem: The utilization cannot be used as a criterion because there are no elements
with utilization in the area of observation.
Solution: Check the input data of the elements in the area of observation.
W 4779 There are no elements in the analysis area with an ip/ipmax result
Problem: ip/ipmax cannot be used as a criterion because there are no elements with
ip/ipmax in the area of observation.
W 4780 There are no elements in the analysis area with an ia/iamax result
Problem: ia/iamax cannot be used as a criterion because there are no elements with
ia/iamax in the area of observation.
W 4781 There are no valid protection devices for the calculation

Problem: Protection devices are required for the protection check.
Solution: Ensure that you have created valid protection devices.
W 4786 The specified time $$$ was not found

Problem: The specified time was not found.
Solution: Check the vulcanus file.
W 4787 The vulcanus file and vulcanus config file must be given
Problem: Not all the required files were specified.
W 4788 Error while reading the vulcanus config file $$$

Problem: The format of the configuration file may possibly be incorrect.
Solution: Check the configuration file.
W 4790 No elements with controller data

Problem: No elements with controller data were entered.
Solution: Ensure that elements with controller data are present in the selection.
W 4796 Optimal branching results could not be determined

Problem: No branches could be determined with the specified parameters.
Solution: Check whether the parameters are correct and the network can be
calculated accordingly.
October 2021 675

Technical Reference
W 4911 Not all calculation objects could be placed for date $$$
Problem: Not enough valid connection possibilities for the mobile consumers and
decentralized supply sources for the date.
Solution: Check the parameters and the network. A suitable number, power and
phase must be configured.
W 4912 Not all calculation objects could be placed

Problem: Not enough valid connection possibilities for the mobile consumers and
Solution: Check the parameters and the network. A suitable number, power and
phase must be configured.
W 4913 No valid connection data for date $$$

Problem: There are no valid connection points for the date.
Solution: Check whether for the time the connection points are isolated or whether
the parameters are invalid. A power value and a max. connection must be specified.
W 4914 No valid calculation object data for date $$$

Problem: There are no valid mobile consumers or decentralized supply sources for
the date.
Solution: Check the parameters. Data with a power value and a number greater than
0 must be specified in the observation period.
W 4918 Symmetrical calculation objects cannot be placed at unsymmetrical nodes for

date $$$
Problem: Symmetrical mobile consumers and decentralized supply sources can only
be connected to 3-phase nodes.
Solution: Check the selected modeling.
W 4919 No valid placements for date $$$ possible

Problem: No placements possible for the date.
Solution: Check the power of the connection points and the mobile consumers or
W 5038 Best neighbor not yet supported

Problem: The Best Neighbor algorithm is not supported at this time.
Solution: This algorithm will only be available in later versions.
W 5040 Only one power station for algorithm #.# supported

Problem: The algorithm supports only one power station.
Solution: Check the station type in your station data for nodes. Only one station in the
network can be a power station.
W 5049 User-defined impedances are not used

Problem: The impedances from the equipment file are used.
Solution: Check the network file.
676 October 2021

Technical Reference
W 5510 PSS E result calculation failed

Problem: There were errors calculating the results.
W 5511 PSS E invalid branch direction

Problem: Assigning the results for the branch failed.
W 6223 Zero data not physically useful

Problem: The zero-phase sequence data is not in the technically normal range.
Solution: Check and change the zero-phase sequence data.
W 6225 Terminal ($$$) of element ($$$=$$$) has no node association. PSS SINCAL will
create a temporary node for this terminal.
Problem: The topology in the CIM file is faulty. There is no node association.
Solution: Ensure that all necessary files (TP, EQ_BD, TP_BD, …) were specified.
PSS SINCAL will create a temporary node for the missing node.
W 6226 Terminal ($$$) has no equipment

Problem: The terminal in the CIM file is not allocated to an element or the element
was not found.
Solution: Ensure that all necessary files (EQ, EQ_BD, …) were specified.
W 6227 Terminal ($$$) connected to $$$ ($$$) which is unknown

Problem: The terminal is allocated to an element not supported by PSS SINCAL.
W 6228 $$$ ($$$) has a wrong number of terminals (#)

Problem: The element in the CIM file has an incorrect number of terminals.
W 6229 $$$ ($$$) has a voltage level mismatch

Problem: The element and/or the nodes have been assigned to different network
levels with different voltage values.
W 6230 Missing voltage level for node ($$$)

Problem: The network level cannot be found.
Solution: Ensure that all necessary files (TP, TP_BD, EQ, EQ_BD, …) were
specified.
W 6231 $$$ ($$$) is used multiple times

Problem: The terminal is used multiple times.
W 6232 $$$ ($$$) connected multiple times to the node ($$$)

Problem: The element is connected multiple times to the same node.
October 2021 677

Technical Reference
W 6405 No valid objects could be mapped to TSDI data

Problem: No mapping could be found between TSDI database and objects in PSS
SINCAL.
Solution: Make sure that the master resources are correct and the objects are not out
of service.
W 6407 Table '$$$' is missing in the TSDI database

Problem: The table is missing in the TSDI database and thus cannot be used.
Solution: Make sure that the database structure meets the requirements.
W 6408 The mapped MRID ('$$$') in the TSDI database is used by multiple objects
Problem: The assigned MRID in the TSDI database may only refer to a single object.
Solution: Use a different MRID and make sure the assignment is always unique.
W 6409 No license available for the 'TSDI' module

Problem: The TSDI functionality can only be used if you have a corresponding
license.
Solution: Disable the TSDI options or purchase a license for TSDI.
W 6412 Error occured in the python script: $$$

Problem: A fault occurred while executing the Python script.
Solution: Check the error message and correct the faults in the script.
22.14.3 Infos
I 1034 # isolated node(s)

Information: The network contains the above number of isolated nodes.
I 1035 # isolated item(s)

Information: The network contains the above number of isolated items.
I 1036 Net contains # node(s)

Information: The network contains the above number of nodes.
I 1037 Net contains # item(s)

Information: The network contains the above number of elements.
I 1038 Net contains # active item(s)

Information: The network contains the above number of active elements.
I 1039 Subnetwork # contains # node(s)

Information: The subnetwork has the above number of nodes.
I 1040 Subnetwork # contains # item(s)

Information: The subnetwork has the above number of elements.
678 October 2021

Technical Reference
I 1041 Subnetwork # contains # active item(s)

Information: The subnetwork has the above number of active elements.
I 1042 Net end node

Information: There is only one item connected to this node.
I 1053 # messages skipped, # messages suppressed

Information: Number of skipped and suppressed messages.
I 1059 Not established or already shut down elements

Information: Due to the observation time, the network contains network elements that
are not part of the calculations.
I 1060 Difference base phase rotation from supply source #.# to supply source #.#:
#.# degree
Information: There is a difference between the angle that supports the entry for the
angle at the supply sources.
I 1152 Elements with low convergence

Information: Elements with improper convergence behavior are being displayed to
simplify network analysis.
I 1192 Order: #.# Network Variation # (#)

Information: Status of the currently calculated network variation.
I 1538 # of # jobs were started without error

Information: Number of job processes started without errors.
I 1539 # of # jobs finished without error

Information: Number of job processes started with errors.
I 2005 Table '$$$.$$$' is not needed

Information: The data from this table are not required for this calculation type.
I 2006 Table '$$$.$$$' is empty

Information: This table contains no data.
I 2007 Data record is not needed

Information: The data access layer has a record that is not required for these
calculations. This record will be ignored by the calculations.
I 2008 Data record is switched off

Information: The data access layer has a record that has been turned off. This record
will be ignored by the calculations.
I 2010 Data record does not belong to the current version

Information: The data access layer has a record that does not belong to this variant.
This record will be ignored by the calculations.
October 2021 679

Technical Reference
I 2037 '$$$' using default value #.#

Information: This field has a zero.
I 2046 Used nodes for connecting networks

Information: Currently used nodes for connecting networks.
I 2056 Scenario calculation was successful

Information: The calculation of the scenario was successfully completed.
I 2057 Scenario calculation failed

Information: The calculation of the scenario was completed with errors.
I 2223 Unknown range #, Key '$$$', Name '$$$'

Information: This range is not used by the calculations.
I 2606 Topology of protection device differs from topology of transformer

Information: Normally the topology of the protection device is the same as that for the
transformer. This is not necessarily so, however, for special entries for protection.
I 2659 Voltage greater than maximum voltage according to standard

Information: The voltage entered exceeds the maximum according to IEC 61363 or
VDE 0102. Please not the special conditions.
I 2742 Connectors are used with the given impedance in present calculations
Information: Connectors cannot be considered in these calculations.
I 2748 Data of RLC circuit: R = #.# Ohm L = #.# mH C= #.# nF

Information: The RLC circuit contains values for the filter circuit.
I 2766 Filter data: R = #.# Ohm L = #.# mH C= #.# nF Rd = #.# Ohm

Information: The high pass contains values for the filter circuit.
I 2809 The controller node has been set to Side 2

Information: An autotransformer D0 does not support Side 1.
I 2850 VDE data for DFIG: KappaWD = #.# iWDmax = #.# kA IkWDmax = #.# kA
IkWDmin = #.# kA
Information: The data shown was calculated.
I 2853 No voltage limits exceeded. Filer design not necessary

Information: No additional filters are required.
I 2862 Nodes supplied by PCC configuration

Information: Nodes supplied via PCC configuration.
I 2865 Connectors are used with a resistance of #.# mOhm in present calculations
Information: Connections in the current calculation cannot be considered.
680 October 2021

Technical Reference
I 3014 The evaluation of the minimum sustained short circuit current uses a lambda
min of #.#
Information: A sustained short circuit of zero was specified. The sustained short
circuit is therefore determined according to VDE requirements using the lambda
curves for generators. The lambda shown was determined for the generator.
I 3123 Internal power loss: #.# kW and #.# kvar

Information: A synchronous machine or a power unit with internal reactance shows a
loss in internal power.
I 3124 Newton Raphson procedure used to solve power flow

Information: All procedures that additionally require the Newton Raphson power flow
procedure log this with this message.
I 3125 Current iteration procedure used to solve power flow

Information: This message documents all additional procedures required by the
current iteration power flow procedure.
I 3126 Internal voltage drop #.# percent real and #.# percent imaginary
Information: Power flow calculations verified the identified inner voltage loss.
I 3127 Internal voltage #.# percent with #.# degrees

Information: Power flow calculations verified the identified inner voltage.
I 3128 Admittance matrix procedure used to solve power flow

Information: The power flow procedure admittance matrix is preset in the calculation
parameters
I 3153 Supply sources for island operation

Information: List of the supply sources that prescribe the voltage in island operation.
I 3154 Elements with reduced power

Information: The identified elements have reduced power.
I 3155 Shed elements

Information: The identified elements have been shed.
I 3158 Feeder # in load balancing

Information: These elements have been grouped to a feeder in load balancing.
I 3159 Single elements in load balancing

Information: These elements were considered as single elements in load balancing.
I 3168 For load assignment, the following elements can be assigned to the measured
data '$$$'
Information: The following elements can be assigned to the measured value, which
then participate in the load assignment.
October 2021 681

Technical Reference
I 3223 Serial resonance at F = #.# Hz, Z = $$$ Ohm

Information: At this frequency and impedance the harmonics calculations have
detected a serial resonance for the concerned frequency response.
I 3224 Parallel resonance at F = #.# Hz, Z = $$$ Ohm

Information: At this frequency and impedance the harmonics calculations have
detected a parallel resonance for the concerned frequency response.
I 3226 Impedance at #.# Hz: $$$ #.# Ohm, #.# degree

Information: At this frequency, harmonics calculations use the impedance shown for
the resonance network.
I 3244 Switching from wye to delta after #.# seconds at #.# ampere
Information: The motor circuitry changed from wye to delta for this current at this
time.
I 3285 There are no restrictions due to rated fuse currents

Information: There are no restrictions resulting from rated fuse currents.
I 3290 Fuse placed at node with voltage greater than or equal to 1.0 kV is ignored in
fuse dimensioning
Information: Fuses only checked for low voltage networks. Fuses at nodes with
voltages greater than or equal to 1.0 kV will be ignored in the fuse check.
I 3316 Protection device valid for opening

Information: PSS SINCAL selects all protection devices located geographically
closest to a fault observation and face the fault observation as possible triggers.
I 3318 Fault location due to # protection device between #.# and #.# meters from
starting node
Information: PSS SINCAL fault location registered this impedance for the network
element at this distance from the starting node.
I 3330 State: #.#

Information: PSS SINCAL Protection Coordination calculated this state for the fault
observation.
I 3336 A coupled line is only centrically partitioned

Information: Coupled lines can only partitioned by a line at the center. For the results
to be exact, you need to enter multiple lines with the respective connection.
I 3361 Fourth zone less than third zone. The fourth zone is set identical to third zone.
Information: The range of the fourth zone is set greater than or equal to the range of
the third zone.
I 3362 Fifth zone less than fourth zone. The fifth zone is set identical to fourth zone.
Information: The range of the fifth zone is set greater than or equal to the range of
the fourth zone.
682 October 2021

Technical Reference
I 3363 Sixth zone less than fifth zone. The sixth zone is set identical to fifth zone.
Information: The range of the sixth zone is set greater than or equal to the range of
the fifth zone.
I 3388 Protection zone for first zone of device

Information: All identified elements belong to the protection zone for the first zone of
device.
I 3389 Line route for first zone of device

Information: All identified elements belong to the line route for the first zone of device.
I 3397 Teleprotection: Signal activated

Information: The teleprotection signal between the two protection devices was
activated.
I 3510 Filling: #.# [m3] emptying: #.# [m3]

Information: Flow rate of filling or emptying for the element or the network.
I 3511 Elements of route

Information: All identified elements belong to a longitudinal diagram.
I 3512 Minimum flow exceeded

Information: The minimum flow has been exceeded. The operating point cannot be
maintained.
I 3657 Coil power evaluated from through power is used

Information: According to the description, coil powers are calculated from the output
loads. Coil powers cannot be entered directly.
I 3711 Subnodes of function groups

Information: All identified nodes are intermediate nodes of function groups.
I 3712 Switched elements

Information: All the identified elements can at least be switched unilaterally.
I 3719 Abort of calculation at #.# seconds

Information: Dynamic calculations aborted after the indicated time.
I 3721 No reliability indices evaluated

Information: PSS SINCAL only evaluates a reliability index if the network has a rated
voltage that is less than or equal to 36 kV.
I 3829 CIM Import: $$$ ($$$) – $$$

Information: Specifies the CIM version and the CIM diagram from the import for the
file.
October 2021 683

Technical Reference
I 3902 Elements having operating point determined via dynamic simulation

Information: List of elements with operating points determined in dynamic
calculations.
I 3958 Closed switches are saved as results

Information: If the option ignore switch status is activated, the closed breakers are
output as information.
I 3964 The enclosure is considered as Shallow type

Information: The enclosure is considered as flat type (shallow).
I 4305 Elements modeled via BOSL

Information: List of the elements with an attached BOSL model.
I 4408 The protection routes must have a length of at least 1e-4 meter
Information: The entire protection route is too short for the calculation.
I 4706 No adjacent feeder found

Information: No adjacent feeders were found that could be connected for the
resupply.
I 4708 No switching for resupply necessary

Information: No switching operations are required for a resupply.
I 4716 No results without violations were found

Information: Only results with limit violations were found.
I 4719 # switches were necessary to isolate the fault

Information: Specifies the number of switching operations that were required in order
to isolate the fault.
I 4770 Nodes for reduction

Information: The listed nodes are reduced.
I 4771 Elements for reduction

Information: The listed nodes are reduced.
I 4772 Boundary nodes

Information: The listed nodes are boundary nodes.
I 6018 Point of no convergence P = #.# (fP = #.#), Q = #.# (fQ = #.#)

Information: With the PV curve calculation the power flow is no longer convergent
from a certain point.
I 6233 Message ($$$ #) suppressed # times

Information: Specifies that the error message was suppressed.
684 October 2021

Technical Reference
I 6401 TSDI database '$$$' is used

Information: This database is used as a TSDI database.
I 6402 No TSDI data in time range $$$ -$$$

Information: There is no data in the TSDI database for the specified period.
October 2021 685

System Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

System Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PSS®SINCAL 18.

● the PSS SINCAL System Manual

PSS® is a registered trademark of SIEMENS AG

1.1 System Requirements 1

2.1 User Interface Elements 7

3.1 Start Page 23

3.6.4 Importing from HUB File 54

3.9.1 Macro Explorer 141

3.13.16 Selection Mode 163

4. Network Model 172

4.1 Networks Element Models 172

4.5 Scenarios 191

5. Graphics Editor 199

5.1 Structure of the Graphics Editor 199

5.6.3 Formatting Nodes 228

6. Tabular View 258

6.1 Structure of Tabular View 258

6.3 Result Compilations 272

7. Diagram View 274

7.1 Structure of Diagram View 275

8. Report View 304

8.1 Aufbau des Berichtes Structure of the Report View 304

8.2.1 New Compilations 306

9. Screen Forms 316

9.1 Types of Fields and Control Buttons 316

9.6.7 Reload Standard Databases 334

10. Network Browser 342

10.1 Topology 343

11. Result Browser 396

12. Signal Explorer 398

13. Network Planning Tools 404

13.1 Feeder 404

13.4 Determining Load Data 406

14. Properties 444

14.1 Editing Properties 445

15. Messages 446

15.1 Toolbar 446

15.2 Pop-Up Menu 448

16. Projects 455

16.1 Managing Projects 456

17. Catalogues 462

17.1 Using Catalogues 463

18. Toolbox 468

19. Calculate 470

19.1 Presetting Calculation Methods 472

20. Input Data and Results 475

20.6.1 Three State Filter Evaluation 490

21. Multi-User Master Database 506

21.1 Concept of the Master Database 506

22. Technical Reference 524

22.1 Shortcuts 524

PSS SINCAL offers a wide range of up-to-date features:

● Sleek windows interface, making network planning perfectly

1.1 System Requirements

Operating Systems Supported

● Windows Server 2016

Database Systems Supported

● Microsoft Access Database Engine 2016 Redistributable:

● Request per E-Mail:

● Default directories for file operations (save, import, export, ...)

Settings for the Network

● Annotations and filters

Changing the Default Language

Basic elements of the user interface: